Subchapter C—Hazardous Materials Regulations (Continued)

SUBCHAPTER C—HAZARDOUS MATERIALS REGULATIONS (CONTINUED)

PART 178—SPECIFICATIONS FOR 178.36 Specification 3A and 3AX seamless steel cylinders. PACKAGINGS 178.37 Specification 3AA and 3AAX seamless steel cylinders. Sec. 178.38 Specification 3B seamless steel cyl- 178.1 Purpose and scope. inders. 178.2 Applicability and responsibility. 178.39 Specification 3BN seamless nickel 178.3 Marking of packagings. cylinders. 178.42 Specification 3E seamless steel cyl- Subpart A [Reserved] inders. 178.44 Specification 3HT seamless steel cyl- Subpart B—Specifications for Inside inders for aircraft use. Containers, and Linings 178.45 Specification 3T seamless steel cylinders. 178.33 Specification 2P; inner nonrefillable 178.46 Specification 3AL seamless alu- metal receptacles. minum cylinders. 178.33–1 Compliance. 178.47 Specification 4DS welded stainless 178.33–2 Type and size. steel cylinders for aircraft use. 178.33–3 Inspection. 178.50 Specification 4B welded or brazed 178.33–4 Duties of inspector. steel cylinders. 178.33–5 Material. 178.51 Specification 4BA welded or brazed 178.33–6 Manufacture. steel cylinders. 178.33–7 Wall thickness. 178.53 Specification 4D welded steel cyl- 178.33–8 Tests. inders for aircraft use. 178.55 Specification 4B240ET welded or 178.33–9 Marking. brazed cylinders. 178.33a Specification 2Q; inner nonrefillable 178.56 Specification 4AA480 welded steel cyl- metal receptacles. inders. 178.33a–1 Compliance. 178.57 Specification 4L welded insulated cyl- 178.33a–2 Type and size. inders. 178.33a–3 Inspection. 178.58 Specification 4DA welded steel cyl- 178.33a–4 Duties of inspector. inders for aircraft use. 178.33a–5 Material. 178.59 Specification 8 steel cylinders with 178.33a–6 Manufacture. porous fillings for acetylene. 178.33a–7 Wall thickness. 178.60 Specification 8AL steel cylinders 178.33a–8 Tests. with porous fillings for acetylene. 178.33a–9 Marking. 178.61 Specification 4BW welded steel cyl- 178.33b Specification 2S; inner nonrefillable inders with electric-arc welded longitu- plastic receptacles dinal seam. 178.33b–1 Compliance. 178.65 Specification 39 non-reusable (non-re- 178.33b–2 Type and size. fillable) cylinders. 178.33b–3 Inspection. 178.68 Specification 4E welded aluminum 178.33b–4 Duties of inspector. cylinders. 178.33b–5 Material. 178.69 Responsibilities and requirements for 178.33b–6 Manufacture. manufacturers of UN pressure recep- 178.33b–7 Design qualification test. tacles. 178.33b–8 Production tests. 178.70 Approval of UN pressure receptacles. 178.33b–9 Marking. 178.71 Specifications for UN pressure recep- 178.33c Specification 2P; inner nonrefillable tacles. metal receptacle variation. 178.74 Approval of MEGCs. 178.33c–1 Compliance. 178.75 Specifications for MEGCs. 178.33c–2 Variation. APPENDIX A TO SUBPART C OF PART 178—IL- 178.33d Specification 2Q; inner nonrefillable LUSTRATIONS: CYLINDER TENSILE SAMPLE metal receptacle variations. 178.33d–1 Compliance. Subparts D–G [Reserved] 178.33d–2 Variation 1. 178.33d–3 Variation 2. Subpart H—Specifications for Portable Tanks Subpart C—Specifications for Cylinders 178.251—178.253–5 [Reserved] 178.35 General requirements for specifica- 178.255 Specification 60; steel portable tion cylinders. tanks.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00017 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pt. 178 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

178.255–1 General requirements. 178.337–17 Marking. 178.255–2 Material. 178.337–18 Certification. 178.255–3 Expansion domes. 178.338 Specification MC–338; insulated 178.255–4 Closures for manholes and domes. cargo tank motor vehicle. 178.255–5 Bottom discharge outlets. 178.338–1 General requirements. 178.255–6 Loading and unloading accessories. 178.338–2 Material. 178.255–7 Protection of valves and acces- 178.338–3 Structural integrity. sories. 178.338–4 Joints. 178.255–8 Safety devices. 178.338–5 Stiffening rings. 178.255–9 Compartments. 178.338–6 Manholes. 178.255–10 Lining. 178.338–7 Openings. 178.255–11 Tank mountings. 178.338–8 Pressure relief devices, piping, 178.255–12 Pressure test. valves, and fittings. 178.255–13 Repair of tanks. 178.338–9 Holding time. 178.255–14 Marking. 178.338–10 Accident damage protection. 178.255–15 Report. 178.338–11 Discharge control devices. 178.273 Approval of Specification UN port- 178.338–12 Shear section. able tanks. 178.338–13 Supporting and anchoring. 178.274 Specification for UN portable tanks. 178.338–14 Gauging devices. 178.275 Specification for UN Portable Tanks 178.338–15 Cleanliness. intended for the transportation of liquid 178.338–16 Inspection and testing. and solid hazardous materials. 178.338–17 Pumps and compressors. 178.276 Requirements for the design, con- 178.338–18 Marking. struction, inspection and testing of port- 178.338–19 Certification. able tanks intended for the transpor- 178.340–178.343 [Reserved] tation of non-refrigerated liquefied com- 178.345 General design and construction re- pressed gases. quirements applicable to Specification 178.277 Requirements for the design, con- DOT 406 (§ 178.346), DOT 407 (§ 178.347), and struction, inspection and testing of port- DOT 412 (§ 178.348) cargo tank motor vehi- able tanks intended for the transpor- cles. tation of refrigerated liquefied gases. 178.345–1 General requirements. 178.345–2 Material and material thickness. Subpart I [Reserved] 178.345–3 Structural integrity. 178.345–4 Joints. Subpart J—Specifications for Containers for 178.345–5 Manhole assemblies. Motor Vehicle Transportation 178.345–6 Supports and anchoring. 178.345–7 Circumferential reinforcements. 178.318 Specification MC 201; container for 178.345–8 Accident damage protection. detonators and percussion caps. 178.345–9 Pumps, piping, hoses and connec- 178.318–1 Scope. tions. 178.318–2 Container. 178.345–10 Pressure relief. 178.318–3 Marking. 178.345–11 Tank outlets. 178.320 General requirements applicable to 178.345–12 Gauging devices. all DOT specification cargo tank motor 178.345–13 Pressure and leakage tests. vehicles. 178.345–14 Marking. 178.337 Specification MC 331; cargo tank 178.345–15 Certification. motor vehicle primarily for transpor- 178.346 Specification DOT 406; cargo tank tation of compressed gases as defined in motor vehicle. subpart G of part 173 of this subchapter. 178.346–1 General requirements. 178.337–1 General requirements. 178.346–2 Material and thickness of mate- 178.337–2 Material. rial. 178.337–3 Structural integrity. 178.346–3 Pressure relief. 178.337–4 Joints. 178.346–4 Outlets. 178.337–5 Bulkheads, baffles and ring stiff- 178.346–5 Pressure and leakage tests. eners. 178.347 Specification DOT 407; cargo tank 178.337–6 Closure for manhole. motor vehicle. 178.337–7 Overturn protection. 178.347–1 General requirements. 178.337–8 Openings, inlets and outlets. 178.347–2 Material and thickness of mate- 178.337–9 Pressure relief devices, piping, rial. valves, hoses, and fittings. 178.347–3 Manhole assemblies. 178.337–10 Accident damage protection. 178.347–4 Pressure relief. 178.337–11 Emergency discharge control. 178.347–5 Pressure and leakage test. 178.337–12 [Reserved] 178.348 Specification DOT 412; cargo tank 178.337–13 Supporting and anchoring. motor vehicle. 178.337–14 Gauging devices. 178.348–1 General requirements. 178.337–15 Pumps and compressors. 178.348–2 Material and thickness of mate- 178.337–16 Testing. rial.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00018 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178

178.348–3 Pumps, piping, hoses and connec- 178.702 IBC codes. tions. 178.703 Marking of IBCs. 178.348–4 Pressure relief. 178.704 General IBC standards. 178.348–5 Pressure and leakage test. 178.705 Standards for metal IBCs. 178.706 Standards for rigid plastic IBCs. Subpart K—Specifications for Packagings 178.707 Standards for composite IBCs. for Class 7 (Radioactive) Materials 178.708 Standards for fiberboard IBCs. 178.709 Standards for wooden IBCs. 178.350 Specification 7A; general packaging, 178.710 Standards for flexible intermediate Type A. bulk containers.

Subpart L—Non-bulk Performance- Subpart O—Testing of IBCs Oriented Packaging Standards 178.800 Purpose and scope. 178.500 Purpose, scope and definitions. 178.801 General requirements. 178.502 Identification codes for packagings. 178.802 Preparation of fiberboard IBCs for 178.503 Marking of packagings. testing. 178.504 Standards for steel drums. 178.803 Testing and certification of IBCs. 178.505 Standards for aluminum drums. 178.810 Drop test. 178.506 Standards for metal drums other 178.811 Bottom lift test. than steel or aluminum. 178.812 Top lift test. 178.507 Standards for plywood drums. 178.813 Leakproofness test. 178.508 Standards for fiber drums. 178.814 Hydrostatic pressure test. 178.509 Standards for plastic drums and 178.815 Stacking test. jerricans. 178.816 Topple test. 178.510 Standards for wooden barrels. 178.817 Righting test. 178.511 Standards for aluminum and steel 178.818 Tear test. jerricans. 178.819 Vibration test. 178.512 Standards for steel, aluminum or other metal boxes. Subpart P—Large Packagings Standards 178.513 Standards for boxes of natural wood. 178.514 Standards for plywood boxes. 178.900 Purpose and scope. 178.515 Standards for reconstituted wood 178.905 Large Packaging identification boxes. codes. 178.516 Standards for fiberboard boxes. 178.910 Marking of Large Packagings. 178.517 Standards for plastic boxes. 178.915 General Large Packaging standards. 178.518 Standards for woven plastic bags. 178.920 Standards for metal Large Pack- 178.519 Standards for plastic film bags. agings. 178.520 Standards for textile bags. 178.925 Standards for rigid plastic Large 178.521 Standards for paper bags. Packagings. 178.522 Standards for composite packagings 178.930 Standards for fiberboard Large with inner plastic receptacles. Packagings. 178.523 Standards for composite packagings 178.935 Standards for wooden Large Pack- with inner glass, porcelain, or stoneware agings. receptacles. 178.940 Standards for flexible Large Pack- agings. Subpart M—Testing of Non-bulk Packagings and Packages Subpart Q—Testing of Large Packagings 178.600 Purpose and scope. 178.950 Purpose and scope. 178.601 General requirements. 178.955 General requirements. 178.602 Preparation of packagings and pack- 178.960 Preparation of Large Packagings for ages for testing. testing. 178.603 Drop test. 178.965 Drop test. 178.604 Leakproofness test. 178.970 Bottom lift test. 178.605 Hydrostatic pressure test. 178.975 Top lift test. 178.606 Stacking test. 178.980 Stacking test. 178.607 Cooperage test for bung-type wooden 178.985 Vibration test. barrels. 178.608 Vibration standard. Subpart R—Flexible Bulk Container 178.609 Test requirements for packagings for Standards infectious substances. 178.1000 Purpose and scope. Subpart N—IBC Performance-Oriented 178.1005 Flexible Bulk Container identifica- Standards tion code. 178.1010 Marking of Flexible Bulk Con- 178.700 Purpose, scope and definitions. tainers.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00019 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.1 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

178.1015 General Flexible Bulk Container However, any person who performs a standards. function prescribed in this part shall 178.1020 Period of use for transportation of perform that function in accordance hazardous materials in Flexible Bulk Containers. with this part. (b) Specification markings. When this Subpart S—Testing of Flexible Bulk part requires that a packaging be Containers marked with a DOT specification or UN standard marking, marking of the 178.1030 Purpose and scope. 178.1035 General requirements. packaging with the appropriate DOT or 178.1040 Preparation of Flexible Bulk Con- UN markings is the certification that— tainers for testing. (1) Except as otherwise provided in 178.1045 Drop test. this section, all requirements of the 178.1050 Top lift test. DOT specification or UN standard, in- 178.1055 Stacking test. 178.1060 Topple test. cluding performance tests, are met; 178.1065 Righting test. and 178.1070 Tear test. (2) All functions performed by, or on APPENDIX A TO PART 178—SPECIFICATIONS FOR behalf of, the person whose name or STEEL symbol appears as part of the marking APPENDIX B TO PART 178—ALTERNATIVE conform to requirements specified in LEAKPROOFNESS TEST METHODS this part. APPENDIX C TO PART 178—NOMINAL AND MIN- IMUM THICKNESSES OF STEEL DRUMS AND (c) Notification. (1) Except as specifi- JERRICANS cally provided in §§ 178.337–18, 178.338–19, APPENDIX D TO PART 178—THERMAL RESIST- and 178.345–15 of this part, the manufac- ANCE TEST turer or other person certifying com- APPENDIX E TO PART 178—FLAME PENETRA- pliance with the requirements of this TION RESISTANCE TEST part, and each subsequent distributor AUTHORITY: 49 U.S.C. 5101–5128; 49 CFR 1.81 of that packaging must: and 1.97. (i) Notify each person to whom that § 178.1 Purpose and scope. packaging is transferred— (A) Of all requirements in this part This part prescribes the manufac- not met at the time of transfer, and turing and testing specifications for packaging and containers used for the (B) With information specifying the transportation of hazardous materials type(s) and dimensions of the closures, in commerce. including gaskets and any other components needed to ensure that the [Amdt. 178–40, 42 FR 2689, Jan. 13, 1977. Redes- packaging is capable of successfully ignated by Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52715, Dec. 21, passing the applicable performance 1990] tests. This information must include § 178.2 Applicability and responsi- any procedures to be followed, includ- bility. ing closure instructions for inner pack- (a) Applicability. (1) The requirements agings and receptacles, to effectively of this part apply to packagings manu- assemble and close the packaging for factured— the purpose of preventing leakage in (i) To a DOT specification, regardless transportation. Closure instructions of country of manufacture; or must provide for a consistent and re- (ii) To a UN standard, for packagings peatable means of closure that is suffi- manufactured within the United cient to ensure the packaging is closed States. For UN standard packagings in the same manner as it was tested. manufactured outside the United For packagings sold or represented as States, see § 173.24(d)(2) of this sub- being in conformance with the require- chapter. For UN standard packagings ments of this subchapter applicable to for which standards are not prescribed transportation by aircraft, this infor- in this part, see § 178.3(b). mation must include relevant guidance (2) A manufacturer of a packaging to ensure that the packaging, as pre- subject to the requirements of this part pared for transportation, will with- is primarily responsible for compliance stand the pressure differential require- with the requirements of this part. ments in § 173.27 of this subchapter.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00020 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.3

(ii) Retain copies of each written no- or a UN standard must be marked on a tification for at least one year from non-removable component of the pack- date of issuance; and aging with specification markings con- (iii) Make copies of all written notifi- forming to the applicable specification, cations available for inspection by a and with the following: representative of the Department. (1) In an unobstructed area, with let- (2) The notification required in acters, and numerals identifying the cordance with this paragraph (c) may standards or specification (e.g. UN 1A1, be in writing or by electronic means, DOT 4B240ET, etc.). including e-mailed transmission or (2) Unless otherwise specified in this transmission on a CD or similar device. part, the name and address or symbol If a manufacturer or subsequent dis- of the packaging manufacturer or the tributor of the packaging utilizes elec- person certifying compliance with a tronic means to make the required no- UN standard. Symbols, if used, must be tifications, the notification must be registered with the Associate Adminis- specific to the packaging in question trator. Unless authorized in writing by and must be in a form that can be the holder of the symbol, symbols must printed in hard copy by the person re- represent either the packaging manu- ceiving the notification. facturer or the approval agency respon- (d) Except as provided in paragraph sible for providing the most recent cer- (c) of this section, a packaging not con- tification for the packaging through forming to the applicable specifica- design certification testing or periodic tions or standards in this part may not retesting, as applicable. Duplicative be marked to indicate such conform- symbols are not authorized. ance. (3) The markings must be stamped, (e) Definitions. For the purpose of this embossed, burned, printed or otherwise part— marked on the packaging to provide Manufacturer means the person whose adequate accessibility, permanency, name and address or symbol appears as contrast, and legibility so as to be part of the specification markings re- readily apparent and understood. quired by this part or, for a packaging marked with the symbol of an approval (4) Unless otherwise specified, letters agency, the person on whose behalf the and numerals must be at least 12.0 mm approval agency certifies the pack- (0.47 inches) in height except that for aging. packagings of less than or equal to 30 L Specification markings mean the pack- (7.9 gallons) capacity for liquids or 30 aging identification markings required kg (66 pounds) capacity for solids the by this part including, where applica- height must be at least 6.0 mm (0.2 ble, the name and address or symbol of inches). For packagings having a ca- the packaging manufacturer or ap- pacity of 5 L (1 gallon) or 5 kg (11 proval agency. pounds) or less, letters and numerals (f) No packaging may be manufac- must be of an appropriate size. tured or marked to a packaging speci- (5) For packages with a gross mass of fication that was in effect on Sep- more than 30 kg (66 pounds), the mark- tember 30, 1991, and that was removed ings or a duplicate thereof must appear from this part 178 by a rule published on the top or on a side of the pack- in the FEDERAL REGISTER on December aging. 21, 1990 and effective October 1, 1991. (b) A UN standard packaging for which the UN standard is set forth in [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52715, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR this part may be marked with the 66284, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 178– 106, 59 FR 67519, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178–117, United Nations symbol and other speci- 62 FR 14338, Mar. 26, 1997; 68 FR 45041, July fication markings only if it fully con- 31, 2003; 69 FR 34612, June 22, 2004; 75 FR 5395, forms to the requirements of this part. Feb. 2, 2010; 75 FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 78 FR A UN standard packaging for which the 1118, Jan. 7, 2013; 78 FR 15328, Mar. 11, 2013] UN standard is not set forth in this part may be marked with the United § 178.3 Marking of packagings. Nations symbol and other specification (a) Each packaging represented as markings for that standard as provided manufactured to a DOT specification in the ICAO Technical Instructions or

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00021 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.33 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

the IMDG Code subject to the following § 178.33 Specification 2P; inner non- conditions: refillable metal receptacles. (1) The U.S. manufacturer must establish that the packaging conforms to § 178.33–1 Compliance. the applicable provisions of the ICAO (a) Required in all details. Technical Instructions (IBR, see § 171.7 (b) [Reserved] of this subchapter) or the IMDG Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), re- § 178.33–2 Type and size. spectively. (a) Single-trip inside containers. (2) If an indication of the name of the Must be seamless, or with seams, weld- manufacturer or other identification of ed, soldered, brazed, double seamed, or the packaging as specified by the com- swedged. petent authority is required, the name (b) The maximum capacity of con- and address or symbol of the manufac- tainers in this class shall not exceed turer or the approval agency certifying one liter (61.0 cubic inches). The max- compliance with the UN standard must imum inside diameter shall not exceed be entered. Symbols, if used, must be 3 inches. registered with the Associate Adminis- [29 FR 18813, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by trator. Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- (3) The letters ‘‘USA’’ must be used nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended to indicate the State authorizing the by Amdt. 178–101, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; allocation of the specification marks if 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] the packaging is manufactured in the § 178.33–3 Inspection. United States. (c) Where a packaging conforms to (a) By competent inspector. more than one UN standard or DOT (b) [Reserved] specification, the packaging may bear § 178.33–4 Duties of inspector. more than one marking, provided the packaging meets all the requirements (a) To inspect material and com- of each standard or specification. pleted containers and witness tests, Where more than one marking appears and to reject defective materials or on a packaging, each marking must ap- containers. pear in its entirety. (b) [Reserved] (d) No person may mark or otherwise § 178.33–5 Material. certify a packaging or container as meeting the requirements of a manu- (a) Uniform quality steel plate such facturing special permit unless that as black plate, electro-tin plate, hot person is the holder of or a party to dipped tin plate, tern plate or other that special permit, an agent of the commercially accepted can making holder or party for the purpose of plate; or nonferrous metal of uniform marking or certification, or a third drawing quality. party tester. (b) Material with seams, cracks, lam- inations or other injurious defects not [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52716, Dec. 21, 1990; 56 FR authorized. 66284, Dec. 20, 1991, as amended by Amdt. 178– 106, 59 FR 67519, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178–113, § 178.33–6 Manufacture. 61 FR 21102, May 9, 1996; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, (a) By appliances and methods that 2000; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61015, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR will assure uniformity of completed 73166, Dec. 9, 2005; 78 FR 14714, Mar. 7, 2013] containers; dirt and scale to be removed as necessary; no defect acceptable that is likely to weaken the fin- Subpart A [Reserved] ished container appreciably; reasonably smooth and uniform surface finish Subpart B—Specifications for required. Inside Containers, and Linings (b) Seams when used must be as follows: SOURCE: 29 FR 18823, Dec. 29, 1964, unless (1) Circumferential seams: By weld- otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, ing, swedging, brazing, soldering, or Apr. 5, 1967. double seaming.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00022 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.33a–6

(2) Side seams: By welding, brazing, § 178.33a Specification 2Q; inner non- or soldering. refillable metal receptacles. (c) Ends: The ends shall be of pressure design. § 178.33a–1 Compliance. [29 FR 18823, Dec. 29, 1964, as amended by (a) Required in all details. Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- (b) [Reserved] nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] § 178.33–7 Wall thickness. (a) The minimum wall thickness for § 178.33a–2 Type and size. any container shall be 0.007 inch. (a) Single-trip inside containers. (b) [Reserved] Must be seamless, or with seams weld- [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- ed, soldered, brazed, double seamed, or nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] swedged. (b) The maximum capacity of con- § 178.33–8 Tests. tainers in this class shall not exceed 1 (a) One out of each lot of 25,000 con- L (61.0 cubic inches). The maximum in- tainers or less, successively produced side diameter shall not exceed 3 inches. per day shall be pressure tested to de- [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- struction and must not burst below 240 nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended psig gauge pressure. The container by Amdt. 178–43, 42 FR 42208, Aug. 22, 1977; tested shall be complete with end as- Amdt. 178–101, 58 FR 50237, Sept. 24, 1993; 66 sembled. FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001] (b) Each such 25,000 containers or § 178.33a–3 Inspection. less, successively produced per day, shall constitute a lot and if the test (a) By competent inspector. container shall fail, the lot shall be re- (b) [Reserved] jected or ten additional containers may [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- be selected at random and subjected to nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] the test under which failure occurred. These containers shall be complete § 178.33a–4 Duties of inspector. with ends assembled. Should any of the ten containers thus tested fail, the en- (a) To inspect material and com- tire lot must be rejected. All con- pleted containers and witness tests, tainers constituting a lot shall be of and to reject defective materials or like material, size, design construc- containers. tion, finish, and quality. (b) [Reserved] [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001] § 178.33a–5 Material. § 178.33–9 Marking. (a) Uniform quality steel plate such (a) By means of printing, as black plate, electrotin plate, hot lithographing, embossing, or stamping, dipped tinplate, ternplate or other each container must be marked to commercially accepted can making show: plate; or nonferrous metal of uniform (1) DOT-2P. drawing quality. (2) Name or symbol of person making (b) Material with seams, cracks, lam- the mark specified in paragraph (a)(1) inations or other injurious defects not of this section. Symbol, if used, must authorized. be registered with the Associate Ad- [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- ministrator. nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] (b) [Reserved] § 178.33a–6 Manufacture. [Amdt. 178–40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as amended by Amdt. 178–97, 56 FR 66287, Dec. (a) By appliances and methods that 20, 1991; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] will assure uniformity of completed

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00023 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.33a–7 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

containers; dirt and scale to be re- (2) Name or symbol of person making moved as necessary; no defect accept- the mark specified in paragraph (a)(1) able that is likely to weaken the fin- of this section. Symbol, if used, must ished container appreciably; reason- be registered with the Associate Ad- ably smooth and uniform surface finish ministrator. required. (b) [Reserved] (b) Seams when used must be as fol- [Amdt. 178–40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as lows: amended by Amdt. 178–97, 56 FR 66287, Dec. (1) Circumferential seams. By weld- 20, 1991; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] ing, swedging, brazing, soldering, or double seaming. § 178.33b Specification 2S; inner non- (2) Side seams. By welding, brazing or refillable plastic receptacles. soldering. § 178.33b–1 Compliance. (c) Ends. The ends shall be of pressure design. (a) Required in all details. (b) [Reserved] [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009] nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] § 178.33b–2 Type and size. § 178.33a–7 Wall thickness. (a) Single-trip inside containers. (a) The minimum wall thickness for (b) The maximum capacity of con- any container shall be 0.008 inch. tainers in this class shall not exceed (b) [Reserved] one liter (61.0 cubic inches). The max- [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- imum inside diameter shall not exceed nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] 3 inches.

§ 178.33a–8 Tests. [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009] (a) One out of each lot of 25,000 con- § 178.33b–3 Inspection. tainers or less, successively produced (a) By competent inspector. per day, shall be pressure tested to de- (b) [Reserved] struction and must not burst below 270 psig gauge pressure. The container [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009] tested shall be complete with end as- § 178.33b–4 Duties of inspector. sembled. (b) Each such 25,000 containers or (a) To inspect material and com- less, successively produced per day, pleted containers and witness tests, shall constitute a lot and if the test and to reject defective materials or container shall fail, the lot shall be re- containers. jected or ten additional containers may (b) [Reserved] be selected at random and subjected to [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009] the test under which failure occurred. These containers shall be complete § 178.33b–5 Material. with ends assembled. Should any of the (a) The receptacles must be con- ten containers thus tested fail, the en- structed of polyethylene terephthalate tire lot must be rejected. All con- (PET), polyethylene napthalate (PEN), tainers constituting a lot shall be of polyamide (Nylon) or a blend of PET, like material, size, design, construc- PEN, ethyl vinyl alcohol (EVOH) and/ tion, finish and quality. or Nylon. (b) Material with seams, cracks, lam- [Order 71, 31 FR 9074, July 1, 1966. Redesig- nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended inations or other injurious defects are by 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001] forbidden. [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009] § 178.33a–9 Marking. (a) By means of printing, § 178.33b–6 Manufacture. lithographing, embossing, or stamping, (a) Each container must be manufac- each container must be marked to tured by thermoplastic processes that show: will assure uniformity of the com- (1) DOT-2Q. pleted container. No used material

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00024 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.33c–2

other than production residues or containers constituting a lot shall be regrind from the same manufacturing of like material, size, design construc- process may be used. The packaging tion, finish, and quality. must be adequately resistant to aging (b) [Reserved] and to degradation caused either by the substance contained or by ultra- [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009, as amended at 75 FR 74, Jan. 4, 2010] violet radiation. (b) [Reserved] § 178.33b–9 Marking. [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009] (a) Each container must be clearly and permanently marked to show: § 178.33b–7 Design qualification test. (1) DOT–2S. (a) Drop testing. (1) To ensure that (2) Name or symbol of person making creep does not affect the ability of the the mark specified in paragraph (a)(1) container to retain the contents, each of this section. Symbol, if used, must new design must be drop tested as fol- be registered with the Associate Ad- lows: Three groups of twenty-five filled ministrator. containers must be dropped from 1.8 m (b) [Reserved] (5.9 ft) on to a rigid, non-resilient, flat and horizontal surface. One group must [74 FR 2268, Jan. 14, 2009] be conditioned at 38 °C (100 °F) for 26 weeks, the second group for 100 hours § 178.33c Specification 2P; inner non- at 50 °C (122 °F) and the third group for refillable metal receptacle variation. 18 hours at 55 °C (131 °F), prior to performing the drop test. The closure, or § 178.33c–1 Compliance. sealing component of the container, must not be protected during the test. Required in all details. The orientation of the test container [81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016] at drop must be statistically random, but direct impact on the valve or valve § 178.33c–2 Variation. closure must be avoided. Notwithstanding the variation pro- (2) Criteria for passing the drop test: vided in this section, each container The containers must not break or leak. must otherwise conform to a DOT 2P (b) Design qualification testing must container in accordance with § 178.33. be completed if the design is manufac- The following conditions also apply tured with a new mold or if there is under Variation 1— any change in the properties of the ma- (a) Manufacture. Side seams: not per- terial of construction. mitted. Ends: The ends shall be de- [75 FR 73, Jan. 4, 2010] signed to withstand pressure and be equipped with a pressure relief system § 178.33b–8 Production tests. (e.g., rim-venting release or a dome ex- (a) Burst Testing. (1) One out of each pansion device) designed to function lot of 5,000 containers or less, succes- prior to bursting of the container. sively produced per day must be pres- (b) Tests. (1) One out of each lot of sure tested to destruction and must not 25,000 containers or less, successively burst below 240 psig. The container produced per day complete with ends tested must be complete as intended assembled (and without a pressure re- for transportation. lief system assembled) shall be pres- (2) Each such 5,000 containers or less, sure tested to destruction at gauge successively produced per day, shall pressure and must not burst below 240 constitute a lot and if the test con- psig. For containers with a pressure re- tainer shall fail, the lot shall be relief system as described in paragraph jected or ten additional containers may (a) of this section and assembled, fail- be selected at random and subjected to ure at a location other than the pres- the test under which failure occurred. sure relief system will reject the lot. These containers shall be complete as For containers with an end expansion intended for transportation. Should device, the lot must be rejected if the any of the ten containers thus tested container bursts prior to buckling of fail, the entire lot must be rejected. All the device.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00025 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.33d 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(2) Each such 25,000 containers or shall be pressure tested to destruction less, successively produced per day, at gauge pressure. The container with- shall constitute a lot and if the test out a pressure relief system must not container(s) shall fail, the lot shall be burst below 320 psig. The container as- rejected. Otherwise, ten (10) additional sembled with a pressure relief system containers of each container design as described in paragraph (b) of this produced may be selected at random section must be tested to destruction. and subjected to the test. These con- The bottom of the container must tainers shall be complete with ends as- buckle at a pressure greater than the sembled. Should any of the containers pressure at which the top buckles and thus tested fail, the entire lot must be vents. rejected. All containers constituting a (2) Each such 25,000 containers or lot shall be of like material, size, de- less, successively produced per day, sign construction, finish, and quality. shall constitute a lot and if the test (c) Marking. By means of printing, container(s) shall fail, the lot shall be lithographing, embossing, or stamping, rejected. Otherwise, ten (10) additional each container must be marked: pairs of containers may be selected at (1) DOT–2P1. random and subjected to the test under (2) With the name or symbol of the which failure occurred. Should any of person making the mark. A symbol, if the containers thus tested fail, the en- used, must be registered with the Asso- tire lot must be rejected. All con- ciate Administrator. tainers constituting a lot shall be of [81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016] like material, size, design construction, finish, and quality. § 178.33d Specification 2Q; inner non- (e) Marking. By means of printing, refillable metal receptacle vari- lithographing, embossing, or stamping, ations. each container must be marked: § 178.33d–1 Compliance. (1) DOT–2Q1. (2) With the name or symbol of the Required in all details. person making the mark. A symbol, if [81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016] used, must be registered with the Asso- ciate Administrator. § 178.33d–2 Variation 1. [81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016] Notwithstanding the variation provided in this paragraph, each container § 178.33d–3 Variation 2. must otherwise conform to a DOT 2Q container in accordance with § 178.33a. Notwithstanding the variation pro- The following conditions also apply vided in this paragraph, each container under Variation 1— must otherwise conform to a DOT 2Q (a) Type and size. The maximum ca- container in accordance with § 178.33a. pacity of containers in this class may The following conditions also apply not exceed 0.40 L (24.4 cubic inches). under Variation 2— The maximum inside diameter shall (a) Manufacture. Ends: The ends shall not exceed 2.1 inches. be designed to withstand pressure and (b) Manufacture. Ends: The top of the the container equipped with a pressure container must be designed with a relief system (e.g., rim-venting release pressure relief system consisting of ra- or a dome expansion device) designed dial scores on the top seam(s). The bot- to buckle prior to the burst of the con- tom of the container must be designed tainer. to buckle at a pressure greater than (b) Tests. (1) One out of each lot of the pressure at which the top buckles 25,000 containers or less, successively and vents. produced per day shall be pressure test- (c) Wall thickness. The minimum wall ed to destruction at gauge pressure and thickness for any container shall be must not burst below 270 psig. For con- 0.0085 inches. tainers with a pressure relief system as (d) Tests. (1) Two containers (one described in paragraph (a) of this sec- without a pressure relief system and tion and assembled, failure at a loca- one with) out of each lot of 25,000 or tion other than the pressure relief sys- less, successively produced per day tem will reject the lot.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00026 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.35

(2) Each such 25,000 containers or fication, the inspector shall perform less, successively produced per day, the following: shall constitute a lot and if the test (1) Inspect all material and reject container(s) shall fail, the lot shall be any not meeting applicable require- rejected. Otherwise, ten (10) additional ments. For cylinders made by the bil- containers of each container design let-piercing process, billets must be in- produced may be selected at random spected and shown to be free from pipe, and subjected to the test. These con- cracks, excessive segregation and other tainers shall be complete with ends as- injurious defects after parting or, when sembled. Should any of the containers applicable, after nick and cold break. thus tested fail, the entire lot must be (2) Verify the material of construc- rejected. All containers constituting a tion meets the requirements of the ap- lot shall be of like material, size, de- plicable specification by— sign construction, finish, and quality. (i) Making a chemical analysis of (c) Marking. By means of printing, each heat of material; lithographing, embossing, or stamping, (ii) Obtaining a certified chemical each container must be marked: analysis from the material manufac- (1) DOT–2Q2. turer for each heat of material (a ladle (2) With the name or symbol of the analysis is acceptable); or person making the mark. A symbol, if (iii) If an analysis is not provided for used, must be registered with the Asso- each heat of material by the material ciate Administrator. manufacturer, by making a check analysis of a sample from each coil, sheet, [81 FR 3685, Jan. 21, 2016] or tube. (3) Verify compliance of cylinders Subpart C—Specifications for with the applicable specification by— Cylinders (i) Verifying identification of material is proper; § 178.35 General requirements for (ii) Inspecting the inside of the cyl- specification cylinders. inder before closing in ends; (a) Compliance. Compliance with the (iii) Verifying that the heat treat- requirements of this subpart is re- ment is proper; quired in all details. (iv) Obtaining samples for all tests (b) Inspections and analyses. Chemical and check chemical analyses (NOTE: analyses and tests required by this sub- Recommended locations for test speci- chapter must be made within the mens taken from welded cylinders are United States, unless otherwise ap- depicted in Figures 1 through 5 in Ap- proved in writing by the Associate Ad- pendix C to this subpart for the specific ministrator, in accordance with sub- construction design.); part I of part 107 of this chapter. In- (v) Witnessing all tests; spections and verification must be per- (vi) Verify threads by gauge; formed by— (vii) Reporting volumetric capacity (1) An independent inspection agency and tare weight (see report form) and approved in writing by the Associate minimum thickness of wall noted; and Administrator, in accordance with sub- (viii) Verifying that each cylinder is part I of part 107 of this chapter; or marked in accordance with the applica- (2) For DOT Specifications 3B, 3BN, ble specification. 3E, 4B, 4BA, 4D (water capacity less (4) Inspector’s report. Prepare a report than 1,100 cubic inches), 4B240ET, containing, at a minimum, the applica- 4AA480, 4L, 8, 8AL, 4BW, 39 (marked ble information listed in CGA C–11 service pressure 900 p.s.i.g. or lower) (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). and 4E manufactured in the United Any additional information or mark- States, a competent inspector of the ings that are required by the applicable manufacturer. specification must be shown on the test (c) Duties of inspector. The inspector report. The signature of the inspector shall determine that each cylinder on the reports certifies that the proc- made is in conformance with the appli- esses of manufacture and heat treat- cable specification. Except as other- ment of cylinders were observed and wise specified in the applicable speci- found satisfactory. The inspector must

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00027 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.35 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

furnish the completed test reports re- 1234 quired by this subpart to the maker of XY the cylinder and, upon request, to the AB 5–95 purchaser. The test report must be re- Or; tained by the inspector for fifteen years from the original test date of the DOT-3A1800–1234–XY AB 5–95 cylinder. (d) Defects and attachments. Cylinders Where: must conform to the following: DOT-3A = specification number (1) A cylinder may not be constructed 1800 = service pressure of material with seams, cracks or lam- 1234 = serial number inations, or other injurious defects. XY = symbol of manufacturer (2) Metal attachments to cylinders AB = inspector’s mark must have rounded or chamfered cor- 5–95 = date of test ners or must be protected in such a (2) Additional required marking must manner as to prevent the likelihood of be applied to the cylinder as follows: causing puncture or damage to other hazardous materials packages. This re- (i) The word ‘‘spun’’ or ‘‘plug’’ must quirement applies to anything tempo- be placed near the DOT specification rarily or permanently attached to the marking when an end closure in the cylinder, such as metal skids. finished cylinder has been welded by (e) Safety devices. Pressure relief de- the spinning process, or effected by vices and protection for valves, safety plugging. devices, and other connections, if ap- (ii) As prescribed in specification 3HT plied, must be as required or author- (§ 178.44) or 3T (§ 178.45), if applicable. ized by the appropriate specification, (3) Marking exceptions. A DOT 3E cyl- and as required in § 173.301 of this sub- inder is not required to be marked with chapter. an inspector’s mark or a serial number. (f) Markings. Markings on a DOT (4) Unless otherwise specified in the Specification cylinder must conform to applicable specification, the markings applicable requirements. on each cylinder must be stamped (1) Each cylinder must be marked plainly and permanently on the shoul- with the following information: der, top head, or neck. (i) The DOT specification marking (5) The size of each marking must be must appear first, followed imme- at least 0.25 inch or as space permits. diately by the service pressure. For ex- (6) Other markings are authorized ample, DOT-3A1800. provided they are made in low stress (ii) The serial number must be placed areas other than the side wall and are just below or immediately following not of a size and depth that will create the DOT specification marking. harmful stress concentrations. Such (iii) A symbol (letters) must be marks may not conflict with any DOT placed just below, immediately before required markings. or following the serial number. Other (7) Marking exceptions. A DOT 8 or variations in sequence of markings are 8AL cylinder is not required to be authorized only when necessitated by a marked with the service pressure. lack of space. The symbol and numbers (g) Manufacturer’s reports. At or be- must be those of the manufacturer. fore the time of delivery to the pur- The symbol must be registered with chaser, the cylinder manufacturer the Associate Administrator; duplica- must have all completed certification tions are not authorized. documents listed in CGA C–11. The (iv) The inspector’s official mark and manufacturer of the cylinders must re- date of test (such as 5–95 for May 1995) tain the reports required by this sub- must be placed near the serial number. part for 15 years from the original test This information must be placed so date of the cylinder. that dates of subsequent tests can be easily added. An example of the mark- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as ings prescribed in this paragraph (f)(1) amended at 66 FR 45185, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR is as follows: 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 76 FR 43531, July 20, 2011; 83 FR 55810, Nov. 7, DOT-3A1800 2018]

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00028 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.36

§ 178.36 Specification 3A and 3AX tent percent may not exceed the fol- seamless steel cylinders. lowing: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorous, 0.045; (a) Type size and service pressure. In sulphur, 0.050. addition to the requirements of § 178.35, (c) Identification of material. Material cylinders must conform to the fol- must be identified by any suitable lowing: method, except that plates and billets (1) A DOT-3A cylinder is a seamless for hot-drawn cylinders must be steel cylinder with a water capacity marked with the heat number. (nominal) not over 1,000 pounds and a (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be service pressure of at least 150 psig. manufactured using equipment and (2) A DOT–3AX is a seamless steel processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder with a water capacity not less cylinder produced conforms to the requirements of this subpart. No fissure than 1,000 pounds and a service pres- or other defect is permitted that is sure of at least 500 psig, conforming to likely to weaken the finished cylinder the following requirements: appreciably. A reasonably smooth and (i) Assuming the cylinder is to be uniform surface finish is required. If supported horizontally at its two ends not originally free from such defects, only and to be uniformly loaded over the surface may be machined or other- its entire length consisting of the wise treated to eliminate these defects. weight per unit of length of the The thickness of the bottoms of cyl- straight cylindrical portion filled with inders welded or formed by spinning is, water and compressed to the specified under no condition, to be less than two test pressure; the sum of two times the times the minimum wall thickness of maximum tensile stress in the bottom the cylindrical shell; such bottom fibers due to bending, plus that in the thicknesses must be measured within same fibers (longitudinal stress), due to an area bounded by a line representing hydrostatic test may not exceed 80 per- the points of contact between the cyl- cent of the minimum yield strength of inder and floor when the cylinder is in the steel at such maximum stress. Wall a vertical position. thickness must be increased when nec- (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or essary to meet the requirement. brazing for any purpose whatsoever is (ii) To calculate the maximum longi- prohibited except as follows: tudinal tensile stress due to bending, (1) Welding or brazing is authorized the following formula must be used: for the attachment of neckrings and S = Mc/I footrings which are non-pressure parts and only to the tops and bottoms of (iii) To calculate the maximum lon- cylinders having a service pressure of gitudinal tensile stress due to hydro- 500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings, static test pressure, the following for- and footrings must be made of weldable mula must be used: steel, the carbon content of which may S = A1 P/A2 not exceed 0.25 percent except in the where: case of 4130X steel which may be used with proper welding procedures. S = tensile stress—p.s.i.; M = bending moment-inch pounds—(wl2)/8; (2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of w = weight per inch of cylinder filled with this section. water; (3) Cylinders used solely in anhy- l = length of cylinder-inches; drous ammonia service may have a 1⁄2 c = radius (D)/(2) of cylinder-inches; inch diameter bar welded within their I = moment of inertia—0.04909 (D4¥d4) inches concave bottoms. fourth; (f) Wall thickness. For cylinders with D = outside diameter-inches; service pressure less than 900 psig, the d = inside diameter-inches; wall stress may not exceed 24,000 psig. A1 = internal area in cross section of cylinder-square inches; A minimum wall thickness of 0.100 inch is required for any cylinder over 5 A2 = area of metal in cross section of cylinder-square inches; inches outside diameter. Wall stress P = hydrostatic test pressure-psig. calculation must be made by using the (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel following formula: of uniform quality must be used. Con- S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)]/(D2¥d2)

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00029 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.36 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

Where: included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra- S = wall stress in psi; dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl- P = minimum test pressure prescribed for inder must be at a 90-degree angle to water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is knife edges during the test. For lots of the greater; 30 or less, flattening tests are author- D = outside diameter in inches; ized to be made on a ring at least 8 d = inside diameter in inches. inches long cut from each cylinder and (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- subjected to same heat treatment as inder must be uniformly and properly the finished cylinder. heat-treated prior to tests. (k) Physical test. A physical test must (h) Openings in cylinders and connec- be conducted to determine yield tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those strength, tensile strength, elongation, openings. Threads are required on open- and reduction of area of material as ings. follows: (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, (1) The test is required on 2 speci- without checks, and to gauge. mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran- (2) Taper threads, when used, must be dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For of length not less than as specified for lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au- American Standard taper pipe threads. thorized to be made on a ring at least (3) Straight threads having at least 6 8 inches long cut from each cylinder engaged threads are authorized. and subjected to same heat treatment Straight threads must have a tight fit as the finished cylinder. and calculated shear strength of at (2) Specimens must conform to the least 10 times the test pressure of the following: cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent (i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a leakage, are required. width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder length of 2 inches with a width of not must successfully withstand a hydro- over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length of at static test, as follows: least 24 times thickness with width not (1) The test must be by water-jacket, over 6 times thickness is authorized or other suitable methods, operated so when cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16 inch as to obtain accurate data. The pres- thick. sure gauge must permit reading to an (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends gauge must permit reading of total ex- may be flattened to within 1 inch of pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- each end of the reduced section. cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. (iii) When size of cylinder does not (2) Pressure must be maintained for permit securing straight specimens, at least 30 seconds and sufficiently the specimens may be taken in any lo- longer to ensure complete expansion. cation or direction and may be Any internal pressure applied after straightened or flattened cold, by pres- heat-treatment and previous to the of- sure only, not by blows. When speci- ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of mens are so taken and prepared, the in- the test pressure. If, due to failure of spector’s report must show in connec- the test apparatus the test pressure tion with record of physical tests de- cannot be maintained the test may be tailed information in regard to such repeated at a pressure increased by 10 specimens. percent or 100 psig, whichever is the (iv) Heating of a specimen for any lower. purpose is not authorized. (3) Permanent, volumetric expansion (3) The yield strength in tension may not exceed 10 percent of the total must be the stress corresponding to a volumetric expansion at test pressure. permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at gauge length. The following conditions least 5⁄3 times service pressure. apply: (j) Flattening test. A flattening test (i) The yield strength must be deter- must be performed on one cylinder mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or taken at random out of each lot of 200 the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as or less, by placing the cylinder between prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 wedge shaped knife edges having a 60° of this subchapter).

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00030 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.37

(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under Except as provided in paragraph (n) of load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- this section, a cylinder that is leaking tension under load’’) corresponding to must be rejected. the stress at which the 0.2-percent per- (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an manent strain occurs may be deter- end closure in the finished cylinder has mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- been welded by the spinning process. culating the elastic extension of the (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which gauge length under appropriate load a permanent closure in the bottom of a and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the finished cylinder has been effected by a gauge length. Elastic extension cal- plug. culations must be based on an elastic (4) As a safety precaution, if the modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of manufacturer elects to make this test controversy the entire stress-strain before the hydrostatic test, the manu- diagram must be plotted and the yield facturer should design the test appa- strength determined from the 0.2 per- ratus so that the pressure is applied to cent offset. the smallest area practicable, around (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- the point of closure, and so as to use urement, the initial strain must be set the smallest possible volume of air or while the specimen is under a stress of gas. 12,000 psig and the strain indicator (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- reading must be set at the calculated ment is authorized for rejected cyl- corresponding strain. inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning minute during yield strength deter- is not authorized. Spun cylinders re- mination. jected under the provisions of para- (l) Acceptable results for physical and graph (m) of this section may be re- flattening tests. Either of the following moved from the spun cylinder category is an acceptable result: by drilling to remove defective mate- (1) An elongation at least 40 percent rial, tapping and plugging. for a 2-inch gauge length or at least 20 [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as percent in other cases and yield amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR strength not over 73 percent of tensile 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, strength. In this instance, the flat- 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 73 FR 57006, tening test is not required. Oct. 1, 2008] (2) An elongation at least 20 percent for a 2-inch gauge length or 10 percent § 178.37 Specification 3AA and 3AAX in other cases and a yield strength not seamless steel cylinders. over 73 percent of tensile strength. In (a) Type, size and service pressure. In this instance, the flattening test is re- addition to the requirements of § 178.35, quired, without cracking, to 6 times cylinders must conform to the fol- the wall thickness. lowing: (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders (1) A DOT-3AA cylinder is a seamless and plugged cylinders must be tested steel cylinder with a water capacity for leakage by gas or air pressure after (nominal) of not over 1,000 pounds and the bottom has been cleaned and is free a service pressure of at least 150 psig. from all moisture subject to the fol- (2) A DOT-3AAX cylinder is a seam- lowing conditions and limitations: less steel cylinder with a water capac- (1) Pressure, approximately the same ity of not less than 1,000 pounds and a as but no less than service pressure, service pressure of at least 500 psig, must be applied to one side of the fin- conforming to the following require- ished bottom over an area of at least ments: 1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but (i) Assuming the cylinder is to be not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in- supported horizontally at its two ends cluding the closure, for at least 1 only and to be uniformly loaded over minute, during which time the other its entire length consisting of the side of the bottom exposed to pressure weight per unit of length of the must be covered with water and closely straight cylindrical portion filled with examined for indications of leakage. water and compressed to the specified

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00031 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.37 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

test pressure; the sum of two times the d = inside diameter-inches; maximum tensile stress in the bottom A1 = internal area in cross section of cyl- fibers due to bending, plus that in the inder-square inches; same fibers (longitudinal stress), due to A2 = area of metal in cross section of cyl- hydrostatic test pressure may not ex- inder-square inches; ceed 80 percent of the minimum yield P = hydrostatic test pressure-psig. strength of the steel at such maximum (b) Authorized steel. Open-hearth, stress. Wall thickness must be in- basic oxygen, or electric steel of uni- creased when necessary to meet the re- form quality must be used. A heat of quirement. steel made under the specifications in (ii) To calculate the maximum ten- table 1 of this paragraph (b), check sile stress due to bending, the following chemical analysis of which is slightly formula must be used: out of the specified range, is accept- S = Mc/I able, if satisfactory in all other re- (iii) To calculate the maximum lon- spects, provided the tolerances shown gitudinal tensile stress due to hydro- in table 2 of this paragraph (b) are not static test pressure, the following for- exceeded. When a carbon-boron steel is mula must be used: used, a hardenability test must be performed on the first and last ingot of 1 2 S = A P/A each heat of steel. The results of this Where: test must be recorded on the Record of S = tensile stress-p.s.i.; Chemical Analysis of Material for Cyl- M = bending moment-inch pounds (wl2)/8; inders required by § 178.35. This hard- w = weight per inch of cylinder filled with ness test must be made 5⁄16-inch from water; the quenched end of the Jominy quench l = length of cylinder-inches; bar and the hardness must be at least c = radius (D)/(2) of cylinder-inches; I = moment of inertia-0.04909 (D4¥d4) inches Rc 33 and no more than Rc 53. The fol- fourth; lowing chemical analyses are author- D = outside diameter-inches; ized:

TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS

4130X (per- NE–8630 (per- Inter- mediate Designation cent) (see Note cent) (see Note 9115 (percent) 9125 (percent) Carbon-boron manganese 1) 1) (see Note 1) (see Note 1) (percent) (percent)

Carbon ...... 0.25/0.35 ...... 0.28/0.33 ...... 0.10/0.20 ...... 0.20/0.30 ...... 0.27–0.37 ...... 0.40 max. Manganese ...... 0.40/0.90 ...... 0.70/0.90 ...... 0.50/0.75 ...... 0.50/0.75 ...... 0.80–1.40 ...... 1.35/1.65. Phosphorus ...... 0.04 max ...... 0.04 max ...... 0.04 max ...... 0.04 max ...... 0.035 max ...... 0.04 max. Sulfur ...... 0.05 max ...... 0.04 max ...... 0.04 max ...... 0.04 max ...... 0.045 max ...... 0.05 max. Silicon ...... 0.15/0.35 ...... 0.20/0.35 ...... 0.60/0.90 ...... 0.60/0.90 ...... 0.3 max...... 0.10/0.30. Chromium ...... 0.80/1.10 ...... 0.40/0.60 ...... 0.50/0.65 ...... 0.50/0.65. Molybdenum ...... 0.15/0.25 ...... 0.15/0.25 Zirconium ...... 0.05/0.15 ...... 0.05/0.15 Nickel ...... 0.40/0.70. Boron ...... 0.0005/0.003. Note 1: This designation may not be restrictive and the commercial steel is limited in analysis as shown in this table.

TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

Tolerance (percent) over the maximum limit or Limit or maximum specified under the minimum limit Element (percent) Under min- Over maximum limit imum limit

Carbon ...... To 0.15 incl ...... 0.02 0.03 Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl ...... 03 .04 Manganese ...... To 0.60 incl ...... 03 .03 Over 0.60 to 1.15 incl ...... 0.04 0.04 Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl ...... 0.05 0.05 Phosphorus1 ...... All ranges ...... 01 Sulphur ...... All ranges ...... 01 Silicon ...... To 0.30 incl ...... 02 .03 Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl ...... 05 .05 Nickel ...... To 1.00 incl ...... 03 .03

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00032 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.37

TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES—Continued

Tolerance (percent) over the maximum limit or Limit or maximum specified under the minimum limit Element (percent) Under min- Over maximum limit imum limit

Chromium ...... To 0.90 incl ...... 03 .03 0.90 to 2.90 incl ...... 05 .05 Molybdenum ...... To 0.20 incl ...... 01 .01 Over 0.20 to 0.40 ...... 02 .02 Zirconium ...... All ranges ...... 01 .05 1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.

(c) Identification of material. Material (f) Wall thickness. The thickness of must be identified by any suitable each cylinder must conform to the fol- method except that plates and billets lowing: for hot-drawn cylinders must be (1) For cylinders with a service pres- marked with the heat number. sure of less than 900 psig, the wall (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be stress may not exceed 24,000 psi. A min- manufactured using equipment and imum wall thickness of 0.100 inch is re- processes adequate to ensure that each quired for any cylinder with an outside cylinder produced conforms to the re- diameter of over 5 inches. quirements of this subpart. No fissure (2) For cylinders with service pres- or other defects is permitted that is sure of 900 psig or more the minimum wall must be such that the wall stress likely to weaken the finished cylinder at the minimum specified test pressure appreciably. A reasonably smooth and may not exceed 67 percent of the min- uniform surface finish is required. If imum tensile strength of the steel as not originally free from such defects, determined from the physical tests re- the surface may be machined or other- quired in paragraphs (k) and (l) of this wise treated to eliminate these defects. section and must be not over 70,000 psi. The thickness of the bottoms of cyl- (3) Calculation must be made by the inders welded or formed by spinning is, formula: under no condition, to be less than two 2 2 2¥ 2 times the minimum wall thickness of S = [P(1.3D + 0.4d )]/(D d ) the cylindrical shell; such bottom Where: thicknesses must be measured within S = wall stress in psi; an area bounded by a line representing P = minimum test pressure prescribed for the points of contact between the cyl- water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is inder and floor when the cylinder is in the greater; a vertical position. D = outside diameter in inches; d = inside diameter in inches. (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or brazing for any purpose whatsoever is (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- prohibited except as follows: inders must be uniformly and properly (1) Welding or brazing is authorized heat treated prior to tests. Heat treat- for the attachment of neckrings and ment of cylinders of the authorized footrings which are non-pressure parts, analyses must be as follows: and only to the tops and bottoms of (1) All cylinders must be quenched by cylinders having a service pressure of oil, or other suitable medium except as 500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings, provided in paragraph (g)(5) of this sec- and footrings must be made of weldable tion. (2) The steel temperature on quench- steel, the carbon content of which may ing must be that recommended for the not exceed 0.25 percent except in the steel analysis, but may not exceed 1750 case of 4130X steel which may be used °F. with proper welding procedure. (3) All steels must be tempered at a (2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of temperature most suitable for that this section. steel.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00033 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.37 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(4) The minimum tempering tempera- as to obtain accurate data. The pres- ture may not be less than 1000 °F ex- sure gauge must permit reading to an cept as noted in paragraph (g)(6) of this accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion section. gauge must permit reading of total ex- (5) Steel 4130X may be normalized at pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- a temperature of 1650 °F instead of cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. being quenched and cylinders so nor- (2) Pressure must be maintained for malized need not be tempered. at least 30 seconds and sufficiently (6) Intermediate manganese steels longer to ensure complete expansion. may be tempered at temperatures not Any internal pressure applied after less than 1150 °F., and after heat treat- heat-treatment and previous to the of- ing each cylinder must be submitted to ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of a magnetic test to detect the presence the test pressure. If, due to failure of of quenching cracks. Cracked cylinders the test apparatus, the test pressure must be rejected and destroyed. cannot be maintained, the test may be (7) Except as otherwise provided in repeated at a pressure increased by 10 paragraph (g)(6) of this section, all cyl- percent or 100 psig, whichever is the inders, if water quenched or quenched lower. with a liquid producing a cooling rate (3) Permanent volumetric expansion in excess of 80 percent of the cooling may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- rate of water, must be inspected by the umetric expansion at test pressure. magnetic particle, dye penetrant or ul- (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at trasonic method to detect the presence least 5⁄3 times the service pressure. of quenching cracks. Any cylinder de- (j) Flattening test. A flattening test signed to the requirements for speci- must be performed on one cylinder fication 3AA and found to have a taken at random out of each lot of 200 quenching crack must be rejected and or less, by placing the cylinder between may not be requalified. Cylinders de- wedge shaped knife edges having a 60° signed to the requirements for speci- included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra- fication 3AAX and found to have dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl- cracks must have cracks removed to inder must be at a 90-degree angle to sound metal by mechanical means. knife edges during the test. For lots of Such specification 3AAX cylinders will 30 or less, flattening tests are author- be acceptable if the repaired area is ized to be made on a ring at least 8 subsequently examined to assure no de- inches long cut from each cylinder and fect, and it is determined that design subjected to the same heat treatment thickness requirements are met. as the finished cylinder. Cylinders may (h) Openings in cylinders and connec- be subjected to a bend test in lieu of tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those the flattening test. Two bend test openings. Threads are required on open- specimens must be taken in accordance ings. with ISO 9809–1 or ASTM E 290 (IBR, see (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, § 171.7 of this subchapter), and must be without checks, and to gauge. subjected to the bend test specified (2) Taper threads, when used, must be therein. of a length not less than as specified (k) Physical test. A physical test must for American Standard taper pipe be conducted to determine yield threads. strength, tensile strength, elongation, (3) Straight threads having at least 6 and reduction of area of material as engaged threads are authorized. follows: Straight threads must have a tight fit (1) The test is required on 2 speci- and a calculated shear strength of at mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran- least 10 times the test pressure of the dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au- leakage, are required. thorized to be made on a ring at least (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder 8 inches long cut from each cylinder must successfully withstand a hydro- and subjected to the same heat treat- static test as follows: ment as the finished cylinder. (1) The test must be by water-jacket, (2) Specimens must conform to the or other suitable method, operated so following:

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00034 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.37

(i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a minute during yield strength deter- width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge mination. length of 2 inches with a width of not (l) Acceptable results for physical, flat- over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length of at tening and bend tests. An acceptable re- least 24 times the thickness with width sult for physical and flattening tests is not over 6 times thickness when the elongation of at least 20 percent for 2 thickness of the cylinder wall is not inches of gauge length or at least 10 over 3⁄16 inch. percent in other cases. Flattening is re- (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip quired, without cracking, to 6 times ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends the wall thickness of the cylinder. An may be flattened to within 1 inch of acceptable result for the alternative each end of the reduced section. bend test is no crack when the cylinder (iii) When size of cylinder does not is bent inward around the mandrel permit securing straight specimens, until the interior edges are not further the specimens may be taken in any lo- apart than the diameter of the man- cation or direction and may be drel. straightened or flattened cold, by pres- (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders sure only, not by blows. When speci- and plugged cylinders must be tested mens are so taken and prepared, the infor leakage by gas or air pressure after spector’s report must show in connec- the bottom has been cleaned and is free tion with record of physical tests de- from all moisture. Pressure, approxi- tailed information in regard to such mately the same as but no less than specimens. the service pressure, must be applied to (iv) Heating of a specimen for any one side of the finished bottom over an purpose is not authorized. area of at least 1⁄16 of the total area of (3) The yield strength in tension the bottom but not less than 3⁄4 inch in must be the stress corresponding to a diameter, including the closure, for at permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the least one minute, during which time gauge length. The following conditions the other side of the bottom exposed to apply: pressure must be covered with water (i) The yield strength must be deter- and closely examined for indications of mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or leakage. Except as provided in para- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as graph (n) of this section, a cylinder prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 must be rejected if there is any leak- of this subchapter). ing. (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under (1) A spun cylinder is one in which an load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- end closure in the finished cylinder has tension under load’’) corresponding to been welded by the spinning process. the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- (2) A plugged cylinder is one in which manent strain occurs may be deter- a permanent closure in the bottom of a mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- finished cylinder has been effected by a culating the elastic extension of the plug. gauge length under appropriate load (3) As a safety precaution, if the and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the manufacturer elects to make this test gauge length. Elastic extension cal- before the hydrostatic test, the manu- culations must be based on an elastic facturer should design the test appa- modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of ratus so that the pressure is applied to controversy, the entire stress-strain the smallest area practicable, around diagram must be plotted and the yield the point of closure, and so as to use strength determined from the 0.2 per- the smallest possible volume of air or cent offset. gas. (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- urement, the initial strain must be set ment is authorized for rejected cyl- while the specimen is under a stress of inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders 12,000 psi, the strain indicator reading must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- being set at the calculated cor- ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning responding strain. is not authorized. Spun cylinders re- (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing jected under the provision of paragraph machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (m) of this section may be removed

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00035 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.38 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

from the spun cylinder category by steel, carbon content of which may not drilling to remove defective material, exceed 0.25 percent except in the case tapping and plugging. of 4130X steel which may be used with proper welding procedure. [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR (2) As permitted in paragraph (d) of 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; this section. 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 76 FR 43531, July 20, (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress may 2011] not exceed 24,000 psi. The minimum wall thickness is 0.090 inch for any cyl- § 178.38 Specification 3B seamless inder with an outside diameter of 6 steel cylinders. inches. Calculation must be made by (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A the following formula: DOT 3B cylinder is seamless steel cyl- S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)]/(D2¥d2) inder with a water capacity (nominal) of not over 1,000 pounds and a service Where: pressure of at least 150 to not over 500 S = wall stress in psi; psig. P = at least two times service pressure or 450 (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel psig, whichever is the greater; of uniform quality must be used. Con- D = outside diameter in inches; tent percent may not exceed the fol- d = inside diameter in inches. lowing: carbon, 0.55; phosphorus, 0.045; (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- sulphur, 0.050. inders must be uniformly and properly (c) Identification of material. Material heat-treated prior to tests. must be identified by any suitable (h) Openings in cylinders and connec- method except that plates and billets tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those for hot-drawn cylinders must be openings. Threads, conforming to the marked with the heat number. following, are required on all openings: (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, manufactured using equipment and without checks, and to gauge. processes adequate to ensure that each (2) Taper threads when used, must be cylinder produced conforms to the re- of a length not less than as specified quirements of this subpart. No fissure for American Standard taper pipe or other defect is permitted that is threads. likely to weaken the finished cylinder (3) Straight threads having at least 4 appreciably. A reasonably smooth and engaged threads are authorized. uniform surface finish is required. If Straight threads must have a tight fit, not originally free from such defects, and calculated shear strength at least the surface may be machined or other- 10 times the test pressure of the cyl- wise treated to eliminate these defects. inder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent The thickness of the bottoms of cyl- leakage, are required. inders welded or formed by spinning is, (i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must under no condition, to be less than two successfully withstand a hydrostatic times the minimum wall thickness of test, as follows: the cylindrical shell; such bottom (1) The test must be by water-jacket, thicknesses to be measured within an or other suitable method, operated so area bounded by a line representing the as to obtain accurate data. The pres- points of contact between the cylinder sure gauge must permit reading to an and floor when the cylinder is in a accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion vertical position. gauge must permit reading of total ex- (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per- brazing for any purpose whatsoever is cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. prohibited except as follows: (2) Pressure must be maintained for (1) Welding or brazing is authorized at least 30 seconds and sufficiently for the attachment of neckrings and longer to insure complete expansion. footrings which are non-pressure parts, Any internal pressure applied after and only to the tops and bottoms of heat-treatment and previous to the of- cylinders having a service pressure of ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of 500 psig or less. Cylinders, neckrings, the test pressure. If, due to failure of and footrings must be made of weldable the test apparatus, the test pressure

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00036 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.38

cannot be maintained, the test may be the specimens may be taken in any lo- repeated at a pressure increased by 10 cation or direction and may be percent or 100 psig, whichever is the straightened or flattened cold, by pres- lower. sure only, not by blows. When speci- (3) Permanent volumetric expansion mens are so taken and prepared, the in- may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- spector’s report must show in connec- umetric expansion at test pressure. tion with record of physical tests de- (4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- tailed information in regard to such lows: specimens. (i) Each cylinder; to at least 2 times (iv) Heating of a specimen for any service pressure; or purpose is not authorized. (ii) 1 cylinder out of each lot of 200 or (3) The yield strength in tension less; to at least 3 times service pres- must be the stress corresponding to a sure. Others must be examined under permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the pressure of 2 times service pressure and gauge length. The following conditions show no defect. apply: (j) Flattening test. A flattening test (i) The yield strength must be deter- must be performed on one cylinder mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or taken at random out of each lot of 200 the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as or less, by placing the cylinder between prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 wedge shaped knife edges having a 60° of this subchapter). included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra- (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl- load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- inder must be at a 90-degree angle to tension under load’’) corresponding to knife edges during the test. For lots of the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- 30 or less, flattening tests are author- manent strain occurs may be deter- ized to be made on a ring at least 8 mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- inches long cut from each cylinder and culating the elastic extension of the subjected to same heat treatment as gauge length under appropriate load the finished cylinder. and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the (k) Physical test. A physical test must gauge length. Elastic extension cal- be conducted to determine yield culations must be based on an elastic strength, tensile strength, elongation, modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of and reduction of area of material, as controversy, the entire stress-strain follows: diagram must be plotted and the yield (1) The test is required on 2 speci- strength determined from the 0.2 per- mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran- cent offset. dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au- urement, the initial strain must be set thorized to be made on a ring at least while the specimen is under a stress of 8 inches long cut from each cylinder 12,000 psi, and the strain indicator and subjected to same heat treatment reading being set at the calculated cor- as the finished cylinder. responding strain. (2) Specimens must conform to the (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing following: machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (i) Gauge length of 8 inches with a minute during yield strength deter- width of not over 11⁄2 inches; or a gauge mination. length of 2 inches with a width of not (l) Acceptable results for physical and over 11⁄2 inches; or a gauge length at flattening tests. Either of the following least 24 times the thickness with a is an acceptable result: width not over 6 times thickness is au- (1) An elongation of at least 40 per- thorized when a cylinder wall is not cent for a 2-inch gauge length or at over 3⁄16 inch thick. least 20 percent in other cases and (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip yield strength not over 73 percent of ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends tensile strength. In this instance, the may be flattened to within one inch of flattening test is not required. each end of the reduced section. (2) An elongation of at least 20 per- (iii) When size of cylinder does not cent for a 2-inch gauge length or 10 per- permit securing straight specimens, cent in other cases and yield strength

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00037 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.39 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

not over 73 percent of tensile strength. imum wall thickness, but may not ex- Flattening is required, without crack- ceed 0.015 inch. ing, to 6 times the wall thickness. (4) Maximum outside diameter of cyl- (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders inder may not exceed 5 inches. and plugged cylinders must be tested (5) Carbon content of cylinder may for leakage by gas or air pressure after not exceed 0.25 percent. If the carbon the bottom has been cleaned and is free content exceeds 0.25 percent, the com- from all moisture, subject to the fol- plete cylinder must be normalized after lowing conditions and limitations: stamping. (1) Pressure, approximately the same (6) Stamping must be adjacent to the as but no less than service pressure, top head. must be applied to one side of the finished bottom over an area of at least [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended by 66 FR 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in- 2003] cluding the closure, for at least one minute, during which time the other § 178.39 Specification 3BN seamless side of the bottom exposed to pressure nickel cylinders. must be covered with water and closely examined for indications of leakage. (a) Type, size and service pressure. A Except as provided in paragraph (n) of DOT 3BN cylinder is a seamless nickel this section, a cylinder must be re- cylinder with a water capacity (nomi- jected if there is any leaking. nal) not over 125 pounds water capacity (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an (nominal) and a service pressure at end closure in the finished cylinder has least 150 to not over 500 psig. been welded by the spinning process. (b) Nickel. The percentage of nickel (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which plus cobalt must be at least 99.0 per- a permanent closure in the bottom of a cent. finished cylinder has been effected by a (c) Identification of material. The ma- plug. terial must be identified by any suit- (4) As a safety precaution, if the able method except that plates and bil- manufacturer elects to make this test lets for hot-drawn cylinders must be before the hydrostatic test, he should marked with the heat number. design his apparatus so that the pres- (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be sure is applied to the smallest area manufactured using equipment and practicable, around the point of clo- processes adequate to ensure that each sure, and so as to use the smallest pos- cylinder produced conforms to the re- sible volume of air or gas. quirements of this subpart. No defect is (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- permitted that is likely to weaken the ment of rejected cylinders is author- finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders sonably smooth and uniform surface must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- finish is required. Cylinders closed in ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning by spinning process are not authorized. is not authorized. Spun cylinders re- (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or jected under the provisions of para- brazing for any purpose whatsoever is graph (m) of this section may be re- prohibited except that welding is au- moved from the spun cylinder category thorized for the attachment of by drilling to remove defective mate- neckrings and footrings which are non- rial, tapping and plugging. pressure parts, and only to the tops and (o) Marking. Markings may be bottoms of cylinders. Neckrings and stamped into the sidewalls of cylinders footrings must be of weldable material, having a service pressure of 150 psig if the carbon content of which may not all of the following conditions are met: exceed 0.25 percent. Nickel welding rod (1) Wall stress at test pressure may must be used. not exceed 24,000 psi. (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress may (2) Minimum wall thickness must be not exceed 15,000 psi. A minimum wall not less than 0.090 inch. thickness of 0.100 inch is required for (3) Depth of stamping must be no any cylinder over 5 inches in outside greater than 15 percent of the min- diameter. Wall stress calculation must

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00038 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.39

be made by using the following for- (j) Flattening test. A flattening test mula: must be performed on one cylinder taken at random out of each lot of 200 S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) or less, by placing the cylinder between Where: wedge shaped knife edges having a 60° 1 S = wall stress in psi; included angle, rounded to ⁄2-inch ra- P = minimum test pressure prescribed for dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl- water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is inder must be at a 90-degree angle to the greater; knife edges during the test. For lots of D = outside diameter in inches; 30 or less, flattening tests are author- d = inside diameter in inches. ized to be made on a ring at least 8 (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- inches long cut from each cylinder and inders must be uniformly and properly subjected to same heat treatment as heat-treated prior to tests. the finished cylinder. (k) Physical test. A physical test must (h) Openings in cylinders and connec- be conducted to determine yield tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those strength, tensile strength, elongation, openings. Threads conforming to the and reduction of area of material, as following are required on openings: follows: (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, (1) The test is required on 2 speci- without checks, and to gauge. mens cut from 1 cylinder taken at ran- (2) Taper threads, when used, to be of dom out of each lot of 200 or less. For length not less than as specified for lots of 30 or less, physical tests are au- American Standard taper pipe threads. thorized to be made on a ring at least (3) Straight threads having at least 6 8 inches long cut from each cylinder engaged threads are authorized. and subjected to same heat treatment Straight threads must have a tight fit as the finished cylinder. and a calculated shear strength of at (2) Specimens must conform to the least 10 times the test pressure of the following: cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a leakage, are required. width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder length of 2 inches with a width of not must successfully withstand a hydro- over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length of at static test, as follows: least 24 times the thickness with a (1) The test must be by water-jacket, width not over 6 times thickness is au- or other suitable method, operated so thorized when a cylinder wall is not as to obtain accurate data. The pres- over 3⁄16 inch thick. sure gauge must permit reading to an (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends gauge must permit reading of total ex- may be flattened to within one inch of pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per- each end of the reduced section. cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. (iii) When size of cylinder does not (2) Pressure must be maintained for permit securing straight specimens, at least 30 seconds and sufficiently the specimens may be taken in any lo- longer to ensure complete expansion. cation or direction and may be Any internal pressure applied after straightened or flattened cold, by pres- heat-treatment and previous to the of- sure only, not by blows. When speci- ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of mens are so taken and prepared, the in- the test pressure. If, due to failure of spector’s report must show in connec- the test apparatus, the test pressure tion with record of physical tests de- cannot be maintained, the test may be tailed information in regard to such repeated at a pressure increased by 10 specimens. percent or 100 psig, whichever is the (iv) Heating of a specimen for any lower. purpose is not authorized. (3) Permanent volumetric expansion (3) The yield strength in tension may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- must be the stress corresponding to a umetric expansion at test pressure. permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at gauge length. The following conditions least 2 times service pressure. apply:

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00039 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.42 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(i) The yield strength must be deter- § 178.42 Specification 3E seamless steel mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or cylinders. the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 DOT 3E cylinder is a seamless steel of this subchapter). cylinder with an outside diameter not (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under greater than 2 inches nominal, a length load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- less than 2 feet and a service pressure tension under load’’) corresponding to of 1,800 psig. the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel manent strain occurs may be deter- of uniform quality must be used. Con- mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- tent percent may not exceed the fol- culating the elastic extension of the lowing: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorus, 0.045; gauge length under appropriate load sulphur, 0.050. and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the (c) Identification of steel. Materials must be identified by any suitable gauge length. Elastic extension cal- method. culations must be based on an elastic (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of manufactured by best appliances and controversy, the entire stress-strain methods. No defect is permitted that is diagram must be plotted and the yield likely to weaken the finished cylinder strength determined from the 0.2 per- appreciably. A reasonably smooth and cent offset. uniform surface finish is required. The (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- thickness of the spun bottom is, under urement, the initial strain must be set no condition, to be less than two times while the specimen is under a stress of the minimum wall thickness of the cy- 12,000 psi, and the strain indicator lindrical shell; such bottom thickness reading must be set at the calculated must be measured within an area corresponding strain. bounded by a line representing the (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing points of contact between the cylinder machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per and floor when the cylinder is in a minute during yield strength deter- vertical position. mination. (e) Openings in cylinders and connec- (l) Acceptable results for physical and tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those openings. Threads conforming to the flattening tests. Either of the following following are required on openings. is an acceptable result: (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, (1) An elongation of at least 40 per- without checks, and to gauge. cent for a 2 inch gauge length or at (2) Taper threads, when used, must be least 20 percent in other cases and of length not less than as specified for yield point not over 50 percent of ten- American Standard taper pipe threads. sile strength. In this instance, the flat- (3) Straight threads having at least 4 tening test is not required. engaged threads are authorized. (2) An elongation of at least 20 per- Straight threads must have a tight fit cent for a 2 inch gauge length or 10 per- and a calculated shear strength of at cent in other cases and a yield point least 10 times the test pressure of the not over 50 percent of tensile strength. cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent Flattening is required, without crack- leakage, are required. ing, to 6 times the wall thickness. (f) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must be (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- tested as follows: ment is authorized for rejected cyl- (1) One cylinder out of each lot of 500 inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders or less must be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of 6,000 psig or higher. must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- (2) The cylinder referred to in para- ceptable. Repair by welding is not au- graph (f)(1) of this section must burst thorized. at a pressure higher than 6,000 psig [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as without fragmenting or otherwise amended by 66 FR 45185, 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, showing lack of ductility, or must hold 2001; 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, a pressure of 12,000 psig for 30 seconds Dec. 31, 2003] without bursting. In which case, it

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00040 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.44

must be subjected to a flattening test is not authorized. Spun cylinders re- without cracking to six times wall jected under the provisions of para- thickness between knife edges, wedge graph (g) of this section may be re- shaped 60 degree angle, rounded out to moved from the spun cylinder category a 1⁄2 inch radius. The inspector’s report by drilling to remove defective mate- must be suitably changed to show re- rial, tapping and plugging. sults of latter alternate and flattening (i) Marking. Markings required by test. § 178.35 must be stamped plainly and (3) Other cylinders must be examined permanently on the shoulder, top head, under pressure of at least 3,000 psig and neck or sidewall of each cylinder. not to exceed 4,500 psig and show no de- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as fect. Cylinders tested at a pressure in amended by 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] excess of 3,600 psig must burst at a pressure higher than 7,500 psig when § 178.44 Specification 3HT seamless tested as specified in paragraph (f)(2) of steel cylinders for aircraft use. this section. The pressure must be (a) Type, size and service pressure. A maintained for at least 30 seconds and DOT 3HT cylinder is a seamless steel sufficiently longer to ensure complete cylinder with a water capacity (nomi- examination. nal) of not over 150 pounds and a serv- (g) Leakage test. All spun cylinders ice pressure of at least 900 psig. and plugged cylinders must be tested (b) Authorized steel. Open hearth or for leakage by gas or air pressure after electric furnace steel of uniform qual- the bottom has been cleaned and is free ity must be used. A heat of steel made from all moisture subject to the fol- under the specifications listed in Table lowing conditions and limitations: 1 in this paragraph (b), a check chem- (1) A pressure, approximately the ical analysis that is slightly out of the same as but not less than the service specified range is acceptable, if satis- pressure, must be applied to one side of factory in all other respects, provided the finished bottom over an area of at the tolerances shown in Table 2 in this least 1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom paragraph (b) are not exceeded. The but not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, maximum grain size shall be 6 or finer. including the closure, for at least one The grain size must be determined in minute, during which time the other accordance with ASTM E 112–88 (IBR, side of the bottom exposed to pressure see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Steel of must be covered with water and closely the following chemical analysis is au- examined for indications of leakage. thorized: Accept as provided in paragraph (h) of this section, a cylinder must be re- TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS jected if there is any leakage. AISI 4130 (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an Designation (percent) end closure in the finished cylinder has been welded by the spinning process. Carbon ...... 0.28/0.33 Manganese ...... 0.40/0.60 (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which Phosphorus ...... 0.040 maximum a permanent closure in the bottom of a Sulfur ...... 0.040 maximum finished cylinder has been effected by a Silicon ...... 0.15/0.35 Chromium ...... 0.80/1.10 plug. Molybdenum ...... 0.15/0.25 (4) As a safety precaution, if the manufacturer elects to make this test TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES before the hydrostatic test, the manufacturer shall design the test apparatus Tolerance (percent) over the so that the pressure is applied to the maximum limit or smallest area practicable, around the under the Limit or maximum minimum limit point of closure, and so as to use the Element specified (percent) smallest possible volume of air or gas. Under Over min- max- (h) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- imum imum ment is authorized for rejected cyl- limit limit inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders Carbon ...... Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl .03 .04 must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- Manganese .... To 0.60 incl ...... 03 .03 ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning Phosphorus1 .. All ranges ...... 01

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00041 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.44 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES— grinding to produce proper surface fin- Continued ish at point of closure is required. (f) Wall thickness. (1) Minimum wall Tolerance (percent) over the thickness for any cylinder must be maximum limit or 0.050 inch. The minimum wall thick- under the Limit or maximum minimum limit ness must be such that the wall stress Element specified (percent) at the minimum specified test pressure Under Over min- max- may not exceed 75 percent of the minimum imum imum tensile strength of the steel as limit limit determined from the physical tests re- Sulphur ...... All ranges ...... 01 quired in paragraph (m) of this section Silicon ...... To 0.30 incl ...... 02 .03 and may not be over 105,000 psi. Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl .05 .05 Chromium ...... To 0.90 incl ...... 03 .03 (2) Calculations must be made by the Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl .05 .05 formula: Molybdenum .. To 0.20 incl ...... 01 .01 Over 0.20 to 0.40 incl .02 .02 S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) 1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for Where: phosphorus. S = Wall stress in psi; (c) Identification of material. Material P = Minimum test pressure prescribed for must be identified by any suitable water jacket test; method. Steel stamping of heat identi- D = Outside diameter in inches; fications may not be made in any area d = Inside diameter in inches. which will eventually become the side wall of the cylinder. Depth of stamping (3) Wall thickness of hemispherical may not encroach upon the minimum bottoms only permitted to 90 percent prescribed wall thickness of the cyl- of minimum wall thickness of cylinder inder. sidewall but may not be less than 0.050 (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be inch. In all other cases, thickness to be manufactured using equipment and no less than prescribed minimum wall. processes adequate to ensure that each (g) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- cylinder produced conforms to the re- inders must be uniformly and properly quirements of this subpart. No fissure heated prior to tests. Heat treatment or other defect is permitted that is of the cylinders of the authorized anal- likely to weaken the finished container ysis must be as follows: appreciably. The general surface finish (1) All cylinders must be quenched by may not exceed a roughness of 250 oil, or other suitable medium. RMS. Individual irregularities such as (2) The steel temperature on quench- draw marks, scratches, pits, etc., ing must be that recommended for the should be held to a minimum con- steel analysis, but may not exceed 1750 sistent with good high stress pressure °F. vessel manufacturing practices. If the (3) The steel must be tempered at a cylinder is not originally free of such temperature most suitable for the par- defects or does not meet the finish re- ticular steel analysis but not less than quirements, the surface may be ma- 850 °F. chined or otherwise treated to elimi- (4) All cylinders must be inspected by nate these defects. The point of closure the magnetic particle or dye penetrant of cylinders closed by spinning may not method to detect the presence of be less than two times the prescribed quenching cracks. Any cylinder found wall thickness of the cylindrical shell. to have a quenching crack must be re- The cylinder end contour must be hem- jected and may not be requalified. ispherical or ellipsoidal with a ratio of (h) Openings in cylinders and connec- major-to-minor axis not exceeding two tions (valves, fuse plugs, etc.) for those to one and with the concave side to openings. Threads conforming to the pressure. following are required on openings: (e) Welding or brazing. Welding or (1) Threads must be clean cut, even, brazing for any purpose whatsoever is without cracks, and to gauge. prohibited, except that welding by (2) Taper threads, when used, must be spinning is permitted to close the bot- of length not less than as specified for tom of spun cylinders. Machining or National Gas Tapered Thread (NGT) as

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00042 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.44

required by American Standard Com- steel, manufactured by the same proc- pressed Gas Cylinder Valve Outlet and ess and heat treated in the same equip- Inlet Connections. ment under the same conditions of (3) Straight threads having at least 6 time, temperature, and atmosphere, engaged threads are authorized. and may not exceed a quantity of 200 Straight threads must have a tight fit cylinders. and a calculated shear stress of at least (4) All cylinders used in cycling tests 10 times the test pressure of the cyl- must be destroyed. inder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent (k) Burst test. One cylinder taken at leakage, are required. random out of each lot of cylinders (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder must be hydrostatically tested to de- must withstand a hydrostatic test, as struction. follows: (l) Flattening test. A flattening test (1) The test must be by water-jacket, must be performed on one cylinder or other suitable method, operated so taken at random out of each lot of 200 as to obtain accurate data. Pressure or less, by placing the cylinder between gauge must permit reading to an accu- wedge shaped knife edges having a 60° racy of 1 percent. The expansion gauge included angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch ra- must permit reading of total expansion dius. The longitudinal axis of the cyl- to an accuracy either of 1 percent of 0.1 inder must be at a 90-degree angle to cubic centimeter. knife edges during the test. For lots of (2) Pressure must be maintained for 30 or less, flattening tests are author- at least 30 seconds and sufficiently ized to be made on a ring at least 8 longer to ensure complete expansion. inches long cut from each cylinder and Any internal pressure applied after subjected to same heat treatment as heat treatment and previous to the of- the finished cylinder. ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of (m) Physical tests. A physical test the test pressure. If, due to failure of must be conducted to determine yield the test apparatus, the test pressure strength, tensile strength, elongation, cannot be maintained, the test may be and reduction of area of material, as repeated at a pressure increased by 10 follows: percent or 100 psig, which ever is the (1) Test is required on 2 specimens lower. cut from 1 cylinder taken at random (3) Permanent volumetric expansion out of each lot of cylinders. may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- (2) Specimens must conform to the umetric expansion at test pressure. following: (4) Each cylinder must be tested to at (i) A gauge length of at least 24 times least 5⁄3 times service pressure. the thickness with a width not over six (j) Cycling tests. Prior to the initial times the thickness. The specimen, ex- shipment of any specific cylinder de- clusive of grip ends, may not be flat- sign, cyclic pressurization tests must tened. Grip ends may be flattened to have been performed on at least three within one inch of each end of the re- representative samples without failure duced section. When size of cylinder as follows: does not permit securing straight (1) Pressurization must be performed specimens, the specimens may be hydrostatically between approximately taken in any location or direction and zero psig and the service pressure at a may be straightened or flattened cold rate not in excess of 10 cycles per by pressure only, not by blows. When minute. Adequate recording instrumen- specimens are so taken and prepared, tation must be provided if equipment is the inspector’s report must show in to be left unattended for periods of connection with the record of physical time. tests detailed information in regard to (2) Tests prescribed in paragraph such specimens. (j)(1) of this section must be repeated (ii) Heating of a specimen for any on one random sample out of each lot purpose is not authorized. of cylinders. The cylinder may then be (3) The yield strength in tension subjected to a burst test. must be the stress corresponding to a (3) A lot is defined as a group of cyl- permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the inders fabricated from the same heat of gauge length.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00043 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.44 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(i) The yield strength must be deter- Except as provided in paragraph (q) of mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or this section, a cylinder must be re- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as jected if there is leakage. prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an of this subchapter). end closure in the finished cylinder has (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under been welded by the spinning process. load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which tension under load’’) corresponding to a permanent closure in the bottom of a the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- finished cylinder has been effected by a manent strain occurs may be deter- plug. mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- (4) As a safety precaution, if the culating the elastic extension of the manufacturer elects to make this test gauge length under appropriate load before the hydrostatic test, the manu- and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the facturer should design the test appa- gauge length. Elastic extension cal- ratus so that the pressure is applied to culations must be based on an elastic the smallest area practicable, around modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of the point of closure, and so as to use controversy, the entire stress-strain the smallest possible volume of air or diagram must be plotted and the yield gas. strength determined from the 0.2 per- (p) Acceptable results of tests. Results cent offset. of the flattening test, physical tests, (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- burst test, and cycling test must con- urement, the initial strain must be set form to the following: while the specimen is under a stress of (1) Flattening required without 12,000 psi, the strain indicator reading cracking to ten times the wall thick- being set at the calculated cor- ness of the cylinder. responding strain. (2) Physical tests: (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing (i) An elongation of at least 6 percent machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per minute during yield strength deter- for a gauge length of 24 times the wall mination. thickness. (n) Magnetic particle inspection. In- (ii) The tensile strength may not ex- spection must be performed on the in- ceed 165,000 p.s.i. side of each container before closing (3) The burst pressure must be at and externally on each finished con- least 4⁄3 times the test pressure. tainer after heat treatment. Evidence (4) Cycling-at least 10,000 pressuriza- of discontinuities, which in the opinion tions. of a qualified inspector may appre- (q) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- ciably weaken or decrease the dura- ment is authorized for rejected cyl- bility of the cylinder, must be cause for inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders rejection. must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- (o) Leakage test. All spun cylinders ceptable. Repair by welding or spinning and plugged cylinders must be tested is not authorized. For each cylinder for leakage by dry gas or dry air pres- subjected to reheat treatment during sure after the bottom has been cleaned original manufacture, sidewall meas- and is free from all moisture, subject urements must be made to verify that to the following conditions and limita- the minimum sidewall thickness meets tions: specification requirements after the (1) Pressure, approximately the same final heat treatment. as but not less than service pressure, (r) Marking. (1) Cylinders must be must be applied to one side of the fin- marked by low stress type steel stamp- ished bottom over an area of at least ing in an area and to a depth which 1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but will insure that the wall thickness not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in- measured from the root of the stamp- cluding the closure, for at least one ing to the interior surface is equal to minute, during which time the other or greater than the minimum pre- side of the bottom exposed to pressure scribed wall thickness. Stamping must must be covered with water and closely be permanent and legible. Stamping on examined for indications of leakage. side wall not authorized.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00044 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.45

(2) The rejection elastic expansion aspects. However, the check analysis (REE), in cubic cm (cc), must be tolerances shown in the table in this marked on the cylinder near the date paragraph (b) may not be exceeded ex- of test. The REE for a cylinder is 1.05 cept as approved by the Department. times its original elastic expansion. (2) Material with seams, cracks, lam- (3) Name plates are authorized, pro- inations, or other injurious defects is vided that they can be permanently not permitted. and securely attached to the cylinder. (3) Material used must be identified Attachment by either brazing or weld- by any suitable method. ing is not permitted. Attachment by (c) Manufacture. General manufac- soldering is permitted provided steel turing requirements are as follows: temperature does not exceed 500 °F. (s) Inspector’s report. In addition to (1) Surface finish must be uniform the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- and reasonably smooth. tor’s report must indicate the rejection (2) Inside surfaces must be clean, dry, elastic expansion (REE), in cubic cm and free of loose particles. (cc). (3) No defect of any kind is permitted if it is likely to weaken a finished cyl- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 65 FR inder. 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45385, Aug. 28, 2001; (4) If the cylinder surface is not origi- 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, nally free from the defects, the surface Dec. 31, 2003] may be machined or otherwise treated to eliminate these defects provided the § 178.45 Specification 3T seamless steel minimum wall thickness is main- cylinder. tained. (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A (5) Welding or brazing on a cylinder DOT 3T cylinder is a seamless steel is not permitted. cylinder with a minimum water capac- (d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall ity of 1,000 pounds and a minimum thickness must be such that the wall service pressure of 1,800 psig. Each cyl- stress at the minimum specified test inder must have integrally formed pressure does not exceed 67 percent of heads concave to pressure at both ends. the minimum tensile strength of the The inside head shape must be hemi- steel as determined by the physical spherical, ellipsoidal in which the tests required in paragraphs (j) and (k) major axis is two times the minor axis, or a dished shape falling within these of this section. A wall stress of more two limits. Permanent closures formed than 90,500 p.s.i. is not permitted. The by spinning are prohibited. minimum wall thickness for any cyl- (b) Material, steel. Only open hearth, inder may not be less than 0.225 inch. basic oxygen, or electric furnace proc- (1) Calculation of the stress for cyl- ess steel of uniform quality is author- inders must be made by the following ized. The steel analysis must conform formula: to the following: S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) ANALYSIS TOLERANCES Where:

Check Analysis S = Wall stress in psi; Element Ladle analysis P = Minimum test pressure, at least 5⁄3 serv- Under Over ice pressure; Carbon ...... 0.35 to 0.50 ...... 0.03 0.04 D = Outside diameter in inches; Manganese ...... 0.75 to 1.05 ...... 0.04 0.04 d = Inside diameter in inches. Phosphorus (max) ...... 0.035 ...... 0.01 Sulphur (max) ...... 0.04 ...... 0.01 (2) Each cylinder must meet the fol- Silicon ...... 0.15 to 0.35 ...... 0.02 0.03 lowing additional requirement which Chromium ...... 0.80 to 1.15 ...... 0.05 0.05 Molybdenum ...... 0.15 to 0.25 ...... 0.02 0.02 assumes a cylinder horizontally supported at its two ends and uniformly (1) A heat of steel made under the loaded over its entire length. This load specifications in the table in this para- consists of the weight per inch of graph (b), the ladle analysis of which is length of the straight cylindrical por- slightly out of the specified range, is tion filled with water compressed to acceptable if satisfactory in all other the specified test pressure. The wall

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00045 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.45 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

thickness must be increased when nec- not less than 1050 °F., and must be held essary to meet this additional require- at this temperature for at least one ment: hour per inch of thickness based on the (i) The sum of two times the max- maximum thickness of the cylinder. imum tensile stress in the bottom fi- Each cylinder must then be cooled bers due to bending (see paragraph under conditions recommended for the (d)(2)(ii) of this section), plus the max- steel. imum tensile stress in the same fibers (f) Openings. Openings in cylinders due to hydrostatic testing (see para- must comply with the following: graph (d)(2)(iii) of this section) may (1) Openings are permitted on heads not exceed 80 percent of the minimum only. yield strength of the steel at this max- (2) The size of any centered opening imum stress. (ii) The following formula must be in a head may not exceed one half the used to calculate the maximum tensile outside diameter of the cylinder. stress due to bending: (3) Openings in a head must have lig- aments between openings of at least S = Mc / I three times the average of their hole Where: diameter. No off-center opening may S = Tensile stress in psi; exceed 2.625 inches in diameter. M = Bending moment in inch-pounds (wl2/8); (4) All openings must be circular. I = Moment of inertia—0.04909 (D4¥d4) in (5) All openings must be threaded. inches fourth; Threads must be in compliance with c = Radius (D/2) of cylinder in inches; w = Weight per inch of cylinder filled with the following: water; (i) Each thread must be clean cut, l = Length of cylinder in inches; even, without any checks, and to D = Outside diameter in inches; gauge. d = Inside diameter in inches. (ii) Taper threads, when used, must (iii) The following formula must be be the American Standard Pipe thread used to calculate the maximum longi- (NPT) type and must be in compliance tudinal tensile stress due to hydro- with the requirements of NBS Hand- static test pressure: book H–28 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). S = A1 P / A2 (iii) Taper threads conforming to Na- Where: tional Gas Taper thread (NGT) stand- S = Tensile stress in psi; ards must be in compliance with the A1 = Internal area in cross section of cyl- requirements of NBS Handbook H–28. inder in square inches; P = Hydrostatic test pressure-psig; (iv) Straight threads conforming with National Gas Straight thread A2 = Area of metal in cross section of cylinder in square inches. (NGS) standards are authorized. These threads must be in compliance with the (e) Heat treatment. Each completed requirements of NBS Handbook H–28. cylinder must be uniformly and properly heat treated prior to testing, as (g) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder follows: must be tested at an internal pressure (1) Each cylinder must be heated and by the water jacket method or other held at the proper temperature for at suitable method, conforming to the fol- least one hour per inch of thickness lowing requirements: based on the maximum thickness of (1) The testing apparatus must be op- the cylinder and then quenched in a erated in a manner that will obtain ac- suitable liquid medium having a cool- curate data. Any pressure gauge used ing rate not in excess of 80 percent of must permit reading to an accuracy of water. The steel temperature on one percent. Any expansion gauge used quenching must be that recommended must permit reading of the total ex- for the steel analysis, but it must pansion to an accuracy of one percent. never exceed 1750 °F. (2) Any internal pressure applied to (2) After quenching, each cylinder the cylinder after heat treatment and must be reheated to a temperature before the official test may not exceed below the transformation range but 90 percent of the test pressure.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00046 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.45

(3) The pressure must be maintained allel to the axis of the cylinder. Each sufficiently long to assure complete ex- cylinder or ring specimen for test must pansion of the cylinder. In no case may be of the same diameter, thickness, and the pressure be held less than 30 sec- metal as the finished cylinders they onds. represent. A test ring must be at least (4) If, due to failure of the test appa- 24 inches long with ends covered during ratus, the required test pressure can- the heat treatment process so as to not be maintained, the test must be re- simulate the heat treatment process of peated at a pressure increased by 10 the finished cylinders it represents. percent or 100 psig, whichever is lower (4) A test cylinder or test ring need or, the cylinder must be reheat treated. represent only one of the heats in a (5) Permanent volumetric expansion furnace batch provided the other heats of the cylinder may not exceed 10 per- in the batch have previously been test- cent of its total volumetric expansion ed and have passed the tests and that at the required test pressure. such tests do not represent more than (6) Each cylinder must be tested to at 200 cylinders from any one heat. least 5⁄3 times its service pressure. (5) The test results must conform to (h) Ultrasonic examination. After the the requirements specified in para- hydrostatic test, the cylindrical sec- graphs (j) and (k) of this section. tion of each vessel must be examined in (6) When the test results do not con- accordance with ASTM E 213 for shear form to the requirements specified, the wave and E 114 for straight beam (IBR, cylinders represented by the tests may Standard see § 171.7 of this subchapter). be reheat treated and the tests re- The equipment used must be calibrated peated. Paragraph (i)(5) of this section to detect a notch equal to five percent applies to any retesting. of the design minimum wall thickness. (j) Basic conditions for acceptable phys- Any discontinuity indication greater ical testing. The following criteria must than that produced by the five percent be followed to obtain acceptable phys- notch must be cause for rejection of ical test results: the cylinder, unless the discontinuity (1) Each tension specimen must have is repaired within the requirements of a gauge length of two inches with a this specification. width not exceeding one and one-half (i) Basic requirements for tension and inches. Except for the grip ends, the Charpy impact tests. Cylinders must be specimen may not be flattened. The subjected to a tension and Charpy im- grip ends may be flattened to within pact as follows: one inch of each end of the reduced sec- (1) When the cylinders are heat treat- tion. ed in a batch furnace, two tension (2) A specimen may not be heated specimens and three Charpy impact after heat treatment specified in para- specimens must be tested from one of graph (d) of this section. the cylinders or a test ring from each (3) The yield strength in tension batch. The lot size represented by these must be the stress corresponding to a tests may not exceed 200 cylinders. permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the (2) When the cylinders are heat treat- gage length. ed in a continuous furnace, two tension (i) This yield strength must be deter- specimens and three Charpy impact mined by the ‘‘offset’’ method or the specimens must be tested from one of ‘‘extension under load’’ method de- the cylinders or a test ring from each scribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 of four hours or less of production. How- this subchapter). ever, in no case may a test lot based on (ii) For the ‘‘extension under load’’ this production period exceed 200 cyl- method, the total strain (or extension inders. under load) corresponding to the stress (3) Each specimen for the tension and at which the 0.2 percent permanent Charpy impact tests must be taken strain occurs may be determined with from the side wall of a cylinder or from sufficient accuracy by calculating the a ring which has been heat treated elastic extension of the gage length with the finished cylinders of which under appropriate load and adding the specimens must be representative. thereto 0.2 percent of the gage length. The axis of the specimens must be par- Elastic extension calculations must be

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00047 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.46 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

based on an elastic modulus of obtained in each retest may not exceed 30,000,000. However, when the degree of the maximum permitted. accuracy of this method is question- (l) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- able the entire stress-strain diagram ment is authorized for rejected cyl- must be plotted and the yield strength inders. However, each reheat treated determined from the 0.2 percent offset. cylinder must subsequently pass all the (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- prescribed tests. Repair by welding is urement, the initial strain must be set not authorized. with the specimen under a stress of (m) Markings. Marking must be done 12,000 p.s.i. and the strain indicator by stamping into the metal of the cyl- reading set at the calculated cor- inder. All markings must be legible and responding strain. located on a shoulder. (iv) The cross-head speed of the test- (n) Inspector’s report. In addition to ing machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- minute during the determination of tor’s report for the physical test re- yield strength. port, must indicate the average value (4) Each impact specimen must be for three specimens and the minimum Charpy V-notch type size 10 mm × 10 value for one specimen for each lot mm taken in accordance with para- number. graph 11 of ASTM A 333 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). When a reduced [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as size specimen is used, it must be the amended at 66 FR 45385, 43588, Aug. 28, 2001; largest size obtainable. 67 FR 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 48571, Aug. 14, 2003; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003] (k) Acceptable physical test results. Re- sults of physical tests must conform to § 178.46 Specification 3AL seamless the following: aluminum cylinders. (1) The tensile strength may not exceed 155,000 p.s.i. (a) Size and service pressure. A DOT (2) The elongation must be at least 16 3AL cylinder is a seamless aluminum percent for a two-inch gage length. cylinder with a maximum water capac- (3) The Charpy V-notch impact prop- ity of 1000 pounds and minimum service erties for the three impact specimens pressure of 150 psig. which must be tested at 0 °F may not (b) Authorized material and identifica- be less than the values shown as fol- tion of material. The material of con- lows: struction must meet the following conditions: Average value Minimum value (1) Starting stock must be cast stock Size of specimen for acceptance (1 specimen only (mm) (3 specimens) of the 3) or traceable to cast stock. (2) Material with seams, cracks, lam- 10.0 × 10.0 ...... 25.0 ft. lbs...... 20.0 ft. lbs. inations, or other defects likely to 10.0 × 7.5 ...... 21.0 ft. lbs...... 17.0 ft. lbs. 10.0 × 5.0 ...... 17.0 ft. lbs...... 14.0 ft. lbs. weaken the finished cylinder may not be used. (4) After the final heat treatment, (3) Material must be identified by a each vessel must be hardness tested on suitable method that will identify the the cylindrical section. The tensile alloy, the aluminum producer’s cast strength equivalent of the hardness number, the solution heat treat batch number obtained may not be more than number and the lot number. 165,000 p.s.i. (Rc 36). When the result of (4) The material must be of uniform a hardness test exceeds the maximum quality. Only the following heat treat- permitted, two or more retests may be able aluminum alloys in table 1 and 2 made; however, the hardness number are permitted as follows:

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00048 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.46

TABLE 1—HEAT OR CAST ANALYSIS FOR ALUMINUM; SIMILAR TO ‘‘ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION’’1 ALLOY 6061 [CHEMICAL ANALYSIS IN WEIGHT PERCENT2]

Other Si Fe Cu Mn Mg Cr Zn Ti Pb Bi min/ max min/max max min/ min/max max max max max each total A1 max max max max

0.4/0.8 0.7 0.15/0.4 0.15 0.8/1.2 0.04/0.35 0.25 0.15 0.005 0.005 0.05 0.15 Bal. 1 The ‘‘Aluminum Association’’ refers to ‘‘Aluminum Standards and Data 1993’’, published by the Aluminum Association Inc. 2 Except for ‘‘Pb’’ and ‘‘Bi’’, the chemical composition corresponds with that of Table 1 of ASTM B 221 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) for Aluminum Association alloy 6061.

TABLE 2—MECHANICAL PROPERTY LIMITS

Tensile strength—PSI Elongation—percent Alloy and temper minimum for 2″ or Ultimate—minimum Yield—minimum 4D 1 size specimen

6061–T6 ...... 38,000 35,000 214

1 ‘‘D’’ represents specimen diameters. When the cylinder wall is greater than 3⁄16 inch thick, a retest without reheat treatment using the 4D size specimen is authorized if the test using the 2 inch size specimen fails to meet elongation requirements. 2 When cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16-inch thick, 10 percent elongation is authorized when using a 24t × 6t size test specimen.

(5) All starting stock must be 100 per- have a basic torispherical, hemi- cent ultrasonically inspected, along spherical, or ellipsoidal interior base the length at right angles to the cen- configuration where the dish radius is tral axis from two positions at 90° to no greater than 1.2 times the inside di- one another. The equipment and con- ameter of the shell. The knuckle radius tinuous scanning procedure must be ca- may not be less than 12 percent of the pable of detecting and rejecting inter- inside diameter of the shell. The inte- nal defects such as cracks which have rior base contour may deviate from the an ultrasonic response greater than true torispherical, hemispherical or el- that of a calibration block with a 5⁄64- lipsoidal configuration provided that— inch diameter flat bottomed hole. (i) Any areas of deviation are accom- (6) Cast stock must have uniform panied by an increase in base thick- equiaxed grain structure not to exceed ness; 500 microns maximum. (ii) All radii of merging surfaces are (7) Any starting stock not complying equal to or greater than the knuckle with the provisions of paragraphs (b)(1) radius; through (b)(6) of this section must be (iii) Each design has been qualified rejected. by successfully passing the cycling (c) Manufacture. Cylinders must be tests in this paragraph (c); and manufactured in accordance with the (iv) Detailed specifications of the following requirements: base design are available to the inspec- (1) Cylinder shells must be manufac- tor. tured by the backward extrusion meth- (3) For free standing cylinders, the od and have a cleanliness level ade- base thickness must be at least two quate to ensure proper inspection. No times the minimum wall thickness fissure or other defect is acceptable along the line of contact between the that is likely to weaken the finished cylinder base and the floor when the cylinder below the design strength re- cylinders are in the vertical position. quirements. A reasonably smooth and (4) Welding or brazing is prohibited. uniform surface finish is required. If (5) Each new design and any signifi- not originally free from such defects, cant change to any acceptable design the surface may be machined or other- must be qualified for production by wise conditioned to eliminate these de- testing prototype samples as follows: fects. (i) Three samples must be subjected (2) Thickness of the cylinder base to 100,000 pressure reversal cycles be- may not be less than the prescribed tween zero and service pressure or minimum wall thickness of the cylin- 10,000 pressure reversal cycles between drical shell. The cylinder base must zero and test pressure, at a rate not in

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00049 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.46 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

excess of 10 cycles per minute without times the average of the diameters of failure. the two openings. (ii) Three samples must be pressur- (4) All openings must be circular. ized to destruction and failure may not (5) All openings must be threaded. occur at less than 2.5 times the marked Threads must comply with the fol- cylinder service pressure. Each cyl- lowing: inder must remain in one piece. Fail- (i) Each thread must be clean cut, ure must initiate in the cylinder side- even, without checks, and to gauge. wall in a longitudinal direction. Rate (ii) Taper threads, when used, must of pressurization may not exceed 200 conform to one of the following: psig per second. (A) American Standard Pipe Thread (6) In this specification ‘‘significant (NPT) type, conforming to the require- change’’ means a 10 percent or greater ments of NBS Handbook H–28 (IBR, see change in cylinder wall thickness, serv- § 171.7 of this subchapter); ice pressure, or diameter; a 30 percent (B) National Gas Taper Thread (NGT) or greater change in water capacity or type, conforming to the requirements base thickness; any change in material; of NBS Handbook H–28; or over 100 percent increase in size of (C) Other taper threads conforming openings; or any change in the number to other standards may be used proof openings. vided the length is not less than that (d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall specified for NPT threads. thickness must be such that the wall (iii) Straight threads, when used, stress at the minimum specified test must conform to one of the following: pressure will not exceed 80 percent of (A) National Gas Straight Thread the minimum yield strength nor exceed (NGS) type, conforming to the require- 67 percent of the minimum ultimate ments of NBS Handbook H–28; tensile strength as verified by physical (B) Unified Thread (UN) type, con- tests in paragraph (i) of this section. forming to the requirements of NBS The minimum wall thickness for any Handbook H–28; cylinder with an outside diameter (C) Controlled Radius Root Thread greater than 5 inches must be 0.125 (UN) type, conforming to the require- inch. Calculations must be made by the ments of NBS Handbook H–28; or following formula: (D) Other straight threads conforming to other recognized standards S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) may be used provided that the require- Where: ments in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of this S = Wall stress in psi; section are met. P = Prescribed minimum test pressure in (iv) All straight threads must have at psig (see paragraph (g) of this section); least 6 engaged threads, a tight fit, and D = Outside diameter in inches; and a factor of safety in shear of at least 10 d = Inside diameter in inches. at the test pressure of the cylinder. Shear stress must be calculated by (e) Openings. Openings must comply using the appropriate thread shear area with the following requirements: in accordance with NBS Handbook H– (1) Openings are permitted in heads 28. only. (f) Heat treatment. Prior to any test, (2) The size of any centered opening all cylinders must be subjected to a so- in a head may not exceed one-half the lution heat treatment and aging treat- outside diameter of the cylinder. ment appropriate for the aluminum (3) Other openings are permitted in alloy used. the head of a cylinder if: (g) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder (i) Each opening does not exceed 2.625 must be subjected to an internal test inches in diameter, or one-half the out- pressure using the water jacket equip- side diameter of the cylinder; which- ment and method or other suitable ever is less; equipment and method and comply (ii) Each opening is separated from with the following requirements: each other by a ligament; and (1) The testing apparatus must be op- (iii) Each ligament which separates erated in a manner so as to obtain ac- two openings must be at least three curate data. The pressure gauge used

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00050 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.46

must permit reading to an accuracy of wall thickness is authorized to qualify one percent. The expansion gauge must lots that fail the flattening test of this permit reading the total expansion to section without reheat treatment. If an accuracy of either one percent or 0.1 used, this test must be performed on cubic centimeter. two samples from one cylinder taken (2) The test pressure must be main- at random out of each lot of 200 cyl- tained for a sufficient period of time to inders or less. assure complete expansion of the cyl- (3) Each test cylinder must withstand inder. In no case may the pressure be flattening to nine times the wall thick- held less than 30 seconds. If, due to fail- ness without cracking. When the alter- ure of the test apparatus, the required nate bend test is used, the test speci- test pressure cannot be maintained, mens must remain uncracked when the test may be repeated at a pressure bent inward around a mandrel in the increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, direction of curvature of the cylinder whichever is lower. If the test appa- wall until the interior edges are at a ratus again fails to maintain the test distance apart not greater than the di- pressure, the cylinder being tested ameter of the mandrel. must be rejected. Any internal pressure applied to the cylinder before any offi- (i) Mechanical properties test. Two test cial test may not exceed 90 percent of specimens cut from one cylinder rep- the test pressure. resenting each lot of 200 cylinders or (3) The minimum test pressure is the less must be subjected to the mechan- greatest of the following: ical properties test, as follows: (i) 450 psig regardless of service pres- (1) The results of the test must con- sure; form to at least the minimum accept- (ii) Two times the service pressure able mechanical property limits for for cylinders having service pressure aluminum alloys as specified in para- less than 500 psig; or graph (b) of this section. (iii) Five-thirds times the service (2) Specimens must be 4D bar or pressure for cylinders having a service gauge length 2 inches with width not pressure of at least 500 psig. over 11⁄2 inch taken in the direction of (4) Permanent volumetric expansion extrusion approximately 180° from each may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- other; provided that gauge length at umetric expansion at test pressure. least 24 times thickness with width not (h) Flattening test. One cylinder taken over 6 times thickness is authorized, at random out of each lot must be sub- when cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16 inch jected to a flattening test as follows: thick. The specimen, exclusive of grip (1) The test must be between knife ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends edges, wedge shaped, having a 60° in- may be flattened to within one inch of cluded angle, and rounded in accord- each end of the reduced section. When ance with the following table. The lon- the size of the cylinder does not permit gitudinal axis of the cylinder must be securing straight specimens, the speci- ° at an angle 90 to the knife edges dur- mens may be taken in any location or ing the test. The flattening test table direction and may be straightened or is as follows: flattened cold by pressure only, not by blows. When such specimens are used, TABLE 3—FLATTENING TEST TABLE the inspector’s report must show that Radius the specimens were so taken and pre- Cylinder wall thickness in inches in inches pared. Heating of specimens for any purpose is forbidden. Under .150 ...... 500 (3) The yield strength in tension .150 to .249 ...... 875 .250 to .349 ...... 1 .500 must be the stress corresponding to a .350 to .449 ...... 2 .125 permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the .450 to .549 ...... 2 .750 gauge length. .550 to .649 ...... 3 .500 .650 to .749 ...... 4 .125 (i) The yield strength must be determined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or (2) An alternate bend test in accord- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as ance with ASTM E 290 using a mandrel prescribed in ASTM B 557 (IBR, see diameter not more than 6 times the § 171.7 of this subchapter).

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00051 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.47 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(ii) In using the ‘‘extension under (3) The inspector must also deter- load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- mine that each cylinder complies with tension under load’’) corresponding to this specification by: the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- (i) Selecting the samples for check manent strain occurs may be deter- analyses performed by other than the mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- material producer; culating the elastic extension of the (ii) Verifying that the prescribed gauge length under appropriate load minimum thickness was met by meas- and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the uring or witnessing the measurement gauge length. Elastic extension cal- of the wall thickness; and culations must be based on an elastic (iii) Verifying that the identification modulus of 10,000,000 psi. In the event of material is proper. of controversy, the entire stress-strain (4) Prior to initial production of any diagram must be plotted and the yield design or design change, verify that the strength determined from the 0.2 per- design qualification tests prescribed in cent offset. paragraph (c)(6) of this section have (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- been performed with acceptable re- urement, the initial strain must be set sults. while the specimen is under a stress of (l) Definitions. (1) In this specifica- 6,000 psi, the strain indicator reading tion, a ‘‘lot’’ means a group of cyl- being set at the calculated cor- inders successively produced having responding strain. the same: (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing (i) Size and configuration; machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (ii) Specified material of construc- minute during yield strength deter- tion; mination. (iii) Process of manufacture and heat (j) Rejected cylinder. Reheat treat- treatment; ment of rejected cylinders is authorized one time. Subsequent thereto, cyl- (iv) Equipment of manufacture and inders must pass all prescribed tests to heat treatment; and be acceptable. (v) Conditions of time, temperature (k) Duties of inspector. In addition to and atmosphere during heat treatment. the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- (2) In no case may the lot size exceed tor shall: 200 cylinders, but any cylinder proc- (1) Verify compliance with the provi- essed for use in the required destruc- sions of paragraph (b) of this section tive physical testing need not be count- by: ed as being one of the 200. (i) Performing or witnessing the per- (m) Inspector’s report. In addition to formance of the chemical analyses on the information required by § 178.35, the each melt or cast lot or other unit of record of chemical analyses must also starting material; or include the alloy designation, and ap- (ii) Obtaining a certified chemical plicable information on iron, titanium, analysis from the material or cylinder zinc, magnesium and any other appli- manufacturer for each melt, or cast of cable element used in the construction material; or of the cylinder. (iii) Obtaining a certified check anal- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as ysis on one cylinder out of each lot of amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 200 cylinders or less, if a certificate 51652, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75749, Dec. 31, 2003; containing data to indicate compliance 77 FR 60943, Oct. 5, 2012] with the material specification is obtained. § 178.47 Specification 4DS welded (2) The inspector must verify ultra- stainless steel cylinders for aircraft sonic inspection of all material by in- use. spection or by obtaining the material (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A producer’s certificate of ultrasonic in- DOT 4DS cylinder is either a welded spection. Ultrasonic inspection must be stainless steel sphere (two seamless performed or verified as having been hemispheres) or circumferentially performed in accordance with para- welded cylinder both with a water ca- graph (b)(5) of this section. pacity of not over 100 pounds and a

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00052 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.47

service pressure of at least 500 but not specified range, is acceptable, if satis- over 900 psig. factory in all other respects, provided (b) Steel. Types 304, 321 and 347 stain- the tolerances shown in table 2 in this less steel are authorized with proper paragraph (b) are not exceeded, except welding procedure. A heat of steel as approved by Associate Adminis- made under the specifications in table trator. The following chemical anal- 1 in this paragraph (b), check chemical yses are authorized: analysis of which is slightly out of the

TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS

Stainless steels

304 (percent) 321 (percent) 347 (percent)

Carbon (max)...... 0.08 0.08 0.08 Manganese (max)...... 2.00 2.00 2.00 Phosphorus (max)...... 030 .030 .030 Sulphur (max)...... 030 .030 .030 Silicon (max) ...... 75 .75 .75 Nickel ...... 8.0/11.0 9.0/13.0 9.0/13.0 Chromium ...... 18.0/20.0 17.0/20.0 17.0/20.0 Molybdenum Titanium ...... (1) Columbium ...... (2) 1 Titanium may not be more than 5C and not more than 0.60%. 2 Columbium may not be less than 10C and not more than 1.0%.

TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

Tolerance (percent) over the maximum limit or Element Limit or maximum specified (percent) under the minimum limit Under min- Over maximum limit imum limit

Carbon ...... To 0.15 incl ...... 0.01 0.01 Manganese ...... Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl ...... 0.05 0.05 Phosphorus1 ...... All ranges ...... 01 Sulphur ...... All ranges ...... 01 Silicon ...... Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl ...... 05 .05 Nickel ...... Over 5.30 to 10.00 incl ...... 10 .10 Over 10.00 to 14.00 incl ...... 15 .15 Chromium ...... Over 15.00 to 20.00 incl ...... 20 .20 Titanium ...... All ranges ...... 05 .05 Columbium ...... All ranges ...... 05 .05 1Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.

(c) Identification of material. Materials butt type and means must be provided must be identified by any suitable for accomplishing complete penetra- method. tion of the joint. (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (e) Attachments. Attachments to the manufactured using equipment and container are authorized by fusion processes adequate to ensure that each welding provided that such attach- cylinder produced conforms to the re- ments are made of weldable stainless quirements of this subpart. No defect is steel in accordance with paragraph (b) permitted that is likely to weaken the of this section. finished cylinder appreciably, a reasonably smooth and uniform surface finish (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall is required. No abrupt change in wall thickness must be such that the wall thickness is permitted. Welding proce- stress at the minimum specified test dures and operators must be qualified pressure may not be over 60,000 psig. A in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 minimum wall thickness of 0.040 inch is (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). All required for any diameter container. seams of the sphere or cylinder must be Calculations must be made by the fol- fusion welded. Seams must be of the lowing formulas:

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00053 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.47 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(1) Calculation for sphere must be but not more than 110 percent, of the made by the formula: test pressure and maintained at this pressure for a minimum of 3 minutes. S = PD / 4tE Total and permanent expansion must Where: be recorded and included in the inspec- S = Wall stress in psi; tor’s report. P = Test pressure prescribed for water jacket (j) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder test, i.e., at least two times service pres- must successfully withstand a hydro- sure, in psig; static test as follows: D = Outside diameter in inches; (1) The test must be by water-jacket, t = Minimum wall thickness in inches; E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency operated so as to obtain accurate data. factor which must be applied in the girth The pressure gauge must permit read- weld area and heat zones which zone ing to an accuracy of 1 percent. The ex- must extend a distance of 6 times wall pansion gauge must permit reading of thickness from center of weld); total expansion to an accuracy either E = 1.0 (for all other areas). of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. (2) Calculation for a cylinder must be (2) Pressure must be maintained for made by the formula: at least 30 seconds and sufficiently longer to ensure complete expansion. 2 2 2 ¥ 2 S = [P(1.3D + 0.4d )] / (D d ) If, due to failure of the test apparatus, Where: the test pressure cannot be main- S = Wall stress in psi; tained, the test may be repeated at a P = Test pressure prescribed for water jacket pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 test, i.e., at least two times service pres- psig, whichever is the lower. sure, in psig; (3) Permanent volumetric expansion D = Outside diameter in inches; may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- d = Inside diameter in inches. umetric expansion at test pressure. (g) Heat treatment. The seamless (4) Each container must be tested to hemispheres and cylinders may be at least 2 times service pressure. stress relieved or annealed for forming. (5) Container must then be inspected. Welded container must be stress re- Any wall thickness lower than that relieved at a temperature of 775 °F ±25° quired by paragraph (f) of this section after process treatment and before hy- must be cause for rejection. Bulges and drostatic test. cracks must be cause for rejection. (h) Openings in container. Openings Welded joint defects exceeding require- must comply with the following: ments of paragraph (k) of this section (1) Each opening in the container must be cause for rejection. must be provided with a fitting, boss or (k) Radiographic inspection. Radio- pad of weldable stainless steel securely graphic inspection is required on all attached to the container by fusion welded joints which are subjected to in- welding. ternal pressure, except that at the dis- (2) Attachments to a fitting, boss, or cretion of the disinterested inspector, pad must be adequate to prevent leak- openings less than 25 percent of the age. Threads must comply with the fol- container diameter need not be sub- lowing: jected to radiographic inspection. Evi- (i) Threads must be clean cut, even, dence of any defects likely to seriously without checks, and tapped to gauge. weaken the container is cause for re- (ii) Taper threads to be of length not jection. Radiographic inspection must less than as specified for American be performed subsequent to the hydro- Standard taper pipe threads. static test. (iii) Straight threads having at least (l) Burst test. One container taken at 4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and random out of 200 or less must be calculated shear strength at least 10 hydrostatically tested to destruction. times the test pressure of the con- Rupture pressure must be included as tainer; gaskets required, adequate to part of the inspector’s report. prevent leakage. (m) Flattening test. A flattening test (i) Process treatment. Each container must be performed as follows: must be hydraulically pressurized in a (1) For spheres the test must be at water jacket to at least 100 percent, the weld between parallel steel plates

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00054 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.50

on a press with welded seam at right (c) Identification of material. Material angles to the plates. Test one sphere must be identified by any suitable taken at random out of each lot of 200 method except that plates and billets or less after the hydrostatic test. Any for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked projecting appurtenances may be cut with the heat number. off (by mechanical means only) prior to (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be crushing. manufactured using equipment and (2) For cylinders the test must be be- processes adequate to ensure that each tween knife edges, wedge shaped, 60° cylinder produced conforms to the re- angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch radius. Test quirements of this subpart. No defect is one cylinder taken at random out of permitted that is likely to weaken the each lot of 200 or less, after the hydro- finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- static test. sonably smooth and uniform surface (n) Acceptable results for flattening and finish is required. Exposed bottom burst tests. Acceptable results for flat- welds on cylinders over 18 inches long tening and burst tests are as follows: must be protected by footrings. Weld- (1) Flattening required to 50 percent ing procedures and operators must be of the original outside diameter with- qualified in accordance with CGA Pam- out cracking. phlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- (2) Burst pressure must be at least 3 chapter). Seams must be made as fol- times the service pressure. lows: (o) Rejected containers. Repair of weld- (1) Welded or brazed circumferential ed seams by welding prior to process seams. Heads attached by brazing must treatment is authorized. Subsequent have a driving fit with the shell, unless thereto, containers must be heat treat- the shell is crimped, swedged, or curled ed and pass all prescribed tests. over the skirt or flange of the head, (p) Duties of inspector. In addition to and be thoroughly brazed until com- the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- plete penetration by the brazing mate- tor must verify that all tests are con- rial of the brazed joint is secured. ducted at temperatures between 60 °F Depth of brazing from end of shell must and 90 °F. be at least four times the thickness of (q) Marking. Markings must be shell metal. stamped plainly and permanently on a (2) Longitudinal seams in shells. Longi- permanent attachment or on a metal tudinal seams must be forged lap weld- nameplate permanently secured to the ed, by copper brazing, by copper alloy container by means other than soft sol- brazing, or by silver alloy brazing. Cop- der. per alloy composition must be: Copper, [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as 95 percent minimum; Silicon, 1.5 per- amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; cent to 3.85 percent; Manganese, 0.25 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, percent to 1.10 percent. The melting 2003] point of the silver alloy brazing material must be in excess of 1000 °F. When § 178.50 Specification 4B welded or brazed, the plate edge must be lapped brazed steel cylinders. at least eight times the thickness of (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A plate, laps being held in position, sub- DOT 4B is a welded or brazed steel cyl- stantially metal to metal, by riveting inder with longitudinal seams that are or electric spot-welding; brazing must forged lap-welded or brazed and with be done by using a suitable flux and by water capacity (nominal) not over 1,000 placing brazing material on one side of pounds and a service pressure of at seam and applying heat until this ma- least 150 but not over 500 psig. Cyl- terial shows uniformly along the seam inders closed in by spinning process are of the other side. not authorized. (e) Welding or brazing. Only the at- (b) Steel. Open-hearth, electric or tachment of neckrings, footrings, han- basic oxygen process steel of uniform dles, bosses, pads, and valve protection quality must be used. Content percent rings to the tops and bottoms of cyl- may not exceed the following: Carbon, inders by welding or brazing is author- 0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050. ized. Such attachments and the portion

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00055 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.50 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

of the container to which they are at- (ii) Taper threads to be of length not tached must be made of weldable steel, less than as specified for American the carbon content of which may not Standard taper pipe threads. exceed 0.25 percent except in the case (iii) Straight threads, having at least of 4130X steel which may be used with 4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and proper welding procedure. calculated shear strength at least 10 (f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness times the test pressure of the cylinder; of the cylinder must comply with the gaskets required, adequate to prevent following requirements: leakage. (1) For cylinders with outside diame- (iv) A brass fitting may be brazed to ters over 6 inches the minimum wall the steel boss or flange on cylinders thickness must be 0.090 inch. In any used as component parts of hand fire case, the minimum wall thickness extinguishers. must be such that calculated wall (2) The closure of a fitting, boss, or stress at minimum test pressure (para- pad must be adequate to prevent leak- graph (i)(4) of this section) may not ex- age. ceed the following values: (i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must (i) 24,000 psi for cylinders without withstand a hydrostatic test as follows: longitudinal seam. (1) The test must be by water-jacket, (ii) 22,800 psig for cylinders having or other suitable method, operated so copper brazed or silver alloy brazed as to obtain accurate data. The pres- longitudinal seam. sure gauge must permit reading to an (iii) 18,000 psi for cylinders having accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion forged lapped welded longitudinal gauge must permit reading of total ex- seam. pansion to an accuracy either of 1 per- (2) Calculation must be made by the cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. formula: (2) Pressure must be maintained for at least 30 seconds and sufficiently S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) longer to ensure complete expansion. Any internal pressure applied after Where: heat-treatment and previous to the of- S = wall stress in psi; ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of P = minimum test pressure prescribed for the test pressure. If, due to failure of water jacket test or 450 psig whichever is the greater; the test apparatus, the test pressure D = outside diameter in inches; cannot be maintained, the test may be d = inside diameter in inches. repeated at a pressure increased by 10 percent or 100 psig, whichever is the (g) Heat treatment. Cylinder body and lower. heads, formed by drawing or pressing, (3) Permanent volumetric expansion must be uniformly and properly heat may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- treated prior to tests. umetric expansion at test pressure. (h) Opening in cylinders. Openings in (4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- cylinders must conform to the follows: lowing: (i) At least one cylinder selected at (1) Each opening in cylinders, except random out of each lot of 200 or less those for safety devices, must be pro- must be tested as outlined in para- vided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se- graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec- curely attached to cylinder by brazing tion to at least two times service pres- or by welding or by threads. Fitting, sure. boss, or pad must be of steel suitable (ii) All cylinders not tested as out- for the method of attachment em- lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec- ployed, and which need not be identi- tion must be examined under pressure fied or verified as to analysis except of at least two times service pressure that if attachment is by welding, car- and show no defect. bon content may not exceed 0.25 per- (j) Flattening test. After the hydro- cent. If threads are used, they must static test, a flattening test must be comply with the following: performed on one cylinder taken at (i) Threads must be clean cut, even random out or each lot of 200 or less, by without checks, and tapped to gauge. placing the cylinder between wedge

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00056 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.50

shaped knife edges having a 60° in- prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 cluded angle, rounded to 1⁄2-inch radius. of this subchapter). The longitudinal axis of the cylinder (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under must be at a 90-degree angle to knife load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- edges during the test. For lots of 30 or tension under load’’) corresponding to less, flattening tests are authorized to the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- be made on a ring at least 8 inches long manent strain occurs may be deter- cut from each cylinder and subjected to mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- same heat treatment as the finished culating the elastic extension of the cylinder. gauge length under appropriate load (k) Physical test. A physical test must and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the be conducted to determine yield gauge length. Elastic extension cal- strength, tensile strength, elongation, culations must be based on an elastic and reduction of area of material as modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of follows: controversy, the entire stress-strain (1) The test is required on 2 speci- diagram must be plotted and the yield mens cut from 1 cylinder, or part strength determined from the 0.2 per- thereof heat-treated as required, taken cent offset. at random out of each lot of 200 or less. (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- For lots of 30 or less, physical tests are urement, the initial strain must be set authorized to be made on a ring at while the specimen is under a stress of least 8 inches long cut from each cyl- 12,000 psi, and strain indicator reading inder and subjected to same heat treat- must be set at the calculated cor- ment as the finished cylinder. responding strain. (2) Specimens must conform to the (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing following: machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a minute during yield strength deter- width of not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge mination. length of 2 inches with a width of not (l) Acceptable results for physical and over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at flattening tests. Either of the following least 24 times the thickness with a is an acceptable result: width not over 6 times the thickness is (1) An elongation of at least 40 per- authorized when a cylinder wall is not cent for a 2-inch gauge length or at over 3⁄16 inch thick. least 20 percent in other cases and (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip yield strength not over 73 percent of ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends tensile strength. In this instance, a may be flattened to within one inch of flattening test is not required. each end of the reduced section. (2) When cylinders are constructed of (iii) When size of cylinder does not lap welded pipe, flattening test is re- permit securing straight specimens, quired, without cracking, to 6 times the specimens may be taken in any lo- the wall thickness. In such case, the cation or direction and may be rings (crop ends) cut from each end of straightened or flattened cold, by pres- pipe, must be tested with the weld 45° sure only, not by blows. When speci- or less from the point of greatest mens are so taken and prepared, the in- stress. If a ring fails, another from the spector’s report must show in connec- same end of pipe may be tested. tion with record of physical tests de- (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- tailed information in regard to such ment is authorized for rejected cyl- specimens. inder. Subsequent thereto, cylinders (iv) Heating of a specimen for any must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- purpose is not authorized. ceptable. Repair of brazed seams by (3) The yield strength in tension brazing and welded seams by welding is must be the stress corresponding to a authorized. permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the (n) Markings. Markings must be gauge length. The following conditions stamped plainly and permanently in apply: any of the following locations on the (i) The yield strength must be deter- cylinder: mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or (1) On shoulders and top heads when the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as they are not less than 0.087-inch thick.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00057 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.51 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(2) On side wall adjacent to top head (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be for side walls which are not less than manufactured using equipment and 0.090 inch thick. processes adequate to ensure that each (3) On a cylindrical portion of the cylinder produced conforms to the re- shell which extends beyond the requirements of this subpart. No defect is cessed bottom of the cylinder, consti- permitted that is likely to weaken the tuting an integral and non-pressure finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- part of the cylinder. sonably smooth and uniform surface (4) On a metal plate attached to the finish is required. Exposed bottom top of the cylinder or permanent part welds on cylinders over 18 inches long thereof; sufficient space must be left on must be protected by footrings. the plate to provide for stamping at (1) Seams must be made as follows: least six retest dates; the plate must be (i) Minimum thickness of heads and at least 1⁄16-inch thick and must be at- bottoms must be not less than 90 per- tached by welding, or by brazing. The cent of the required thickness of the brazing rod must melt at a tempera- side wall. ture of 1100 °F. Welding or brazing (ii) Circumferential seams must be must be along all the edges of the made by welding or by brazing. Heads plate. must be attached by brazing and must (5) On the neck, neckring, valve boss, have a driving fit with the shell, unless valve protection sleeve, or similar part the shell is crimped, swedged or curled permanently attached to the top of the over the skirt or flange of the head and cylinder. must be thoroughly brazed until com- (6) On the footring permanently at- plete penetration by the brazing mate- tached to the cylinder, provided the rial of the brazed joint is secured. water capacity of the cylinder does not Depth of brazing from end of the shell exceed 25 pounds. must be at least four times the thickness of shell metal. [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as (iii) Longitudinal seams in shells amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR must be made by copper brazing, cop- 45385, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, per alloy brazing, or by silver alloy 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003] brazing. Copper alloy composition § 178.51 Specification 4BA welded or must be: Copper 95 percent minimum, brazed steel cylinders. Silicon 1.5 percent to 3.85 percent, Man- ganese 0.25 percent to 1.10 percent. The (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A melting point of the silver alloy braz- DOT 4BA cylinder is a cylinder, either ing material must be in excess of 1,000 spherical or cylindrical in shape, with °F. The plate edge must be lapped at a water capacity of 1,000 pounds or less least eight times the thickness of and a service pressure of at least 225 plate, laps being held in position, sub- and not over 500 psig. Closures made by stantially metal to metal, by riveting the spinning process are not author- or by electric spot-welding. Brazing ized. must be done by using a suitable flux (1) Spherical type cylinders must be and by placing brazing material on one made from two seamless hemispheres side of seam and applying heat until joined by the welding of one circum- this material shows uniformly along ferential seam. the seam of the other side. Strength of (2) Cylindrical type cylinders must be longitudinal seam: Copper brazed lon- of circumferentially welded or brazed gitudinal seam must have strength at construction. least 3⁄2 times the strength of the steel (b) Steel. The steel used in the con- wall. struction of the cylinder must be as (2) Welding procedures and operators specified in table 1 of appendix A to must be qualified in accordance with this part. CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of (c) Identification of material. Material this subchapter). must be identified by any suitable (e) Welding and brazing. Only the method except that plates and billets welding or brazing of neckrings, for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked footrings, handles, bosses, pads, and with the heat number. valve protection rings to the tops and

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00058 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.51

bottoms of cylinders is authorized. zone must extend a distance of 6 times Provided that such attachments and wall thickness from center line of weld); the portion of the container to which E = 1.0 (for all other areas). they are attached are made of weldable (4) For a cylinder with a wall thick- steel, the carbon content of which may ness less than 0.100 inch, the ratio of not exceed 0.25 percent except in the tangential length to outside diameter case of 4130 × steel which may be used may not exceed 4.1. with proper welding procedure. (g) Heat treatment. Cylinders must be (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall heat treated in accordance with the thickness of the cylinder must meet following requirements: the following conditions: (1) Each cylinder must be uniformly (1) For any cylinder with an outside and properly heat treated prior to test diameter of greater than 6 inches, the by the applicable method shown in minimum wall thickness is 0.078 inch. table 1 of appendix A to this part. Heat In any case the minimum wall thick- treatment must be accomplished after ness must be such that the calculated all forming and welding operations, ex- wall stress at the minimum test pres- cept that when brazed joints are used, sure may not exceed the lesser value of heat treatment must follow any form- any of the following: ing and welding operations, but may be (i) The value shown in table 1 of ap- done before, during or after the brazing pendix A to this part, for the particular operations. material under consideration; (2) Heat treatment is not required (ii) One-half of the minimum tensile after the welding or brazing of weldable strength of the material determined as low carbon parts to attachments of required in paragraph (j) of this sec- similar material which have been pre- tion; viously welded or brazed to the top or (iii) 35,000 psi; or bottom of cylinders and properly heat (iv) Further provided that wall stress treated, provided such subsequent for cylinders having copper brazed lon- welding or brazing does not produce a gitudinal seams may not exceed 95 per- temperature in excess of 400 °F in any cent of any of the above values. Meas- part of the top or bottom material. ured wall thickness may not include (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in galvanizing or other protective coat- cylinders must comply with the fol- ing. lowing requirements: (2) Cylinders that are cylindrical in (1) Any opening must be placed on shape must have the wall stress cal- other than a cylindrical surface. culated by the formula: (2) Each opening in a spherical type S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) cylinder must be provided with a fitting, boss, or pad of weldable steel se- Where: curely attached to the container by fu- S = wall stress in psi; sion welding. P = minimum test pressure prescribed for (3) Each opening in a cylindrical type water jacket test; cylinder must be provided with a fit- D = outside diameter in inches; d = inside diameter in inches. ting, boss, or pad, securely attached to container by brazing or by welding. (3) Cylinders that are spherical in (4) If threads are used, they must shape must have the wall stress cal- comply with the following: culated by the formula: (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even, S = PD / 4tE without checks and tapped to gauge. (ii) Taper threads must be of a length Where: not less than that specified for Amer- S = wall stress in psi; ican Standard taper pipe threads. P = minimum test pressure prescribed for (iii) Straight threads, having at least water jacket test; D = outside diameter in inches; 4 engaged threads, must have a tight t = minimum wall thickness in inches; fit and a calculated shear strength of E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency at least 10 times the test pressure of factor which must be applied in the girth the cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to pre- weld area and heat affected zones which vent leakage, are required.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00059 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.51 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at must successfully withstand a hydro- least 24 times the thickness with a static test, as follows: width not over 6 times the thickness is (1) The test must be by water jacket, authorized when a cylinder wall is not or other suitable method, operated so over 3⁄16 inch thick. as to obtain accurate data. A pressure (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip gauge must permit reading to an accu- ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends racy of 1 percent. An expansion gauge may be flattened to within one inch of must permit reading of total expansion each end of the reduced section. to an accuracy of either 1 percent or 0.1 (iii) When size of the cylinder does cubic centimeter. not permit securing straight speci- (2) Pressure must be maintained for mens, the specimens may be taken in at least 30 seconds and sufficiently any location or direction and may be longer to ensure complete expansion. straightened or flattened cold, by pres- Any internal pressure applied after sure only, not by blows. When speci- heat treatment and previous to the of- mens are so taken and prepared, the in- ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of spector’s report must show in connec- the test pressure. tion with record of physical tests de- (3) Permanent volumetric expansion tailed information in regard to such may not exceed 10 percent of the total specimens. volumetric expansion at test pressure. (iv) Heating of a specimen for any (4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- purpose is not authorized. lows: (i) At least one cylinder selected at (3) The yield strength in tension random out of each lot of 200 or less must be the stress corresponding to a must be tested as outlined in para- permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec- gauge length. The following conditions tion to at least two times service pres- apply: sure. (i) The yield strength must be deter- (ii) All cylinders not tested as out- mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as tion must be examined under pressure prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 of at least two times service pressure of this subchapter). and show no defect. (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under (j) Physical test. A physical test must load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- be conducted to determine yield tension under load’’), corresponding to strength, tensile strength, elongation, the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- and reduction of area of material, as manent strain occurs may be deter- follows: mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- (1) The test is required on 2 speci- culating the elastic extension of the mens cut from one cylinder or part gauge length under appropriate load thereof having passed the hydrostatic and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the test and heat-treated as required, gauge length. Elastic extension cal- taken at random out of each lot of 200 culations must be based on an elastic or less. Physical tests for spheres are modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of required on 2 specimens cut from flat controversy, the entire stress-strain representative sample plates of the diagram must be plotted and the yield same heat taken at random from the strength determined from the 0.2 per- steel used to produce the spheres. This cent offset. flat steel from which 2 specimens are (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- to be cut must receive the same heat urement, the initial strain reference treatment as the spheres themselves. must be set while the specimen is Sample plates must be taken from each under a stress of 12,000 psi, and the lot of 200 or less spheres. strain indicator reading must be set at (2) Specimens must conform to the the calculated corresponding strain. following: (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per width not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge minute during yield strength deter- length of 2 inches with a width not mination.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00060 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.53

(k) Elongation. Physical test speci- psig, as provided in paragraph (k) of mens must show at least a 40 percent this section. elongation for a 2-inch gauge length or (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- at least 20 percent in other cases. Ex- ment is authorized for rejected cyl- cept that these elongation percentages inders. Subsequent thereto, cylinders may be reduced numerically by 2 for 2- must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- inch specimens, and by 1 in other cases, ceptable. Repair of brazed seams by for each 7,500 psi increment of tensile brazing and welded seams by welding is strength above 50,000 psi to a maximum authorized. of four such increments. (n) Markings. Markings must be (l) Tests of welds. Except for brazed stamped plainly and permanently in seams, welds must be tested as follows: one of the following locations on the (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be cylinder: cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 (1) On shoulders and top heads not or less, or welded test plate. The weld- less than 0.087 inch thick. ed test plate must be of one of the (2) On side wall adjacent to top head heats in the lot of 200 or less which it for side walls not less than 0.090 inch represents, in the same condition and thick. (3) On a cylindrical portion of the approximately the same thickness as shell which extends beyond the re- the cylinder wall except that in no case cessed bottom of the cylinder consti- must it be of a lesser thickness than tuting an integral and non-pressure that required for a quarter size Charpy part of the cylinder. impact specimen. The weld must be (4) On a plate attached to the top of made by the same procedures and sub- the cylinder or permanent part thereof; jected to the same heat treatment as sufficient space must be left on the the major weld on the cylinder. The plate to provide for stamping at least specimen must be taken from across six retest dates; the plate must be at the major seam and must be prepared least 1⁄16 inch thick and must be at- and tested in accordance with and tached by welding, or by brazing at a must meet the requirements of CGA temperature of at least 1100 °F., Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this throughout all edges of the plate. subchapter). Should this specimen fail (5) On the neck, neckring, valve boss, to meet the requirements, specimens valve protection sleeve, or similar part may be taken from two additional cyl- permanently attached to the top of the inders or welded test plates from the cylinder. same lot and tested. If either of the lat- (6) On the footring permanently at- ter specimens fail to meet the require- tached to the cylinder, provided the ments, the entire lot represented must water capacity of the cylinder does not be rejected. exceed 25 pounds. (2) Guided bend test. A root bend test specimen must be cut from the cyl- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 4535, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR inder or welded test plate, used for the 16015, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; tensile test specified in paragraph (l)(1) 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003] of this section. Specimens must be taken from across the major seam and § 178.53 Specification 4D welded steel must be prepared and tested in accord- cylinders for aircraft use. ance with and must meet the require- (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3. DOT 4D cylinder is a welded steel (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This sphere (two seamless hemispheres) or test may be used and must be as re- circumferentially welded cylinder (two quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec- seamless drawn shells) with a water ca- imen must be bent until the elongation pacity not over 100 pounds and a serv- at the outer surface, adjacent to the ice pressure of at least 300 but not over root of the weld, between the lightly 500 psig. Cylinders closed in by spin- scribed gage lines a to b, must be at ning process are not authorized. least 20 percent, except that this per- (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel centage may be reduced for steels hav- of uniform and weldable quality must ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000 be used. Content may not exceed the

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00061 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.53 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

following: Carbon, 0.25; phosphorus, sociate Administrator. The following 0.045; sulphur, 0.050, except that the fol- chemical analyses are authorized: lowing steels commercially known as 4130X and Type 304, 316, 321, and 347 TABLE 1—4130X STEEL stainless steels may be used with prop- 4130X Percent er welding procedure. A heat of steel made under table 1 in this paragraph Carbon ...... 0.25/0.35. Manganese ...... 0.40/0.60. (b), check chemical analysis of which is Phosphorus ...... 0.04 max. slightly out of the specified range, is Sulphur ...... 0.05 max Silicon ...... 0.15/0.35. acceptable, if satisfactory in all other Chromium ...... 0.80/1.10. respects, provided the tolerances shown Molybdenum ...... 0.15/0.25. in table 2 in this paragraph (b) are not Zirconium ...... None. exceeded, except as approved by the As- Nickel ...... None.

TABLE 2—AUTHORIZED STAINLESS STEELS

Stainless steels 304 316 321 347 (percent) (percent) (percent) (percent)

Carbon (max)...... 0.08 0.08 0.08 0.08 Manganese (max) ...... 2.00 2.00 2.00 2.00 Phosphorus (max)...... 030 .045 .030 .030 Sulphur (max)...... 030 .030 .030 .030 Silicon (max) ...... 75 1.00 .75 .75 Nickel ...... 8.0/11.0 10.0/14.0 9.0/13.0 9.0/13.0 Chromium ...... 18.0/20.0 16.0/18.0 17.0/20.0 17.0/20.0 Molybdenum ...... 2.0/3.0 ...... Titanium ...... (1) ...... Columbium ...... (2) 1 Titanium may not be less than 5C and not more than 0.60%. 2 Columbium may not be less than 10C and not more than 1.0%.

TABLE 3—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES

Tolerance (percent) over the maximum limit or Limit or maximum specified under the minimum limit Element (percent) Under min- Over maximum limit imum limit

Carbon ...... To 0.15 incl ...... 0.01 0.01 Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl ...... 03 .04 Manganese ...... To 0.60 incl ...... 03 .03 Over 1.15 to 2.50 incl ...... 05 .05 Phosphorus 1 ...... All ranges ...... 01 Sulphur ...... All ranges ...... 01 Silicon ...... To 0.30 incl ...... 02 .03 Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl ...... 05 .05 Nickel ...... Over 5.30 to 10.00 incl ...... 10 .10 Over 10.00 to 14.00 incl ...... 15 .15 Chromium ...... To 0.90 incl ...... 03 .03 Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl ...... 05 .05 Over 15.00 to 20.00 incl ...... 20 .20 Molybdenum ...... To 0.20 incl ...... 01 .01 Over 0.20 to 0.40 incl ...... 02 .02 Over 1.75 to 3.0 incl ...... 10 .10 Titanium ...... All ranges ...... 05 .05 Columbium ...... All ranges ...... 05 .05 1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.

(c) Identification of material. Material (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be must be identified by any suitable manufactured using equipment and method except that plates and billets processes adequate to ensure that each for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked cylinder produced conforms to the re- with the heat number. quirements of this subpart. No defect is

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00062 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.53

permitted that is likely to weaken the threads are used, they must comply finished container appreciably. A rea- with the following: sonably smooth and uniform surface (i) Threads must be clean cut, even, finish is required. Welding procedures without checks, and tapped to gauge. and operators must be qualified in ac- (ii) Taper threads must be of a length cordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, not less than that specified for Amer- see § 171.7 of this subchapter). ican Standard taper pipe threads. (e) Wall thickness. The wall stress at (iii) Straight threads, having at least the minimum test pressure may not ex- 4 engaged threads, must have a tight ceed 24,000 psi, except where steels fit and calculated shear strength of at commercially known as 4130X, types least 10 times the test pressure of the 304, 316, 321, and 347 stainless steels are container. Gaskets, adequate to pre- used, stress at the test pressures may vent leakage, are required. not exceed 37,000 psi. The minimum (2) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad wall thickness for any container hav- must be adequate to prevent leakage. ing a capacity of 1,100 cubic inches or (h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder less is 0.04 inch. The minimum wall must successfully withstand a hydro- thickness for any container having a static test, as follows: capacity in excess of 1,100 cubic inches (1) The test must be by water-jacket, is 0.095 inch. Calculations must be done or other suitable method, operated so by the following: as to obtain accurate data. A pressure (1) Calculation for a ‘‘sphere’’ must gauge must permit a reading to an ac- be made by the formula: curacy of 1 percent. An expansion gauge must permit reading of total ex- S = PD / 4tE pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- Where: cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. S = wall stress in psi; (2) Pressure must be maintained for P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket at least 30 seconds and sufficiently test, i.e., at least two times service pres- longer to ensure complete expansion. sure, in psig; Any internal pressure applied after D = outside diameter in inches; heat-treatment and previous to the of- t = minimum wall thickness in inches; ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency factor which must be applied in the girth the test pressure. If, due to failure of weld area and heat affected zones which the test apparatus, the test pressure zone must extend a distance of 6 times cannot be maintained, the test may be wall thickness from center line of weld); repeated at a pressure increased by 10 E = 1.0 (for all other areas). percent or 100 psig, whichever is the (2) Calculation for a cylinder must be lower. made by the formula: (3) Permanent volumetric expansion may not exceed 10 percent of the total S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ dT12) volumetric expansion at test pressure. Where: (4) Containers must be tested as fol- S = wall stress in psi; lows: P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket (i) Each container to at least 2 times test, i.e., at least two times service pres- service pressure; or sure, in psig; (ii) One container out of each lot of D = outside diameter in inches; 200 or less to at least 3 times service d = inside diameter in inches. pressure. Others must be examined (f) Heat treatment. The completed cyl- under pressure of 2 times service pres- inders must be uniformly and properly sure and show no defects. heat-treated prior to tests. (i) Flattening test for spheres and cyl- (g) Openings in container. Openings in inders. Spheres and cylinders must be cylinders must comply with the fol- subjected to a flattening test as following: lows: (1) Each opening in the container, ex- (1) One sphere taken at random out cept those for safety devices, must be of each lot of 200 or less must be sub- provided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se- jected to a flattening test as follows: curely attached to the container by (i) The test must be performed after brazing or by welding or by threads. If the hydrostatic test.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00063 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.53 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(ii) The test must be between parallel (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip steel plates on a press with a welded ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends seam at right angles to the plates. Any may be flattened to within 1 inch of projecting appurtenances may be cut each end of the reduced section. Heat- off (by mechanical means only) prior to ing of the specimen for any purpose is crushing. not authorized. (2) One cylinder taken at random out (5) The yield strength in tension of each lot of 200 or less must be sub- must be the stress corresponding to a jected to a flattening test, as follows: permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the (i) The test must be performed after gauge length. The following conditions the hydrostatic test. apply: (ii) The test must be between knife (i) The yield strength must be deter- edges, wedge shaped, 60° angle, rounded mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or to 1⁄2 inch radius. For lots of 30 or less, the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as physical tests are authorized to be prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 made on a ring at least 8 inches long of this subchapter). cut from each cylinder and subjected to (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under the same heat treatment as the fin- load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- ished cylinder. tension under load’’) corresponding to (j) Physical test and specimens for the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- spheres and cylinders. Spheres and cyl- manent strain occurs may be deter- inders must be subjected to a physical mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- test as follows: culating the elastic extension of the (1) Physical test for spheres are re- gauge length under appropriate load quired on 2 specimens cut from a flat and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the representative sample plate of the gauge length. Elastic extension cal- same heat taken at random from the culations must be based on an elastic steel used to produce the sphere. This modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of flat steel from which the 2 specimens controversy, the entire stress-strain are to be cut must receive the same diagram must be plotted and the yield heat-treatment as the spheres them- strength determined from the 0.2 per- selves. Sample plates must be taken for cent offset. each lot of 200 or less spheres. (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- (2) Specimens for spheres must have urement, the initial strain must be set a gauge length 2 inches with a width while the specimen is under a stress of not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length 12,000 psi and the strain indicator read- at least 24 times the thickness with a ing being set at the calculated cor- width not over 6 times the thickness is responding strain. authorized when a wall is not over 3⁄16 (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing inch thick. machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (3) Physical test for cylinders is re- minute during yield strength deter- quired on 2 specimens cut from 1 cyl- mination. inder taken at random out of each lot (k) Acceptable results for physical and of 200 or less. For lots of 30 or less, flattening tests. Either of the following physical tests are authorized to be is an acceptable result: made on a ring at least 8 inches long (1) An elongation of at least 40 per- cut from each cylinder and subjected to cent for a 2 inch gauge length or at the same heat treatment as the fin- least 20 percent in other cases and ished cylinder. yield strength not over 73 percent of (4) Specimens for cylinders must con- tensile strength. In this instance, the form to the following: flattening test is not required. (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a (2) An elongation of at least 20 per- width not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge cent for a 2 inch gauge length or 10 per- length of 2 inches with a width not cent in other cases. Flattening is re- over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at quired to 50 percent of the original out- least 24 times the thickness with a side diameter without cracking. width not over 6 times the thickness is (l) Rejected cylinders. Reheat-treat- authorized when a cylinder wall is not ment is authorized for rejected cyl- over 3⁄16 inch thick. inders. Subsequent thereto, containers

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00064 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.55

must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- between the cylinder and the floor ceptable. Repair of welded seams by when the cylinder is in a vertical posi- welding prior to reheat-treatment is tion. Seams must conform to the fol- authorized. lowing: (m) Marking. Marking on each con- (1) Circumferential seams must be by tainer by stamping plainly and perma- brazing only. Heads must be attached nently are only authorized where the to shells by the lap brazing method and metal is at least 0.09 inch thick, or on must overlap not less than four times a metal nameplate permanently se- the wall thickness. Brazing material cured to the container by means other must have a melting point of not less than soft solder, or by means that than 1000 °F. Heads must have a driving would not reduce the wall thickness. fit with the shell unless the shell is [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as crimped, swedged, or curled over the amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; skirt or flange of the head and be thor- 67 FR 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, oughly brazed until complete penetra- 2003] tion of the joint by the brazing material is secured. Brazed joints may be re- § 178.55 Specification 4B240ET welded paired by brazing. or brazed cylinders. (2) Longitudinal seams in shell must (a) Type, spinning process, size and be by electric resistance welded joints service pressure. A DOT 4B240ET cyl- only. No repairs to longitudinal joints inder is a brazed type cylinder made is permitted. from electric resistance welded tubing. (3) Welding procedures and operators The maximum water capacity of this must be qualified in accordance with cylinder is 12 pounds or 333 cubic CGA C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- inches and the service must be 240 psig. chapter). The maximum outside diameter of the (e) Welding or brazing. Only the at- shell must be five inches and maximum tachment, by welding or brazing, to the length of the shell is 21 inches. Cyl- tops and bottoms of cylinders of inders closed in by a spinning process neckrings, footrings, handles, bosses, are authorized. pads, and valve protection rings is au- (b) Steel. Open-hearth, basic oxygen, thorized. Provided that such attach- or electric steel of uniform quality ments and the portion of the container must be used. Plain carbon steel con- to which they are attached are made of tent may not exceed the following: Car- weldable steel, the carbon content of bon, 0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulfur, which may not exceed 0.25 percent. 0.050. The addition of other elements (f) Wall thickness. The wall stress for alloying effect is prohibited. must be at least two times the service (c) Identification of material. Material pressure and may not exceed 18,000 psi. must be identified by any suitable The minimum wall thickness is 0.044 method. inch. Calculation must be made by the (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be following formula: manufactured using equipment and S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) processes adequate to ensure that each cylinder produced conforms to the re- Where: quirements of this subpart. No defect is S = wall stress in psig; permitted that is likely to weaken the P = 2 times service pressure; finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- D = outside diameter in inches; sonably smooth and uniform surface d = inside diameter in inches. finish is required. Heads may be at- (g) Heat treatment. Heads formed by tached to shells by lap brazing or may drawing or pressing must be uniformly be formed integrally. The thickness of and properly heat treated prior to the bottom of cylinders welded or tests. Cylinders with integral formed formed by spinning is, under no condi- heads or bases must be subjected to a tion, to be less than two times the min- normalizing operation. Normalizing imum wall thickness of the cylindrical and brazing operations may be com- shell. Such bottom thicknesses must be bined, provided the operation is carried measured within an area bounded by a out at a temperature in excess of the line representing the points of contact upper critical temperature of the steel.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00065 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.55 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in must be tested as outlined in para- cylinders must comply with the fol- graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec- lowing: tion to at least two times service pres- (1) Each opening in cylinders, except sure. those for safety devices, must be pro- (ii) All cylinders not tested as out- vided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se- lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec- curely attached to the cylinder by tion must be examined under pressure brazing or by welding or by threads. A of at least two times service pressure fitting, boss, or pad must be of steel and show no defect. suitable for the method of attachment (5) Each 1000 cylinders or less succes- employed, and which need not be iden- sively produced each day must con- tified or verified as to analysis, except stitute a lot. One cylinder must be se- that if attachment is by welding, car- lected from each lot and bon content may not exceed 0.25 per- hydrostatically tested to destruction. cent. If threads are used, they must If this cylinder bursts below five times comply with the following: the service pressure, then two addi- (i) Threads must be clean cut, even tional cylinders must be selected and without checks, and tapped to gauge. subjected to this test. If either of these (ii) Taper threads to be of length not cylinders fails by bursting below five less than as specified for American times the service pressure then the en- Standard taper pipe threads. tire lot must be rejected. All cylinders (iii) Straight threads, having at least constituting a lot must be of identical 4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and size, construction heat-treatment, fin- calculated shear strength at least 10 ish, and quality. times the test pressure of the cylinder; (j) Flattening test. Following the hy- gaskets required, adequate to prevent drostatic test, one cylinder taken at leakage. random out of each lot of 200 or less, (2) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad must be subjected to a flattening test must be adequate to prevent leakage. that is between knife edges, wedge (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder shaped, 60° angle, rounded to 1⁄2 inch ra- must successfully withstand a hydro- dius. static test as follows: (k) Physical test. A physical test must (1) The test must be by water-jacket, be conducted to determine yield or other suitable method, operated so strength, tensile strength, elongation, as to obtain accurate data. The pres- and reduction of area of material, as sure gauge must permit reading to an follows: accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion (1) The test is required on 2 speci- gauge must permit reading of total ex- mens cut from 1 cylinder, or part pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- thereof heat-treated as required, taken cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. at random out of each lot of 200 or less (2) Pressure must be maintained for in the case of cylinders of capacity at least 30 seconds and sufficiently greater than 86 cubic inches and out of longer to ensure complete expansion. each lot of 500 or less for cylinders hav- Any internal pressure applied after ing a capacity of 86 cubic inches or heat-treatment and previous to the of- less. ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of (2) Specimens must conform to the the test pressure. If, due to failure of following: the test apparatus, the test pressure (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a cannot be maintained, the test may be width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge repeated at a pressure increased by 10 length of 2 inches with a width not percent or 100 psig, whichever is the over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at lower. least 24 times the thickness with a (3) Permanent volumetric expansion width not over 6 times the thickness is may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- authorized when a cylinder wall is not umetric expansion at test pressure. over 3⁄16 inch thick. (4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip lows: ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends (i) At least one cylinder selected at may be flattened to within one inch of random out of each lot of 200 or less each end of the reduced section.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00066 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.55

(iii) When size of cylinder does not the direction of the applied load. Two permit securing straight specimens, rings cut from the ends of length of the specimens may be taken in any lo- pipe used in production of a lot may be cation or direction and may be used for the flattening test provided straightened or flattened cold by pres- the rings accompany the lot which sure only, not by blows. When speci- they represent in all thermal proc- mens are so taken and prepared, the in- essing operations. At least one of the spector’s report must show in connec- rings must pass the flattening test. tion with record of physical tests de- (m) Leakage test. All spun cylinders tailed information in regard to such and plugged cylinders must be tested specimens. for leakage by gas or air pressure after (iv) Heating of a specimen for any the bottom has been cleaned and is free purpose is not authorized. from all moisture, subject to the fol- (3) The yield strength in tension lowing conditions: must be the stress corresponding to a (1) Pressure, approximately the same permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the as but no less than service pressure, gauge length. The following conditions must be applied to one side of the fin- apply: ished bottom over an area of at least (i) The yield strength must be deter- 1⁄16 of the total area of the bottom but mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or not less than 3⁄4 inch in diameter, in- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as cluding the closure, for at least 1 prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 minute, during which time the other of this subchapter). side of the bottom exposed to pressure (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under must be covered with water and closely load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- examined for indications of leakage. tension under load’’) corresponding to Except as provided in paragraph (n) of the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- this section, cylinders which are leak- manent strain occurs may be deter- ing must be rejected. mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- (2) A spun cylinder is one in which an culating the elastic extension of the end closure in the finished cylinder has gauge length under appropriate load been welded by the spinning process. and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the gauge length. Elastic extension cal- (3) A plugged cylinder is one in which culations must be based on an elastic a permanent closure in the bottom of a modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of finished cylinder has been effected by a controversy, the entire stress-strain plug. diagram must be plotted and the yield (4) As a safety precaution, if the strength determined from the 0.2 per- manufacturer elects to make this test cent offset. before the hydrostatic test, he should (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- design his apparatus so that the pres- urement, the initial strain must be set sure is applied to the smallest area while the specimen is under a stress of practicable, around the point of clo- 12,000 psi and the strain indicator read- sure, and so as to use the smallest pos- ing being set at the calculated cor- sible volume of air or gas. responding strain. (n) Rejected cylinders. Repairs of re- (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing jected cylinders is authorized. Cyl- machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per inders that are leaking must be re- minute during yield strength deter- jected, except that: mination. (1) Spun cylinders rejected under the (l) Acceptable results for physical and provisions of paragraph (m) of this sec- flattening tests. Acceptable results for tion may be removed from the spun the physical and flattening tests are an cylinder category by drilling to remove elongation of at least 40 percent for a 2 defective material, tapping, and plug- inch gauge length or at least 20 percent ging. in other cases and a yield strength not (2) Brazed joints may be rebrazed. over 73 percent of tensile strength. In (3) Subsequent to the operations this instance the flattening test is re- noted in paragraphs (n)(1) and (n)(2) of quired, without cracking, to six times this section, acceptable cylinders must the wall thickness with a weld 90° from pass all prescribed tests.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00067 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.56 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(o) Marking. Markings on each cyl- bottoms of cylinders is authorized. inder must be by stamping plainly and Provided that such attachments are permanently on shoulder, top head, made of weldable steel, the carbon con- neck or valve protection collar which tent of which does not exceed 0.25 per- is permanently attached to the cyl- cent. inders and forming an integral part (f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness thereof, provided that cylinders not of the cylinder must conform to the less than 0.090 inch thick may be following: stamped on the side wall adjacent to (1) For cylinders with an outside di- top head. ameter over 5 inches, the minimum [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as wall thickness is 0.078 inch. In any amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR case, the minimum wall thickness 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, must be such that the calculated wall 2003] stress at the minimum test pressure (in paragraph (i) of this section) may not § 178.56 Specification 4AA480 welded exceed the lesser value of either of the steel cylinders. following: (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A (i) One-half of the minimum tensile DOT 4AA480 cylinder is a welded steel strength of the material determined as cylinder having a water capacity required in paragraph (j) of this sec- (nominal) not over 1,000 pounds water tion; or capacity and a service pressure of 480 (ii) 35,000 psi. psig. Closures welded by spinning proc- (2) Calculation must be made by the ess not permitted. formula: (b) Steel. The limiting chemical composition of steel authorized by this S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) specification must be as shown in table Where: I of appendix A to this part. S = wall stress in psi; (c) Identification of material. Material P = minimum test pressure prescribed for must be identified by any suitable water jacket test; method except that plates and billets D = outside diameter in inches; for hotdrawn cylinders must be marked d = inside diameter in inches. with the heat number. (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (3) The ratio of tangential length to manufactured using equipment and outside diameter may not exceed 4.0 for processes adequate to ensure that each cylinders with a wall thickness less cylinder produced conforms to the re- than 0.100 inch. quirements of this subpart. No defect is (g) Heat treatment. Each cylinder permitted that is likely to weaken the must be uniformly and properly heat finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- treated prior to tests. Any suitable sonably smooth and uniform surface heat treatment in excess of 1100 °F is finish is required. Exposed bottom authorized except that liquid quench- welds on cylinders over 18 inches long ing is not permitted. Heat treatment must be protected by footrings. Min- must be accomplished after all forming imum thickness of heads and bottoms and welding operations. Heat treat- may not be less than 90 percent of the ment is not required after welding required thickness of the side wall. weldable low carbon parts to attach- Seams must be made as follows: ments of similar material which have (1) Circumferential seams must be been previously welded to the top or welded. Brazing is not authorized. bottom of cylinders and properly heat (2) Longitudinal seams are not per- treated, provided such subsequent mitted. welding does not produce a tempera- (3) Welding procedures and operators ture in excess of 400 °F., in any part of must be qualified in accordance with the top or bottom material. CGA C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in chapter). cylinders must conform to the fol- (e) Welding. Only the welding of lowing: neckrings, footrings, bosses, pads, and (1) All openings must be in the heads valve protection rings to the tops and or bases.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00068 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.56

(2) Each opening in the cylinder, ex- (ii) Each cylinder not tested as pre- cept those for safety devices, must be scribed in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec- provided with a fitting boss, or pad, se- tion must be examined under pressure curely attached to the cylinder by of at least two times service pressure welding or by threads. If threads are and must show no defect. A cylinder used they must comply with the fol- showing a defect must be rejected un- lowing: less it may be requalified under para- (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even graph (m) of this section. without checks and cut to gauge. (j) Physical test. A physical test must (ii) Taper threads to be of length not be conducted to determine yield less than as specified for American strength, tensile strength, elongation, Standard taper pipe threads. and reduction of area of material, as (iii) Straight threads having at least follows: 6 engaged threads, must have a tight (1) The test is required on 2 speci- fit and a calculated shear strength at mens cut from one cylinder having least 10 times the test pressure of the passed the hydrostatic test, or part cylinder. Gaskets, adequate to prevent thereof heat-treated as required, taken leakage, are required. at random out of each lot of 200 or less. (3) Closure of a fitting, boss or pad (2) Specimens must conform to the must be adequate to prevent leakage. following: (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a must successfully withstand a hydro- width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge static test as follows: length of 2 inches with a width not (1) The test must be by water jacket, over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at or other suitable method, operated so least 24 times the thickness with a as to obtain accurate data. The pres- width not over 6 times thickness is au- sure gauge must permit reading to an thorized when the cylinder wall is not accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion over 3⁄16 inch thick. gauge must permit reading of total expansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends (2) Pressure must be maintained for may be flattened to within one inch of at least 30 seconds or sufficiently each end of the reduced section. longer to assure complete expansion. (iii) When size of cylinder does not Any internal pressure applied after permit securing straight specimens, heat-treatment and before the official the specimens may be taken in any lo- test may not exceed 90 percent of the cation or direction and may be test pressure. If, due to failure of test straightened or flattened cold, by pres- apparatus, the test pressure cannot be sure only, not by blows. When speci- maintained, the test may be repeated mens are so taken and prepared, the in- at a pressure increased by 10 percent or spector’s report must show in connec- 100 psig, whichever is lower. tion with record of physical tests de- (3) Permanent volumetric expansion tailed information in regard to such may not exceed 10 percent of the total specimens. volumetric expansion at test pressure. (iv) Heating of a specimen for any (4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- purpose is not authorized. lows: (3) The yield strength in tension (i) At least one cylinder selected at must be the stress corresponding to a random out of each lot of 200 or less permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the must be tested as described in para- gauge length. The following conditions graphs (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this sec- apply: tion, to at least two times service pres- (i) The yield strength must be deter- sure. If a selected cylinder fails, then mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or two additional specimens must be se- the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as lected at random from the same lot and prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 subjected to the prescribed test. If ei- of this subchapter). ther of these fails the test, then each (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under cylinder in that lot must be so tested; load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- and tension under load’’), corresponding to

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00069 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.56 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- fail to meet the requirements, the en- manent strain occurs may be deter- tire lot represented must be rejected. mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- (2) Guided bend test. A root bend test culating the elastic extension of the specimen must be cut from the cyl- gauge length under appropriate load inder or a welded test plate, used for and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the the tensile test specified in paragraph gauge length. Elastic extension cal- (l)(1) of this section. Specimens must culations must be based on an elastic be taken from across the major seam modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of and must be prepared and tested in ac- controversy, the entire stress-strain cordance with and must meet the re- diagram must be plotted and the yield quirements of CGA Pamphlet C–3. strength determined from the 0.2 percent offset. (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- test may be used and must be as re- urement, the initial strain reference quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec- must be set while the specimen is imen must be bent until the elongation under a stress of 12,000 psi and the at the outer surface, adjacent to the strain indicator reading being set at root of the weld, between the lightly the calculated corresponding strain. scribed gage lines-a to b, is at least 20 (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing percent, except that this percentage machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per may be reduced for steels having a ten- minute during yield strength deter- sile strength in excess of 50,000 psi, as mination. provided in paragraph (k) of this sec- (k) Elongation. Physical test speci- tion. mens must show at least a 40 percent (m) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- elongation for 2-inch gauge lengths or ment of rejected cylinders is author- at least a 20 percent elongation in ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders other cases. Except that these elon- must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- gation percentages may be reduced nu- ceptable. Repair of welded seams by merically by 2 for 2-inch specimens and welding is authorized. by 1 in other cases for each 7,500 psi in- (n) Markings. Markings must be crement of tensile strength above 50,000 stamped plainly and permanently in psi to a maximum of four such incre- one of the following locations on the ments. (l) Tests of welds. Welds must be test- cylinder: ed as follows: (1) On shoulders and top heads not (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be less than 0.087 inch thick. cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 (2) On neck, valve boss, valve protec- or less, or a welded test plate. The tion sleeve, or similar part perma- welded test plate must be of one of the nently attached to top end of cylinder. heats in the lot of 200 or less which it (3) On a plate attached to the top of represents, in the same condition and the cylinder or permanent part thereof: approximately the same thickness as sufficient space must be left on the the cylinder wall except that it may plate to provide for stamping at least not be of a lesser thickness than that six retest dates: the plate must be at required for a quarter size Charpy im- least 1⁄16 inch thick and must be at- pact specimen. The weld must be made tached by welding or by brazing at a by the same procedures and subjected temperature of at least 1100 °F, to the same heat treatment as the throughout all edges of the plate. major weld on the cylinder. The speci- (4) Variations in location of mark- mens must be taken across the major ings authorized only when necessitated seam and must be prepared and tested by lack of space. in accordance with and must meet the requirements of CGA Pamphlet C–3. [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as Should this specimen fail to meet the amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR requirements, specimens may be taken 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, from two additional cylinders or weld- 2003] ed test plates from the same lot and tested. If either of the latter specimens

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00070 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.57

§ 178.57 Specification 4L welded insu- thickness of heads may not be less lated cylinders. than 90 percent of the required thick- (a) Type, size, service pressure, and de- ness of the sidewall. The heads must be sign service temperature. A DOT 4L cyl- reasonably true to shape, have no ab- inder is a fusion welded insulated cyl- rupt shape changes, and the skirts inder with a water capacity (nominal) must be reasonably true to round. not over 1,000 pounds water capacity (3) The surface of the cylinder must and a service pressure of at least 40 but be insulated. The insulating material not greater than 500 psig conforming to must be fire resistant. The insulation the following requirements: on non-evacuated jackets must be cov- (1) For liquefied hydrogen service, ered with a steel jacket not less than the cylinders must be designed to stand 0.060-inch thick or an aluminum jacket on end, with the axis of the cylindrical not less than 0.070 inch thick, so con- portion vertical. structed that moisture cannot come in (2) The design service temperature is contact with the insulating material. If the coldest temperature for which a a vacuum is maintained in the insula- cylinder is suitable. The required de- tion space, the evacuated jacket must sign service temperatures for each be designed for a minimum collapsing cryogenic liquid is as follows: pressure of 30 psig differential whether made of steel or aluminum. The con- Cryogenic liquid Design service temperature struction must be such that the total Argon ...... Minus 320 °F or colder. heat transfer, from the atmosphere at Helium ...... Minus 452 °F or colder. ambient temperature to the contents Hydrogen ...... Minus 42 3 °F or colder. of the cylinder, will not exceed 0.0005 Neon ...... Minus 411 °F or colder. Btu per hour, per Fahrenheit degree Nitrogen ...... Minus 320 °F or colder. Oxygen ...... Minus 320 °F or colder. differential in temperature, per pound of water capacity of the cylinder. For (b) Material. Material use in the con- hydrogen, cryogenic liquid service, the struction of this specification must total heat transfer, with a temperature conform to the following: differential of 520 Fahrenheit degrees, (1) Inner containment vessel (cylinder). may not exceed that required to vent Designations and limiting chemical 30 SCF of hydrogen gas per hour. compositions of steel authorized by (4) For a cylinder having a design this specification must be as shown in service temperature colder than minus table 1 in paragraph (o) of this section. 320 °F, a calculation of the maximum (2) Outer jacket. Steel or aluminum weight of contents must be made and may be used subject to the require- that weight must be marked on the ments of paragraph (o)(2) of this sec- cylinder as prescribed in § 178.35. tion. (5) Welding procedures and oper- (c) Identification of material. Material ations must be qualified in accordance must be identified by any suitable with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see method. § 171.7 of this subchapter). In addition, (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be an impact test of the weld must be per- manufactured using equipment and formed in accordance with paragraph processes adequate to ensure that each (l) of this section as part of the quali- cylinder produced conforms to the re- fication of each welding procedure and quirements of this subpart and to the operator. following requirements: (e) Welding. Welding of the cylinder (1) No defect is permitted that is must be as follows: likely to weaken the finished cylinder (1) All seams of the cylinder must be appreciably. A reasonably smooth and fusion welded. A means must be pro- uniform surface finish is required. The vided for accomplishing complete pene- shell portion must be a reasonably true tration of the joint. Only butt or joggle cylinder. butt joints for the cylinder seams are (2) The heads must be seamless, con- authorized. All joints in the cylinder cave side to the pressure, hemi- must have reasonably true alignment. spherical or ellipsoidal in shape with (2) All attachments to the sidewalls the major diameter not more than and heads of the cylinder must be by twice the minor diameter. Minimum fusion welding and must be of a

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00071 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.57 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

weldable material complying with the curely attached to, the cylinder body impact requirements of paragraph (l) of by fusion welding. Attachments to a this section. fitting, boss or pad may be made by (3) For welding the cylinder, each welding, brazing, mechanical attach- procedure and operator must be quali- ment, or threading. fied in accordance with the sections of (2) Threads must comply with the fol- CGA Pamphlet C–3 that apply. In addi- lowing: tion, impact tests of the weld must be (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even, performed in accordance with para- without checks and cut to gauge. graph (l) of this section as part of the (ii) Taper threads to be of a length qualification of each welding procedure not less than that specified for NPT. and operator. (iii) Straight threads must have at (4) Brazing, soldering and threading least 4 engaged threads, tight fit and are permitted only for joints not made calculated shear strength at least 10 directly to the cylinder body. Threads must comply with the requirements of times the test pressure of the cylinder. paragraph (h) of this section. Gaskets, which prevent leakage and (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall are inert to the hazardous material, thickness of the cylinder must be such are required. that the calculated wall stress at the (i) Pressure test. Each cylinder, before minimum required test pressure may insulating and jacketing, must be ex- not exceed the least value of the fol- amined under a pressure of at least 2 lowing: times the service pressure maintained (1) 45,000 psi. for at least 30 seconds without evidence (2) One-half of the minimum tensile of leakage, visible distortion or other strength across the welded seam deter- defect. The pressure gauge must permit mined in paragraph (l) of this section. reading to an accuracy of 1 percent. (3) One-half of the minimum tensile (j) Physical test. A physical test must strength of the base metal determined be conducted to determine yield as required in paragraph (j) of this sec- strength, tensile strength, and elon- tion. gation as follows: (4) The yield strength of the base (1) The test is required on 2 speci- metal determined as required in para- mens selected from material of each graph (l) of this section. heat and in the same condition as that (5) Further provided that wall stress in the completed cylinder. for cylinders having longitudinal (2) Specimens must conform to the seams may not exceed 85 percent of the following: above value, whichever applies. (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a (6) Calculation must be made by the width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge following formula: length of 2 inches with width not over S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at least 24 times thickness with a width not over where: 6 times thickness (authorized when cyl- S = wall stress in pounds psi; inder wall is not over 1⁄16 inch thick). P = minimum test pressure prescribed for pressure test in psig; (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip D = outside diameter in inches; ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends d = inside diameter in inches. may be flattened to within one inch of (g) Heat treatment. Heat treatment is each end of the reduced section. not permitted. (iii) When size of the cylinder does (h) Openings in cylinder. Openings in not permit securing straight speci- cylinders must conform to the fol- mens, the specimens may be taken in lowing: any location or direction and may be (1) Openings are permitted in heads straightened or flattened cold by pres- only. They must be circular and may sure only, not by blows. When speci- not exceed 3 inches in diameter or one mens are so taken and prepared, the in- third of the cylinder diameter, which- spector’s report must show in connec- ever is less. Each opening in the cyl- tion with record of physical tests de- inder must be provided with a fitting, tailed information in regard to such boss or pad, either integral with, or se- specimens.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00072 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.57

(iv) Heating of a specimen for any heats in the lot of 200 or less which it purpose is not authorized. represents, in the same condition and (3) The yield strength in tension approximately the same thickness as must be the stress corresponding to a the cylinder wall except that it may permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the not be of a lesser thickness than that gauge length. The following conditions required for a quarter size Charpy im- apply: pact specimen. The weld must be made (i) The yield strength must be deter- by the same procedures and subjected mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or to the same heat treatment as the the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as major weld on the cylinder. The speci- prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 men must be taken across the major of this subchapter). seam and must be prepared in accord- (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under ance with and must meet the require- load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3. Should tension under load’’), corresponding to this specimen fail to meet the require- the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- ments, specimens may be taken from manent strain occurs may be deter- two additional cylinders or welded test mined with sufficient accuracy by calculating the elastic expansion of the plates from the same lot and tested. If gauge length under appropriate load either of the latter specimens fails to and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the meet the requirements, the entire lot gauge length. Elastic extension cal- represented must be rejected. culations must be based on the elastic (2) Guided bend test. A ‘‘root’’ bend modulus of the material used. In the test specimen must be cut from the event of controversy, the entire stress- cylinder or welded test plate, used for strain diagram must be plotted and the the tensile test specified in paragraph yield strength determined from the 0.2 (l)(1) of this section and from any other percent offset. seam or equivalent welded test plate if (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- the seam is welded by a procedure dif- urement, the initial strain reference ferent from that used for the major must be set while the specimen is seam. Specimens must be taken across under a stress of 12,000 psi and the the particular seam being tested and strain indicator reading being set at must be prepared and tested in accord- the calculated corresponding strain. ance with and must meet the require- (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3. machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This minute during yield strength deter- test may be used and must be as speci- mination. fied in CGA Pamphlet C–3. The speci- (k) Acceptable results for physical tests. men must be bent until the elongation Physical properties must meet the lim- at the outer surface, adjacent to the its specified in paragraph (o)(1), table 1, root of the weld, between the lightly of this section, for the particular steel scribed gage lines a to b, is at least 20 in the annealed condition. The speci- percent, except that this percentage mens must show at least a 20 percent may be reduced for steels having a ten- elongation for a 2-inch gage length. Ex- sile strength in excess of 100,000 psig, as cept that the percentage may be re- provided in paragraph (c) of this sec- duced numerically by 2 for each 7,500 tion. psi increment of tensile strength above 100,000 psi to a maximum of 5 such in- (4) Impact tests. One set of three im- crements. Yield strength and tensile pact test specimens (for each test) strength must meet the requirements must be prepared and tested for deter- of paragraph (o)(1), table 1, of this sec- mining the impact properties of the de- tion. posited weld metal— (l) Tests of welds. Welds must be test- (i) As part of the qualification of the ed as follows: welding procedure. (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be (ii) As part of the qualification of the cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 operators. or less, or welded test plate. The weld- (iii) For each ‘‘heat’’ of welding rodor ed test plate must be of one of the wire used.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00073 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.57 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(iv) For each 1,000 feet of weld made Minimum impact value Minimum with the same heat of welding rod or required for impact value wire. Size of specimen avg. of each permitted on set of three one only of a (v) All impact test specimens must be specimens set of three of the charpy type, keyhole or milled (ft.-lb.) (ft.-lb.) U-notch, and must conform in all re- 10 mm × 10 mm ...... 15 10 spects to ASTM E 23 (IBR, see § 171.7 of 10 mm × 7.5 mm ...... 12 .5 8 .5 this subchapter). Each set of impact 10 mm × 5 mm ...... 10 7 .0 × specimens must be taken across the 10 mm 2.5 mm ...... 5 3 .5 weld and have the notch located in the (viii) When the average value of the weld metal. When the cylinder mate- three specimens equals or exceeds the rial thickness is 2.5 mm or thicker, im- minimum value permitted for a single pact specimens must be cut from a cyl- specimen and the value for more than inder or welded test plate used for the one specimen is below the required av- tensile or bend test specimens. The di- erage value, or when the value for one mension along the axis of the notch specimen is below the minimum value must be reduced to the largest possible permitted for a single specimen, a of 10 mm, 7.5 mm, 5 mm or 2.5 mm, de- retest of three additional specimens pending upon cylinder thickness. When must be made. The value of each of the material in the cylinder or welded these retest specimens must equal or test plate is not of sufficient thickness exceed the required average value. to prepare 2.5 mm impact test speci- When an erratic result is caused by a mens, 2.5 mm specimens must be pre- defective specimen, or there is uncer- pared from a welded test plate made tainty in test procedure, a retest is au- from 1⁄8 inch thick material meeting thorized. the requirements specified in para- (m) Radiographic examination. Cyl- graph (o)(1), table 1, of this section and inders must be subject to a radio- having a carbon analysis of .05 min- graphic examination as follows: imum, but not necessarily from one of (1) The techniques and acceptability the heats used in the lot of cylinders. of radiographic inspection must conform to the standards set forth in CGA The test piece must be welded by the Pamphlet C–3. same welding procedure as used on the (2) One finished longitudinal seam particular cylinder seam being quali- must be selected at random from each fied and must be subjected to the same lot of 100 or less successively produced heat treatment. and be radiographed throughout its en- (vi) Impact test specimens must be tire length. Should the radiographic cooled to the design service tempera- examination fail to meet the require- ture. The apparatus for testing the ments of paragraph (m)(1) of this sec- specimens must conform to require- tion, two additional seams of the same ments of ASTM Standard E 23. The test lot must be examined, and if either of piece, as well as the handling tongs, these fail to meet the requirements of must be cooled for a length of time suf- (m)(1) of this section, only those pass- ficient to reach the service tempera- ing are acceptable. ture. The temperature of the cooling (n) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- device must be maintained within a ment of rejected cylinders is author- range of plus or minus 3 °F. The speci- ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders men must be quickly transferred from must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- the cooling device to the anvil of the ceptable. Welds may be repaired by testing machine and broken within a suitable methods of fusion welding. time lapse of not more than six sec- (o) Authorized materials of construc- onds. tion. Authorized materials of construc- (vii) The impact properties of each tion are as follows: (1) Inner containment vessel (cylinder). set of impact specimens may not be Electric furnace steel of uniform qual- less than the values in the following ity must be used. Chemical analysis table: must conform to ASTM A 240/A 240M (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter),

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00074 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.58

Type 304 stainless steel. Chemical anal- an outer jacket made of steel or alu- ysis must conform to ASTM A240, Type minum. 304 Stainless Steel. A heat of steel (ii) Flammable cryogenic liquids. made under table 1 and table 2 in this Cylinders intended for use in the trans- paragraph (o)(1) is acceptable, even portation of flammable cryogenic liq- though its check chemical analysis is uid must have an outer jacket made of slightly out of the specified range, if it steel. is satisfactory in all other respects, (p) Markings. (1) Markings must be provided the tolerances shown in table stamped plainly and permanently on 3 in this paragraph (o)(1) are not ex- shoulder or top head of jacket or on a ceeded. The following chemical anal- permanently attached plate or head yses and physical properties are au- protective ring. thorized: (2) The letters ‘‘ST’’, followed by the design service temperature (for exam- TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS ple, ST–423F), must be marked on cylinders having a design service tempera- Chemical analysis, Designation limits in percent ture of colder than minus 320 °F only. Location to be just below the DOT Carbon 1 ...... 0.08 max. mark. Manganese ...... 2.00 max. Phosphorus ...... 0.045 max. (3) The maximum weight of contents, Sulphur ...... 0.030 max. in pounds (for example, ‘‘Max. Content Silicon ...... 1.00 max. 51 #’’), must be marked on cylinders Nickel ...... 8.00–10.50. Chromium ...... 18.00–20.00. having a design service temperature Molybdenum ...... None. colder than minus 320 °F only. Loca- Titanium ...... None. tion to be near symbol. Columbium ...... None. (4) Special orientation instructions 1 The carbon analysis must be reported to the nearest hun- must be marked on the cylinder (for dredth of one percent. example, THIS END UP), if the cyl- TABLE 2—PHYSICAL PROPERTIES inder is used in an orientation other than vertical with openings at the top Physical properties of the cylinder. (annealed) (5) If the jacket of the cylinder is constructed of aluminum, the letters Tensile strength, p.s.i. (minimum) ...... 75,000 Yield strength, p.s.i. (minimum) ...... 30,000 ‘‘AL’’ must be marked after the service Elongation in 2 inches (minimum) percent ...... 30 .0 pressure marking. Example: DOT-4L150 Elongation other permissible gauge lengths AL. (minimum) percent ...... 15.0 (6) Except for serial number and jacket material designation, each marking TABLE 3—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES prescribed in this paragraph (p) must be duplicated on each cylinder by any Tolerance over the suitable means. Limit or specified range maximum (q) Inspector’s report. In addition to Elements (percent) limit or under the minimum the information required by § 178.35, the limit inspector’s reports must contain infor- Carbon ...... To 0.030, incl ...... 0 .005 mation on: Over 0.30 to 0.20, incl ..... 0 .01 (1) The jacket material and insula- Manganese ...... To 1.00 incl ...... 03 tion type; Over 1.00 to 3.00, incl ..... 0 .04 Phosphorus 1 ..... To 0.040, incl ...... 0 .005 (2) The design service temperature Over 0.040 to 0.020 incl .. 0.010 (°F); and Sulphur ...... To .40 incl ...... 0 .005 (3) The impact test results, on a lot Silicon ...... To 1.00, incl ...... 0 .05 Nickel ...... Over 5.00 to 10.00, incl ... 0 .10 basis. Over 10.00 to 20.00, incl 0 .15 Chromium ...... Over 15.00 to 20.00, incl 0 .20 [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for 51653, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003] phosphorus. (2) Outer jacket. (i) Nonflammable § 178.58 Specification 4DA welded steel cryogenic liquids. Cylinders intended cylinders for aircraft use. for use in the transportation of non- (a) Type, size, and service pressure. A flammable cryogenic liquid must have DOT 4DA is a welded steel sphere (two

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00075 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.58 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

seamless hemispheres) or a circum- ciably. A reasonably smooth and uni- ferentially welded cylinder (two seam- form surface finish is required. No ab- less drawn shells) with a water capac- rupt change in wall thickness is per- ity not over 100 pounds and a service mitted. Welding procedures and opera- pressure of at least 500 but not over 900 tors must be qualified in accordance psig. with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see (b) Steel. Open-hearth or electric steel § 171.7 of this subchapter). of uniform quality must be used. A (2) All seams of the sphere or cyl- heat of steel made under table 1 in this inders must be fusion welded. Seams paragraph (b), check chemical analysis must be of the butt or joggle butt type of which is slightly out of the specified and means must be provided for accom- range, is acceptable, if satisfactory in plishing complete penetration of the all other respects, provided the toler- joint. ances shown in table 2 in this para- (e) Welding. Attachments to the con- graph (b) are not exceeded except as ap- tainer are authorized by fusion welding proved by the Associate Administrator. provided that such attachments are The following chemical analyses are made of weldable steel, the carbon con- authorized: tent of which may not exceed 0.25 percent except in the case of 4130 steel. TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS (f) Wall thickness. The minimum wall 4130 Percent thickness must be such that the wall stress at the minimum specified test Carbon ...... 0.28/0.33. Manganese ...... 0.40/0.60. pressure may not exceed 67 percent of Phosphorus ...... 0.040 max. the minimum tensile strength of the Sulfur ...... 0.040 max. steel as determined from the physical Silicon ...... 0.15/0.35. and burst tests required and may not Chromium ...... 0.80/1.10. Molybdenum ...... 0.15/0.25. be over 70,000 p.s.i. For any diameter container, the minimum wall thickness is 0.040 inch. Calculations must be TABLE 2—CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES made by the formulas in (f)(1) or (f)(2) Tolerance (per- of this section: cent) over the maximum limit or (1) Calculation for a sphere must be under the min- made by the following formula: Element Limit or maximum imum limit specified (percent) S = PD / 4tE Under Over min- max- imum imum Where: limit limit S = wall stress in pounds psi; Carbon ...... Over 0.15 to 0.40 incl .03 ...... 04 P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket Manganese ..... To 0.60 incl ...... 03 ...... 03 test, i.e., at least 2 times service pres- Phosphorus1 ... All ranges ...... 01 sure, in psig; Sulphur ...... All ranges ...... 01 D = outside diameter in inches; Silicon ...... To 0.30 incl ...... 02 ...... 03 Over 0.30 to 1.00 incl .05 ...... 05 t = minimum wall thickness in inches; Chromium ...... To 0.90 incl ...... 03 ...... 03 E = 0.85 (provides 85 percent weld efficiency Over 0.90 to 2.10 incl .05 ...... 05 factor which must be applied in the girth Molybdenum ... To 0.20 incl ...... 01 ...... 01 weld area and heat affected zones which Over 0.20 to 0.40, incl .02 ...... 02 zone must extend a distance of 6 times 1 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for wall thickness from center line of weld); phosphorus. E = 1.0 (for all other areas). (c) Identification of material. Materials (2) Calculation for a cylinder must be must be identified by any suitable made by the following formula: method except that plates and billets for hot-drawn containers must be S = [P(1.3D 2 + 0.4d 2)] / (D 2 ¥ d 2) marked with the heat number. Where: (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be S = wall stress in pounds psi; manufactured in accordance with the P = test pressure prescribed for water jacket following requirements: test, i.e., at least 2 times service pres- (1) By best appliances and methods. sure, in psig; No defect is acceptable that is likely to D = outside diameter in inches; weaken the finished container appre- d = inside diameter in inches.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00076 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.58

(g) Heat treatment. The completed as to obtain accurate data. The pres- containers must be uniformly and sure gauge must permit reading to an properly heat-treated prior to tests. accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion Heat-treatment of containers of the au- gauge must permit reading of total ex- thorized analysis must be as follows: pansion to accuracy either of 1 percent (1) All containers must be quenched or 0.1 cubic centimeter. by oil, or other suitable medium except (2) Pressure must be maintained for as provided in paragraph (g)(4) of this at least 30 seconds and sufficiently section. longer to ensure complete expansion. (2) The steel temperature on quench- Any internal pressure applied after ing must be that recommended for the heat-treatment and previous to the of- steel analysis, but may not exceed 1,750 ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of °F. the test pressure. If, due to failure of (3) The steel must be tempered at the the test apparatus, the test pressure temperature most suitable for the cannot be maintained, the test may be analysis except that in no case shall repeated at a pressure increased by 10 the tempering temperature be less than percent or 100 psig, whichever is the 1,000 °F. lower. (4) The steel may be normalized at a (3) Permanent volumetric expansion temperature of 1,650 °F instead of being may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- quenched, and containers so normal- umetric expansion at test pressure. ized need not be tempered. (4) Each container must be tested to (5) All cylinders, if water quenched or at least 2 times service pressure. quenched with a liquid producing a (j) Burst test. One container taken at cooling rate in excess of 80 percent of random out of 200 or less must be the cooling rate of water, must be in- hydrostatically tested to destruction. spected by the magnetic particle or dye The rupture pressure must be included penetrant method to detect the pres- as part of the inspector’s report. ence of quenching cracks. Any cylinder (k) Flattening test. Spheres and cyl- found to have a quench crack must be inders must be subjected to a flat- rejected and may not be requalified. tening test as follows: (h) Openings in container. Openings in (1) Flattening test for spheres. One the container must comply with the sphere taken at random out of each lot following requirements: of 200 or less must be subjected to a (1) Each opening in the container flattening test as follows: must be provided with a fitting, boss, (i) The test must be performed after or pad of weldable steel securely at- the hydrostatic test. tached to the container by fusion weld- (ii) The test must be at the weld being. tween the parallel steel plates on a (2) Attachments to a fitting, boss, or press with a welded seam, at right an- pad must be adequate to prevent leak- gles to the plates. Any projecting ap- age. Threads must comply with the fol- purtenances may be cut off (by me- lowing: chanical means only) prior to crushing. (i) Threads must be clean cut, even, (2) Flattening test for cylinders. One without checks, and tapped to gauge. cylinder taken at random out of each (ii) Taper threads to be of length not lot of 200 or less, must be subjected to less than as specified for American a flattening test as follows: Standard taper pipe threads. (i) The test must be performed after (iii) Straight threads, having at least the hydrostatic test. 4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and (ii) The test cylinder must be placed calculated shear strength at least 10 between wedge-shaped knife edges hav- times the test pressure of the con- ing a 60° angle, rounded to a 1⁄2-inch ra- tainer; gaskets required, adequate to dius. prevent leakage. (l) Radiographic inspection. Radio- (i) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder graphic examinations is required on all must successfully withstand a hydro- welded joints which are subjected to in- static test as follows: ternal pressure, except that at the dis- (1) The test must be by water-jacket, cretion of the disinterested inspector, or other suitable method, operated so openings less than 25 percent of the

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00077 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.59 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

sphere diameter need not be subjected the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- to radiographic inspection. Evidence of manent strain occurs may be deter- any defects likely to seriously weaken mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- the container must be cause for rejec- culating the elastic extension of the tion. gauge length under appropriate load (m) Physical test and specimens for and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the spheres and cylinders. Spheres and cyl- gauge length. Elastic extension cal- inders must be subjected to a physical culations must be based on an elastic test as follows: modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of (1) A physical test for a sphere is re- controversy, the entire stress-strain quired on 2 specimens cut from a flat diagram must be plotted and the yield representative sample plate of the strength determined from the 0.2 per- same heat taken at random from the cent offset. steel used to produce the sphere. This (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- flat steel from which the 2 specimens urement, the initial strain must be set are to be cut must receive the same while the specimen is under a stress of heat-treatment as the spheres them- 12,000 psi and the strain indicator read- selves. Sample plates to be taken for ing being set at the calculated cor- each lot of 200 or less spheres. responding strain. (2) Specimens for spheres have a (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing gauge length of 2 inches with a width machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per not over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length minute during yield strength deter- at least 24 times thickness with a mination. width not over 6 times thickness is au- (n) Acceptable results for physical, flat- thorized when wall of sphere is not tening, and burst tests. The following are over 3⁄16 inch thick. acceptable results of the physical, flat- (3) A physical test for cylinders is re- tening and burst test: quired on 2 specimens cut from 1 cyl- (1) Elongation must be at least 20 inder taken at random out of each lot percent for a 2-inch gauge length or 10 of 200 or less. percent in other cases. (4) Specimens for cylinder must con- (2) Flattening is required to 50 perform to the following: cent of the original outside diameter (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a without cracking. width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge (3) Burst pressure must be at least 3 length of 2 inches with a width not times service pressure. over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge length at least (o) Rejected containers. Reheat-treat- 24 times thickness with a width not ment of rejected cylinders is author- over 6 times thickness is authorized ized. Subsequent thereto, containers when a cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16 must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- inch thick. ceptable. Repair of welded seams by (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip welding prior to reheat-treatment is ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends authorized. may be flattened to within 1 inch of (p) Marking. Markings on each con- each end of the reduced section. tainer must be stamped plainly and (iii) Heating of a specimen for any permanently on a permanent attach- purpose is not authorized. ment or on a metal nameplate perma- (5) The yield strength in tension nently secured to the container by must be the stress corresponding to a means other than soft solder. permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as gauge length. The following conditions amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; apply: 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; 67 FR 61015, Sept. 27, (i) The yield strength must be deter- 2002; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003] mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as § 178.59 Specification 8 steel cylinders prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 with porous fillings for acetylene. of this subchapter). (a) Type and service pressure. A DOT 8 (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under cylinder is a seamless cylinder with a load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- service pressure of 250 psig. The fol- tension under load’’) corresponding to lowing steel is authorized:

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00078 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.59

(1) A longitudinal seam if forge lap heat-treatment and previous to the of- welded; ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of (2) Attachment of heads by welding the test pressure. or by brazing by dipping process; or (3) Permanent volumetric expansion (3) A welded circumferential body may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- seam if the cylinder has no longitu- umetric expansion at test pressure. dinal seam. (4) One cylinder out of each lot of 200 (b) Steel. Open-hearth, electric or or less must be hydrostatically tested basic oxygen process steel of uniform to at least 750 psig. Cylinders not so quality must be used. Content percent tested must be examined under pres- may not exceed the following: Carbon, sure of between 500 and 600 psig and 0.25; phosphorus, 0.045; sulphur, 0.050. show no defect. If hydrostatically test- (c) Identification of steel. Materials ed cylinder fails, each cylinder in the must be identified by any suitable lot may be hydrostatically tested and method except that plates and billets those passing are acceptable. for hot-drawn cylinders must be (i) Leakage test. Cylinders with bot- marked with the heat number. toms closed in by spinning must be (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be subjected to a leakage test by setting manufactured using equipment and the interior air or gas pressure to not processes adequate to ensure that each less than the service pressure. Cyl- cylinder produced conforms to the re- inders which leak must be rejected. quirements of this subpart. No defect is (j) Physical test. A physical test must acceptable that is likely to weaken the be conducted as follows: finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- (1) The test is required on 2 speci- sonably smooth and uniform surface mens cut longitudinally from 1 cyl- finish is required. Welding procedures inder or part thereof taken at random and operators must be qualified in ac- out of each lot of 200 or less, after heat cordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, treatment. see § 171.7 of this subchapter). (2) Specimens must conform to a (e) Exposed bottom welds. Exposed bot- gauge length of 8 inches with a width tom welds on cylinders over 18 inches not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge length of 2 long must be protected by footrings. inches with width not over 11⁄2, or a (f) Heat treatment. Body and heads gauge length at least 24 times thick- formed by drawing or pressing must be ness with a width not over 6 times uniformly and properly heat treated thickness is authorized when a cylinder prior to tests. wall is not over 3⁄16 inch thick. (g) Openings. Openings in the cyl- (3) The yield strength in tension inders must comply with the following: must be the stress corresponding to a (1) Standard taper pipe threads are permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the required; gauge length. The following conditions (2) Length may not be less than as apply: specified for American Standard pipe (i) The yield strength must be deter- threads; tapped to gauge; clean cut, mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or even, and without checks. the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as (h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 must successfully withstand a hydro- of this subchapter). static test as follows: (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under (1) The test must be by water-jacket, load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- or other suitable method, operated so tension under load’’) corresponding to as to obtain accurate data. The pres- the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- sure gauge must permit reading to an manent strain occurs may be deter- accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- gauge must permit reading of total ex- culating the elastic extension of the pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- gauge length under appropriate load cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the (2) Pressure must be maintained for gauge length. Elastic extension cal- at least 30 seconds and sufficiently culations must be based on an elastic longer to ensure complete expansion. modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of Any internal pressure applied after controversy, the entire stress-strain

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00079 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.59 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

diagram must be plotted and the yield be tested for porosity. If the test cyl- strength determined from the 0.2 off- inder fails, each cylinder in the lot set. may be tested individually and those (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- cylinders that pass the test are accept- urement, the initial strain must be set able. while the specimen is under a stress of (3) For filling that is molded and 12,000 psi and the strain indicator read- dried before insertion in cylinders, po- ing being set at the calculated cor- rosity test may be made on a sample responding strain. block taken at random from material (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing to be used. machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per (4) The porosity of the filling mate- minute during yield strength deter- rial must be determined. The amount mination. of solvent at 70 °F for a cylinder: (4) Yield strength may not exceed 73 (i) Having shell volumetric capacity percent of tensile strength. Elongation above 20 pounds water capacity (nomi- must be at least 40 percent in 2 inch or nal) may not exceed the following: 20 percent in other cases. Maximum (k) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- acetone sol- ment of rejected cylinder is authorized. vent percent Percent porosity of filler shell capac- Subsequent thereto, cylinders must ity by vol- pass all prescribed tests to be accept- ume able. Repair by welding is authorized. 90 to 92 ...... 43.4 (l) Porous filling. (1) Cylinders must 87 to 90 ...... 42.0 be filled with a porous material in ac- 83 to 87 ...... 40.0 cordance with the following: 80 to 83 ...... 38.6 75 to 80 ...... 36.2 (i) The porous material may not dis- 70 to 75 ...... 33.8 integrate or sag when wet with solvent 65 to 70 ...... 31.4 or when subjected to normal service; (ii) The porous filling material must (ii) Having volumetric capacity of 20 be uniform in quality and free of voids, pounds or less water capacity (nomi- except that a well drilled into the fill- nal), may not exceed the following: ing material beneath the valve is au- Maximum thorized if the well is filled with a ma- acetone sol- terial of such type that the functions vent percent Percent porosity of filler shell capac- of the filling material are not im- ity by vol- paired; ume (iii) Overall shrinkage of the filling 90 to 92 ...... 41.8 material is authorized if the total 83 to 90 ...... 38.5 clearance between the cylinder shell 80 to 83 ...... 37.1 75 to 80 ...... 34.8 and filling material, after solvent has 70 to 75 ...... 32.5 been added, does not exceed 1⁄2 of 1 per- 65 to 70 ...... 30.2 cent of the respective diameter or length, but not to exceed 1⁄8 inch, meas- (m) Tare weight. The tare weight is ured diametrically and longitudinally; the combined weight of the cylinder (iv) The clearance may not impair proper, porous filling, valve, and sol- the functions of the filling material; vent, without removable cap. (v) The installed filling material (n) Duties of inspector. In addition to must meet the requirements of CGA C– the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- 12 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter); tor is required to— and (1) Certify chemical analyses of steel (vi) Porosity of filling material may used, signed by manufacturer thereof; not exceed 80 percent except that fill- also verify by, check analyses of sam- ing material with a porosity of up to 92 ples taken from each heat or from 1 out percent may be used when tested with of each lot of 200 or less, plates, shells, satisfactory results in accordance with or tubes used. CGA Pamphlet C–12. (2) Verify compliance of cylinder (2) When the porosity of each cyl- shells with all shell requirements; in- inder is not known, a cylinder taken at spect inside before closing in both ends; random from a lot of 200 or less must verify heat treatment as proper; obtain

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00080 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.60

all samples for all tests and for check (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be analyses; witness all tests; verify manufactured using equipment and threads by gauge; report volumetric ca- processes adequate to ensure that each pacity and minimum thickness of wall cylinder produced conforms to the re- noted. quirements of this subpart. No defect is (3) Prepare report on manufacture of permitted that is likely to weaken the steel shells in form prescribed in finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- § 178.35. Furnish one copy to manufac- sonably smooth and uniform surface turer and three copies to the company finish is required. Welding procedures that is to complete the cylinders. and operators must be qualified in ac- (4) Determine porosity of filling and cordance with CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, tare weights; verify compliance of see § 171.7 of this subchapter). marking with prescribed requirements; (e) Footrings. Exposed bottom welds obtain necessary copies of steel shell on cylinders over 18 inches long must reports; and furnish complete reports be protected by footrings. required by this specification to the (f) Welding or brazing. Welding or person who has completed the manu- brazing for any purpose whatsoever is facture of the cylinders and, upon re- prohibited except as follows: quest, to the purchaser. The test re- (1) The attachment to the tops or ports must be retained by the inspector bottoms of cylinders of neckrings, for fifteen years from the original test footrings, handlers, bosses, pads, and date of the cylinder. valve protecting rings is authorized (o) (1) Marking on each cyl- Marking. provided that such attachments and inder must be stamped plainly and per- the portion of the container to which manently on or near the shoulder, top they are attached are made of weldable head, neck or valve protection collar steel, the carbon content of which may which is permanently attached to the not exceed 0.25 percent. cylinder and forming integral part (2) Heat treatment is not required thereof. after welding or brazing weldable low (2) Tare weight of cylinder, in pounds carbon parts to attachments, specified and ounces, must be marked on the in paragraph (f)(1) of this section, of cylinder. similar material which have been pre- (3) Cylinders, not completed, when viously welded or brazed to the top or delivered must each be marked for bottom of cylinders and properly heat identification of each lot of 200 or less. treated, provided such subsequent [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as welding or brazing does not produce a amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR temperature in excess of 400 °F in any 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; part of the top or bottom material. 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003] (g) Wall thickness; wall stress. The wall § 178.60 Specification 8AL steel cyl- thickness/wall stress of the cylinder inders with porous fillings for acet- must conform to the following: ylene. (1) The calculated wall stress at 750 (a) Type and service pressure. A DOT psi may not exceed 35,000 psi, or one- 8AL cylinder is a seamless steel cyl- half of the minimum ultimate strength inder with a service pressure of 250 of the steel as determined in paragraph psig. However, the attachment of heads (l) of this section, whichever value is by welding or by brazing by dipping the smaller. The measured wall thick- process and a welded circumferential ness may not include galvanizing or body seam is authorized. Longitudinal other protective coating. seams are not authorized. (i) Calculation of wall stress must be (b) Authorized steel. The authorized made by the formula: steel is as specified in table I of appen- S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) dix A to this part. (c) Identification of steel. Material Where: must be identified by any suitable S = wall stress in pounds psi; method except that plates and billets P = 750 psig (minimum test pressure); for hot-drawn cylinders must be D = outside diameter in inches; marked with heat number. d = inside diameter in inches.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00081 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.60 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(ii) Either D or d must be calculated (k) Leakage test. Cylinders with bot- from the relation D = d + 2t, where t = toms closed in by spinning must be minimum wall thickness. leakage tested by setting the interior (2) Cylinders with a wall thickness air or gas pressure at not less than the less than 0.100 inch, the ratio of service pressure. Any cylinder that straight side wall length to outside di- leaks must be rejected. ameter may not exceed 3.5. (l) Physical test. A physical test must (3) For cylinders having outside di- be conducted as follows; ameter over 5 inches, the minimum (1) The test is required on 2 speci- wall thickness must be 0.087 inch. mens cut longitudinally from 1 cyl- (h) Heat treatment. Each cylinder inder or part thereof taken at random must be uniformly and properly heat out of each lot of 200 or less, after heat treated, prior to tests, by any suitable treatment. method in excess of 1100 °F. Heat treat- (2) Specimens must conform to a ment must be accomplished after all gauge length of 8 inches with a width 1 forming and welding operations, except not over 1 ⁄2 inches, a gauge length 2 1 that when brazed joints are used, heat inches with a width not over 1 ⁄2 inches, treatment must follow any forming or a gauge length at least 24 times and welding operations but may be thickness with a width not over 6 times thickness is authorized when a cylinder done before, during, or after the braz- wall is not over 3⁄16 inch thick. ing operations. Liquid quenching is not (3) The yield strength in tension authorized. must be the stress corresponding to a (i) Openings. Standard taper pipe permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the threads required in all openings. The gauge length. The following conditions length of the opening may not be less apply: than as specified for American Stand- (i) The yield strength must be deter- ard pipe threads; tapped to gauge; mined by either the ‘‘offset’’ method or clean cut, even, and without checks. the ‘‘extension under load’’ method as (j) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 must successfully withstand a hydro- of this subchapter). static test as follows: (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under (1) The test must be by water-jacket, load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- or other suitable method, operated so tension under load’’) corresponding to as to obtain accurate data. The pres- the stress at which the 0.2 percent per- sure gauge must permit reading to an manent strain occurs may be deter- accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- gauge must permit reading of total ex- culating the elastic extension of the pansion to an accuracy of either 1 per- gauge length under appropriate load cent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the (2) Pressure must be maintained for gauge length. Elastic extension cal- at least 30 seconds and sufficiently culations must be based on an elastic longer to ensure complete expansion. modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of Any internal pressure applied after controversy, the entire stress-strain heat-treatment and previous to the of- diagram must be plotted and the yield ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of strength determined from the 0.2 off- the test pressure. set. (3) Permanent volumetric expansion (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- may not exceed 10 percent of total vol- urement, the initial strain must be set umetric expansion at test pressure. while the specimen is under a stress of (4) One cylinder out of each lot of 200 12,000 psi, the strain indicator reading or less must be hydrostatically tested being set at the calculated cor- to at least 750 psig. Cylinders not so responding strain. tested must be examined under pres- (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing sure of between 500 and 600 psig and machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per show no defect. If a hydrostatically minute during yield strength deter- tested cylinder fails, each cylinder in mination. the lot may be hydrostatically tested (m) Elongation. Physical test speci- and those passing are acceptable. mens must show at least a 40 percent

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00082 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.60

elongation for a 2 inch gauge length or (p) Porous filling. (1) Cylinders must at least a 20 percent elongation in be filled with a porous material in ac- other cases. Except that these elon- cordance with the following: gation percentages may be reduced nu- (i) The porous material may not dis- merically by 2 for 2 inch specimens and integrate or sag when wet with solvent 1 in other cases for each 7,500 psi incre- or when subjected to normal service; ment of tensile strength above 50,000 (ii) The filling material must be uni- psi to a maximum of four such incre- form in quality and free of voids, ex- ments. cept that a well drilled into the filling material beneath the valve is author- (n) Weld tests. Specimens taken ized if the well is filled with a material across the circumferentially welded of such type that the functions of the seam must be cut from one cylinder filling material are not impaired; taken at random from each lot of 200 or (iii) Overall shrinkage of the filling less cylinders after heat treatment and material is authorized if the total must pass satisfactorily the following clearance between the cylinder shell tests: and filling material, after solvent has (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be been added, does not exceed 1⁄2 of 1 per- cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 cent of the respective diameter or or less, or welded test plate. The speci- length but not to exceed 1⁄8 inch, meas- men must be taken from across the ured diametrically and longitudinally; major seam and must be prepared and (iv) The clearance may not impair tested in accordance with and must the functions of the filling material; meet the requirements of CGA Pam- (v) The installed filling material phlet C–3. Should this specimen fail to must meet the requirements of CGA C– meet the requirements, specimens may 12 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter); be taken from two additional cylinders and or welded test plates from the same lot (vi) Porosity of filling material may and tested. If either of the latter speci- not exceed 80 percent except that fill- mens fail to meet the requirements, ing material with a porosity of up to 92 the entire lot represented must be re- percent may be used when tested with jected. satisfactory results in accordance with CGA Pamphlet C–12. (2) Guided bend test. A root bend test (2) When the porosity of each cyl- specimen must be cut from the cylinder is not known, a cylinder taken at inder or welded test plate, used for the random from a lot of 200 or less must tensile test specified in paragraph be tested for porosity. If the test cyl- (n)(1) of this section. Specimens must inder fails, each cylinder in the lot be prepared and tested in accordance may be tested individually and those with and must meet the requirements cylinders that pass the test are accept- of CGA Pamphlet C–3. able. (3) Alternate guided-bend test. This (3) For filling that is molded and test may be used and must be as re- dried before insertion in cylinders, po- quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec- rosity test may be made on sample imen must be bent until the elongation block taken at random from material at the outer surface, adjacent to the to be used. root of the weld, between the lightly (4) The porosity of the filling mate- scribed gage lines-a to b, must be at rial must be determined; the amount of least 20 percent, except that this per- solvent at 70 °F for a cylinder: centage may be reduced for steels hav- (i) Having shell volumetric capacity ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000 above 20 pounds water capacity (nomi- psi, as provided in paragraph (m) of nal) may not exceed the following: this section. Maximum acetone (o) Rejected cylinders. Reheat treat- Percent porosity of filler solvent percent shell ment of rejected cylinders is author- capacity by volume ized. Subsequent thereto, cylinders 90 to 92 ...... 43.4 must pass all prescribed tests to be ac- 87 to 90 ...... 42.0 83 to 87 ...... 40.0 ceptable. Repair by welding is author- 80 to 83 ...... 38.6 ized. 75 to 80 ...... 36.2

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00083 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.61 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

Maximum acetone spector for fifteen years from the origi- Percent porosity of filler solvent percent shell nal test date of the cylinder. capacity by volume (s) Marking. (1) Tare weight of cyl- 70 to 75 ...... 33.8 inder, in pounds and ounces, must be 65 to 70 ...... 31.4 marked on the cylinder. (2) Cylinders, not completed, when (ii) Having volumetric capacity of 20 delivered must each be marked for pounds or less water capacity (nomi- identification of each lot of 200 or less. nal), may not exceed the following: (3) Markings must be stamped plainly and permanently in locations in ac- Maximum acetone Percent porosity of filler solvent percent shell cordance with the following: capacity by volume (i) On shoulders and top heads not 90 to 92 ...... 41.8 less than 0.087 inch thick; or 83 to 90 ...... 38.5 (ii) On neck, valve boss, valve protec- 80 to 83 ...... 37.1 tion sleeve, or similar part perma- 75 to 80 ...... 34.8 nently attached to the top end of cyl- 70 to 75 ...... 32.5 inder; or 65 to 70 ...... 30.2 (iii) On a plate of ferrous material attached to the top of the cylinder or (q) Tare weight. The tare weight is permanent part thereof; the plate must the combined weight of the cylinder be at least 1⁄16 inch thick, and must be proper, porous filling, valve, and sol- attached by welding, or by brazing at a vent, but without removable cap. temperature of at least 1,100 °F (r) Duties of inspector. In addition to throughout all edges of the plate. Suffi- the requirements of § 178.35, the inspec- cient space must be left on the plate to tor shall— provide for stamping at least four (4) (1) Certify chemical analyses of steel retest dates. used, signed by manufacturer thereof; also verify by check analyses, of sam- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as ples taken from each heat or from 1 out amended at 66 FR 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; of each lot of 200 or less plates, shells, 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003] or tubes used. (2) Verify compliance of cylinder § 178.61 Specification 4BW welded shells with all shell requirements, in- steel cylinders with electric-arc spect inside before closing in both ends, welded longitudinal seam. verify heat treatment as proper; obtain (a) Type, size and service pressure. A all samples for all tests and for check DOT 4BW cylinder is a welded type analyses, witness all tests; verify steel cylinder with a longitudinal elec- threads by gauge, report volumetric ca- tric-arc welded seam, a water capacity pacity and minimum thickness of wall (nominal) not over 1,000 pounds and a noted. service pressure at least 225 and not (3) Report percentage of each speci- over 500 psig gauge. Cylinders closed in fied alloying element in the steel. Pre- by spinning process are not authorized. pare report on manufacture of steel (b) Authorized steel. Steel used in the shells in form prescribed in § 178.35. construction of the cylinder must con- Furnish one copy to manufacturer and form to the following: three copies to the company that is to (1) The body of the cylinder must be complete the cylinders. constructed of steel conforming to the (4) Determine porosity of filling and limits specified in table 1 of appendix A tare weights; verify compliance of to this part. marking with prescribed requirements; (2) Material for heads must meet the obtain necessary copies of steel shell requirements of paragraph (b)(1) of this reports prescribed in paragraph (b) of section or be open hearth, electric or this section; and furnish complete test basic oxygen carbon steel of uniform reports required by this specification quality. Content percent may not ex- to the person who has completed the ceed the following: Carbon 0.25, Man- manufacturer of the cylinders and, ganese 0.60, Phosphorus 0.045, Sulfur upon request, to the purchaser. The 0.050. Heads must be hemispherical or test reports must be retained by the in- ellipsoidal in shape with a maximum

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00084 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.61

ratio of 2.1. If low carbon steel is used, each lot of 50 consecutively welded cyl- the thickness of such heads must be de- inders is spot radiographed. In addi- termined by using a maximum wall tion, one out of the first five cylinders stress of 24,000 p.s.i. in the formula de- welded following a shut down of weld- scribed in paragraph (f)(4) of this sec- ing operations exceeding four hours tion. must be spot radiographed. Spot (c) Identification of material. Material radiographs, when required, must be must be identified by any suitable made of a finished welded cylinder and method. must include the girth weld for 2 (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be inches in both directions from the manufactured using equipment and intersection of the longitudinal and processes adequate to ensure that each girth welds and include at least 6 cylinder produced conforms to the re- inches of the longitudinal weld. Max- quirements of this subpart and the fol- imum joint efficacy of 0.75 must be per- lowing: missible without radiography. (1) No defect is permitted that is (4) Welding procedures and operators likely to weaken the finished cylinder must be qualified in accordance with appreciably. A reasonably smooth and CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of uniform surface is required. Exposed this subchapter). bottom welds on cylinders over 18 (e) Welding of attachments. The at- inches long must be protected by tachment to the tops and bottoms only footrings. Minimum thickness of heads of cylinders by welding of neckrings, may not be less than 90 percent of the footrings, handles, bosses, pads and required thickness of the sidewall. valve protection rings is authorized Heads must be concave to pressure. provided that such attachments and (2) Circumferential seams must be by the portion of the container to which electric-arc welding. Joints must be they are attached are made of weldable butt with one member offset (joggle steel, the carbon content of which may butt) or lap with minimum overlap of not exceed 0.25 percent. at least four times nominal sheet (f) Wall thickness. For outside diame- thickness. ters over 6 inches the minimum wall (3) Longitudinal seams in shells must thickness must be 0.078 inch. For a cyl- conform to the following: inder with a wall thickness less than (i) Longitudinal electric-arc welded 0.100 inch, the ratio of tangential seams must be of the butt welded type. length to outside diameter may not ex- Welds must be made by a machine ceed 4 to1 (4:1). In any case the min- process including automatic feed and imum wall thickness must be such that welding guidance mechanisms. Longi- the wall stress calculated by the for- tudinal seams must have complete mula listed in paragraph (f)(4) of this joint penetration, and must be free section may not exceed the lesser value from undercuts, overlaps or abrupt of any of the following: ridges or valleys. Misalignment of mat- (1) The value referenced in paragraph ing butt edges may not exceed 1⁄6 of (b) of this section for the particular nominal sheet thickness or 1⁄32 inch material under consideration. whichever is less. All joints with nomi- (2) One-half of the minimum tensile nal sheet thickness up to and including strength of the material determined as 1⁄8 inch must be tightly butted. When required in paragraph (j) of this sec- nominal sheet thickness is greater tion. than 1⁄8 inch, the joint must be gapped (3) 35,000 psi. with maximum distance equal to one- (4) Stress must be calculated by the half the nominal sheet thickness or 1⁄32 following formula: inch whichever is less. Joint design, S = [2P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / [E(D2 ¥ d2)] preparation and fit-up must be such that requirements of this paragraph (d) where: are satisfied. S = wall stress, psi; P = service pressure, psig; (ii) Maximum joint efficiency must D = outside diameter, inches; be 1.0 when each seam is radiographed d = inside diameter, inches; completely. Maximum joint efficiency E = joint efficiency of the longitudinal seam must be 0.90 when one cylinder from (from paragraph (d) of this section).

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00085 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.61 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(g) Heat treatment. Each cylinder (3) Permanent volumetric expansion must be uniformly and properly heat may not exceed 10 percent of the total treated prior to test by the applicable volumetric expansion at test pressure. method referenced in Table 1 of appen- (4) Cylinders must be tested as fol- dix A to this part. Heat treatment lows: must be accomplished after all forming (i) At least 1 cylinder selected at ran- and welding operations. Heat treat- dom out of each lot of 200 or less must ment is not required after welding or be tested as outlined in paragraphs brazing of weldable low carbon parts to (i)(1), (i)(2), and (i)(3) of this section to attachments of similar material which at least two times service pressure. have been previously welded to the top (ii) All cylinders not tested as out- or bottom of cylinders and properly lined in paragraph (i)(4)(i) of this sec- heat treated, provided such subsequent tion must be examined under pressure welding or brazing does not produce a of at least two times service pressure temperature in excess of 400 °F in any and show no defect. part of the top or bottom material. (h) Openings in cylinders. Openings in (5) One finished cylinder selected at the cylinder must conform to the fol- random out of each lot of 500 or less lowing: successively produced must be (1) All openings must be in the heads hydrostatically tested to 4 times serv- or bases. ice pressure without bursting. (2) Openings in cylinders must be pro- (j) Physical tests. Cylinders must be vided with adequate fittings, bosses, or subjected to a physical test as follows: pads, integral with or securely at- (1) Specimens must be taken from tached to the cylinder by welding. one cylinder after heat treatment and (3) Threads must comply with the fol- chosen at random from each lot of 200 lowing: or less, as follows: (i) Threads must be clean cut and to (i) Body specimen. One specimen gauge. must be taken longitudinally from the (ii) Taper threads must be of length body section at least 90 degrees away not less than as specified for American from the weld. Standard Taper Pipe threads. (ii) Head specimen. One specimen (iii) Straight threads, having at least must be taken from either head on a 4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and cylinder when both heads are made of calculated shear strength at least 10 the same material. However, if the two times the test pressure of the cylinder; heads are made of differing materials, gaskets required, adequate to prevent a specimen must be taken from each leakage. head. (4) Closure of fittings, boss or pads (iii) If due to welded attachments on must be adequate to prevent leakage. the top head there is insufficient sur- (i) Hydrostatic test. Cylinders must face from which to take a specimen, it withstand a hydrostatic test, as fol- may be taken from a representative lows: head of the same heat treatment as the (1) The test must be by water-jacket, test cylinder. or other suitable method, operated so as to obtain accurate data. The pres- (2) Specimens must conform to the sure gauge must permit readings to an following: accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a gauge must permit readings of total width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge volumetric expansion to an accuracy length of 2 inches with a width not either of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centi- over 11⁄2 inches, or a gauge length at meter. least 24 times thickness with a width (2) Pressure must be maintained for not over 6 times thickness is author- at least 30 seconds and sufficiently ized when a cylinder wall is not over 3⁄16 longer to ensure complete expansion. inch thick. Any internal pressure applied after (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip heat treatment and previous to the of- ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends ficial test may not exceed 90 percent of may be flattened to within 1 inch of the test pressure. each end of the reduced section.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00086 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.61

(iii) When size of the cylinder does (l) Tests of welds. Welds must be sub- not permit securing straight speci- jected to the following tests: mens, the specimens may be taken in (1) Tensile test. A specimen must be any location or direction and may be cut from one cylinder of each lot of 200 straightened or flattened cold, by pres- or less. The specimen must be taken sure only, not by blows when speci- from across the longitudinal seam and mens are so taken and prepared, the in- must be prepared and tested in accord- spector’s report must show in connec- ance with and must meet the require- tion with record of physical tests de- ments of CGA Pamphlet C–3. tailed information in regard to such (2) Guided bend test. A root test speci- specimens. men must be cut from the cylinder (iv) Heating of a specimen for any used for the tensile test specified in purpose is not authorized. paragraph (l)(1) of this section. Speci- (3) The yield strength in tension mens must be taken from across the must be the stress corresponding to a permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the longitudinal seam and must be pre- gauge length. The following conditions pared and tested in accordance with apply: and must meet the requirements of (i) The yield strength must be deter- CGA Pamphlet C–3. mined by either the ‘‘off-set’’ method (3) Alternate guided bend test. This or the ‘‘extension under load’’ method test may be used and must be as re- as prescribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see quired by CGA Pamphlet C–3. The spec- § 171.7 of this subchapter). imen must be bent until the elongation (ii) In using the ‘‘extension under at the outer surface, adjacent to the load’’ method, the total strain (or ‘‘ex- root of the weld, between the lightly tension under load’’), corresponding to scribed gauge lines a to b, must be at the stress at which the 0.2-percent per- least 20 percent, except that this permanent strain occurs may be deter- centage may be reduced for steels hav- mined with sufficient accuracy by cal- ing a tensile strength in excess of 50,000 culating the elastic extension of the psi, as provided in paragraph (k) of this gauge length under appropriate load section. and adding thereto 0.2 percent of the (m) Radiographic examination. Welds gauge length. Elastic extension cal- of the cylinders must be subjected to a culations must be based on an elastic radiographic examination as follows: modulus of 30,000,000. In the event of (1) Radiographic inspection must controversy, the entire stress-strain conform to the techniques and accept- diagram must be plotted and the yield ability criteria set forth in CGA Pam- strength determined from the 0.2-per- phlet C–3. When fluoroscopic inspection cent offset. is used, permanent film records need (iii) For the purpose of strain meas- not be retained. urement, the initial strain reference must be set while the specimen is (2) Should spot radiographic exam- under a stress of 12,000 psi and the ination fail to meet the requirements strain indicator reading being set at of paragraph (m)(1) of this section, two the calculated corresponding strain. additional welds from the same lot of (iv) Cross-head speed of the testing 50 cylinders or less must be examined, and if either of these fail to meet the machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per minute during yield strength deter- requirements, each cylinder must be mination. examined as previously outlined; only (k) Elongation. Physical test speci- those passing are acceptable. mens must show at least a 40 percent (n) Rejected cylinders. (1) Unless oth- elongation for a 2-inch gauge length or erwise stated, if a sample cylinder or at least a 20 percent elongation in specimen taken from a lot of cylinders other cases. Except that these elon- fails the prescribed test, then two addi- gation percentages may be reduced nu- tional specimens must be selected from merically by 2 for 2-inch specimens and the same lot and subjected to the pre- by 1 in other cases for each 7,500 psi in- scribed test. If either of these fails the crement of tensile strength above 50,000 test, then the entire lot must be re- psi to a maximum of four increments. jected.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00087 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.65 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(2) Reheat treatment of rejected cyl- (2) Test pressure. The minimum test inders is authorized. Subsequent there- pressure is the maximum pressure of to, cylinders must pass all prescribed contents at 130 °F or 180 p.s.i.g. which- tests to be acceptable. Repair of welded ever is greater. seams by welding is authorized pro- (3) Pressure of contents. The term vided that all defective metal is cut ‘‘pressure of contents’’ as used in this away and the joint is rewelded as pre- specification means the total pressure scribed for original welded joints. of all the materials to be shipped in the (o) Markings. Markings must be cylinder. stamped plainly and permanently in (b) Material; steel or aluminum. The any of the following locations on the cylinder must be constructed of either cylinder: steel or aluminum conforming to the (1) On shoulders and top heads when following requirements: they are not less than 0.087-inch thick. (1) Steel. (i) The steel analysis must (2) On a metal plate attached to the conform to the following: top of the cylinder or permanent part thereof; sufficient space must be left on Ladle Check analysis analysis the plate to provide for stamping at least six retest dates; the plate must be Carbon, maximum percent ...... 0.12 0.15 at least 1⁄16-inch thick and must be at- Phosphorus, maximum percent ...... 04 .05 tached by welding, or by brazing. The Sulfur, maximum percent ...... 05 .06 brazing rod is to melt at a temperature (ii) For a cylinder made of seamless of 1100 °F Welding or brazing must be steel tubing with integrally formed along all the edges of the plate. ends, hot drawn, and finished, content (3) On the neck, valve boss, valve pro- percent for the following may not ex- tection sleeve, or similar part perma- ceed: Carbon, 0.55; phosphorous, 0.045; nently attached to the top of the cyl- sulfur, 0.050. inder. (iii) For non-heat treated welded (4) On the footring permanently at- steel cylinders, adequately killed deep tached to the cylinder, provided the drawing quality steel is required. water capacity of the cylinder does not exceed 25 pounds. (iv) Longitudinal or helical welded (p) Inspector’s report. In addition to cylinders are not authorized for service the information required by § 178.35, the pressures in excess of 500 p.s.i.g. inspector’s report must indicate the (2) Aluminum. Aluminum is not au- type and amount of radiography. thorized for service pressures in excess of 500 psig. The analysis of the alu- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as minum must conform to the Aluminum amended at 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR Association standard for alloys 1060, 45386, 45388, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 6, 1100, 1170, 3003, 5052, 5086, 5154, 6061, and 2002; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 78 FR 6063, as specified in its publication en- 60754, Oct. 2, 2013] titled ‘‘Aluminum Standards and Data’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- § 178.65 Specification 39 non-reusable chapter). (non-refillable) cylinders. (3) Material with seams, cracks, lam- (a) Type, size, service pressure, and test inations, or other injurious defects not pressure. A DOT 39 cylinder is a seam- permitted. less, welded, or brazed cylinder with a (4) Material used must be identified service pressure not to exceed 80 per- by any suitable method. cent of the test pressure. Spherical (c) Manufacture. (1) General manufac- pressure vessels are authorized and turing requirements are as follows: covered by references to cylinders in (i) The surface finish must be uni- this specification. form and reasonably smooth. (1) Size limitation. Maximum water ca- (ii) Inside surfaces must be clean, pacity may not exceed: (i) 55 pounds dry, and free of loose particles. (1,526 cubic inches) for a service pres- (iii) No defect of any kind is per- sure of 500 p.s.i.g. or less, and (ii) 10 mitted if it is likely to weaken a fin- pounds (277 cubic inches) for a service ished cylinder. pressure in excess of 500 p.s.i.g. (2) Requirements for seams:

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00088 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.65

(i) Brazing is not authorized on alu- D = Outside diameter, in inches; minum cylinders. t = Minimum wall thickness, in inches. (ii) Brazing material must have a (e) Openings and attachments. Open- melting point of not lower than 1,000 ings and attachments must conform to ° F. the following: (iii) Brazed seams must be assembled (1) Openings and attachments are with proper fit to ensure complete pen- permitted on heads only. etration of the brazing material (2) All openings and their reinforce- throughout the brazed joint. ments must be within an imaginary (iv) Minimum width of brazed joints circle, concentric to the axis of the cyl- must be at least four times the thick- inder. The diameter of the circle may ness of the shell wall. not exceed 80 percent of the outside di- (v) Brazed seams must have design ameter of the cylinder. The plane of strength equal to or greater than 1.5 the circle must be parallel to the plane times the minimum strength of the of a circumferential weld and normal shell wall. to the long axis of the cylinder. (vi) Welded seams must be properly (3) Unless a head has adequate thick- aligned and welded by a method that ness, each opening must be reinforced provides clean, uniform joints with by a securely attached fitting, boss, adequate penetration. pad, collar, or other suitable means. (vii) Welded joints must have a strength equal to or greater than the (4) Material used for welded openings minimum strength of the shell mate- and attachments must be of weldable rial in the finished cylinder. quality and compatible with the mate- (3) Attachments to the cylinder are rial of the cylinder. permitted by any means which will not (f) Pressure tests. (1) Each cylinder be detrimental to the integrity of the must be tested at an internal pressure cylinder. Welding or brazing of attach- of at least the test pressure and must ments to the cylinder must be com- be held at that pressure for at least 30 pleted prior to all pressure tests. seconds. (4) Welding procedures and operators (i) The leakage test must be con- must be qualified in accordance with ducted by submersion under water or CGA Pamphlet C–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of by some other method that will be this subchapter). equally sensitive. (d) Wall thickness. The minimum wall (ii) If the cylinder leaks, evidences thickness must be such that the wall visible distortion, or any other defect, stress at test pressure does not exceed while under test, it must be rejected the yield strength of the material of (see paragraph (h) of this section). the finished cylinder wall. Calculations (2) One cylinder taken from the be- must be made by the following for- ginning of each lot, and one from each mulas: 1,000 or less successively produced (1) Calculation of the stress for cyl- within the lot thereafter, must be inders must be made by the following hydrostatically tested to destruction. formula: The entire lot must be rejected (see paragraph (h) of this section) if: 2 2 2 ¥ 2 S = [P(1.3D + 0.4d )] / (D d ) (i) A failure occurs at a gage pressure Where: less than 2.0 times the test pressure; S = Wall stress, in psi; (ii) A failure initiates in a braze or a P = Test pressure in psig; weld or the heat affected zone thereof; D = Outside diameter, in inches; (iii) A failure is other than in the d = Inside diameter, in inches. sidewall of a cylinder longitudinal with (2) Calculation of the stress for its long axis; or spheres must be made by the following (iv) In a sphere, a failure occurs in formula: any opening, reinforcement, or at a point of attachment. S = PD / 4t (3) A ‘‘lot’’ is defined as the quantity Where: of cylinders successively produced per S = Wall stress, in psi; production shift (not exceeding 10 P = Test pressure i psig; hours) having identical size, design,

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00089 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.68 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

construction, material, heat treat- (2) Required markings are as follows: ment, finish, and quality. (i) DOT-39. (g) Flattening test. One cylinder must (ii) NRC. be taken from the beginning of produc- (iii) The service pressure. tion of each lot (as defined in para- (iv) The test pressure. graph (f)(3) of this section) and sub- (v) The registration number (M****) jected to a flattening test as follows: of the manufacturer. (1) The flattening test must be made (vi) The lot number. on a cylinder that has been tested at (vii) The date of manufacture if the test pressure. lot number does not establish the date (2) A ring taken from a cylinder may of manufacture. be flattened as an alternative to a test (viii) With one of the following state- on a complete cylinder. The test ring ments: may not include the heat affected zone (A) For cylinders manufactured prior or any weld. However, for a sphere, the to October 1, 1996: ‘‘Federal law forbids test ring may include the circumferen- transportation if refilled-penalty up to tial weld if it is located at a 45 degree $25,000 fine and 5 years imprisonment angle to the ring, ±5 degrees. (49 U.S.C. 1809)’’ or ‘‘Federal law for- (3) The flattening must be between 60 bids transportation if refilled-penalty degrees included-angle, wedge shaped up to $500,000 fine and 5 years imprison- knife edges, rounded to a 0.5 inch ra- ment (49 U.S.C. 5124).’’ dius. (B) For cylinders manufactured on or (4) Cylinders and test rings may not after October 1, 1996: ‘‘Federal law for- crack when flattened so that their bids transportation if refilled-penalty outer surfaces are not more than six up to $500,000 fine and 5 years imprison- times wall thickness apart when made ment (49 U.S.C. 5124).’’ of steel or not more than ten times (3) The markings required by para- wall thickness apart when made of alu- graphs (i)(2)(i) through (i)(2)(v) of this minum. section must be in numbers and letters (5) If any cylinder or ring cracks at least 1⁄8 inch high and displayed se- when subjected to the specified flat- quentially. For example: tening test, the lot of cylinders rep- DOT-39 NRC 250/500 M1001. resented by the test must be rejected (see paragraph (h) of this section). (4) No person may mark any cylinder (h) Rejected cylinders. Rejected cyl- with the specification identification inders must conform to the following ‘‘DOT-39’’ unless it was manufactured requirements: in compliance with the requirements of (1) If the cause for rejection of a lot this section and its manufacturer has a is determinable, and if by test or in- registration number (M****) from the spection defective cylinders are elimi- Associate Administrator. nated from the lot, the remaining cyl- [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as inders must be qualified as a new lot amended at 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR under paragraphs (f) and (g) of this sec- 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; tion. 68 FR 75748, 75749, Dec. 31, 2003] (2) Repairs to welds are permitted. Following repair, a cylinder must pass § 178.68 Specification 4E welded alu- the pressure test specified in paragraph minum cylinders. (f) of this section. (a) Type, size and service pressure. A (3) If a cylinder made from seamless DOT 4E cylinder is a welded aluminum steel tubing fails the flattening test de- cylinder with a water capacity (nomi- scribed in paragraph (g) of this section, nal) of not over 1,000 pounds and a serv- suitable uniform heat treatment must ice pressure of at least 225 to not over be used on each cylinder in the lot. All 500 psig. The cylinder must be con- prescribed tests must be performed structed of not more than two seamless subsequent to this heat treatment. drawn shells with no more than one (i) Markings. (1) The markings re- circumferential weld. The circumferen- quired by this section must be durable tial weld may not be closer to the point and waterproof. The requirements of of tangency of the cylindrical portion § 178.35(h) do not apply to this section. with the shoulder than 20 times the

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00090 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.68

cylinder wall thickness. Cylinders or (ii) One-half of the minimum tensile shells closed in by spinning process and strength of the material as required in cylinders with longitudinal seams are paragraph (j) of this section. not authorized. (2) Calculation must be made by the (b) Authorized material. The cylinder following formula: must be constructed of aluminum of S = [P(1.3D2 + 0.4d2)] / (D2 ¥ d2) uniform quality. The following chemical analyses are authorized: Where: S = wall stress in psi; TABLE 1—AUTHORIZED MATERIALS P = minimum test pressure prescribed for water jacket test; Chemical analysis—limits in Designation D = outside diameter in inches; percent 5154 1 d = inside diameter in inches. Iron plus silicon ...... 0.45 maximum. Copper ...... 0.10 maximum. (3) Minimum thickness of heads and Manganese ...... 0.10 maximum. bottoms may not be less than the min- Magnesium ...... 3.10/3.90. imum required thickness of the side Chromium ...... 0.15/0.35. wall. Zinc ...... 0.20 maximum. Titanium ...... 0.20 maximum. (g) Opening in cylinder. Openings in Others, each ...... 0.05 maximum. cylinders must conform to the fol- Others, total ...... 0.15 maximum. lowing: Aluminum ...... remainder. (1) All openings must be in the heads 1 Analysis must regularly be made only for the elements or bases. specifically mentioned in this table. If, however, the presence of other elements is indicated in the course of routine anal- (2) Each opening in cylinders, except ysis, further analysis should be made to determine conform- those for safety devices, must be pro- ance with the limits specified for other elements. vided with a fitting, boss, or pad, se- (c) Identification. Material must be curely attached to cylinder by welding identified by any suitable method that by inert gas shielded arc process or by will identify the alloy and manufactur- threads. If threads are used, they must er’s lot number. comply with the following: (d) Manufacture. Cylinders must be (i) Threads must be clean-cut, even, manufactured using equipment and without checks and cut to gauge. processes adequate to ensure that each (ii) Taper threads to be of length not cylinder produced conforms to the re- less than as specified for American quirements of this subpart. No defect is Standard taper pipe threads. permitted that is likely to weaken the (iii) Straight threads, having at least finished cylinder appreciably. A rea- 4 engaged threads, to have tight fit and sonably smooth and uniform surface calculated shear strength at least 10 finish is required. All welding must be times the test pressure of the cylinder; by the gas shielded arc process. gaskets required, adequate to prevent (e) Welding. The attachment to the leakage. tops and bottoms only of cylinders by (3) Closure of a fitting, boss, or pad welding of neckrings or flanges, must be adequate to prevent leakage. footrings, handles, bosses and pads and (h) Hydrostatic test. Each cylinder valve protection rings is authorized. must successfully withstand a hydro- However, such attachments and the static test, as follows: portion of the cylinder to which it is (1) The test must be by water jacket, attached must be made of weldable alu- or other suitable method, operated so minum alloys. as to obtain accurate data. The pres- (f) Wall thickness. The wall thickness sure gauge must permit reading to an of the cylinder must conform to the accuracy of 1 percent. The expansion following: gauge must permit a reading of the (1) The minimum wall thickness of total expansion to an accuracy either the cylinder must be 0.140 inch. In any of 1 percent or 0.1 cubic centimeter. case, the minimum wall thickness (2) Pressure of 2 times service pres- must be such that calculated wall sure must be maintained for at least 30 stress at twice service pressure may seconds and sufficiently longer to in- not exceed the lesser value of either of sure complete expansion. Any internal the following: pressure applied previous to the official (i) 20,000 psi. test may not exceed 90 percent of the

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00091 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.68 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

test pressure. If, due to failure of the and reduction of area of material as test apparatus, the test pressure can- follows: not be maintained, the test may be re- (1) The test is required on 2 speci- peated at a pressure increased by 10 mens cut from one cylinder or part percent over the pressure otherwise thereof taken at random out of each specified. lot of 200 or less. (3) Permanent volumetric expansion (2) Specimens must conform to the may not exceed 12 percent of total vol- following: umetric expansion at test pressure. (i) A gauge length of 8 inches with a (4) Cylinders having a calculated wall width not over 11⁄2 inches, a gauge stress of 18,000 psi or less at test pres- length of 2 inches with a width not sure may be tested as follows: over 11⁄2 inches. (i) At least one cylinder selected at (ii) The specimen, exclusive of grip random out of each lot of 200 or less ends, may not be flattened. Grip ends must be tested in accordance with may be flattened to within 1 inch of paragraphs (h)(1), (h)(2), and (h)(3) of each end of the reduced section. this section. (iii) When size of cylinder does not (ii) All cylinders not tested as pro- permit securing straight specimens, vided in paragraph (h)(4)(i) of this sec- the specimens may be taken in any lo- tion must be examined under pressure cation or direction and may be of at least 2 times service pressure and straightened or flattened cold, by pres- show no defect. sure only, not by blows; when speci- (5) One finished cylinder selected at mens are so taken and prepared, the in- random out of each lot of 1,000 or less spector’s report must show in connec- must be hydrostatically tested to 4 tion with record of physical test de- times the service pressure without tailed information in regard to such bursting. Inability to meet this re- specimens. quirement must result in rejection of (iv) Heating of a specimen for any the lot. purpose is not authorized. (i) Flattening test. After hydrostatic (3) The yield strength in tension testing, a flattening test is required on must be the stress corresponding to a one section of a cylinder, taken at ran- permanent strain of 0.2 percent of the dom out of each lot of 200 or less as fol- gauge length. The following conditions lows: apply: (1) If the weld is not at midlength of (i) The yield strength must be deter- the cylinder, the test section must be mined by the ‘‘offset’’ method as pre- no less in width than 30 times the cyl- scribed in ASTM E 8 (IBR, see § 171.7 of inder wall thickness. The weld must be this subchapter). in the center of the section. Weld rein- (ii) Cross-head speed of the testing forcement must be removed by machin- machine may not exceed 1⁄8 inch per ing or grinding so that the weld is flush minute during yield strength deter- with the exterior of the parent metal. mination. There must be no evidence of cracking (k) Acceptable results for physical tests. in the sample when it is flattened be- An acceptable result of the physical tween flat plates to no more than 6 test requires an elongation to at least times the wall thickness. 7 percent and yield strength not over 80 (2) If the weld is at midlength of the percent of tensile strength. cylinder, the test may be made as spec- (l) Weld tests. Welds of the cylinder ified in paragraph (i)(1) of this section are required to successfully pass the or must be made between wedge shaped following tests: knife edges (60° angle) rounded to a 1⁄2 (1) Reduced section tensile test. A speci- inch radius. There must be no evidence men must be cut from the cylinder of cracking in the sample when it is used for the physical tests specified in flattened to no more than 6 times the paragraph (j) of this section. The speci- wall thickness. men must be taken from across the (j) Physical test. A physical test must seam, edges must be parallel for a dis- be conducted to determine yield tance of approximately 2 inches on ei- strength, tensile strength, elongation, ther side of the weld. The specimen

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00092 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.69

must be fractured in tension. The ap- (m) Rejected cylinders. Repair of weld- parent breaking stress calculated on ed seams is authorized. Acceptable cyl- the minimum wall thickness must be inders must pass all prescribed tests. at least equal to 2 times the stress cal- (n) Inspector’s report. In addition to culated under paragraph (f)(2) of this the information required by § 178.35, the section, and in addition must have an record of chemical analyses must also actual breaking stress of at least 30,000 include applicable information on iron, psi. Should this specimen fail to meet titanium, zinc, and magnesium used in the requirements, specimens may be the construction of the cylinder. taken from 2 additional cylinders from [Amdt. 178–114, 61 FR 25942, May 23, 1996, as the same lot and tested. If either of the amended at 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR latter specimens fails to meet require- 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002; ments, the entire lot represented must 68 FR 75748, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, Sept. be rejected. 7, 2004; 74 FR 16143, Apr. 9, 2009] (2) Guided bend test. A bend test specimen must be cut from the cylinder § 178.69 Responsibilities and require- used for the physical test specified in ments for manufacturers of UN paragraph (j) of this section. Specimen pressure receptacles. must be taken across the seam, must (a) Each manufacturer of a UN pres- be a minimum of 11⁄2 inches wide, edges sure receptacle marked with ‘‘USA’’ as must be parallel and rounded with a a country of approval must comply file, and back-up strip, if used, must be with the requirements in this section. removed by machining. The specimen The manufacturer must maintain a shall be tested as follows: quality system, obtain an approval for (i) The specimen must be bent to re- each initial pressure receptacle design fusal in the guided bend test jig as il- type, and ensure that all production of lustrated in paragraph 6.10 of CGA C–3 UN pressure receptacles meets the ap- (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). The plicable requirements. root of the weld (inside surface of the (1) Quality system. The manufacturer cylinder) must be located away from of a UN pressure receptacle must have the ram of the jig. The specimen must its quality system approved by the As- not show a crack or other open defect sociate Administrator. The quality sys- exceeding 1⁄8 inch in any direction upon tem will initially be assessed through completion of the test. Should this an audit by the Associate Adminis- specimen fail to meet the require- trator or his or her representative to ments, specimens may be taken from determine whether it meets the re- each of 2 additional cylinders from the quirements of this section. The Asso- same lot and tested. If either of the lat- ciate Administrator will notify the ter specimens fails to meet require- manufacturer in writing of the results ments, the entire lot represented must of the audit. The notification will con- be rejected. tain the conclusions of the audit and (ii) Alternatively, the specimen may any corrective action required. The As- be tested in a guided bend test jig as il- sociate Administrator may perform lustrated in Figure 12.1 of The Alu- periodic audits to ensure that the man- minum Association’s 2002 publication, ufacturer operates in accordance with ‘‘Welding Aluminum: Theory and Prac- the quality system. Reports of periodic tice.’’ The root of the weld (inside sur- audits will be provided to the manufac- face of the cylinder) must be located turer. The manufacturer must bear the away from the mandrel of the jig. No cost of audits. specimen must show a crack or other (2) Quality system documentation. The open defect exceeding 1⁄8 inch in any di- manufacturer must be able to dem- rection upon completion of the test. onstrate a documented quality system. Should this specimen fail to meet the Management must review the adequacy requirements, specimens may be taken of the quality system to assure that it from each of 2 additional cylinders is effective and conforms to the re- from the same lot and tested. If either quirements in § 178.70. The quality sys- of the latter specimens fails to meet tem records must be in English and requirements, the entire lot rep- must include detailed descriptions of resented must be rejected. the following:

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00093 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.70 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(i) The organizational structure and § 178.70 Approval of UN pressure re- responsibilities of personnel with receptacles. gard to design and product quality; (a) Initial design-type approval. The (ii) The design control and design manufacturer of a UN pressure recep- verification techniques, processes, and tacle must obtain an initial design procedures used when designing the type approval from the Associate Ad- pressure receptacles; ministrator. The initial design type ap- (iii) The relevant procedures for pres- proval must be of the pressure recep- sure receptacle manufacturing, quality tacle design as it is intended to be pro- control, quality assurance, and process operation instructions; duced. The manufacturer must arrange (iv) Inspection and testing meth- for an IIA, approved by the Associate odologies, measuring and testing equip- Administrator in accordance with sub- ment, and calibration data; part I of part 107 of this chapter, to (v) The process for meeting customer perform a pre-audit of its pressure re- requirements; ceptacle manufacturing operation prior (vi) The process for document control to having an audit conducted by the and document revision; Associate Administrator or his des- (vii) The system for controlling non- ignee. conforming material and records, in- (b) IIA pre-audit. The manufacturer cluding procedures for identification, must submit an application for initial segregation, and disposition; design type approval to the IIA for re- (viii) Production, processing and fab- view. The IIA will examine the manu- rication, including purchased compo- facturer’s application for initial design nents, in-process and final materials; type approval for completeness. An in- and complete application will be returned (ix) Training programs for relevant to the manufacturer with an expla- personnel. nation. If an application is complete, (3) Maintenance of quality system. The the IIA will review all technical docu- manufacturer must maintain the qual- mentation, including drawings and cal- ity system as approved by the Asso- culations, to verify that the design ciate Administrator. The manufacturer meets all requirements of the applica- shall notify the Associate Adminis- ble UN pressure receptacle standard trator of any intended changes to the and specification requirements. If the approved quality system prior to mak- technical documentation shows that ing the change. The Associate Adminis- the pressure receptacle prototype de- trator will evaluate the proposed sign conforms to the applicable stand- change to determine whether the ards and requirements in § 178.70, the amended quality system will satisfy manufacturer will fabricate a proto- the requirements. The Associate Ad- type lot of pressure receptacles in con- ministrator will notify the manufac- formance with the technical docu- turer of the findings. mentation representative of the design. (b) Design type approvals. The manu- The IIA will verify that the prototype facturer must have each pressure re- lot conforms to the applicable require- ceptacle design type reviewed by an IIA ments by selecting pressure receptacles and approved by the Associate Admin- and witnessing their testing. After pro- istrator in accordance with § 178.70. A totype testing has been satisfactorily cylinder is considered to be of a new completed, showing the pressure recep- design, compared with an existing ap- tacles fully conform to all applicable proved design, as stated in the applica- specification requirements, the certi- ble ISO design, construction and test- fying IIA must prepare a letter of rec- ing standard. ommendation and a design type ap- (c) Production inspection and certifi- proval certificate. The design type ap- cation. The manufacturer must ensure proval certificate must contain the that each UN pressure receptacle is in- name and address of the manufacturer spected and certified in accordance and the IIA certifying the design type, with § 178.71. the test results, chemical analyses, lot [71 FR 33885, June 12, 2006] identification, and all other supporting

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00094 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.70

data specified in the applicable ISO de- plications or compatibility with hydro- sign, construction and testing stand- gen embrittlement gases. ard. The IIA must provide the certifi- (d) Modification of approved pressure cate and documentation to the manu- receptacle design type. Modification of facturer. an approved UN pressure receptacle de- (c) Application for initial design type sign type is not authorized without the approval. If the pre-audit is found satis- approval of the Associate Adminis- factory by the IIA, the manufacturer trator. A manufacturer seeking modi- will submit the letter of recommenda- fication of an approved UN pressure re- tion from the IIA and an application ceptacle design type may be required for design type approval to the Asso- to submit design qualification test ciate Administrator. An application for data to the Associate Administrator initial design type approval must be before production. An audit may be re- submitted for each manufacturing fa- quired as part of the process to modify cility. The application must be in an approval. English and, at a minimum, contain (e) Responsibilities of the production the following information: IIA. The production IIA is responsible (1) The name and address of the man- for ensuring that each pressure recep- ufacturing facility. If the application is tacle conforms to the design type ap- submitted by an authorized representa- proval. The production IIA must per- tive on behalf of the manufacturer, the form the following functions: application must include the represent- (1) Witness all inspections and tests ative’s name and address. specified in the UN pressure receptacle (2) The name and title of the indi- standard to ensure compliance with the vidual responsible for the manufactur- standard and that the procedures er’s quality system, as required by adopted by the manufacturer meet the § 178.69. requirements of the standard; (3) The designation of the pressure (2) Verify that the production inspec- receptacle and the relevant pressure re- tions were performed in accordance ceptacle standard. with this section; (4) Details of any refusal of approval (3) Select UN pressure receptacles of a similar application by a designated from a prototype production lot and approval agency of another country. witness testing as required for the de- (5) The name and address of the pro- sign type approval; duction IIA that will perform the func- (4) Ensure that the various design tions prescribed in paragraph (e) of this type approval examinations and tests section. The IIA must be approved in are performed accurately; writing by the Associate Administrator (5) Verify that each pressure recep- in accordance with subpart I of part 107 tacle is marked in accordance with the of this chapter. applicable requirements in § 178.71; and (6) Documentation on the manufac- (6) Furnish complete test reports to turing facility as specified in § 178.69. the manufacturer and upon request to (7) Design specifications and manu- the purchaser. The test reports and facturing drawings, showing compo- certificate of compliance must be re- nents and subassemblies if relevant, de- tained by the IIA for at least 20 years sign calculations, and material speci- from the original test date of the pres- fications necessary to verify compli- sure receptacles. ance with the applicable pressure re- (f) Production inspection audit and cer- ceptacle design standard. tification. (1) If the application, design (8) Manufacturing procedures and drawing and quality control documents any applicable standards that describe are found satisfactory, PHMSA will in detail the manufacturing processes schedule an on-site audit of the pres- and control. sure receptacle manufacturer’s quality (9) Design type approval test reports system, manufacturing processes, in- detailing the results of examinations spections, and test procedures. and tests conducted in accordance with (2) During the audit, the manufac- the relevant pressure receptacle stand- turer will be required to produce pres- ard, to include any additional data, sure receptacles to the technical stand- such as suitability for underwater ap- ards for which approval is sought.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00095 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(3) The production IIA must witness ciate Administrator’s decision on re- the required inspections and consideration; verifications on the pressure recep- (ii) State in detail any alleged errors tacles during the production run. The of fact and law; IIA selected by the manufacturer for (iii) Enclose any additional informa- production inspection and testing may tion needed to support the appeal; and be different from the IIA who per- (iv) State in detail the modification formed the design type approval of the final decision sought. verifications. (2) The PHMSA Administrator will (4) If the procedures and controls are grant or deny the relief and inform the deemed acceptable, test sample pres- appellant in writing of the decision. sure receptacles will be selected at ran- PHMSA Administrator’s decision is the dom from the production lot and sent final administrative action. to a laboratory designated by the Asso- (j) Termination of a design type ap- ciate Administrator for verification proval certificate. (1) The Associate Ad- testing. ministrator may terminate an approval (5) If the pressure receptacle test certificate issue under this section if it samples are found to conform to all the is determined that, because of a change applicable requirements, the Associate in circumstances, the approval no Administrator will issue approvals to longer is needed or no longer would be the manufacturer and the production granted if applied for; information IIA to authorize the manufacture of upon which the approval was based is the pressure receptacles. The approved fraudulent or substantially erroneous; design type approval certificate will be or termination of the approval is nec- returned to the manufacturer. essary to adequately protect against risks to life and property. (6) Upon the receipt of the approved (2) Before an approval is terminated, design type approval certificate from the Associate Administrator will pro- the Associate Administrator, the pres- vide the manufacturer and the ap- sure receptacle manufacturer must proval agency— sign the certificate. (i) Written notice of the facts or con- (g) Recordkeeping. The production IIA duct believed to warrant the with- and the manufacturer must retain a drawal; copy of the design type approval cer- (ii) Opportunity to submit oral and tificate and certificate of compliance written evidence, and records for at least 20 years. (iii) Opportunity to demonstrate or (h) Denial of design type application. If achieve compliance with the applica- the design type application is denied, tion requirement. the Associate Administrator will no- (3) If the Associate Administrator de- tify the applicant in writing and pro- termines that a certificate of approval vide the reason for the denial. The must be withdrawn to preclude a sig- manufacturer may request that the As- nificant and imminent adverse affect sociate Administrator reconsider the on public safety, the procedures in decision. The application request paragraph (j)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this sec- must— tion need not be provided prior to with- (1) Be written in English and filed drawal of the approval, but shall be within 60 days of receipt of the deci- provided as soon as practicable there- sion; after. (2) State in detail any alleged errors [71 FR 33886, June 12, 2006, as amended at 71 of fact and law; and FR 54397, Sept. 14, 2006; 77 FR 60943, Oct. 5, (3) Enclose any additional informa- 2012] tion needed to support the request to reconsider. § 178.71 Specifications for UN pressure (i) Appeal. (1) A manufacturer whose receptacles. reconsideration request is denied may (a) General. Each UN pressure recep- appeal to the PHMSA Administrator. tacle must meet the requirements of The appeal must— this section. UN pressure receptacles (i) Be written in English and filed and service equipment constructed ac- within 60 days of receipt of the Asso- cording to the standards applicable at

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00096 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.71

the date of manufacture may continue valves manufactured until December in use subject to the continuing quali- 31, 2020, ISO 13340:2001(E) (IBR, see fication and maintenance provisions of § 171.7 of this subchapter), and be pro- part 180 of this subchapter. Require- tected as specified in § 173.301b(f) of this ments for approval, qualification, subchapter. Until December 31, 2020, maintenance, and testing are contained the manufacture of a valve conforming in § 178.70, and subpart C of part 180 of to the requirements in ISO 10297:2006(E) this subchapter. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) is (b) Definitions. The following defini- authorized. Until December 31, 2008, tions apply for the purposes of design the manufacture of a valve conforming and construction of UN pressure recep- to the requirements in ISO 10297:1999(E) tacles under this subpart: (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) is Alternative arrangement means an ap- authorized. Additionally, valves must proval granted by the Associate Ad- be initially inspected and tested in ac- ministrator for a MEGC that has been cordance with ISO 14246:2014(E) Gas designed, constructed or tested to the cylinders—Cylinder valves—Manufac- technical requirements or testing turing tests and examinations (IBR, see methods other than those specified for § 171.7 of this subchapter). UN pressure receptacles in part 178 or (3) UN pressure receptacles that can- part 180 of this subchapter. not be handled manually or rolled, Bundle of cylinders. See § 171.8 of this must be equipped with devices (e.g., subchapter. skids, rings, straps) ensuring that they Design type means a pressure recep- can be safely handled by mechanical tacle design as specified by a particular means and so arranged as not to impair pressure receptacle standard. the strength of, nor cause undue Design type approval means an overall stresses, in the pressure receptacle. approval of the manufacturer’s quality (4) Pressure receptacles filled by vol- system and design type of each pres- ume must be equipped with a level insure receptacle to be produced within dicator. the manufacturer’s facility. (e) Bundles of cylinders. UN pressure UN tube. See § 171.8 of this subchapter. receptacles assembled in bundles must (c) Following the final heat treat- be structurally supported and held to- ment, all cylinders, except those se- gether as a unit and secured in a man- lected for batch testing must be sub- ner that prevents movement in rela- jected to a proof pressure or a hydrau- tion to the structural assembly and lic volumetric expansion test. movement that would result in the (d) Service equipment. (1) Except for concentration of harmful local pressure relief devices, UN pressure re- stresses. The frame design must ensure ceptacle equipment, including valves, stability under normal operating con- piping, fittings, and other equipment ditions. subjected to pressure must be designed (1) The frame must securely retain and constructed to withstand at least all the components of the bundle and 1.5 times the test pressure of the pres- must protect them from damage during sure receptacle. conditions normally incident to trans- (2) Service equipment must be config- portation. The method of cylinder re- ured, or designed, to prevent damage straint must prevent any vertical or that could result in the release of the horizontal movement or rotation of the pressure receptacle contents during cylinder that could cause undue strain normal conditions of handling and on the manifold. The total assembly transport. Manifold piping leading to must be able to withstand rough han- shut-off valves must be sufficiently dling, including being dropped or over- flexible to protect the valves and the turned. piping from shearing or releasing the (2) The frame must include features pressure receptacle contents. The fill- designed for the handling and transpor- ing and discharge valves and any pro- tation of the bundle. The lifting rings tective caps must be secured against must be designed to withstand a design unintended opening. The valves must load of 2 times the maximum gross conform to ISO 10297:2014(E) or, for weight. Bundles with more than one non-refillable pressure receptacles lifting ring must be designed such that

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00097 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

a minimum sling angle of 45 degrees to 60 bar and below (IBR, see § 171.7 of this the horizontal can be achieved during subchapter). lifting using the lifting rings. If four (2) ISO 18172–1: Gas cylinders—Refill- lifting rings are used, their design able welded stainless steel cylinders— must be strong enough to allow the Part 1: Test pressure 6 MPa and below bundle to be lifted by two rings. Where (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). two or four lifting rings are used, dia- (3) ISO 20703: Gas cylinders—Refill- metrically opposite lifting rings must able welded aluminum-alloy cyl- be aligned with each other to allow for inders—Design, construction and test- correct lifting using shackle pins. If ing (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). the bundle is filled with forklift pock- (4) ISO 21172–1:2015(E) Gas cylinders— ets, it must contain two forklift pock- Welded steel pressure drums up to 3,000 ets on each side from which it is to be litres capacity for the transport of lifted. The forklift pockets must be po- gases—Design and construction—Part sitioned symmetrically consistent with 1: Capacities up to 1,000 litres (IBR, see the bundle center of gravity. § 171.7 of this subchapter). Irrespective (3) The frame structural members of section 6.3.3.4 of this standard, weld- must be designed for a vertical load of ed steel gas pressure drums with dished 2 times the maximum gross weight of ends convex to pressure may be used the bundle. Design stress levels may for the transport of corrosive sub- not exceed 0.9 times the yield strength stances provided all applicable addi- of the material. tional requirements are met. (4) The frame must not contain any (g) Design and construction require- protrusions from the exterior frame ments for UN refillable seamless steel cyl- structure that could cause a hazardous inders. In addition to the general re- condition. quirements of this section, UN refill- (5) The frame design must prevent able seamless steel cylinders must con- collection of water or other debris that form to the following ISO standards, as would increase the tare weight of bun- applicable: dles filled by weight. (1) ISO 9809–1:2010 Gas cylinders—Re- (6) The floor of the bundle frame fillable seamless steel gas cylinders— must not buckle during normal oper- Design, construction and testing—Part ating conditions and must allow for the 1: Quenched and tempered steel cyl- drainage of water and debris from inders with tensile strength less than around the base of the cylinders. 1100 MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- (7) If the frame design includes mov- chapter). Until December 31, 2018, the able doors or covers, they must be ca- manufacture of a cylinder conforming pable of being secured with latches or to the requirements in ISO 9809–1:1999 other means that will not become dis- (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) is lodged by operational impact loads. authorized. Valves that need to be operated in nor- (2) ISO 9809–2: Gas cylinders—Refill- mal service or in an emergency must able seamless steel gas cylinders—De- be accessible. sign, construction and testing—Part 2: (8) For bundles of cylinders, pressure Quenched and tempered steel cylinders receptacle marking requirements only with tensile strength greater than or apply to the individual cylinders of a equal to 1100 MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of bundle and not to any assembly struc- this subchapter). Until December 31, ture. 2018, the manufacture of a cylinder (f) Design and construction require- conforming to the requirements in ISO ments for UN refillable welded cylinders 9809–2:2000 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- and UN pressure drums. In addition to chapter) is authorized. the general requirements of this sec- (3) ISO 9809–3: Gas cylinders—Refill- tion, UN refillable welded cylinders able seamless steel gas cylinders—De- and UN pressure drums must conform sign, construction and testing—Part 3: to the following ISO standards, as ap- Normalized steel cylinders. (IBR, see plicable: § 171.7 of this subchapter). Until Decem- (1) ISO 4706: Gas cylinders—Refillable ber 31, 2018, the manufacture of a cyl- welded steel cylinders—Test pressure inder conforming to the requirements

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00098 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.71

in ISO 9809–3:2000 (IBR, see § 171.7 of Design, construction and testing—Part this subchapter) is authorized. 1: Quenched and tempered steel cyl- (4) ISO 9809–4:2014(E) (IBR, see § 171.7 inders with tensile strength less than of this subchapter). 1100 MPa. Until December 31, 2018, the (h) Design and construction require- manufacture of a cylinder conforming ments for UN refillable seamless aluminum to the requirements in ISO 9809–1:1999 alloy cylinders. In addition to the gen- (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) is eral requirements of this section, UN authorized. refillable seamless aluminum cylinders (ii) ISO 9809–3: Gas cylinders—Refill- must conform to ISO 7866:2012(E) as able seamless steel gas cylinders—De- modified by ISO 7866:2012/Cor.1:2014(E) sign, construction and testing—Part 3: (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Normalized steel cylinders. Until De- Until December 31, 2020, the manufac- cember 31, 2018, the manufacture of a ture of a cylinder conforming to the re- cylinder conforming to the require- quirements in ISO 7866(E) (IBR, see ments in ISO 9809–3:2000 (IBR, see § 171.7 § 171.7 of this subchapter) is authorized. of this subchapter) is authorized. The use of Aluminum alloy 6351–T6 or (2) The porous mass in an acetylene equivalent is prohibited. cylinder must conform to ISO (i) Design and construction require- 3807:2013(E) (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- ments for UN non-refillable metal cyl- chapter). Until December 31, 2020, the inders. In addition to the general re- manufacture of a cylinder conforming quirements of this section, UN non-re- to the requirements in ISO 3807–2(E) fillable metal cylinders must conform (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) is to ISO 11118:2015(E) Gas cylinders— authorized. Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders— Specification and test methods (IBR, (l) Design and construction require- see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Until De- ments for UN composite cylinders and cember 31, 2020, cylinders conforming tubes. (1) In addition to the general re- to ISO 11118:1999(E) Gas cylinders— quirements of this section, UN com- Non-refillable metallic gas cylinders— posite cylinders and tubes must be de- Specification and test methods (IBR, signed for a design life of not less than see § 171.7 of this subchapter) are au- 15 years. Composite cylinders and tubes thorized. with a design life longer than 15 years (j) Design and construction require- must not be filled after 15 years from ments for UN refillable seamless steel the date of manufacture, unless the de- tubes. In addition to the general re- sign has successfully passed a service quirements of this section, UN refill- life test program. The service life test able seamless steel tubes must conform program must be part of the initial de- to ISO 11120:2015(E) Gas cylinders—Re- sign type approval and must specify in- fillable seamless steel tubes of water spections and tests to demonstrate capacity between 150 L and 3,000 L—De- that cylinders manufactured accord- sign, construction and testing (IBR, see ingly remain safe to the end of their § 171.7 of this subchapter). Until Decem- design life. The service life test pro- ber 31, 2022, UN refillable seamless steel gram and the results must be approved tubes may be manufactured in accord- by the competent authority of the ance with ISO 11120: Gas cylinders—Re- country of approval that is responsible fillable seamless steel tubes of water for the initial approval of the cylinder capacity between 150 L and 3,000 L—De- design. The service life of a composite sign, construction and testing (IBR, see cylinder or tube must not be extended § 171.7 of this subchapter) beyond its initial approved design life. (k) Design and construction require- Additionally, composite cylinders and ments for UN acetylene cylinders. In ad- tubes must conform to the following dition to the general requirements of ISO standards, as applicable: this section, UN acetylene cylinders (i) ISO 11119–1:2012(E) (IBR, see § 171.7 must conform to the following ISO of this subchapter). Until December 31, standards, as applicable: 2020, cylinders conforming to the re- (1) For the cylinder shell: quirements in ISO 11119–1(E), (IBR, see (i) ISO 9809–1:2010 Gas cylinders—Re- § 171.7 of this subchapter) are author- fillable seamless steel gas cylinders— ized.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00099 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(ii) ISO 11119–2:2012(E) (ISO 11119– (o) Material compatibility. In addition 2:2012/Amd.1:2014(E)) (IBR, see § 171.7 of to the material requirements specified this subchapter). Until December 31, in the UN pressure receptacle design 2020, cylinders conforming to the re- and construction ISO standards, and quirements in ISO 11119–2(E) (IBR, see any restrictions specified in part 173 § 171.7 of this subchapter) are author- for the gases to be transported, the re- ized. quirements of the following standards (iii) ISO 11119–3:2013(E) (IBR, see must be applied with respect to mate- § 171.7 of this subchapter). Until Decem- rial compatibility: ber 31, 2020, cylinders conforming to (1) ISO 11114–1:2012: Gas cylinders— the requirements in ISO 11119–3(E) Compatibility of cylinder and valve (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) are materials with gas contents—Part 1: authorized. Metallic materials. (IBR, see § 171.7 of (2) ISO 11119–2 and ISO 11119–3 gas this subchapter). cylinders of composite construction (2) ISO 11114–2:2013(E) (IBR, see § 171.7 manufactured in accordance with the of this subchapter). requirements for underwater use must (p) Protection of closures. Closures and bear the ‘‘UW’’ mark. their protection must conform to the (m) Design and construction require- requirements in § 173.301(f) of this sub- ments for UN metal hydride storage sys- chapter. tems. In addition to the general require- (q) Marking of UN refillable pressure re- ments of this section, metal hydride ceptacles. UN refillable pressure recep- storage systems must conform to the tacles must be marked clearly and leg- following ISO standards, as applicable: ibly. The required markings must be ISO 16111: Transportable gas storage permanently affixed by stamping, en- devices—Hydrogen absorbed in revers- graving, or other equivalent method, ible metal hydride (IBR, see § 171.7 of on the shoulder, top end or neck of the this subchapter). pressure receptacle or on a perma- (n) Design and construction require- nently affixed component of the pres- ments for UN cylinders for the transpor- sure receptacle, such as a welded col- tation of adsorbed gases. In addition to lar. Except for the ‘‘UN’’ mark, the the general requirements of this sec- minimum size of the marks must be 5 tion, UN cylinders for the transpor- mm for pressure receptacles with a di- tation of adsorbed gases must conform ameter greater than or equal to 140 to the following ISO standards, as ap- mm, and 2.5 mm for pressure recep- plicable: ISO 11513:2011, Gas cylinders— tacles with a diameter less than 140 Refillable welded steel cylinders con- mm. The minimum size of the ‘‘UN’’ taining materials for sub-atmospheric mark must be 5 mm for pressure recep- gas packaging (excluding acetylene)— tacles with a diameter less than 140 Design, construction, testing, use and mm, and 10 mm for pressure recep- periodic inspection, or ISO 9809–1:2010: tacles with a diameter of greater than Gas cylinders—Refillable seamless or equal to 140 mm. The depth of the steel gas cylinders—Design, construc- markings must not create harmful tion and testing—Part 1: Quenched and stress concentrations. A refillable pres- tempered steel cylinders with tensile sure receptacle conforming to the UN strength less than 1100 MPa. (IBR, see standard must be marked as follows: § 171.7 of this subchapter.) (1) The UN packaging symbol.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00100 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.71

(2) The ISO standard, for example two significant figures rounded down ISO 9809–1, used for design, construc- to the last digit. For acetylene cyl- tion and testing. Acetylene cylinders inders, the tare weight must be marked must be marked to indicate the porous on the cylinders in kilograms. The tare mass and the steel shell, for example: weight is the sum of the empty weight, ‘‘ISO 3807–2/ISO 9809–1.’’ mass of the valve, any coating and all (3) The mark of the country where permanently attached parts (e.g., fit- the approval is granted. The letters tings and accessories) that are not re- ‘‘USA’’ must be marked on UN pressure moved during filling. The tare weight receptacles approved by the United must be expressed to two significant States. The manufacturer must obtain figures rounded down to the last digit. an approval number from the Associate The tare weight does not include the Administrator. The manufacturer ap- cylinder cap or any outlet cap or plug proval number must follow the country not permanently attached to the cyl- of approval mark, separated by a slash inder. (for example, USA/MXXXX). Pressure (9) The minimum wall thickness of receptacles approved by more than one the pressure receptacle in millimeters national authority may contain the followed by the letters ‘‘MM’’. This mark of each country of approval, sep- mark is not required for pressure re- arated by a comma. ceptacles with a water capacity less (4) The identity mark or stamp of the than or equal to 1.0 L or for composite IIA. cylinders. (5) The date of the initial inspection, (10) For pressure receptacles intended the year (four digits) followed by the month (two digits) separated by a for the transport of compressed gases slash, for example ‘‘2006/04’’. and UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, the (6) The test pressure in bar, preceded working pressure in bar, proceeded by by the letters ‘‘PH’’ and followed by the letters ‘‘PW’’. the letters ‘‘BAR’’. (11) For liquefied gases, the water ca- (7) The rated charging pressure of the pacity in liters expressed to three sig- metal hydride storage system in bar, nificant digits rounded down to the preceded by the letters ‘‘RCP’’ and fol- last digit, followed by the letter ‘‘L’’. If lowed by the letters ‘‘BAR.’’ the value of the minimum or nominal (8) The empty or tare weight. Except water capacity is an integer, the digits for acetylene cylinders, empty weight after the decimal point may be omit- is the mass of the pressure receptacle ted. in kilograms, including all integral (12) Identification of the cylinder parts (e.g., collar, neck ring, foot ring, thread type (e.g., 25E). Information on etc.), followed by the letters ‘‘KG’’. The the marks that may be used for identi- empty weight does not include the fying threads for cylinders is given in mass of the valve, valve cap or valve ISO/TR 11364, Gas Cylinders—Compila- guard or any coating. The empty tion of national and international weight must be expressed to three sig- valve stem/gas cylinder neck threads nificant figures rounded up to the last and their identification and marking digit. For cylinders of less than 1 kg, system (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- the empty weight must be expressed to chapter).

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00101 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER19JA11.035 § 178.71 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(13) The country of manufacture. The (21) For composite cylinders and letters ‘‘USA’’ must be marked on cyl- tubes having a limited design life inders manufactured in the United greater than 15 years and for composite States. cylinders and tubes having non-limited (14) The serial number assigned by design life, the letters ‘‘SERVICE’’ fol- the manufacturer. lowed by the date 15 years from the (15) For steel pressure receptacles, date of manufacture (initial inspec- the letter ‘‘H’’ showing compatibility tion) shown as the year (four digits) of the steel, as specified in ISO 11114–1. followed by the month (two digits) sep- (16) Identification of aluminum alloy, arated by a slash (i.e. ‘‘/’’). if applicable. (r) Marking sequence. The marking required by paragraph (q) of this section (17) Stamp for nondestructive test- must be placed in three groups as ing, if applicable. shown in the example below: (18) Stamp for underwater use of (1) The top grouping contains manu- composite cylinders, if applicable. facturing marks and must appear con- (19) For metal hydride storage sys- secutively in the sequence given in tems having a limited life, the date of paragraphs (q)(13) through (19) of this expiration indicated by the word section. ‘‘FINAL,’’ followed by the year (four (2) The middle grouping contains digits), the month (two digits) and sep- operational marks described in para- arated by a slash. graphs (q)(6) through (11) of this sec- (20) For composite cylinders and tion. tubes having a limited design life, the (3) The bottom grouping contains letters ‘‘FINAL’’ followed by the design certification marks and must appear life shown as the year (four digits) fol- consecutively in the sequence given in lowed by the month (two digits) sepa- paragraphs (q)(1) through (5) of this rated by a slash (i.e. ‘‘/’’). section.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00102 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER30MR17.035 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.71

(s) Other markings. Other markings stitute the marking required by this are allowed in areas other than the side paragraph with a label. Reduction in wall, provided they are made in low marking size is authorized only as pre- stress areas and are not of a size and scribed in ISO 7225, Gas cylinders—Pre- depth that will create harmful stress cautionary labels. (IBR, see § 171.7 of concentrations. Such marks must not this subchapter). conflict with required marks. (4) Each non-refillable pressure re- (t) Marking of UN non-refillable pres- ceptacle must also be legibly marked sure receptacles. Unless otherwise speci- by stenciling the following statement: fied in this paragraph, each UN non-re- ‘‘Federal law forbids transportation if fillable pressure receptacle must be refilled-penalty up to $500,000 fine and 5 clearly and legibly marked as pre- years in imprisonment (49 U.S.C. scribed in paragraph (q) of this section. 5124).’’ In addition, permanent stenciling is (u) Marking of bundles of cylinders. (1) authorized. Except when stenciled, the Individual cylinders in a bundle of cyl- marks must be on the shoulder, top end inders must be marked in accordance or neck of the pressure receptacle or on with paragraphs (q), (r), (s) and (t) of a permanently affixed component of this section as appropriate. the pressure receptacle (e.g., a welded (2) Refillable UN bundles of cylinders collar). must be marked clearly and legibly (1) The marking requirements and se- with certification, operational, and quence listed in paragraphs (q)(1) manufacturing marks. These marks through (19) of this section are re- must be permanently affixed (e.g., quired, except the markings in para- stamped, engraved, or etched) on a graphs (q)(8), (9), (12) and (18) are not plate permanently attached to the applicable. The required serial number frame of the bundle of cylinders. Ex- marking in paragraph (q)(14) may be cept for the ‘‘UN’’ mark, the minimum replaced by the batch number. size of the marks must be 5 mm. The (2) Each receptacle must be marked minimum size of the ‘‘UN’’ mark must with the words ‘‘DO NOT REFILL’’ in be 10 mm. A refillable UN bundle of letters of at least 5 mm in height. cylinders must be marked with the fol- (3) A non-refillable pressure recep- lowing: tacle, because of its size, may sub- (i) The UN packaging symbol;

(ii) The ISO standard, for example proval number must follow the country ISO 9809–1, used for design, construc- of approval mark, separated by a slash tion and testing. Acetylene cylinders (for example, USA/MXXXX). Pressure must be marked to indicate the porous receptacles approved by more than one mass and the steel shell, for example: national authority may contain the ‘‘ISO 3807–2/ISO 9809–1’’; mark of each country of approval, sep- (iii) The mark of the country where arated by a comma; the approval is granted. The letters (iv) The identity mark or stamp of ‘‘USA’’ must be marked on UN pressure the IIA; receptacles approved by the United (v) The date of the initial inspection, States. The manufacturer must obtain the year in four digits followed by the an approval number from the Associate two digit month separated by a slash, Administrator. The manufacturer ap- for example ‘‘2006/04’’;

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00103 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER08JA15.002 § 178.74 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(vi) The test pressure in bar, preceded § 178.74 Approval of MEGCs. by the letters ‘‘PH’’ and followed by (a) Application for design type ap- the letters ‘‘BAR’’; (vii) For pressure receptacles in- proval. (1) Each new MEGC design type tended for the transport of compressed must have a design approval certifi- gases and UN 1001 acetylene, dissolved, cate. An owner or manufacturer must the working pressure in bar, proceeded apply to an approval agency that is ap- by the letters ‘‘PW’’; proved by the Associate Administrator (viii) For liquefied gases, the water in accordance with subpart E of part capacity in liters expressed to three 107 of this chapter + to obtain approval significant digits rounded down to the of a new design. When a series of last digit, followed by the letter ‘‘L’’. If MEGCs is manufactured without the value of the minimum or nominal change in the design, the certificate is water capacity is an integer, the digits valid for the entire series. The design after the decimal point may be omit- approval certificate must refer to the ted; prototype test report, the materials of (ix) The total mass of the frame of construction of the manifold, the the bundle and all permanently at- standards to which the pressure recep- tached parts (cylinders, manifolds, fit- tacles are made and an approval num- tings and valves). Bundles intended for ber. The compliance requirements or the carriage of UN 1001 acetylene, dis- test methods applicable to MEGCs as solved must bear the tare mass as spec- specified in this subpart may be varied ified in clause N.4.2 of ISO 10961:2010; when the level of safety is determined (x) The country of manufacture. The to be equivalent to or exceed the re- letters ‘‘USA’’ must be marked on cyl- quirements of this subchapter and is inders manufactured in the United approved in writing by the Associate States; Administrator. A design approval may (xi) The serial number assigned by serve for the approval of smaller the manufacturer; and MEGCs made of materials of the same (xii) For steel pressure receptacles, type and thickness, by the same fab- the letter ‘‘H’’ showing compatibility rication techniques and with identical of the steel, as specified in 1SO 11114–1. supports, equivalent closures and other (v) Marking sequence. The marking re- appurtenances. quired by paragraph (u) of this section (2) Each application for design ap- must be placed in three groups as fol- proval must be in English and contain lows: the following information: (1) The top grouping contains manu- (i) Two complete copies of all engi- facturing marks and must appear con- neering drawings, calculations, and secutively in the sequence given in test data necessary to ensure that the paragraphs (u)(2)(x) through (u)(2)(xii) design meets the relevant specifica- of this section as applicable. tion. (2) The middle grouping contains operational marks described in para- (ii) The manufacturer’s serial number graphs (u)(2)(vi) through (u)(2)(ix) of that will be assigned to each MEGC. this section as applicable. When the (iii) A statement as to whether the operational mark specified in para- design type has been examined by any graph (u)(2)(vii) is required, it must im- approval agency previously and judged mediately precede the operational unacceptable. Affirmative statements mark specified in paragraph (u)(2)(vi). must be documented with the name of (3) The bottom grouping contains the approval agency, reason for non-ac- certification marks and must appear ceptance, and the nature of modifica- consecutively in the sequence given in tions made to the design type. paragraphs (u)(2)(i) through (u)(2)(v) of (b) Actions by the approval agency. The this section as applicable. approval agency must review the application for design type approval, includ- [76 FR 3385, Jan. 19, 2011, as amended at 76 FR 43532, July 20, 2011; 77 FR 60943, Oct. 5, ing all drawings and calculations, to 2012; 78 FR 1096, Jan. 7, 2013; 80 FR 1166, Jan. ensure that the design of the MEGC 8, 2015; 80 FR 72929, Nov. 23, 2015; 82 FR 15895, meets all requirements of the relevant Mar. 30, 2017; 85 FR 27900, May 11, 2020] specification and to determine whether

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00104 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.74

it is complete and conforms to the re- (i) The information displayed on the quirements of this section. An incom- metal identification plate required by plete application will be returned to § 178.75(j); the applicant with the reasons why the (ii) The results of the applicable application was returned. If the appli- framework test specified in ISO 1496–3 cation is complete and all applicable (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter); requirements of this section are met, (iii) The results of the initial inspec- the approval agency must prepare a tion and test specified in paragraph (h) MEGC design approval certificate con- of this section; taining the manufacturer’s name and (iv) The results of the impact test address, results and conclusions of the specified in § 178.75(i)(4); examination and necessary data for (v) Certification documents verifying identification of the design type. If the that the cylinders and tubes conform Associate Administrator approves the to the applicable standards; and (vi) A statement that the approval Design Type Approval Certificate ap- agency certifies the MEGC in accord- plication, the approval agency and the ance with the procedures in this sec- manufacturer must each maintain a tion and that the MEGC is suitable for copy of the approved drawings, calcula- its intended purpose and meets the re- tions, and test data for at least 20 quirements of this subchapter. When a years. series of MEGCs is manufactured with- (c) Approval agency’s responsibilities. out change in the design type, the cer- The approval agency is responsible for tificate may be valid for the entire se- ensuring that the MEGC conforms to ries of MEGCs representing a single de- the design type approval. The approval sign type. The approval number must agency must: consist of the distinguishing sign or (1) Witness all tests required for the mark of the country (‘‘USA’’ for the approval of the MEGC specified in this United States of America) where the section and § 178.75. approval was granted and a registra- (2) Ensure, through appropriate in- tion number. spection, that each MEGC is fabricated (6) Retain on file a copy of each ap- in all respects in conformance with the proval certificate for at least 20 years. approved drawings, calculations, and (d) Manufacturers’ responsibilities. The test data. manufacturer is responsible for compli- (3) Determine and ensure that the ance with the applicable specifications MEGC is suitable for its intended use for the design and construction of and that it conforms to the require- MEGCs. The manufacturer of a MEGC ments of this subchapter. must: (1) Comply with all the requirements (4) Apply its name, identifying mark of the applicable ISO standard specified or identifying number, and the date the in § 178.71; approval was issued, to the metal iden- (2) Obtain and use an approval agen- tification marking plate attached to cy to review the design, construction the MEGC upon successful completion and certification of the MEGC; of all requirements of this subpart. (3) Provide a statement in the manu- Any approvals by the Associate Admin- facturers’ data report certifying that istrator authorizing design or con- each MEGC manufactured complies struction alternatives (Alternate Ar- with the relevant specification and all rangements) of the MEGC (see para- the applicable requirements of this graph (a) of this section) must be indi- subchapter; and cated on the metal identification plate (4) Retain records for the MEGCs for as specified in § 178.75(j). at least 20 years. When required by the (5) Prepare an approval certificate specification, the manufacturer must for each MEGC or, in the case of a se- provide copies of the records to the ap- ries of identical MEGCs manufactured proval agency, the owner or lessee of to a single design type, for each series the MEGC, and to a representative of of MEGCs. The approval certificate DOT, upon request. must include all of the following infor- (e) Denial of application for approval. mation: If the Associate Administrator finds

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00105 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.74 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

that the MEGC will not be approved for changes made to the modification since any reason, the Associate Adminis- its original rejection. trator will notify the applicant in writ- (2) The approval agency must review ing and provide the reason for the de- the request for modification. If the ap- nial. The manufacturer may request proval agency determines that the pro- that the Associate Administrator re- posed modification does not conform to consider the decision. The application the relevant specification, the approval request must— agency must reject the request in ac- (1) Be written in English and filed cordance with paragraph (d) of this sec- within 90 days of receipt of the deci- tion. If the approval agency determines sion; that the proposed modification con- (2) State in detail any alleged errors forms fully with the relevant specifica- of fact and law; and tion, the request is accepted. If modi- (3) Enclose any additional informa- fication to an approved MEGC alters tion needed to support the request to any information on the approval cer- reconsider. tificate, the approval agency must pre- (f) Appeal. (1) A manufacturer whose pare a new approval certificate for the reconsideration request is denied may modified MEGC and submit the certifi- appeal to the PHMSA Administrator. cate to the Associate Administrator for The appeal must— approval. After receiving approval (i) Be in writing and filed within 90 from the Associate Administrator, the days of receipt of the Associate Admin- approval agency must ensure that any istrator s decision on reconsideration; necessary changes are made to the (ii) State in detail any alleged errors metal identification plate. A copy of of fact and law; each newly issued approval certificate (iii) Enclose any additional informa- must be retained by the approval agen- tion needed to support the appeal; and cy and the MEGC’s owner for at least (iv) State in detail the modification 20 years. The approval agency must of the final decision sought. perform the following activities: (2) The Administrator will grant or (i) Retain a set of the approved re- deny the relief and inform the appel- vised drawings, calculations, and data lant in writing of the decision. The Ad- as specified in § 178.69(b)(4) for at least ministrator’s decision is the final ad- 20 years; ministrative action. (ii) Ensure through appropriate in- (g) Modifications to approved MEGCs. (1) Prior to modification of any ap- spection that all modifications con- proved MEGC that may affect conform- form to the revised drawings, calcula- ance and safe use, and that may in- tions, and test data; and volve a change to the design type or af- (iii) Determine the extent to which fect its ability to retain the hazardous retesting of the modified MEGC is nec- material in transportation, the essary based on the nature of the pro- MEGC’s owner must inform the ap- posed modification, and ensure that all proval agency that prepared the initial required retests are satisfactorily per- approval certificate for the MEGC or, if formed. the initial approval agency is unavail- (h) Termination of Approval Certificate. able, another approval agency, of the (1) The Associate Administrator may nature of the modification and request terminate an approval issued under certification of the modification. The this section if he or she determines owner must supply the approval agency that— with all revised drawings, calculations, (i) Because of a change in cir- and test data relative to the intended cumstances, the approval no longer is modification. The MEGC’s owner must needed or no longer would be granted if also provide a statement as to whether applied for; the intended modification has been ex- (ii) Information upon which the ap- amined and determined to be unaccept- proval was based is fraudulent or sub- able by any approval agency. The writ- stantially erroneous; ten statement must include the name (iii) Termination of the approval is of the approval agency, the reason for necessary to adequately protect non-acceptance, and the nature of against risks to life and property; or

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00106 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.75

(iv) The MEGC does not meet the discharge openings of the pressure re- specification. ceptacles. (2) Before an approval is terminated, Maximum permissible gross mass or the Associate Administrator will pro- MPGM means the heaviest load author- vide the person— ized for transport (sum of the tare (i) Written notice of the facts or con- mass of the MEGC, service equipment duct believed to warrant the termi- and pressure receptacle). nation; Service equipment means manifold sys- (ii) An opportunity to submit oral tem (measuring instruments, piping and written evidence; and and safety devices). (3) An opportunity to demonstrate or Shut-off valve means a valve that achieve compliance with the applicable stops the flow of gas. requirements. Structural equipment means the rein- (i) Imminent Danger. If the Associate forcing, fastening, protective and stabi- Administrator determines that a cer- lizing members external to the pres- tificate of approval must be terminated sure receptacles. to preclude a significant and imminent (d) General design and construction re- adverse effect on public safety, the As- quirements. (1) The MEGC must be capa- sociate Administrator may terminate ble of being loaded and discharged the certificate immediately. In such without the removal of its structural circumstances, the opportunities of equipment. It must possess stabilizing paragraphs (h)(2) and (3) of this section members external to the pressure re- need not be provided prior to termi- ceptacles to provide structural integ- nation of the approval, but must be rity for handling and transport. MEGCs provided as soon as practicable there- must be designed and constructed with after. supports to provide a secure base dur- [71 FR 33890, June 12, 2006] ing transport and with lifting and tie- down attachments that are adequate § 178.75 Specifications for MEGCs. for lifting the MEGC including when (a) General. Each MEGC must meet loaded to its maximum permissible the requirements of this section. In a gross mass. The MEGC must be de- MEGC that meets the definition of a signed to be loaded onto a transport ve- ‘‘container’’ within the terms of the hicle or vessel and equipped with skids, International Convention for Safe Con- mountings or accessories to facilitate tainers (CSC) must meet the require- mechanical handling. ments of the CSC as amended and 49 (2) MEGCs must be designed, manu- CFR parts 450 through 453, and must factured and equipped to withstand, have a CSC approval plate. without loss of contents, all normal (b) Alternate Arrangements. The tech- handling and transportation condi- nical requirements applicable to tions. The design must take into ac- MEGCs may be varied when the level of count the effects of dynamic loading safety is determined to be equivalent and fatigue. to or exceed the requirements of this (3) Each pressure receptacle of a subchapter. Such an alternate arrange- MEGC must be of the same design type, ment must be approved in writing by seamless steel, and constructed and the Associate Administrator. MEGCs tested according to one of the following approved to an Alternate Arrangement ISO standards: must be marked as required by para- (i) ISO 9809–1: Gas cylinders—Refill- graph (j) of this section. able seamless steel gas cylinders—De- (c) Definitions. The following defini- sign, construction and testing—Part 1: tions apply: Quenched and tempered steel cylinders Leakproofness test means a test using with tensile strength less than 1100 gas subjecting the pressure receptacles MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- and the service equipment of the MEGC chapter). Until December 31, 2018, the to an effective internal pressure of not manufacture of a cylinder conforming less than 20% of the test pressure. to the requirements in ISO 9809–1:1999 Manifold means an assembly of piping (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) is and valves connecting the filling and/or authorized;

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00107 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.75 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(ii) ISO 9809–2: Gas cylinders—Refill- thermal loads during normal condi- able seamless steel gas cylinders—De- tions of handling and transport. The sign, construction and testing—Part 2: design must take into account the ef- Quenched and tempered steel cylinders fects of fatigue, caused by repeated ap- with tensile strength greater than or plication of these loads through the ex- equal to 1100 MPa. (IBR, see § 171.7 of pected life of the MEGC. this subchapter). Until December 31, (8) MEGCs and their fastenings must, 2018, the manufacture of a cylinder under the maximum permissible load, conforming to the requirements in ISO be capable of withstanding the fol- 9809–2:2000 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- lowing separately applied static forces chapter) is authorized; (for calculation purposes, acceleration (iii) ISO 9809–3: Gas cylinders—Refill- due to gravity (g) = 9.81 m/s2): able seamless steel gas cylinders—De- (i) In the direction of travel: 2g sign, construction and testing—Part 3: (twice the MPGM multiplied by the ac- Normalized steel cylinders. (IBR, see celeration due to gravity); § 171.7 of this subchapter). Until Decem- (ii) Horizontally at right angles to ber 31, 2018, the manufacture of a cyl- the direction of travel: 1g (the MPGM inder conforming to the requirements multiplied by the acceleration due to in ISO 9809–3:2000 (IBR, see § 171.7 of gravity. When the direction of travel is this subchapter) is authorized; or not clearly determined, the forces must (iv) ISO 9809–4:2014(E) Gas cylinders— be equal to twice the MPGM); Refillable seamless steel gas cyl- (iii) Vertically upwards: 1g (the inders—Design, construction and test- MPGM multiplied by the acceleration ing—Part 4: Stainless steel cylinders due to gravity); and with an Rm value of less than 1 100 (iv) Vertically downwards: 2g (twice MPa (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- the MPGM (total loading including the chapter). effect of gravity) multiplied by the ac- (v) ISO 11120:2015(E) Gas cylinders— celeration due to gravity. Refillable seamless steel tubes of water capacity between 150 L and 3000 L—De- (9) Under each of the forces specified in paragraph (d)(8) of this section, the sign, construction and testing (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Until Decem- stress at the most severely stressed ber 31, 2022, pressure receptacles of a point of the pressure receptacles must MEGC may be constructed and tested not exceed the values given in the ap- in accordance with ISO 11120:1999(E) plicable design specifications (e.g., ISO Gas cylinders—Refillable seamless 11120). steel tubes of water capacity between (10) Under each of the forces specified 150 L and 3000 L—Design, construction in paragraph (d)(8) of this section, the and testing (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- safety factor for the framework and chapter). fastenings must be as follows: (4) Pressure receptacles of MEGCs, (i) For steels having a clearly defined fittings, and pipework must be con- yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in re- structed of a material that is compat- lation to the guaranteed yield ible with the hazardous materials in- strength; or tended to be transported, as specified (ii) For steels with no clearly defined in this subchapter. yield point, a safety factor of 1.5 in re- (5) Contact between dissimilar met- lation to the guaranteed 0.2 percent als that could result in damage by gal- proof strength and, for austenitic vanic action must be prevented by ap- steels, the 1 percent proof strength. propriate means. (11) MEGCs must be capable of being (6) The materials of the MEGC, in- electrically grounded to prevent elec- cluding any devices, gaskets, and ac- trostatic discharge when intended for cessories, must have no adverse effect flammable gases. on the gases intended for transport in (12) The pressure receptacles of a the MEGC. MEGC must be secured in a manner to (7) MEGCs must be designed to with- prevent movement that could result in stand, without loss of contents, at damage to the structure and con- least the internal pressure due to the centration of harmful localized contents, and the static, dynamic and stresses.

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00108 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.75

(e) Service equipment. (1) Service (vi) All shut-off valves with screwed equipment must be arranged so that it spindles must close by a clockwise mois protected from mechanical damage tion of the handwheel. For other shut- by external forces during handling and off valves, the open and closed posi- transportation. When the connections tions and the direction of closure must between the frame and the pressure re- be clearly shown. ceptacles allow relative movement be- (vii) All shut-off valves must be de- tween the subassemblies, the equip- signed and positioned to prevent unin- ment must be fastened to allow move- tentional opening. ment to prevent damage to any work- (viii) Ductile metals must be used in ing part. The manifolds, discharge fit- the construction of valves or acces- tings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices), sories. and shut-off valves must be protected (4) The piping must be designed, con- from damage by external forces. Mani- structed and installed to avoid damage fold piping leading to shut-off valves due to expansion and contraction, me- must be sufficiently flexible to protect chanical shock and vibration. Joints in the valves and the piping from shear- tubing must be brazed or have an ing, or releasing the pressure recep- equally strong metal union. The melt- tacle contents. The filling and dis- ing point of brazing materials must be charge devices, including flanges or no lower than 525 °C (977 °F). The rated threaded plugs, and any protective caps pressure of the service equipment and must be capable of being secured of the manifold must be not less than against unintended opening. two-thirds of the test pressure of the (2) Each pressure receptacle intended pressure receptacles. for the transport of Division 2.3 gases (f) Pressure relief devices. Each pres- must be equipped with an individual sure receptacle must be equipped with shut-off valve. The manifold for Divi- one or more pressure relief devices as sion 2.3 liquefied gases must be de- specified in § 173.301(f) of this sub- signed so that each pressure receptacle chapter. When pressure relief devices can be filled separately and be kept are installed, each pressure receptacle isolated by a valve capable of being or group of pressure receptacles of a closed during transit. For Division 2.1 MEGC that can be isolated must be gases, the pressure receptacles must be equipped with one or more pressure re- isolated by an individual shut-off valve lief devices. Pressure relief devices into assemblies of not more than 3,000 must be of a type that will resist dy- L. namic forces including liquid surge and (3) For MEGC filling and discharge must be designed to prevent the entry openings: of foreign matter, the leakage of gas (i) Two valves in series must be and the development of any dangerous placed in an accessible position on each excess pressure. discharge and filling pipe. One of the (1) The size of the pressure relief de- valves may be a backflow prevention vices: CGA S–1.1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this valve. (ii) The filling and discharge de- subchapter) must be used to determine vices may be equipped to a manifold. the relief capacity of individual pres- (iii) For sections of piping which can sure receptacles. be closed at both ends and where a liq- (2) Connections to pressure-relief de- uid product can be trapped, a pressure- vices: Connections to pressure relief relief valve must be provided to pre- devices must be of sufficient size to en- vent excessive pressure build-up. able the required discharge to pass un- (iv) The main isolation valves on a restricted to the pressure relief device. MEGC must be clearly marked to indi- A shut-off valve installed between the cate their directions of closure. All pressure receptacle and the pressure re- shutoff valves must close by a clock- lief device is prohibited, except where wise motion of the handwheel. duplicate devices are provided for (v) Each shut-off valve or other maintenance or other reasons, and the means of closure must be designed and shut-off valves serving the devices ac- constructed to withstand a pressure tually in use are locked open, or the equal to or greater than 1.5 times the shut-off valves are interlocked so that test pressure of the MEGC. at least one of the duplicate devices is

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00109 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.75 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

always operable and capable of meeting other similar structures are accept- the requirements of paragraph (f)(1) of able. If the pressure receptacles and this section. No obstruction is per- service equipment are so constructed mitted in an opening leading to or as to withstand impact and over- leaving from a vent or pressure-relief turning, additional protective support device that might restrict or cut-off structure is not required (see para- the flow from the pressure receptacle graph (h)(4) of this section). to that device. The opening through all (2) The combined stresses caused by piping and fittings must have at least pressure receptacle mountings (e.g. the same flow area as the inlet of the cradles, frameworks, etc.) and MEGC pressure relief device to which it is lifting and tie-down attachments must connected. The nominal size of the dis- not cause excessive stress in any pres- charge piping must be at least as large sure receptacle. Permanent lifting and as that of the pressure relief device. tie-down attachments must be (3) Location of pressure-relief de- equipped to all MEGCs. Any welding of vices: For liquefied gases, each pressure relief device must, under max- mountings or attachments onto the imum filling conditions, be in commu- pressure receptacles is prohibited. nication with the vapor space of the (3) The effects of environmental cor- pressure receptacles. The devices, when rosion must be taken into account in installed, must be arranged to ensure the design of supports and frameworks. the escaping vapor is discharged up- (4) When MEGCs are not protected wards and unrestrictedly to prevent during transport as specified in para- impingement of escaping gas or liquid graph (h)(1) of this section, the pres- upon the MEGC, its pressure recep- sure receptacles and service equipment tacles or personnel. For flammable, must be protected against damage re- pyrophoric and oxidizing gases, the es- sulting from lateral or longitudinal im- caping gas must be directed away from pact or overturning. External fittings the pressure receptacle in such a man- must be protected against release of ner that it cannot impinge upon the the pressure receptacles’ contents upon other pressure receptacles. Heat resist- impact or overturning of the MEGC on ant protective devices that deflect the its fittings. Particular attention must flow of gas are permissible provided the be paid to the protection of the mani- required pressure relief device capacity fold. Examples of protection include: is not reduced. Arrangements must be (i) Protection against lateral impact, made to prevent access to the pressure which may consist of longitudinal bars; relief devices by unauthorized persons (ii) Protection against overturning, and to protect the devices from damage which may consist of reinforcement caused by rollover. rings or bars fixed across the frame; (g) Gauging devices. When a MEGC is (iii) Protection against rear impact, intended to be filled by mass, it must which may consist of a bumper or be equipped with one or more gauging frame; devices. Glass level-gauges and gauges (iv) Protection of the pressure recep- made of other fragile material are prohibited. tacles and service equipment against (h) MEGC supports, frameworks, lifting damage from impact or overturning by and tie-down attachments. (1) MEGCs use of an ISO frame according to the must be designed and constructed with relevant provisions of ISO 1496–3. (IBR, a support structure to provide a secure see § 171.7 of this subchapter). base during transport. MEGCs must be (i) Initial inspection and test. The pres- protected against damage to the pressure receptacles and items of equip- sure receptacles and service equipment ment of each MEGC must be inspected resulting from lateral and longitudinal and tested before being put into service impact and overturning. The forces for the first time (initial inspection specified in paragraph (d)(8) of this sec- and test). This initial inspection and tion, and the safety factor specified in test of an MEGC must include the fol- paragraph (d)(10) of this section must lowing: be considered in this aspect of the de- (1) A check of the design characteris- sign. Skids, frameworks, cradles or tics.

100

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00110 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.75

(2) An external examination of the UN MEGC and its fittings, taking into account the hazardous materials to be transported. (3) A pressure test performed at the test pressures specified in § 173.304b(b)(1) and (2) of this subchapter. The pressure test of the manifold may be performed as a hydraulic test or by using another liquid or gas. A leakproofness test and a test of the satisfactory operation of all service equipment must also be performed before the MEGC is placed into service. When the pressure receptacles and Approval Country their fittings have been pressure-tested Approval Number separately, they must be subjected to a Alternate Arrangements (see § 178.75(b)) leakproof test after assembly. MEGC Manufacturer’s name or mark (4) An MEGC that meets the defini- MEGC’s serial number tion of ‘‘container’’ in the CSC (see 49 CFR 450.3(a)(2)) must be subjected to an Approval agency (Authorized body for impact test using a prototype rep- the design approval) resenting each design type. The proto- Year of manufacture type MEGC must be shown to be capa- Test pressure: lll bar gauge ble of absorbing the forces resulting Design temperature range lll °C to from an impact not less than 4 times (4 lll °C g) the MPGM of the fully loaded Number of pressure receptacles lll MEGC, at a duration typical of the me- Total water capacity lll liters chanical shocks experienced in rail transport. A listing of acceptable Initial pressure test date and identi- methods for performing the impact test fication of the Approval Agency is provided in the UN Recommenda- Date and type of most recent periodic tions (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- tests chapter). Year lll Monthlll Type lll (j) Marking. (1) Each MEGC must be (e.g. 2004–05, AE/UE, where ‘‘AE’’ rep- equipped with a corrosion resistant resents acoustic emission and ‘‘UE’’ metal plate permanently attached to represents ultrasonic examination) the MEGC in a conspicuous place read- Stamp of the approval agency who ily accessible for inspection. The pres- performed or witnessed the most recent sure receptacles must be marked ac- test cording to this section. Affixing the (2) The following information must metal plate to a pressure receptacle is be marked on a metal plate firmly se- prohibited. At a minimum, the fol- cured to the MEGC: lowing information must be marked on Name of the operator the plate by stamping or by any other Maximum permissible load mass lll equivalent method: kg Country of manufacture Working pressure at 15 °C: lll bar gauge Maximum permissible gross mass (MPGM) lll kg Unladen (tare) mass lll kg [71 FR 33892, June 12, 2006, as amended at 73 FR 4719, Jan. 28, 2008; 77 FR 60943, Oct. 5, 2012; 80 FR 1168, Jan. 8, 2015; 82 FR 15896, Mar. 30, 2017; 85 FR 27901, May 11, 2020]

101

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00111 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER12JN06.002 Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

APPENDIX A TO SUBPART C OF PART 178—ILLUSTRATIONS: CYLINDER TENSILE SAMPLE

The following figures illustrate the recommended locations for test specimens taken from welded cylinders:

102

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00112 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER08AU02.013 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A

103

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00113 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER08AU02.014 Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

104

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00114 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER08AU02.015 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A

105

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00115 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER08AU02.016 Pt. 178, Subpt. C, App. A 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

[67 FR 51654, Aug. 8, 2002]

106

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00116 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER08AU02.017 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.255–6

Subparts D–G [Reserved] § 178.255–3 Expansion domes. (a) Expansion domes, if applied, must Subpart H—Specifications for have a minimum capacity of one per- Portable Tanks cent of the combined capacity of the tank and dome. SOURCE: 29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964, unless (b) [Reserved] otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967. § 178.255–4 Closures for manholes and domes. §§ 178.251—178.253–5 [Reserved] (a) The manhole cover shall be designed to provide a secure closure of § 178.255 Specification 60; steel portable tanks. the manhole. All covers, not hinged to the tanks, shall be attached to the out- § 178.255–1 General requirements. side of the dome by at least 1⁄8 inch chain or its equivalent. Closures shall (a) Tanks must be of fusion welded be made tight against leakage of vapor construction, cylindrical in shape with and liquid by use of gaskets of suitable seamless heads concave to the pressure. Tank shells may be of seamless material. construction. (b) [Reserved] (b) Tanks must be designed, con- § 178.255–5 Bottom discharge outlets. structed, certified, and stamped in accordance with Section VIII of the (a) Bottom discharge outlets prohib- ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- ited, except on tanks used for ship- chapter). ments of sludge acid and alkaline cor- (c) Tanks including all permanent at- rosive liquids. tachments must be postweld heat (b) If installed, bottom outlets or treated as a unit. bottom washout chambers shall be of (d) Requirements concerning types of metal not subject to rapid deteriora- valves, retesting, and qualification of tion by the lading, and each shall be portable tanks contained in §§ 173.32 provided with a valve or plug at its and 173.315 of this chapter must be ob- upper end and liquid-tight closure at it served. lower end. Each valve or plug shall be designed to insure against unseating [29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 due to stresses or shocks incident to FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. 178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969; 68 FR 75750, transportation. Bottom outlets shall be Dec. 31, 2003] adequately protected against handling damage and outlet equipment must not § 178.255–2 Material. extend to within less than one inch of (a) Material used in the tank must be the bottom bearing surface of the skids steel of good weldable quality and con- or tank mounting. form with the requirements in Sections [29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 V, VIII, and IX of the ASME Code (IBR, FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended by Amdt. see § 171.7 of this subchapter). 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994] (b) The minimum thickness of metal, exclusive of lining material, for shell § 178.255–6 Loading and unloading ac- and heads of tanks shall be as follows: cessories. (a) When installed, gauging, loading Minimum Tank capacity thickness and air inlet devices, including their (inch) valves, shall be provided with adequate means for their secure closure; and 1 Not more than 1,200 gallons ...... ⁄4 means shall also be provided for the Over 1,200 to 1,800 gallons ...... 5⁄16 Over 1,800 gallons ...... 3⁄8 closing of pipe connections of valves. (b) Interior heater coils, if installed, [29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 must be of extra heavy pipe and so con- FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. structed that breaking off of exterior 178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969; 68 FR 75750, connections will not cause leakage of Dec. 31, 2003] tanks.

107

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00117 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.255–7 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

§ 178.255–7 Protection of valves and devices shall be deemed to comply with accessories. this requirement. (a) All valves, fittings, accessories, (b) All tank mountings such as skids, safety devices, gauging devices, and the fastenings, brackets, cradles, lifting like shall be adequately protected lugs, etc., intended to carry loadings against mechanical damage by a hous- shall be permanently secured to tanks ing closed with a cover plate. in accordance with the requirements (b) Protective housing shall comply under which the tanks are fabricated, with the requirements under which the and shall be designed with a factor of tanks are fabricated with respect to de- safety of four, and built to withstand sign and construction, and shall be de- loadings in any direction equal to two signed with a minimum factor of safety times the weight of the tanks and at- of four to withstand loadings in any di- tachments when filled to the maximum rection equal to two times the weight permissible loaded weight. of the tank and attachments when (c) Lifting lugs or side hold-down filled with water. lugs shall be provided on the tank mountings in a manner suitable for at- § 178.255–8 Safety devices. taching lifting gear and hold-down de- (a) See § 173.315(i) of this subchapter. vices. Lifting lugs and hold-down lugs (b) [Reserved] welded directly to the tank shall be of the pad-eye type. Doubling plates weld- [Amdt. 178–83, 50 FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985] ed to the tank and located at the points of support shall be deemed to § 178.255–9 Compartments. comply with this requirement. (a) When the interior of the tank is (d) All tank mountings shall be so de- divided into compartments, each com- signed as to prevent the concentration partment shall be designed, con- of excessive loads on the tank shell. structed and tested as a separate tank. Thickness of shell and compartment § 178.255–12 Pressure test. heads shall be determined on the basis (a) Each completed portable tank of total tank capacity. prior to application of lining shall be (b) [Reserved] tested before being put into transpor- § 178.255–10 Lining. tation service by completely filling the tank with water or other liquid having (a) If a lining is required, the mate- a similar viscosity, the temperature of rial used for lining the tank shall be which shall not exceed 100 °F during homogeneous, nonporous, imperforate the test, and applying a pressure of 60 when applied, not less elastic than the psig. The tank shall be capable of hold- metal of the tank proper. It shall be of ing the prescribed pressure for at least substantially uniform thickness, not 10 minutes without leakage, evidence less than 1⁄32 inch thick if metallic, and of impending failure, or failure. All clo- not less than 1⁄16 inch thick if non- sures shall be in place while the test is metallic, and shall be directly bonded made and the pressure shall be gauged or attached by other equally satisfac- at the top of the tank. Safety devices tory means. Rubber lining shall be not and/or vents shall be plugged during less than 3⁄16 inch thick. Joints and this test. seams in the lining shall be made by (b) [Reserved] fusing the material together or by other equally satisfactory means. The [29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 interior of the tank shall be free from FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, as amended by Amdt. scale, oxidation, moisture and all for- 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994] eign matter during the lining operation. § 178.255–13 Repair of tanks. (b) [Reserved] (a) Tanks failing to meet the test may be repaired and retested, provided § 178.255–11 Tank mountings. that repairs are made in complete com- (a) Tanks shall be designed and fab- pliance with the requirements of this ricated with mountings to provide a se- specification. cure base in transit. ‘‘Skids’’ or similar (b) [Reserved]

108

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00118 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.273

§ 178.255–14 Marking. § 178.273 Approval of Specification UN (a) In addition to markings required portable tanks. by Section VIII of the ASME Code (a) Application for approval. (1) An (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), owner or manufacturer of a portable every tank shall bear permanent marks tank shall apply for approval to a des- at least 1/8-inch high stamped into the ignated approval agency authorized to metal near the center of one of the approve the portable tank in accord- tank heads or stamped into a plate per- ance with the procedures in subpart E, manently attached to the tank by part 107 of this subchapter. means of brazing or welding or other (2) Each application for approval suitable means as follows: must contain the following information: Manufacturer’s name lllllll Serial (i) Two complete copies of all engi- No. llllllllllllllllllll neering drawings, calculations, and DOT specification llllllllllllll Nominal capacity lllllll (gallons) test data necessary to ensure that the Tare weight lllllll (pounds) design meets the relevant specifica- Date of manufacture llllllllllll tion. (ii) The manufacturer’s serial number (b) [Reserved] that will be assigned to each portable [29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 tank. FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. (iii) A statement as to whether the 178–67, 46 FR 49906, Oct. 8, 1981; 68 FR 75750, design type has been examined by any Dec. 31, 2003] approval agency previously and judged unacceptable. Affirmative statements § 178.255–15 Report. must be documented with the name of (a) A copy of the manufacturer’s data the approval agency, reason for non- report required by Section VIII of the acceptance, and the nature of modifica- ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- tions made to the design type. chapter) under which the tank is fab- (b) Action by approval agency. The ap- ricated must be furnished to the owner proval agency must perform the fol- for each new tank. lowing activities: Place ——————————————— (1) Review the application for ap- Date ———————————————— proval to determine whether it is com- Portable tank plete and conforms with the require- Manufactured for lllllll Company ments of paragraph (a) of this section. Location llllllllllllllllll If an application is incomplete, it will Manufactured by lllllll Company be returned to the applicant with an Location llllllllllllllllll explanation as to why the application Consigned to lllllllll Company Location llllllllllllllllll is incomplete. Size lll feet outside diameter by lll (2) Review all drawings and calcula- long. tions to ensure that the design is in Marks on tank as prescribed by § 178.255–14 of compliance with all requirements of this specification are as follows: the relevant specification. If the appli- Manufacturer’s name llllllllllll cation is approved, one set of the ap- Serial number llllllllllllllll proved drawings, calculations, and test Owner’s serial number lllllllllll DOT specification llllllllllllll data shall be returned to the applicant. ASME Code Symbol (par U–201) lllllll The second (inspector’s copy) set of ap- Date of manufacture llllllllllll proved drawings, calculations, and test Nominal capacity lllllll gallons. data shall be retained by the approval It is hereby certified that this tank is in agency. Maintain drawings and ap- complete compliance with the requirements proval records for as long as the port- of DOT specification No. 60. able tank remains in service. The draw- (Signed) ——————————————— ings and records must be provided to Manufacturer or owner the Department of Transportation (b) [Reserved] (DOT) upon request. [29 FR 18972, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 (3) Witness all tests required for the FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. approval of the portable tank specified 178–83, 50 FR 11066, Mar. 19, 1985; 68 FR 75750, in this section and part 180, subpart G Dec. 31, 2003] of this subchapter.

109

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00119 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.273 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(4) Ensure, through appropriate in- series of identical portable tanks man- spection that each portable tank is fab- ufactured to a single design type, for ricated in all respects in conformance each series of portable tanks. The ap- with the approved drawings, calcula- proval certificate must include all the tions, and test data. information required to be displayed on (5) Determine and ensure that the the metal identification plate required portable tank is suitable for its in- by § 178.274(i). The approval certificate tended use and that it conforms to the must certify that the approval agency requirements of this subchapter. designated to approve the portable (6) For UN portable tanks intended tank has approved the portable tank in for non-refrigerated and refrigerated accordance with the procedures in sub- liquefied gases and Division 6.1 liquids part E of part 107 of this subchapter which meet the inhalation toxicity cri- and that the portable tank is suitable teria (Zone A or B) as defined in for its intended purpose and meets the § 173.132 of this subchapter, or that are requirements of this subchapter. When designated as toxic by inhalation mate- a series of portable tanks is manufac- rials in the § 172.101 Table of this sub- tured without change in the design chapter, the approval agency must en- type, the certificate may be valid for sure that: the entire series of portable tanks rep- (i) The portable tank has been de- resenting a single design type. For UN signed, constructed, certified, and portable tanks, the certificate must stamped in accordance with the re- refer to the prototype test report, the quirements in Division 1 of Section hazardous material or group of haz- VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 ardous materials allowed to be trans- of this subchapter). Other design codes ported, the materials of construction of may be used if approved by the Asso- the shell and lining (when applicable) ciate Administrator (see § 178.274(b)(1)); and an approval number. The approval (ii) All applicable provisions of the number must consist of the distin- design and construction have been met guishing sign or mark of the country to the satisfaction of the designated (‘‘USA’’ for the United States of Amer- approval agency in accordance with the ica) where the approval was granted rules established in the ASME Code and a registration number. and that the portable tank meets the (iii) Retain a copy of each approval requirements of the ASME Code and all certificate. the applicable requirements specified (8) For UN portable tanks, the ap- in this subchapter; proval certificate must also include the (iii) The inspector has carried out all following: the inspections specified by the rules (i) The results of the applicable established in the ASME Code; and framework and rail impact test speci- (iv) The portable tank is marked fied in part 180, subpart G, of this sub- with a U stamp code symbol under the chapter; and authority of the authorized inde- (ii) The results of the initial inspec- pendent inspector. tion and test in § 178.274(j). (7) Upon successful completion of all (9) The approval agency shall be inde- requirements of this subpart, the ap- pendent from the manufacturer. The proval agency must: approval agency and the authorized in- (i) Apply its name, identifying mark spector may be the same entity. or identifying number, and the date (c) Manufacturers’ responsibilities. The upon which the approval was issued, to manufacturer is responsible for compli- the metal identification marking plate ance with the applicable specifications attached to the portable tank. Any ap- for the design and construction of port- provals for UN portable tanks author- able tanks. In addition to responsi- izing design or construction alter- bility for compliance, manufacturers natives (Alternate Arrangements) ap- are responsible for ensuring that the proved by the Associate Administrator contracted approval agency and au- (see § 178.274(a)(2)) must be indicated on thorized inspector, if applicable, are the plate as specified in § 178.274(i). qualified, reputable and competent. (ii) Issue an approval certificate for The manufacturer of a portable tank each portable tank or, in the case of a shall—

110

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00120 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.273

(1) Comply with all the applicable re- (2) A statement as to whether the in- quirements of the ASME Code and of tended modification has been examined this subpart including, but not limited and determined to be unacceptable by to, ensuring that the quality control, any approval agency. The written design calculations and required tests statement must include the name of are performed and that all aspects of the approving agency, the reason for the portable tank meet the applicable nonacceptance, and the nature of requirements. changes made to the modification since (2) Obtain and use a designated ap- its original rejection. proval agency, if applicable, and obtain (3) The approval agency shall review and use a DOT-designated approval the request for modification, and if it agency to approve the design, construc- is determined that the proposed modi- tion and certification of the portable fication is in full compliance with the tank. relevant DOT specification, including a (3) Provide a statement in the manu- UN portable tank, the request shall be facturers’ data report certifying that approved and the approval agency shall each portable tank that is manufac- perform the following activities: tured complies with the relevant speci- (i) Return one set of the approved re- fication and all the applicable require- vised drawings, calculations, and test ments of this subchapter. data to the applicant. The second and (4) Maintain records of the qualifica- third sets of the approved revised draw- tion of portable tanks for at least 5 ings, calculations, and data shall be re- years and provide copies to the ap- tained by the approval agency as re- proval agency, the owner or lessee of quired in § 107.404(a)(3) of this sub- the tank. Upon request, provide these chapter. records to a representative of DOT. (ii) Ensure through appropriate in- (d) Denial of application for approval. spection that all modifications con- If an approval agency finds that a port- form to the revised drawings, calcula- able tank cannot be approved for any tions, and test data. reason, it shall notify the applicant in writing and shall provide the applicant (iii) Determine the extent to which with the reasons for which the ap- retesting of the modified tank is nec- proval is denied. A copy of the notifica- essary based on the nature of the pro- tion letter shall be provided to the As- posed modification, and ensure that all sociate Administrator. An applicant required retests are satisfactorily per- aggrieved by a decision of an approval formed. agency may appeal the decision in (iv) If modification to an approved writing, within 90 days of receipt, to tank alters any information on the ap- the Associate Administrator. proval certificate, issue a new approval (e) Modifications to approved portable certificate for the modified tank and tanks. (1) Prior to modification of any ensure that any necessary changes are UN portable tank which may affect made to the metal identification plate. conformance and the safe use of the A copy of each newly issued approval portable tank, which may involve a certificate shall be retained by the ap- change to the design type or which proval agency and by the owner of each may affect its ability to retain haz- portable tank. ardous material in transportation, the (4) If the approval agency determines person desiring to make such modifica- that the proposed modification is not tion shall inform the approval agency in compliance with the relevant DOT that issued the initial approval of the specification, the approval agency portable tank (or if unavailable, an- shall deny the request in accordance other approval agency) of the nature of with paragraph (d) of this section. the modification and request approval (f) Termination of Approval Certificate. of the modification. The person desir- (1) The Associate Administrator may ing to modify the tank must supply the terminate an approval issued under approval agency with three sets of all this section if he determines that— revised drawings, calculations, and test (i) Information upon which the ap- data relative to the intended modifica- proval was based is fraudulent or sub- tion. stantially erroneous; or

111

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00121 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(ii) Termination of the approval is tanks may be varied if approved by the necessary to adequately protect Associate Administrator and the port- against risks to life and property; or able tank is shown to provide a level of (iii) The approval was not issued by safety equal to or exceeding the re- the approval agency in good faith; or quirements of this subchapter. Port- (iv) The portable tank does not meet able tanks approved to alternative the specification. technical requirements must be (2) Before an approval is terminated, marked ‘‘Alternative Arrangement’’ as the Associate Administrator gives the specified in paragraph (i) of this sec- interested party(ies): tion. (i) Written notice of the facts or con- (3) Definitions. The following defini- duct believed to warrant the termi- tions apply for the purposes of design nation; and construction of UN portable tanks (ii) Opportunity to submit oral and under this subpart: written evidence; and Alternate Arrangement portable tank (iii) Opportunity to demonstrate or means a UN portable tank that has achieve compliance with the applicable been approved to alternative technical requirements. requirements or testing methods other (3) If the Associate Administrator de- than those specified for UN portable termines that a certificate of approval tanks in part 178 or part 180 of this sub- must be terminated to preclude a sig- chapter. nificant and imminent adverse affect on public safety, he may terminate the Approval agency means the des- certificate immediately. In such cir- ignated approval agency authorized to cumstances, the opportunities of para- approve the portable tank in accord- graphs (f)(2) (ii) and (iii) of this section ance with the procedures in subpart E need not be provided prior to termi- of part 107 of this subchapter. nation of the approval, but shall be Design pressure is defined according provided as soon as practicable there- to the hazardous materials intended to after. be transported in the portable tank. See §§ 178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, as ap- [66 FR 33439, June 21, 2001, as amended at 67 plicable. FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75748, 75751, Dec. 31, 2003; 72 FR 55695, Oct. 1, 2007] Design type means a portable tank or series of portable tanks made of mate- § 178.274 Specifications for UN port- rials of the same material specifica- able tanks. tions and thicknesses, manufactured (a) General. (1) Each UN portable by a single manufacturer, using the tank must meet the requirements of same fabrication techniques (for exam- this section. In addition to the require- ple, welding procedures) and made with ments of this section, requirements equivalent structural equipment, clo- specific to UN portable tanks used for sures, and service equipment. liquid and solid hazardous materials, Fine grain steel means steel that has a non-refrigerated liquefied gases and re- ferritic grain size of 6 or finer when de- frigerated liquefied gases are provided termined in accordance with ASTM E in §§ 178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, respec- 112–96 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- tively. Requirements for approval, chapter). maintenance, inspection, testing and Fusible element means a non-reclosing use are provided in § 178.273 and part pressure relief device that is thermally 180, subpart G, of this subchapter. Any activated and that provides protection portable tank which meets the defini- against excessive pressure buildup in tion of a ‘‘container’’ within the terms the portable tank developed by expo- of the International Convention for sure to heat, such as from a fire (see Safe Containers (CSC) must meet the § 178.275(g)). requirements of the CSC as amended Jacket means the outer insulation and 49 CFR parts 450 through 453 and cover or cladding which may be part of must have a CSC safety approval plate. the insulation system. (2) In recognition of scientific and Leakage test means a test using gas to technological advances, the technical subject the shell and its service equip- requirements applicable to UN portable ment to an internal pressure.

112

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00122 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.274

Maximum allowable working pressure (b) General design and construction re- (MAWP) is defined according to the quirements. (1) The design temperature hazardous materials intended to be range for the shell must be ¥40 °C to 50 transported in the portable tank. See °C (¥40 °F to 122 °F) for hazardous ma- §§ 178.275, 178.276 and 178.277, as applica- terials transported under normal con- ble. ditions of transportation, except for Maximum permissible gross mass portable tanks used for refrigerated (MPGM) means the sum of the tare liquefied gases where the minimum de- mass of the portable tank and the sign temperature must not be higher heaviest hazardous material authorized than the lowest (coldest) temperature for transportation. (for example, service temperature) of Mild steel means a steel with a guar- the contents during filling, discharge anteed minimum tensile strength of 360 or transportation. For hazardous mate- N/mm2 to 440 N/mm2 and a guaranteed rials handled under elevated tempera- minimum elongation at fracture as ture conditions, the design tempera- specified in paragraph (c)(10) of this ture must not be less than the max- section. imum temperature of the hazardous Offshore portable tank means a port- material during filling, discharge or able tank specially designed for re- transportation. More severe design peated use in the transportation of haz- temperatures must be considered for ardous materials to, from and between portable tanks subjected to severe cli- offshore facilities. An offshore portable matic conditions (for example, portable tank is designed and constructed in ac- tanks transported in arctic regions). cordance with the Guidelines for the Shells must be designed and con- Approval of Containers Handled in structed in accordance with the re- Open Seas specified in the IMDG Code quirements in Section VIII of the (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- Reference steel means a steel with a chapter), except as limited or modified tensile strength of 370 N/mm2 and an in this subchapter. For portable tanks elongation at fracture of 27%. used for liquid or solid hazardous mate- Service equipment means measuring rials, a design code other than the instruments and filling, discharge, ASME Code may be used if approved by venting, safety, heating, cooling and the Associate Administrator. Portable insulating devices. tanks must have an ASME certifi- Shell means the part of the portable cation and U stamp when used for Haz- tank which retains the hazardous ma- ard Zone A or B toxic by inhalation liq- terials intended for transportation, in- uids, or when used for non-refrigerated cluding openings and closures, but does or refrigerated liquefied compressed not include service equipment or exter- gases. Shells must be made of metallic nal structural equipment. materials suitable for forming. Non- Structural equipment means the rein- metallic materials may be used for the forcing, fastening, protective and stabi- attachments and supports between the lizing members external to the shell. shell and jacket, provided their mate- Test pressure means the maximum rial properties at the minimum and gauge pressure at the top of the shell maximum design temperatures are during the hydraulic pressure test proven to be sufficient. For welded equal to not less than 1.5 times the de- shells, only a material whose sign pressure for liquids and 1.3 for liq- weldability has been fully dem- uefied compressed gases and refrig- onstrated may be used. Welds must be erated liquefied gases. In some in- of high quality and conform to a level stances a pneumatic test is authorized of integrity at least equivalent to the as an alternative to the hydraulic test. welding requirements specified in Sec- The minimum test pressures for port- tion VIII of the ASME Code for the able tanks intended for specific liquid welding of pressure vessels. When the and solid hazardous materials are spec- manufacturing process or the materials ified in the applicable portable tank T make it necessary, the shells must be codes (such as T1–T23) assigned to suitably heat-treated to guarantee ade- these hazardous materials in the quate toughness in the weld and in the § 172.101 Table of this subchapter. heat-affected zones. In choosing the

113

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00123 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

material, the design temperature range perforations, sufficiently elastic and must be taken into account with re- compatible with the thermal expansion spect to risk of brittle fracture, stress characteristics of the shell. The lining corrosion cracking, resistance to im- of every shell, shell fittings and piping pact, and suitability for the hazardous must be continuous and must extend materials intended for transportation around the face of any flange. Where in the portable tank. When fine grain external fittings are welded to the steel is used, the guaranteed value of tank, the lining must be continuous the yield strength must be not more through the fitting and around the face than 460 N/mm2 and the guaranteed of external flanges. Joints and seams in value of the upper limit of the tensile the lining must be made by fusing the strength must be not more than 725 N/ material together or by other equally mm2 according to the material speci- effective means. fication. Aluminum may not be used as (5) Contact between dissimilar met- a construction material for the shells als which could result in damage by of portable tanks intended for the galvanic action must be prevented by transport of non-refrigerated liquefied appropriate measures. gases. For portable tanks intended for (6) The construction materials of the the transport of liquid or solid haz- portable tank, including any devices, ardous materials, aluminum may only gaskets, linings and accessories, must be used as a construction material for not adversely affect or react with the portable tank shells if approved by the hazardous materials intended to be Associate Administrator. Portable transported in the portable tank. tank materials must be suitable for the (7) Portable tanks must be designed external environment where they will and constructed with supports that be transported, taking into account the provide a secure base during transpor- determined design temperature range. tation and with suitable lifting and tie- Portable tanks shall be designed to down attachments. withstand, without loss of contents, at (c) Design criteria. (1) Portable tanks least the internal pressure due to the and their fastenings must, under the contents and the static, dynamic and maximum permissible loads and max- thermal loads during normal condi- imum permissible working pressures, tions of handling and transportation. be capable of absorbing the following The design must take into account the separately applied static forces (for effects of fatigue, caused by repeated calculation purposes, acceleration due application of these loads through the to gravity (g) = 9.81m/s2): expected life of the portable tank. (i) In the direction of travel: 2g (2) Portable tank shells, fittings, and (twice the MPGM multiplied by the ac- pipework shall be constructed from celeration due to gravity); materials that are: (ii) Horizontally at right angles to (i) Compatible with the hazardous the direction of travel: 1g (the MPGM materials intended to be transported; multiplied by the acceleration due to or gravity); (ii) Properly passivated or neutral- (iii) Vertically upwards: 1g (the ized by chemical reaction, if applica- MPGM multiplied by the acceleration ble; or due to gravity); and (iii) For portable tanks used for liq- (iv) Vertically downwards: 2g (twice uid and solid materials, lined with cor- the MPGM multiplied by the accelera- rosion-resistant material directly tion due to gravity). bonded to the shell or attached by (2) Under each of the forces specified equivalent means. in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, the (3) Gaskets and seals shall be made of safety factor must be as follows: materials that are compatible with the (i) For metals having a clearly de- hazardous materials intended to be fined yield point, a design margin of 1.5 transported. in relation to the guaranteed yield (4) When shells are lined, the lining strength; or must be compatible with the hazardous (ii) For metals with no clearly de- materials intended to be transported, fined yield point, a design margin of 1.5 homogeneous, non-porous, free from in relation to the guaranteed 0.2%

114

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00124 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.274

proof strength and, for austenitic Re = yield strength in N/mm2, or 0.2% steels, the 1% proof strength. proof strength or, for austenitic (3) The values of yield strength or steels, 1% proof strength; proof strength must be the values ac- Rm = minimum tensile strength in N/ cording to recognized material stand- mm2. ards. When austenitic steels are used, (8) The values of Re and Rm to be the specified minimum values of yield used must be the specified minimum strength or proof strength according to values according to recognized mate- the material standards may be in- rial standards. When austenitic steels creased by up to 15% for portable tanks are used, the specified minimum values used for liquid and solid hazardous ma- for Re and Rm according to the mate- terials, other than toxic by inhalation rial standards may be increased by up liquids meeting the criteria of Hazard to 15% when greater values are at- Zone A or Hazard Zone B (see § 173.133 tested in the material inspection cer- of this subchapter), when these greater tificate. values are attested in the material in- (9) Steels which have a Re/Rm ratio spection certificate. of more than 0.85 are not allowed for (4) Portable tanks must be capable of the construction of welded shells. The being electrically grounded to prevent values of Re and Rm to be used in de- dangerous electrostatic discharge when termining this ratio must be the values they are used for Class 2 flammable specified in the material inspection gases or Class 3 flammable liquids, in- certificate. cluding elevated temperature mate- (10) Steels used in the construction of rials transported at or above their shells must have an elongation at frac- flash point. ture, in percentage, of not less than (5) For shells of portable tanks used 10,000/Rm with an absolute minimum of for liquefied compressed gases, the 16% for fine grain steels and 20% for shell must consist of a circular cross other steels. section. Shells must be of a design ca- (11) For the purpose of determining actual values for materials for sheet pable of being stress-analyzed mathe- metal, the axis of the tensile test speci- matically or experimentally by resist- men must be at right angles (trans- ance strain gauges as specified in UG– versely) to the direction of rolling. The 101 of Section VIII of the ASME Code, permanent elongation at fracture must or other methods approved by the As- be measured on test specimens of rec- sociate Administrator. tangular cross sections in accordance (6) Shells must be designed and con- with ISO 6892 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this structed to withstand a hydraulic test subchapter), using a 50 mm gauge pressure of not less than 1.5 times the length. design pressure for portable tanks used (d) Minimum shell thickness. (1) The for liquids and 1.3 times the design minimum shell thickness must be the pressure for portable tanks used for liq- greatest thickness of the following: uefied compressed gases. Specific re- (i) the minimum thickness deter- quirements are provided for each haz- mined in accordance with the require- ardous material in the applicable T ments of paragraphs (d)(2) through Code or portable tank special provision (d)(7) of this section; specified in the § 172.101 Table of this (ii) the minimum thickness deter- subchapter. The minimum shell thick- mined in accordance with Section VIII ness requirements must also be taken of the ASME Code or other approved into account. pressure vessel code; or (7) For metals exhibiting a clearly (iii) the minimum thickness specified defined yield point or characterized by in the applicable T code or portable a guaranteed proof strength (0.2% proof tank special provision indicated for strength, generally, or 1% proof each hazardous material in the § 172.101 strength for austenitic steels), the pri- Table of this subchapter. mary membrane stress s (sigma) in the (2) Shells (cylindrical portions, heads shell must not exceed 0.75 Re or 0.50 and manhole covers) not more than 1.80 Rm, whichever is lower, at the test m in diameter may not be less than 5 pressure, where: mm thick in the reference steel or of

115

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00125 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

equivalent thickness in the metal to be d1 = 1.8m, unless the formula is used to de- used. Shells more than 1.80 m in diame- termine the equivalent minimum thick- ter may not be less than 6 mm (0.2 ness for a portable tank shell that is re- inches) thick in the reference steel or quired to have a minimum thickness of 8mm or 10mm according to the applica- of equivalent thickness in the metal to ble T code indicated in the § 172.101 Table be used. For portable tanks used only of this subchapter. When reference steel for the transportation of powdered or thicknesses of 8mm or 10mm are speci- granular solid hazardous materials of fied, d1 is equal to the actual diameter of Packing Group II or III, the minimum the shell but not less than 1.8m; thickness requirement may be reduced Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength to 5 mm in the reference steel or of (in N/mm 2) of the metal to be used; A1 = guaranteed minimum elongation at equivalent thickness in the metal to be fracture (in %) of the metal to be used used regardless of the shell diameter. according to recognized material stand- For vacuum-insulated tanks, the ag- ards. gregate thickness of the jacket and the shell must correspond to the minimum (6) The wall and all parts of the shell thickness prescribed in this paragraph, may not have a thickness less than with the thickness of the shell itself that prescribed in paragraphs (d)(2), not less than the minimum thickness (d)(3) and (d)(4) of this section. This prescribed in paragraph (d)(3) of this thickness must be exclusive of any cor- section. rosion allowance. (3) When additional protection (7) There must be no sudden change against shell damage is provided in the of plate thickness at the attachment of case of portable tanks used for liquid the heads to the cylindrical portion of and solid hazardous materials requir- the shell. ing test pressures less than 2.65 bar (e) Service equipment. (1) Service (265.0 kPa), subject to certain limita- equipment must be arranged so that it tions specified in the UN Recommenda- is protected against the risk of me- tions (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- chanical damage by external forces chapter), the Associate Administrator during handling and transportation. may approve a reduced minimum shell When the connections between the thickness. frame and the shell allow relative (4) The cylindrical portions, heads movement between the sub-assemblies, and manhole covers of all shells must the equipment must be fastened to not be less than 3 mm (0.1 inch) thick allow such movement without risk of regardless of the material of construc- damage to any working part. The ex- tion, except for portable tanks used for ternal discharge fittings (pipe sockets, shut-off devices) and the internal stop- liquefied compressed gases where the valve and its seating must be protected cylindrical portions, ends (heads) and against mechanical damage by exter- manhole covers of all shells must not nal forces (for example, by using shear be less than 4 mm (0.2 inch) thick re- sections). Each internal self-closing gardless of the material of construc- stop-valve must be protected by a tion. shear section or sacrificial device lo- (5) When steel is used, that has char- cated outboard of the valve. The shear acteristics other than that of reference section or sacrificial device must break steel, the equivalent thickness of the at no more than 70% of the load that shell and heads must be determined ac- would cause failure of the internal self- cording to the following formula: closing stop valve. The filling and dis- 21.4ed charge devices (including flanges or e = 01 threaded plugs) and any protective 1 3 × caps must be capable of being secured 18. mRmA11 against unintended opening. Where: (2) Each filling or discharge opening e1 = required equivalent thickness (in mm) of of a portable tank must be clearly the metal to be used; marked to indicate its function. e0 = minimum thickness (in mm) of the reference steel specified in the applicable T (3) Each stop-valve or other means of code or portable tank special provision closure must be designed and con- indicated for each material in the structed to a rated pressure not less § 172.101 Table of this subchapter; than the MAWP of the shell taking

116

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00126 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR EN21JN01.005 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.274

into account the temperatures ex- and ISO 4126–7 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this pected during transport. All stop- subchapter); and valves with screwed spindles must (vi) The cross sectional flow areas of close by a clockwise motion of the the spring loaded pressure relief de- handwheel. For other stop-valves, the vices, frangible discs, and fusible ele- position (open and closed) and direc- ments in mm2; and tion of closure must be clearly indi- (vii) When practicable, the device cated. All stop-valves must be designed must show the manufacturer’s name to prevent unintentional opening. and product number. (4) Piping must be designed, con- (2) Connections to pressure relief de- structed and installed to avoid the risk vices. Connections to pressure relief de- of damage due to thermal expansion vices must be of sufficient size to en- and contraction, mechanical shock and able the required discharge to pass un- vibration. All piping must be of a suit- restricted to the safety device. No stop- able metallic material. Welded pipe valve may be installed between the joints must be used wherever possible. shell and the pressure relief devices ex- (5) Joints in copper tubing must be cept where duplicate devices are pro- brazed or have an equally strong metal vided for maintenance or other reasons union. The melting point of brazing and the stop-valves serving the devices materials must be no lower than 525 °C actually in use are locked open or the (977 °F). The joints must not decrease stop-valves are interlocked so that at the strength of the tubing, such as may least one of the devices is always in happen when cutting threads. Brazed use. There must be no obstruction in joints are not authorized for portable an opening leading to a vent or pres- tanks intended for refrigerated lique- sure relief device which might restrict fied gases. or cut-off the flow from the shell to (6) The burst pressure of all piping that device. Vents or pipes from the and pipe fittings must be greater than pressure relief device outlets, when the highest of four times the MAWP of used, must deliver the relieved vapor or the shell or four times the pressure to liquid to the atmosphere in conditions which it may be subjected in service by of minimum back-pressure on the re- the action of a pump or other device lieving devices. (except pressure relief devices). (3) Location of pressure relief devices. (7) Ductile metals must be used in (i) Each pressure relief device inlet the construction of valves and acces- must be situated on top of the shell in sories. a position as near the longitudinal and (f) Pressure relief devices—(1) Marking transverse center of the shell as rea- of pressure relief devices. Every pressure sonably practicable. All pressure relief relief device must be clearly and per- device inlets must, under maximum manently marked with the following: filling conditions, be situated in the (i) the pressure (in bar or kPa) or vapor space of the shell and the devices temperature for fusible elements (in must be so arranged as to ensure that °C) at which it is set to discharge; any escaping vapor is not restricted in (ii) the allowable tolerance at the any manner. For flammable hazardous discharge pressure for reclosing de- materials, the escaping vapor must be vices; directed away from the shell in such a (iii) the reference temperature cor- manner that it cannot impinge upon responding to the rated pressure for the shell. For refrigerated liquefied frangible discs; gases, the escaping vapor must be di- (iv) the allowable temperature toler- rected away from the tank and in such ance for fusible elements; a manner that it cannot impinge upon (v) The rated flow capacity of the the tank. Protective devices which de- spring loaded pressure relief devices, flect the flow of vapor are permissible frangible disc or fusible elements in provided the required relief-device ca- standard cubic meters of air per second pacity is not reduced. (m3/s). For spring loaded pressure relief (ii) Provisions must be implemented devices, the rated flow capacity must to prevent unauthorized persons from be determined according to ISO 4126–1 access to the pressure relief devices (including Technical Corrigendum 1) and to protect the devices from damage

117

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00127 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.274 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

caused by the portable tank over- (ii) The distance between forklift turning. pockets (measured from the center of (g) Gauging devices. Unless a portable each pocket) is at least half of the tank is intended to be filled by weight, maximum length of the portable tank. it must be equipped with one or more (5) During transport, portable tanks gauging devices. Glass level-gauges and must be adequately protected against gauges made of other fragile material, damage to the shell, and service equip- which are in direct communication ment resulting from lateral and longi- with the contents of the tank are pro- tudinal impact and overturning, or the hibited. A connection for a vacuum shell and service equipment must be gauge must be provided in the jacket of constructed to withstand the forces re- a vacuum-insulated portable tank. sulting from impact or overturning. (h) Portable tank supports, frameworks, External fittings must be protected so lifting and tie-down attachments. (1) as to preclude the release of the shell Portable tanks must be designed and contents upon impact or overturning of the portable tank on its fittings. Ex- constructed with a support structure to amples of protection include: provide a secure base during transport. (i) Protection against lateral impact The forces and safety factors specified which may consist of longitudinal bars in paragraphs (c)(1) and (c)(2) of this protecting the shell on both sides at section, respectively, must be taken the level of the median line; into account in this aspect of the de- (ii) Protection of the portable tank sign. Skids, frameworks, cradles or against overturning which may consist other similar structures are accept- of reinforcement rings or bars fixed able. across the frame; (2) The combined stresses caused by (iii) Protection against rear impact portable tank mountings (for example, which may consist of a bumper or cradles, framework, etc.) and portable frame; tank lifting and tie-down attachments (iv) Protection of the shell against must not cause stress that would dam- damage from impact or overturning by age the shell in a manner that would use of an ISO frame in accordance with compromise its lading retention capa- ISO 1496–3 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- bility. Permanent lifting and tie-down chapter); and attachments must be fitted to all port- (v) Protection of the portable tank able tanks. Preferably they should be from impact or damage that may re- fitted to the portable tank supports sult from overturning by an insulation but may be secured to reinforcing jacket. plates located on the shell at the (i) Marking. (1) Every portable tank points of support. Each portable tank must be fitted with a corrosion resist- must be designed so that the center of ant metal plate permanently attached gravity of the filled tank is approxi- to the portable tank in a conspicuous mately centered within the points of place and readily accessible for inspec- attachment for lifting devices. tion. When the plate cannot be perma- (3) In the design of supports and nently attached to the shell, the shell frameworks, the effects of environ- must be marked with at least the infor- mental corrosion must be taken into mation required by Section VIII of the account. ASME Code. At a minimum, the fol- (4) Forklift pockets must be capable lowing information must be marked on of being closed off. The means of clos- the plate by stamping or by any other ing forklift pockets must be a perma- equivalent method: nent part of the framework or perma- Country of manufacture nently attached to the framework. Sin- U N gle compartment portable tanks with a Approval Country length less than 3.65 m (12 ft.) need not Approval Number have forklift pockets that are capable Alternative Arrangements (see § 178.274(a)(2)) of being closed off provided that: ‘‘AA’’ Manufacturer’s name or mark (i) The shell, including all the fit- Manufacturer’s serial number tings, are well protected from being hit Approval Agency (Authorized body for the by the forklift blades; and design approval)

118

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00128 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.274

Owner’s registration number ‘‘OFFSHORE PORTABLE TANK’’ must Year of manufacture be marked on the identification plate. Pressure vessel code to which the shell is de- (j) Initial inspection and test. The ini- signed Test pressurellllbar gauge. tial inspection and test of a portable MAWPllllbar gauge. tank must include the following: External design pressure (not required for (1) A check of the design characteris- portable tanks used for refrigerated lique- tics. fied gases)llllbar gauge. (2) An internal and external examina- Design temperature rangellll °C tollll °C. (For portable tanks used for tion of the portable tank and its fit- refrigerated liquefied gases, the minimum tings, taking into account the haz- design temperature must be marked.) ardous materials to be transported. For Water capacity at 20 °C/llllliters. UN portable tanks used for refrigerated Water capacity of each compartment at 20 liquefied gases, a pressure test using an °Cllllliters. inert gas may be conducted instead of Initial pressure test date and witness identi- a hydrostatic test. An internal inspec- fication. MAWP for heating/cooling systemllllbar tion is not required for a portable tank gauge. used for the dedicated transportation Shell material(s) and material standard ref- of refrigerated liquefied gases that are erence(s). not filled with an inspection opening. Equivalent thickness in reference (3) A pressure test as specified in steelllllmm. paragraph (i) of this section. Lining material (when applicable). Date and type of most recent periodic test(s). (4) A leakage test. MonthllllYearllll Test (5) A test of the satisfactory oper- pressurellllbar gauge. ation of all service equipment includ- Stamp of approval agency that performed or ing pressure relief devices must also be witnessed the most recent test. performed. When the shell and its fit- For portable tanks used for refrigerated tings have been pressure-tested sepa- liquefied gases: rately, they must be subjected to a Either ‘‘thermally insulated’’ or ‘‘vacuum in- leakage test after reassembly. All sulated’’llll. welds, subject to full stress level in the Effectiveness of the insulation system (heat shell, must be inspected during the ini- influx)llllWatts (W). Reference holding timelllldays or hours tial test by radiographic, ultrasonic, or and initial pressurellllbar/kPa gauge another suitable non-destructive test and degree of fillingllllin kg for each method. This does not apply to the refrigerated liquefied gas permitted for jacket. transportation. (6) Effective January 1, 2008, each (2) The following information must new UN portable tank design type be marked either on the portable tank meeting the definition of ‘‘container’’ itself or on a metal plate firmly se- in the Convention for Safe Containers cured to the portable tank: (CSC) (see 49 CFR 450.3(a)(2)) must be subjected to the dynamic longitudinal Name of the operator. impact test prescribed in Part IV, Sec- Name of hazardous materials being transported and maximum mean bulk tempera- tion 40 of the UN Manual of Tests and ture (except for refrigerated liquefied Criteria (see IBR, § 171.7 of this sub- gases, the name and temperature are only chapter). A UN portable tank design required when the maximum mean bulk type impact-tested prior to January 1, temperature is higher than 50 °C). 2008, in accordance with the require- Maximum permissible gross mass ments of this section in effect on Octo- (MPGM)llllkg. ber 1, 2005, need not be retested. UN Unladen (tare) massllllkg. portable tanks used for the dedicated NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (i)(2): For the identi- transportation of ‘‘Helium, refrigerated fication of the hazardous materials being liquid,’’ UN1963, and ‘‘Hydrogen, refrig- transported refer to part 172 of this sub- erated liquid,’’ UN1966, that are chapter. marked ‘‘NOT FOR RAIL TRANS- (3) If a portable tank is designed and PORT’’ in letters of a minimum height approved for open seas operations, such of 10 cm (4 inches) on at least two sides as offshore oil exploration, in accord- of the portable tank are excepted from ance with the IMDG Code, the words the dynamic longitudinal impact test.

119

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00129 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.275 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(7) The following tests must be com- (ii) The sum of— pleted on a portable tank or a series of (A) The absolute vapor pressure (in portable tanks designed and con- bar) of the hazardous material at 65 °C, structed to a single design type that is minus 1 bar (149 °F, minus 100 kPa); also a CSC container without leakage (B) The partial pressure (in bar) of or deformation that would render the air or other gases in the ullage space, portable tank unsafe for transportation resulting from their compression dur- and use: ing filling without pressure relief by a (i) Longitudinal inertia. The portable maximum ullage temperature of 65 °C tank loaded to its maximum gross (149 °F) and a liquid expansion due to weight must be positioned with its lon- an increase in mean bulk temperature gitudinal axis vertical. It shall be held of 35 °C (95 °F); and in this position for five minutes by sup- (C) A head pressure determined on port at the lower end of the base struc- the basis of the forces specified in ture providing vertical and lateral re- § 178.274(c) of this subchapter, but not straint and by support at the upper end less than 0.35 bar (35 kPa). of the base structure providing lateral (2) Maximum allowable working pres- restraint only. sure (MAWP) means a pressure that (ii) Lateral inertia. The portable tank must not be less than the highest of loaded to its maximum gross weight the following pressures measured at must be positioned for five minutes the top of the shell while in operating with its transverse axis vertical. It position: shall be held in this position for five (i) The maximum effective gauge minutes by support at the lower side of pressure allowed in the shell during the base structure providing vertical filling or discharge; or and lateral restraint and by support at (ii) The maximum effective gauge the upper side of the base structure pressure to which the shell is designed providing lateral restraint only. which must be not less than the design [66 FR 33440, June 21, 2001, as amended at 67 pressure. FR 15744, Apr. 3, 2002; 68 FR 45041, July 31, (c) Service equipment. (1) In addition 2003; 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75751, to the requirements specified in Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 76185, Dec. 20, 2004; 70 FR § 178.274, for service equipment, all 34399, June 14, 2005; 71 FR 78634, Dec. 29, 2006; openings in the shell, intended for fill- 72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007; 73 FR 4719, Jan. 28, ing or discharging the portable tank 2008; 78 FR 1096, Jan. 7, 2013] must be fitted with a manually oper- EDITORIAL NOTE: At 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, ated stop-valve located as close to the 2003, § 178.274 was amended in paragraph shell as reasonably practicable. Other (b)(1); however, the amendment could not be openings, except for openings leading incorporated due to inaccurate amendatory instruction. to venting or pressure relief devices, must be equipped with either a stop- § 178.275 Specification for UN Portable valve or another suitable means of clo- Tanks intended for the transpor- sure located as close to the shell as tation of liquid and solid hazardous reasonably practicable. materials. (2) All portable tanks must be fitted (a) In addition to the requirements of with a manhole or other inspection § 178.274, this section sets forth defini- openings of a suitable size to allow for tions and requirements that apply to internal inspection and adequate ac- UN portable tanks intended for the cess for maintenance and repair of the transportation of liquid and solid haz- interior. Compartmented portable ardous materials. tanks must have a manhole or other (b) Definitions and requirements—(1) inspection openings for each compart- Design pressure means the pressure to ment. be used in calculations required by the (3) For insulated portable tanks, top recognized pressure vessel code. The fittings must be surrounded by a spill design pressure must not be less than collection reservoir with suitable the highest of the following pressures: drains. (i) The maximum effective gauge (4) Piping must be designed, con- pressure allowed in the shell during structed and installed to avoid the risk filling or discharge; or of damage due to thermal expansion

120

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00130 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.275

and contraction, mechanical shock and (D) Except for portable tanks having vibration. All piping must be of a suit- a capacity less than 1,000 liters (264.2 able metallic material. Welded pipe gallons), it must be possible to close joints must be used wherever possible. the valve from an accessible position (d) Bottom openings. (1) Certain haz- on the portable tank that is remote ardous materials may not be trans- from the valve itself within 30 seconds ported in portable tanks with bottom of actuation; and openings. When the applicable T code (E) The valve must continue to be ef- or portable tank special provision, as fective in the event of damage to the referenced for materials in the § 172.101 external device for controlling the op- Table of this subchapter, specifies that eration of the valve; bottom openings are prohibited, there (ii) An external stop-valve fitted as must be no openings below the liquid close to the shell as reasonably prac- level of the shell when it is filled to its ticable; maximum permissible filling limit. (iii) A liquid tight closure at the end When an existing opening is closed, it of the discharge pipe, which may be a must be accomplished by internally bolted blank flange or a screw cap; and and externally welding one plate to the (iv) For UN portable tanks, with bot- shell. tom outlets, used for the transpor- (2) Bottom discharge outlets for port- tation of liquid hazardous materials able tanks carrying certain solid, crys- that are Class 3, PG I or II, or PG III tallizable or highly viscous hazardous with a flash point of less than 100 °F (38 materials must be equipped with at °C); Division 5.1, PG I or II; or Division least two serially fitted and mutually 6.1, PG I or II, the remote means of clo- independent shut-off devices. Use of sure must be capable of thermal acti- only two shut-off devices is only au- vation. The thermal means of activa- thorized when this paragraph is ref- tion must activate at a temperature of erenced in the applicable T Code indi- not more than 250 °F (121 °C). cated for each hazardous material in (e) Pressure relief devices. All portable the § 172.101 Table of this subchapter. tanks must be fitted with at least one The design of the equipment must be to pressure relief device. All relief devices the satisfaction of the approval agency must be designed, constructed and and must include: marked in accordance with the require- (i) An external stop-valve fitted as ments of this subchapter. close to the shell as reasonably prac- (f) Vacuum-relief devices. (1) A shell ticable; and which is to be equipped with a vacuum- (ii) A liquid tight closure at the end relief device must be designed to with- of the discharge pipe, which may be a stand, without permanent deformation, bolted blank flange or a screw cap. an external pressure of not less than (3) Except as provided in paragraph 0.21 bar (21.0 kPa). The vacuum-relief (d)(2) of this section, every bottom dis- device must be set to relieve at a vacu- charge outlet must be equipped with um setting not greater than ¥0.21 bar three serially fitted and mutually inde- (¥21.0 kPa) unless the shell is designed pendent shut-off devices. The design of for a higher external over pressure, in the equipment must include: which case the vacuum-relief pressure (i) A self-closing internal stop-valve, of the device to be fitted must not be which is a stop-valve within the shell greater than the tank design vacuum or within a welded flange or its com- pressure. A shell that is not fitted with panion flange, such that: a vacuum-relief device must be de- (A) The control devices for the oper- signed to withstand, without perma- ation of the valve are designed to pre- nent deformation, an external pressure vent any unintended opening through of not less than 0.4 bar (40.0 kPa). impact or other inadvertent act; (2) Vacuum-relief devices used on (B) The valve is operable from above portable tanks intended for the trans- or below; portation of hazardous materials meet- (C) If possible, the setting of the ing the criteria of Class 3, including valve (open or closed) must be capable elevated temperature hazardous mate- of being verified from the ground; rials transported at or above their

121

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00131 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.275 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

flash point, must prevent the imme- pressure 10% above the start-to-dis- diate passage of flame into the shell or charge pressure of the reclosable pres- the portable tank must have a shell ca- sure relief device. pable of withstanding, without leak- (4) Every portable tank with a capac- age, an internal explosion resulting ity less than 1,900 liters (501.9 gallons) from the passage of flame into the must be fitted with a pressure relief de- shell. vice which, except as provided in para- (g) Pressure relief devices. (1) Each graph (g)(3) of this section, may be a portable tank with a capacity not less frangible disc when this disc is set to than 1,900 liters (501.9 gallons) and rupture at a nominal pressure equal to every independent compartment of a the test pressure at any temperature portable tank with a similar capacity, within the design temperature range. must be provided with one or more (5) When the shell is fitted for pres- pressure relief devices of the reclosing sure discharge, a suitable pressure re- type. Such portable tanks may, in addition, have a frangible disc or fusible lief device must provide the inlet line element in parallel with the reclosing to the portable tank and set to operate devices, except when the applicable T at a pressure not higher than the code assigned to a hazardous material MAWP of the shell, and a stop-valve requires that the frangible disc precede must be fitted as close to the shell as the pressure relief device, according to practicable to minimize the potential paragraph (g)(3) of this section, or for damage. when no bottom openings are allowed. (6) Setting of pressure relief devices. (i) The pressure relief devices must have Pressure relief devices must operate sufficient capacity to prevent rupture only in conditions of excessive rise in of the shell due to over pressurization temperature. The shell must not be or vacuum resulting from filling, dis- subject to undue fluctuations of pres- charging, heating of the contents or sure during normal conditions of trans- fire. portation. (2) Pressure relief devices must be de- (ii) The required pressure relief designed to prevent the entry of foreign vice must be set to start to discharge matter, the leakage of liquid and the at a nominal pressure of five-sixths of development of any dangerous excess the test pressure for shells having a pressure. test pressure of not more than 4.5 bar (3) When required for certain haz- (450 kPa) and 110% of two-thirds of the ardous materials by the applicable T test pressure for shells having a test code or portable tank special provision pressure of more than 4.5 bar (450 kPa). specified for a hazardous material in A self-closing relief device must close the § 172.101 Table of this subchapter, at a pressure not more than 10% below portable tanks must have a pressure the pressure at which the discharge relief device consistent with the re- starts. The device must remain closed quirements of this subchapter. Except for a portable tank in dedicated service at all lower pressures. This require- that is fitted with an approved relief ment does not prevent the use of vacu- device constructed of materials com- um-relief or combination pressure re- patible with the hazardous material, lief and vacuum-relief devices. the relief device system must include a (h) Fusible elements. Fusible elements frangible disc preceding (such as, be- must operate at a temperature between tween the lading and the reclosing 110 °C (230 °F) and 149 °C (300.2 °F), pro- pressure relief device) a reclosing pres- vided that the pressure in the shell at sure relief device. A pressure gauge or the fusing temperature will not exceed suitable tell-tale indicator for the de- the test pressure. They must be placed tection of disc rupture, pin-holing or at the top of the shell with their inlets leakage must be provided in the space in the vapor space and in no case may between the frangible disc and the they be shielded from external heat. pressure relief device to allow the port- Fusible elements must not be utilized able tank operator to check to deter- on portable tanks with a test pressure mine if the disc is leak free. The fran- which exceeds 2.65 bar (265.0 kPa); how- gible disc must rupture at a nominal ever, fusible elements are authorized

122

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00132 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.275

on portable tanks for the transpor- U = thermal conductance of the insulation, tation of certain organometallic mate- in kW m¥2K¥1, at 38 °C (100 °F); and t = rials in accordance with § 172.102, spe- actual temperature of the hazardous material during filling (in °C) or when this cial provision TP36 of this subchapter. temperature is unknown, let t = 15 °C (59 Fusible elements used on portable °F). The value of F given in this para- tanks intended for the transport of ele- graph (i)(2)(i)(A) for insulated shells may vated temperature hazardous materials only be used if the insulation is in con- must be designed to operate at a tem- formance with paragraph (i)(2)(iv) of this perature higher than the maximum section; temperature that will be experienced A = total external surface area of shell in square meters; during transport and must be designed Z = the gas compressibility factor in the ac- to the satisfaction of the approval cumulating condition (when this factor agency. is unknown, let Z equal 1.0); (i) Capacity of pressure relief devices. T = absolute temperature in Kelvin (°C + 273) (1) The reclosing pressure relief device above the pressure relief devices in the required by paragraph (g)(1) of this sec- accumulating condition; tion must have a minimum cross sec- L = the latent heat of vaporization of the liquid, in kJ/kg, in the accumulating condi- tional flow area equivalent to an ori- tion; fice of 31.75 mm (1.3 inches) diameter. M = molecular weight of the hazardous mate- Vacuum-relief devices, when used, rial. must have a cross sectional flow area (B) The constant C, as shown in the not less than 284 mm 2 (11.2 inches 2). formula in paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) of this (2) The combined delivery capacity of section, is derived from one of the fol- the pressure relief system (taking into lowing formulas as a function of the account the reduction of the flow when ratio k of specific heats: the portable tank is fitted with frangible-discs preceding spring-loaded c pressure-relief devices or when the k= p spring-loaded pressure-relief devices c are provided with a device to prevent v the passage of the flame), in condition Where: of complete fire engulfment of the cp is the specific heat at constant pressure; portable tank must be sufficient to and limit the pressure in the shell to 20% cv is the specific heat at constant volume. above the start to discharge pressure (C) When k >1: limiting device (pressure relief device). The total required capacity of the re- k +1 lief devices may be determined using ⎛ 2 ⎞ k −1 the formula in paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) of Ck= ⎜ ⎟ this section or the table in paragraph ⎝ k +1⎠ (i)(2)(iii) of this section. (D) When k = 1 or k is unknown, a (i)(A) To determine the total re- value of 0.607 may be used for the con- quired capacity of the relief devices, stant C. C may also be taken from the which must be regarded as being the following table: sum of the individual capacities of all the contributing devices, the following C CONSTANT VALUE TABLE formula must be used: k C FA082. ZT 1.00 0.607 = 1.02 0.611 Q 12. 4 1.04 0.615 LC M 1.06 0.620 Where: 1.08 0.624 1.10 0.628 Q = minimum required rate of discharge in 1.12 0.633 m3 cubic meters of air per second ( /s) at 1.14 0.637 conditions: 1 bar and 0 °C (273 °K); 1.16 0.641 F = for uninsulated shells: 1; for insulated 1.18 0.645 ¥ 1.20 0.649 shells: U(649 t)/13.6 but in no case is less 1.22 0.652 than 0.25 1.24 0.656 Where: 1.26 0.660

123

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00133 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER01OC08.000 ER01OC08.001 ER01OC08.002 § 178.276 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

C CONSTANT VALUE TABLE—Continued MINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT CAPACITY— Continued k C [Q Values] 1.28 0.664 1.30 0.667 A Q A Q 1.32 0.671 Exposed area (Cubic me- Exposed area (Cubic me- (square meters of air (square meters of air 1.34 0.674 ters) per second) ters) per second) 1.36 0.678 1.38 0.681 22.5 1.670 75 4.483 1.40 0.685 25 1.821 80 4.726 1.42 0.688 27.5 1.969 85 4.967 1.44 0.691 30 2.115 90 5.206 1.46 0.695 1.48 0.698 32.5 2.258 95 5.442 1.50 0.701 35 2.400 100 5.676 1.52 0.704 1.54 0.707 (iv) Insulation systems, used for the 1.56 0.710 purpose of reducing venting capacity, 1.58 0.713 1.60 0.716 must be specifically approved by the 1.62 0.719 approval agency. In all cases, insula- 1.64 0.722 tion systems approved for this purpose 1.66 0.725 1.68 0.728 must— 1.70 0.731 (A) Remain effective at all tempera- 2.00 0.770 tures up to 649 °C (1200 °F); and 2.20 0.793 (B) Be jacketed with a material having a melting point of 700 °C (1292 °F) or (ii) As an alternative to the formula greater. in paragraph (i)(2)(i)(A) of this section, (j) Approval, inspection and testing. relief devices for shells used for trans- Approval procedures for UN portable porting liquids may be sized in accord- tanks are specified in § 178.273. Inspec- ance with the table in paragraph tion and testing requirements are spec- (i)(2)(iii) of this section. The table in ified in § 180.605 of this subchapter. paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section as- [66 FR 33445, June 21, 2001, as amended at 68 sumes an insulation value of F = 1 and FR 32414, May 30, 2003; 69 FR 76185, Dec. 20, must be adjusted accordingly when the 2004; 73 FR 57006, Oct. 1, 2008; 76 FR 3388, Jan. shell is insulated. Other values used in 19, 2011] determining the table in paragraph (i)(2)(iii) of this section are: L = 334.94 § 178.276 Requirements for the design, kJ/kg; M = 86.7; T = 394 °K; Z = 1; and construction, inspection and testing C = 0.607. of portable tanks intended for the transportation of non-refrigerated (iii) Minimum emergency vent capac- liquefied compressed gases. ity, Q, in cubic meters of air per second at 1 bar and 0 °C (273 °K) shown in the (a) In addition to the requirements of following table: § 178.274 applicable to UN portable tanks, the following requirements MINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT CAPACITY apply to UN portable tanks used for [Q Values] non-refrigerated liquefied compressed gases. In addition to the definitions in A Q A Q Exposed area (Cubic me- Exposed area (Cubic me- § 178.274, the following definitions (square meters of air (square meters of air apply: ters) per second) ters) per second) (1) Design pressure means the pressure 2 0.230 37.5 2.539 to be used in calculations required by 3 0.320 40 2.677 the ASME Code, Section VIII (IBR, see 4 0.405 42.5 2.814 § 171.7 of this subchapter). The design 5 0.487 45 2.949 6 0.565 47.5 3.082 pressure must be not less than the 7 0.641 50 3.215 highest of the following pressures: 8 0.715 52.5 3.346 (i) The maximum effective gauge 9 0.788 55 3.476 10 0.859 57.5 3.605 pressure allowed in the shell during 12 0.998 60 3.733 filling or discharge; or 14 1.132 62.5 3.860 (ii) The sum of: 16 1.263 65 3.987 18 1.391 67.5 4.112 (A) The maximum effective gauge 20 1.517 70 4.236 pressure to which the shell is designed

124

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00134 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.276

as defined in this paragraph under capacity greater than 450 liters (118.9 ‘‘MAWP’’; and gallons). Shells must be designed, con- (B) A head pressure determined on structed, certified and stamped in ac- the basis of the dynamic forces speci- cordance with the ASME Code, Section fied in paragraph (h) of this section, VIII. but not less than 0.35 bar (35 kPa). (2) Portable tanks must be postweld (2) Design reference temperature means heat-treated and radiographed as pre- the temperature at which the vapor scribed in Section VIII of the ASME pressure of the contents is determined Code, except that each portable tank for the purpose of calculating the constructed in accordance with part MAWP. The value for each portable UHT of the ASME Code must be tank type is as follows: postweld heat-treated. Where postweld (i) Shell with a diameter of 1.5 meters heat treatment is required, the port- ° ° (4.9 ft.) or less: 65 C (149 F); or able tank must be treated as a unit (ii) Shell with a diameter of more after completion of all the welds in than 1.5 meters (4.9 ft.): and/or to the shell and heads. The (A) Without insulation or sun shield: method must be as prescribed in the ° ° 60 C (140 F); ASME Code. Welded attachments to ° ° (B) With sun shield: 55 C (131 F); and pads may be made after postweld heat ° ° (C) With insulation: 50 C (122 F). treatment is made. A portable tank (3) Filling density means the average used for anhydrous ammonia must be mass of liquefied compressed gas per postweld heat-treated. The postweld liter of shell capacity (kg/l). heat treatment must be as prescribed (4) Maximum allowable working pres- in the ASME Code, but in no event at sure (MAWP) means a pressure that less than 1050 °F tank metal tempera- must be not less than the highest of ture. Additionally, portable tanks con- the following pressures measured at structed in accordance with part UHT the top of the shell while in operating of the ASME Code must conform to the position, but in no case less than 7 bar following requirements: (700 kPa): (i) The maximum effective gauge (i) Welding procedure and welder per- pressure allowed in the shell during formance tests must be made annually filling or discharge; or in accordance with Section IX of the (ii) The maximum effective gauge ASME Code. In addition to the essen- pressure to which the shell is designed, tial variables named therein, the fol- which must be: lowing must be considered to be essen- (A) Not less than the pressure speci- tial variables: number of passes, thick- fied for each liquefied compressed gas ness of plate, heat input per pass, and listed in the UN Portable Tank Table manufacturer’s identification of rod for Liquefied Compressed Gases in and flux. The number of passes, thick- § 173.313; and ness of plate and heat input per pass (B) Not less than the sum of: may not vary more than 25 percent (1) The absolute vapor pressure (in from the qualified procedure. Records bar) of the liquefied compressed gas at of the qualification must be retained the design reference temperature for at least 5 years by the portable minus 1 bar; and tank manufacturer or his designated (2) The partial pressure (in bar) of air agent and, upon request, made avail- or other gases in the ullage space able to a representative of the Depart- which is determined by the design ref- ment of Transportation or the owner of erence temperature and the liquid the tank. phase expansion due to the increase of (ii) Impact tests must be made on a the mean bulk temperature of tr¥tf (tf lot basis. A lot is defined as 100 tons or = filling temperature, usually 15 °C, tr = less of the same heat and having a 50 °C maximum mean bulk tempera- thickness variation no greater than ture). plus or minus 25 percent. The minimum (b) General design and construction re- impact required for full-sized speci- quirements. (1) Shells must be of seam- mens shall be 20 foot-pounds (or 10 less or welded steel construction, or foot-pounds for half-sized specimens) at combination of both, and have a water 0 °F (¥17.8 °F) Charpy V-Notch in both

125

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00135 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.276 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

the longitudinal and transverse direc- flow, specified by the manufacturer, is tion. If the lot test does not pass this reached. Connections and accessories requirement, individual plates may be leading to or from such a valve must accepted if they individually meet this have a capacity for a flow more than impact requirement. the excess flow valve’s rated flow. (3) When the shells intended for the (3) For filling and discharge openings transportation of non-refrigerated liq- that are located below the liquid level, uefied compressed gases are equipped the first shut-off device must be an in- with thermal insulation, a device must ternal stop-valve and the second must be provided to prevent any dangerous be a stop-valve placed in an accessible pressure from developing in the insu- position on each discharge and filling lating layer in the event of a leak, pipe. when the protective covering is closed (4) For filling and discharge openings it must be gas tight. The thermal insu- located below the liquid level of port- lation must not inhibit access to the able tanks intended for the transpor- fittings and discharge devices. In addi- tation of flammable and/or toxic lique- tion, the thermal insulation systems fied compressed gases, the internal must satisfy the following require- stop-valve must be a self-closing safety ments: device that fully closes automatically (i) consist of a shield covering not during filling or discharge in the event less than the upper third, but not more of fire engulfment. The device shall than the upper half of the surface of fully close within 30 seconds of actu- the shell, and separated from the shell ation and the thermal means of closure by an air space of approximately 40 mm must actuate at a temperature of not (1.7 inches) across; or more than 121 °C (250 °F). Except for (ii) consist of a complete cladding of portable tanks having a capacity less insulating materials. The insulation than 1,000 liters (264.2 gallons), this de- must be of adequate thickness and con- vice must be operable by remote constructed to prevent the ingress of mois- trol. ture and damage to the insulation. The insulation and cladding must have a (5) In addition to filling, discharge thermal conductance of not more than and gas pressure equalizing orifices, shells may have openings in which 0.67 (W·m¥2·K¥1) under normal conditions of transportation. gauges, thermometers and manometers (c) Service equipment. (1) Each opening can be fitted. Connections for such in- with a diameter of more than 1.5 mm struments must be made by suitable (0.1 inch) in the shell of a portable welded nozzles or pockets and may not tank, except openings for pressure-re- be connected by screwed connections lief devices, inspection openings and through the shell. closed bleed holes, must be fitted with (6) All portable tanks must be fitted at least three mutually independent with manholes or other inspection shut-off devices in series: the first openings of suitable size to allow for being an internal stop-valve, excess internal inspection and adequate ac- flow valve, integral excess flow valve, cess for maintenance and repair of the or excess flow feature (see § 178.337– interior. 1(g)), the second being an external (7) Inlets and discharge outlets on chlo- stop-valve and the third being a blank rine portable tanks. The inlet and dis- flange, thread cap, plug or equivalent charge outlets on portable tanks used tight liquid closure device. to transport chlorine must meet the re- (2) When a portable tank is fitted quirements of § 178.337–1(c)(2) and must with an excess flow valve, the excess be fitted with an internal excess flow flow valve must be so fitted that its valve. In addition to the internal ex- seating is inside the shell or inside a cess flow valve, the inlet and discharge welded flange or, when fitted exter- outlets must be equipped with an ex- nally, its mountings must be designed ternal stop valve (angle valve). Excess so that in the event of impact it main- flow valves must conform to the stand- tains its effectiveness. The excess flow ards of The Chlorine Institute, Inc. valves must be selected and fitted so as (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) as to close automatically when the rated follows:

126

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00136 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.276

(i) A valve conforming to Drawing than the MAWP and be fully open at a 101–7, dated July 1993, must be installed pressure equal to 110% of the MAWP. under each liquid angle valve. These devices must, after discharge, (ii) A valve conforming to Drawing close at a pressure not less than 10% 106–6, dated July 1993, must be installed below the pressure at which discharge under each gas angle valve. For port- starts and must remain closed at all able tanks used to transport non-re- lower pressures. The pressure relief de- frigerated liquefied gases. vices must be of a type that will resist (8) External fittings must be grouped dynamic forces including liquid surge. together as close as reasonably prac- A frangible disc may only be used in se- ticable. The following openings may be ries with a reclosing pressure relief de- installed at locations other than on the vice. top or end of the tank: (2) Pressure relief devices must be de- (i) The openings for liquid level gaug- signed to prevent the entry of foreign ing devices, pressure gauges, or for matter, the leakage of gas and the de- safety devices, may be installed sepa- velopment of any dangerous excess rately at the other location or in the pressure. side of the shell; (3) A portable tank intended for the (ii) One plugged opening of 2-inch Na- transportation of certain liquefied tional Pipe Thread or less provided for compressed gases identified in the UN maintenance purposes may be located Portable Tank Table for Liquefied elsewhere; Compressed Gases in § 173.313 of this (iii) An opening of 3-inch National subchapter must have a pressure relief Pipe Size or less may be provided at device which conforms to the require- another location, when necessary, to ments of this subchapter. Unless a facilitate installation of condensing portable tank, in dedicated service, is coils. fitted with a relief device constructed (9) Filling and discharge connections of materials compatible with the haz- are not required to be grouped and may ardous material, the relief device must be installed below the normal liquid be comprised of a frangible disc pre- level of the tank if: ceded by a reclosing device. The space (i) The portable tank is permanently between the frangible disc and the de- mounted in a full framework for con- vice must be provided with a pressure tainerized transport; gauge or a suitable tell-tale indicator. (ii) For each portable tank design, a This arrangement must facilitate the prototype portable tank, meets the re- detection of disc rupture, pinholing or quirements of parts 450 through 453 of leakage which could cause a malfunc- this title for compliance with the re- tion of the pressure relief device. The quirements of Annex II of the Inter- frangible disc must rupture at a nomi- national Convention for Safe Con- nal pressure 10% above the start-to-dis- tainers; and charge pressure of the relief device. (iii) Each filling and discharge outlet (4) In the case of portable tanks used meets the requirements of paragraph for more than one gas, the pressure re- (c)(4) of this section. lief devices must open at a pressure in- (d) Bottom openings. Bottom openings dicated in paragraph (e)(1) of this sec- are prohibited on portable tanks when tion for the gas having the highest the UN Portable Tank Table for Lique- maximum allowable pressure of the fied Compressed Gases in § 173.313 of gases allowed to be transported in the this subchapter indicates that bottom portable tank. openings are not allowed. In this case, (f) Capacity of relief devices. The com- there may be no openings located bined delivery capacity of the relief de- below the liquid level of the shell when vices must be sufficient so that, in the it is filled to its maximum permissible event of total fire engulfment, the filling limit. pressure inside the shell cannot exceed (e) Pressure relief devices. (1) Portable 120% of the MAWP. Reclosing relief de- tanks must be provided with one or vices must be used to achieve the full more reclosing pressure relief devices. relief capacity prescribed. In the case The pressure relief devices must open of portable tanks used for more than automatically at a pressure not less gas, the combined delivery capacity of

127

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00137 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.277 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

the pressure relief devices must be design and construction of the shell taken for the liquefied compressed gas not higher than the lowest (coldest) which requires the highest delivery ca- service temperature of the contents pacity of the liquefied compressed during normal conditions of filling, dis- gases allowed to be transported in the charge and transportation. portable tank. The total required ca- Shell means the part of the portable pacity of the relief devices must be de- tank which retains the refrigerated liq- termined according to the require- uefied gas intended for transport, in- ments in § 178.275(i). These require- cluding openings and their closures, ments apply only to liquefied com- but does not include service equipment pressed gases which have critical tem- or external structural equipment. peratures well above the temperature Tank means a construction which at the accumulating condition. For normally consists of either: gases that have critical temperatures (1) A jacket and one or more inner near or below the temperature at the shells where the space between the accumulating condition, the calcula- shell(s) and the jacket is exhausted of tion of the pressure relief device deliv- air (vacuum insulation) and may incor- ery capacity must consider the addi- porate a thermal insulation system; or tional thermodynamic properties of the (2) A jacket and an inner shell with gas, for example see CGA S–1.2 (IBR, an intermediate layer of solid ther- see § 171.7 of this subchapter). mally insulating material (for example, solid foam). [66 FR 33448, June 21, 2001, as amended at 68 FR 75748, 75752, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR 54046, (b) General design and construction re- Sept. 7, 2004; 69 FR 76185, Dec. 20, 2004] quirements. (1) Portable tanks must be of seamless or welded steel construc- § 178.277 Requirements for the design, tion and have a water capacity of more construction, inspection and testing than 450 liters (118.9 gallons). Portable of portable tanks intended for the tanks must be designed, constructed, transportation of refrigerated lique- certified and stamped in accordance fied gases. with Section VIII of the ASME Code. (a) In addition to the requirements of (2) Portable tanks must be postweld § 178.274 applicable to UN portable heat treated and radiographed as pre- tanks, the following requirements and scribed in Sections V and VIII of the definitions apply to UN portable tanks ASME Code except that each tank con- used for refrigerated liquefied gases: structed in accordance with part UHT Design pressure For the purpose of in Section VIII of the ASME Code must this section the term ‘‘design pressure’’ be postweld heat treated. Where is consistent with the definition for de- postweld heat treatment is required, sign pressure in the ASME Code, Sec- the tank must be treated as a unit tion VIII (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- after completion of all the welds to the chapter). shell and heads. The method must be as Holding time is the time, as deter- prescribed in the ASME Code. Welded mined by testing, that will elapse from attachments to pads may be made after loading until the pressure of the con- postweld heat treatment is made. The tents, under equilibrium conditions, postweld heat treatment must be as reaches the lowest set pressure of the prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME pressure limiting device(s) (for exam- Code, but in no event at less than 1,050 ple, pressure control valve or pressure °F tank metal temperature. relief device). Holding time must be de- (3) Welding procedure and welder per- termined as specified in § 178.338–9. formance tests must be made annually Maximum allowable working pressure in accordance with Section IX of the (MAWP) means the maximum effective ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- gauge pressure permissible at the top chapter). In addition to the essential of the shell of a loaded portable tank in variables named in the ASME Code, the its operating position including the following must be considered as essen- highest effective pressure during filling tial variables: number of passes, thick- and discharge; ness of plate, heat input per pass, and Minimum design temperature means the specified rod and flux. The number the temperature which is used for the of passes, thickness of plate and heat

128

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00138 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.277

input per pass may not vary more than (10) A reference holding time must be 25% from the procedure qualification. determined for each refrigerated lique- Records of the qualification must be fied gas intended for transport in a retained for at least 5 years by the portable tank. The reference holding portable tank manufacturer and made time must be determined by testing in available to the approval agency and accordance with the requirements of the owner of the portable tank as spec- § 178.338–9, considering the following ified in § 178.273. factors: (4) Shells and jackets must be made (i) The effectiveness of the insulation of metallic materials suitable for form- system, determined in accordance with ing. Jackets must be made of steel. paragraph (b)(11) of this section; Non-metallic materials may be used (ii) The lowest set pressure of the for the attachments and supports be- pressure limiting device; tween the shell and jacket, provided (iii) The initial filling conditions; their material properties at the min- (iv) An assumed ambient tempera- imum design temperature are proven ture of 30 °C (86 °F); to be sufficient. In choosing the mate- (v) The physical properties of the in- rial, the minimum design temperature dividual refrigerated liquefied gas in- must be taken into account with re- tended to be transported. spect to risk of brittle fracture, to hy- (11) The effectiveness of the insula- drogen embrittlement, to stress corro- tion system (heat influx in watts) may sion cracking and to resistance to im- be determined by type testing the port- pact. able tank in accordance with a proce- (5) Any part of a portable tank, in- dure specified in § 178.338–9(c) or by cluding fittings, gaskets and pipe- using the holding time test in § 178.338– work, which can be expected normally 9(b). This test must consist of either: to come into contact with the refrig- (i) A constant pressure test (for ex- erated liquefied gas transported must ample, at atmospheric pressure) when be compatible with that refrigerated the loss of refrigerated liquefied gas is liquefied gas. measured over a period of time; or (6) The thermal insulation system (ii) A closed system test when the must include a complete covering of rise in pressure in the shell is measured the shell with effective insulating ma- over a period of time. terials. External insulation must be (12) When performing the constant protected by a jacket so as to prevent pressure test, variations in atmos- the ingress of moisture and other dam- pheric pressure must be taken into ac- age under normal transport conditions. count. When performing either test, (7) When a jacket is so closed as to be corrections must be made for any vari- gas-tight, a device must be provided to ation of the ambient temperature from prevent any dangerous pressure from the assumed ambient temperature ref- developing in the insulation space. erence value of 30 °C (86 °F). (8) Materials which may react with (13) The jacket of a vacuum-insulated oxygen or oxygen enriched double-wall tank must have either an atmospheres in a dangerous manner external design pressure not less than may not be used in portable tanks in- 100 kPa (1 bar) gauge pressure cal- tended for the transport of refrigerated culated in accordance with Section liquefied gases having a boiling point VIII of the ASME Code or a calculated below minus 182 °C at atmospheric critical collapsing pressure of not less pressure in locations with the thermal than 200 kPa (2 bar) gauge pressure. In- insulation where there is a risk of con- ternal and external reinforcements tact with oxygen or with oxygen en- may be included in calculating the riched fluid. ability of the jacket to resist the exter- (9) Insulating materials must not de- nal pressure. teriorate to an extent that the effec- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): For the deter- tiveness of the insulation system, as mination of the actual holding time, as indi- determined in accordance with para- cated by paragraphs (b)(10), (11), (12), and graph (b)(11) of this section, would be (13), before each journey, refer to § 178.338– reduced in service. 9(b).

129

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00139 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.277 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(c) Design criteria. For shells with (7) Vacuum insulated portable tanks vacuum insulation, the test pressure are not required to have an inspection must not be less than 1.3 times the sum opening. of the MAWP and 100 kPa (1 bar). In no (e) Pressure relief devices. (1) Every case may the test pressure be less than shell must be provided with not less 300 kPa (3 bar) gauge pressure. than two independent reclosing pres- (d) Service equipment. (1) Each filling sure relief devices. The pressure relief and discharge opening in portable devices must open automatically at a tanks used for the transport of flam- pressure not less than the MAWP and mable refrigerated liquefied gases must be fully open at a pressure equal to be fitted with at least three mutually 110% of the MAWP. These devices independent shut-off devices in series: must, after discharge, close at a pres- the first being a stop-valve situated as sure not lower than 10% below the pres- close as reasonably practicable to the sure at which discharge starts and jacket, the second being a stop-valve must remain closed at all lower pres- and the third being a blank flange or equivalent device. The shut-off device sures. The pressure relief devices must closest to the jacket must be a self- be of the type that will resist dynamic closing device, which is capable of forces including surge. being closed from an accessible posi- (2) Except for portable tanks used for tion on the portable tank that is re- oxygen, portable tanks for non-flam- mote from the valve within 30 seconds mable refrigerated liquefied gases (ex- of actuation. This device must actuate cept oxygen) and hydrogen may in ad- at a temperature of not more than 121 dition have frangible discs in parallel °C (250 °F). with the reclosing devices as specified (2) Each filling and discharge opening in paragraphs (e)(4)(ii) and (e)(4)(iii) of in portable tanks used for the trans- this section. port of non-flammable refrigerated liq- (3) Pressure relief devices must be de- uefied gases must be fitted with at signed to prevent the entry of foreign least two mutually independent shut- matter, the leakage of gas and the de- off devices in series: the first being a velopment of any dangerous excess stop-valve situated as close as reason- pressure. ably practicable to the jacket and the (4) Capacity and setting of pressure re- second a blank flange or equivalent de- lief devices. (i) In the case of the loss of vice. vacuum in a vacuum-insulated tank or (3) For sections of piping which can of loss of 20% of the insulation of a be closed at both ends and where liquid portable tank insulated with solid ma- product can be trapped, a method of terials, the combined capacity of all automatic pressure relief must be pro- pressure relief devices installed must vided to prevent excess pressure build- be sufficient so that the pressure (in- up within the piping. cluding accumulation) inside the shell (4) Each filling and discharge opening does not exceed 120% of the MAWP. on a portable tank must be clearly marked to indicate its function. (ii) For non-flammable refrigerated (5) When pressure-building units are liquefied gases (except oxygen) and hy- used, the liquid and vapor connections drogen, this capacity may be achieved to that unit must be provided with a by the use of frangible discs in parallel valve as close to the jacket as reason- with the required safety-relief devices. ably practicable to prevent the loss of Frangible discs must rupture at nomi- contents in case of damage to the pres- nal pressure equal to the test pressure sure-building unit. A check valve may of the shell. be used for this purpose if it is located (iii) Under the circumstances de- on the vapor side of the pressure build- scribed in paragraphs (e)(4)(i) and up coil. (e)(4)(ii) of this section, together with (6) The materials of construction of complete fire engulfment, the com- valves and accessories must have satis- bined capacity of all pressure relief de- factory properties at the lowest oper- vices installed must be sufficient to ating temperature of the portable limit the pressure in the shell to the tank. test pressure.

130

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00140 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.318–2

(iv) The required capacity of the re- event to come in contact with any of lief devices must be calculated in ac- the caps. Space shall be provided so cordance with CGA Pamphlet S–1.2 that each detonator of whatever nature (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). may be inserted in an individual cell in [66 FR 33450, June 21, 2001, as amended at 68 the body of the container, into which FR 75748, 75752, Dec. 31, 2003] each such cap shall snugly fit. There shall be provided no more than twenty Subpart I [Reserved] (20) such cellular spaces. Space may be provided into which a plurality of percussion caps may be carried, provided Subpart J—Specifications for Con- that such space may be closed with a tainers for Motor Vehicle screw cap, and further provided that Transportation each or any such space is entirely separate from any space provided for any SOURCE: 29 FR 18975, Dec. 29, 1964, unless detonator. Each cellular space into otherwise noted. Redesignated at 32 FR 5606, which a detonator is to be inserted and Apr. 5, 1967. carried shall be capable of being cov- § 178.318 Specification MC 201; con- ered by a rotary cover so arranged as tainer for detonators and percus- to expose not more than one cell at any sion caps. time, and capable of rotation to such a place that all cells will be covered at § 178.318–1 Scope. the same time, at which place means (a) This specification pertains to a shall be provided to lock the cover in container to be used for the transpor- place. Means shall be provided to lock tation of detonators and percussion in place the cover for the cells provided caps in connection with the transpor- for the carrying of detonators. The re- tation of liquid nitroglycerin, desen- quirement that not more than one cell sitized liquid nitroglycerin or be exposed at one time need not apply diethylene glycol dinitrate, where any in the case of detonators, although or all of such types of caps may be used spaces for such caps and detonators for the detonation of liquid nitroglyc- shall be separate. Sufficient annular erin, desentitized liquid nitroglycerin space shall be provided inside the cover or diethylene glycol dinitrate in blast- for such detonators that, when the ing operations. This specification is cover is closed, there will be sufficient not intended to take the place of any space to accommodate the wires cus- shipping or packing requirements of tomarily attached to such caps. If the this Department where the caps in material is of such a nature as to re- question are themselves articles of quire treatment to prevent the absorp- commerce. tion of moisture, such treatment shall (b) [Reserved] be applied as shall be necessary in [29 FR 18975, Dec. 29, 1964. Redesignated at 32 order to provide against the penetra- FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended by Amdt. tion of water by permeation. A suitable 178–60, 44 FR 70733, Dec. 10, 1979] carrying handle shall be provided, except for which handle no part of the § 178.318–2 Container. container may project beyond the exte- (a) Every container for detonators rior of the body. and percussion caps coming within the (b) Exhibited in plates I and II are scope of this specification shall be con- line drawings of a container for deto- structed entirely of hard rubber, nators and percussion caps, illustrative phenolresinous or other resinous mate- of the requirements set forth in rial, or other nonmetallic, nonsparking § 178.318–2(a). These plates shall not be material, except that metal parts may construed as a part of this specifica- be used in such locations as not in any tion.

131

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00141 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.318–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

§ 178.318–3 Marking. tention or containment function and provides no structural support to the Each container must be marked as cargo tank. prescribed in § 178.2(b). Baffle means a non-liquid-tight trans- [Amdt. 178–40, 41 FR 38181, Sept. 9, 1976, as verse partition device that deflects, amended at 66 FR 45185, Aug. 28, 2001] checks or regulates fluid motion in a tank. § 178.320 General requirements appli- Bulkhead means a liquid-tight trans- cable to all DOT specification cargo verse closure at the ends of or between tank motor vehicles. cargo tanks. (a) Definitions. For the purpose of this Cargo tank means a bulk packaging subchapter: that: Appurtenance means any attachment (1) Is a tank intended primarily for to a cargo tank that has no lading re- the carriage of liquids, gases, solids, or

132

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00142 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR EC02MR91.076 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.320

semi-solids and includes appur- (3) To the same engineering drawings tenances, reinforcements, fittings, and and calculations, except for minor closures (for tank, see §§ 178.337–1, variations in piping that do not affect 178.338–1, or 178.345–1, as applicable); the lading retention capability of the (2) Is permanently attached to or cargo tank; forms a part of a motor vehicle, or is (4) Of the same materials of construc- not permanently attached to a motor tion; vehicle but that, by reason of its size, (5) To the same cross-sectional di- construction, or attachment to a mensions; motor vehicle, is loaded or unloaded (6) To a length varying by no more without being removed from the motor than 5 percent; vehicle; and (7) With the volume varying by no (3) Is not fabricated under a speci- more than 5 percent (due to a change in fication for cylinders, intermediate length only); and bulk containers, multi-unit tank car (8) For the purposes of § 178.338 only, tanks, portable tanks, or tank cars. with the same insulation system. Cargo tank motor vehicle means a External self-closing stop valve means a motor vehicle with one or more cargo self-closing stop valve designed so that tanks permanently attached to or the self-stored energy source is located forming an integral part of the motor outside the cargo tank and the welded vehicle. flange. Cargo tank wall means those parts of Extreme dynamic loading means the the cargo tank that make up the pri- maximum loading a cargo tank motor mary lading retention structure, in- vehicle may experience during its excluding shell, bulkheads, and fittings pected life, excluding accident loadings and, when closed, yield the minimum resulting from an accident, such as volume of a completed cargo tank overturn or collision. motor vehicle. Flange means the structural ring for Charging line means a hose, tube, guiding or attachment of a pipe or fit- pipe, or a similar device used to pres- ting with another flange (companion surize a tank with material other than flange), pipe, fitting or other attach- the lading. ment. Companion flange means one of two Inspection pressure means the pres- mating flanges where the flange faces sure used to determine leak tightness are in contact or separated only by a of the cargo tank when testing with thin leak-sealing gasket and are se- pneumatic pressure. cured to one another by bolts or Internal self-closing stop valve means a clamps. self-closing stop valve designed so that Connecting structure means the struc- the self-stored energy source is located ture joining two cargo tanks. inside the cargo tank or cargo tank Constructed and certified in accordance sump, or within the welded flange, and with the ASME Code means a cargo the valve seat is located within the tank is constructed and stamped in ac- cargo tank or within one inch of the cordance with Section VIII of the external face of the welded flange or ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- sump of the cargo tank. chapter), and is inspected and certified Lading means the hazardous material by an Authorized Inspector. contained in a cargo tank. Constructed in accordance with the Loading/unloading connection means ASME Code means a cargo tank is con- the fitting in the loading/unloading structed in accordance with Section line farthest from the loading/unload- VIII of the ASME Code with authorized ing outlet to which the loading/unload- exceptions (see §§ 178.346 through ing hose, pipe, or device is attached. 178.348) and is inspected and certified Loading/unloading outlet means a by a Registered Inspector. cargo tank outlet used for normal load- Design type means one or more cargo ing/unloading operations. tanks that are made— Loading/unloading stop valve means (1) To the same specification; the stop valve farthest from the cargo (2) By the same manufacturer; tank loading/unloading outlet to which

133

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00143 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.320 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

the loading/unloading connection is at- Multi-specification cargo tank motor ve- tached. hicle means a cargo tank motor vehicle Manufacturer means any person en- equipped with two or more cargo tanks gaged in the manufacture of a DOT fabricated to more than one cargo tank specification cargo tank, cargo tank specification. motor vehicle, or cargo tank equip- Normal operating loading means the ment that forms part of the cargo tank loading a cargo tank motor vehicle wall. This term includes attaching a may be expected to experience rou- cargo tank to a motor vehicle or to a tinely in operation. motor vehicle suspension component Nozzle means a subassembly con- that involves welding on the cargo sisting of a pipe or tubular section with tank wall. A manufacturer must reg- or without a welded or forged flange on ister with the Department in accord- one end. ance with subpart F of part 107 in sub- Outlet means any opening in the shell part A of this chapter. or head of a cargo tank, (including the Maximum allowable working pressure means for attaching a closure), except or MAWP means the maximum pres- that the following are not outlets: a sure allowed at the top of the tank in threaded opening securely closed dur- its normal operating position. The ing transportation with a threaded MAWP must be calculated as pre- plug or a threaded cap, a flanged open- scribed in Section VIII of the ASME ing securely closed during transpor- Code. In use, the MAWP must be great- tation with a bolted or welded blank er than or equal to the maximum lad- flange, a manhole, a gauging device, a ing pressure conditions prescribed in thermometer well, or a pressure relief § 173.33 of this subchapter for each ma- device. terial transported. Outlet stop valve means the stop valve at a cargo tank loading or unloading Maximum lading pressure. See outlet. § 173.33(c). Pipe coupling means a fitting with in- Minimum thickness means the min- ternal threads on both ends. imum required shell and head (and baf- Rear bumper means the structure de- fle and bulkhead when used as tank re- signed to prevent a vehicle or object inforcement) thickness needed to meet from under-riding the rear of another the specification. The minimum thick- motor vehicle. See § 393.86 of this title. ness is the greatest of the following val- Rear-end tank protection device means ues: (1)(i) For MC 330, MC 331, and MC the structure designed to protect a 338 cargo tanks, the specified minimum cargo tank and any lading retention thickness found the applicable speci- piping or devices in case of a rear end fication(s); or collision. (ii) For DOT 406, DOT 407 and DOT Self-closing stop valve means a stop 412 cargo tanks, the specified minimum valve held in the closed position by thickness found in Tables I and II of means of self-stored energy, that opens the applicable specification(s); or only by application of an external force (iii) For MC 300, MC 301, MC 302, MC and that closes when the external force 303, MC 304, MC 305, MC 306, MC 307, MC is removed. 310, MC 311, and MC 312 cargo tanks, Shell means the circumferential por- the in-service minimum thickness pre- tion of a cargo tank defined by the scribed in Tables I and II of basic design radius or radii excluding § 180.407(i)(5) of this subchapter, for the the bulkheads. minimum thickness specified by Tables Stop valve means a valve that stops I and II of the applicable specifica- the flow of lading. tion(s); or Sump means a protrusion from the (2) The thickness necessary to meet bottom of a cargo tank shell designed with the structural integrity and acci- to facilitate complete loading and un- dent damage requirements of the appli- loading of lading. cable specification(s); or Tank means a container, consisting (3) The thickness as computed per of a shell and heads, that forms a pres- the ASME Code requirements (if appli- sure tight vessel having openings de- cable). signed to accept pressure tight fittings

134

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00144 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.337–1

or closures, but excludes any appur- (c) Exceptions to the ASME Code. Un- tenances, reinforcements, fittings, or less otherwise specified, when excep- closures. tions are provided in this subpart from Test pressure means the pressure to compliance with certain paragraphs of which a tank is subjected to determine the ASME Code, compliance with those structural integrity. paragraphs is not prohibited. Toughness of material means the capa- [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37055, Sept. 7, 1990, as bility of a material to absorb energy amended by Amdt. 178–98, 58 FR 33306, June represented by the area under a stress 16, 1993; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51339, Oct. 1, strain curve (indicating the energy ab- 1996; 68 FR 19277, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52370, sorbed per unit volume of the material) Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75752, Dec. 31, 2003; 76 FR up to the point of rupture. 43532, July 20, 2011] Vacuum cargo tank means a cargo tank that is loaded by reducing the § 178.337 Specification MC 331; cargo pressure in the cargo tank to below at- tank motor vehicle primarily for transportation of compressed gases mospheric pressure. as defined in subpart G of part 173 Variable specification cargo tank of this subchapter. means a cargo tank that is constructed in accordance with one specification, § 178.337–1 General requirements. but that may be altered to meet an- (a) ASME Code construction. Tanks other specification by changing relief must be— device, closures, lading discharge de- (1) Seamless or welded construction, vices, and other lading retention de- or a combination of both; vices. (2) Designed, constructed, certified, Void means the space between tank and stamped in accordance with Sec- heads or bulkheads and a connecting tion VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see structure. § 171.7 of this subchapter); Welded flange means a flange at- (3) Made of steel or aluminum; how- tached to the tank by a weld joining ever, if aluminum is used, the cargo the tank shell to the cylindrical outer tank must be insulated and the haz- surface of the flange, or by a fillet weld ardous material to be transported must joining the tank shell to a flange be compatible with the aluminum (see shaped to fit the shell contour. §§ 178.337–1(e)(2), 173.315(a) table, and (b) Design certification. (1) Each cargo 178.337–2(a)(1) of this subchapter); and tank or cargo tank motor vehicle de- (4) Covered with a steel jacket if the sign type, including its required acci- cargo tank is insulated and used to dent damage protection device, must transport a flammable gas (see be certified to conform to the specifica- § 173.315(a) table Note 11 of this sub- tion requirements by a Design Certi- chapter). fying Engineer who is registered in ac- (b) Design pressure. The design pres- cordance with subpart F of part 107 of sure of a cargo tank authorized under this title. An accident damage protec- this specification shall be not less than tion device is a rear-end protection, the vapor pressure of the commodity overturn protection, or piping protec- contained therein at 115 °F. or as pre- tion device. scribed for a particular commodity in (2) The Design Certifying Engineer § 173.315(a) of this subchapter, except shall furnish to the manufacturer a that in no case shall the design pres- certificate to indicate compliance with sure of any cargo tank be less than 100 the specification requirements. The p.s.i.g. nor more than 500 p.s.i.g. certificate must include the sketches, drawings, and calculations used for cer- NOTE 1: The term design pressure as used in tification. Each certificate, including this specification, is identical to the term sketches, drawings, and calculations, MAWP as used in the ASME Code. shall be signed by the Design Certi- (c) Openings. (1) Excess pressure relief fying Engineer. valves shall be located in the top of the (3) The manufacturer shall retain the cargo tank or heads. design certificate at his principal place (2) A chlorine cargo tank shall have of business for as long as he manufac- only one opening. That opening shall tures DOT specification cargo tanks. be in the top of the cargo tank and

135

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00145 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.337–1 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

shall be fitted with a nozzle that meets provisions in Section VIII of the ASME the following requirements: Code under which it is constructed. (i) On a cargo tank manufactured on Where postweld heat treatment is re- or before December 31, 1974, the nozzle quired, the cargo tank must be treated shall be protected by a dome cover as a unit after completion of all the plate which conforms to either the welds in and/or to the shells and heads. standard of The Chlorine Institute, The method must be as prescribed in Inc., Dwg. 103–3, dated January 23, 1958, Section VIII of the ASME Code. Welded or to the standard specified in para- attachments to pads may be made after graph (c) (2) (ii) of this section. postweld heat treatment. A cargo tank (ii) On a cargo tank manufactured on used for anhydrous ammonia must be or after January 1, 1975, the nozzle postweld heat treated. The postweld shall be protected by a manway cover heat treatment must be as prescribed which conforms to the standard of The in Section VIII of the ASME Code, but Chlorine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 103–4, in no event at less than 1,050 § F cargo dated September 1, 1971. tank metal temperature. (d) Reflective design. Every (g) Definitions. The following defini- uninsulated cargo tank permanently tions apply to §§ 178.337–1 through attached to a cargo tank motor vehicle 178.337–18: shall, unless covered with a jacket Emergency discharge control means the made of aluminum, stainless steel, or ability to stop a cargo tank unloading other bright nontarnishing metal, be operation in the event of an uninten- painted a white, aluminum or similar tional release. Emergency discharge reflecting color on the upper two-thirds control can utilize passive or off-truck of area of the cargo tank. remote means to stop the unloading (e) Insulation. (1) Each cargo tank re- operation. A passive means of emer- quired to be insulated must conform gency discharge control automatically with the use and performance require- shuts off the flow of product without ments contained in §§ 173.315(a) table the need for human intervention with- and 178.337–1 (a)(3) and (e)(2) of this in 20 seconds of an unintentional re- subchapter. lease caused by a complete separation (2) Each cargo tank intended for of the liquid delivery hose. An off- chlorine; carbon dioxide, refrigerated truck remote means of emergency dis- liquid; or nitrous oxide, refrigerated charge control permits a qualified per- liquid service must have suitable insu- son attending the unloading operation lation of such thickness that the over- to close the cargo tank’s internal self- all thermal conductance is not more closing stop valve and shut off all mo- than 0.08 Btu per square foot per °F dif- tive and auxiliary power equipment at ferential per hour. The conductance a distance from the cargo tank motor must be determined at 60 °F. Insulation vehicle. material used on cargo tanks for ni- Excess flow valve, integral excess flow trous oxide, refrigerated liquid must be valve, or excess flow feature means a noncombustible. Insulating material component that will close automati- used on cargo tanks for chlorine must cally if the flow rate of a gas or liquid be corkboard or polyurethane foam, through the component reaches or ex- with a minimum thickness of 4 inches, ceeds the rated flow of gas or liquid or 2 inches minimum thickness of ce- specified by the original valve manu- ramic fiber/fiberglass of 4 pounds per facturer when piping mounted directly cubic foot minimum density covered by on the valve is sheared off before the 2 inches minimum thickness of fiber. first valve, pump, or fitting down- (f) Postweld heat treatment. Postweld stream from the valve. heat treatment must be as prescribed Internal self-closing stop valve means a in the ASME Code except that each primary shut off valve installed in a cargo tank constructed in accordance product discharge outlet of a cargo with Part UHT of Section VIII of the tank and designed to be kept closed by ASME Code must be postweld heat self-stored energy. treated. Each chlorine cargo tank must Primary discharge control system be fully radiographed and postweld means a primary shut-off installed at a heat treated in accordance with the product discharge outlet of a cargo

136

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00146 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.337–2

tank consisting of an internal self-clos- identified representatives of the De- ing stop valve that may include an in- partment of Transportation. tegral excess flow valve or an excess (4) The direction of final rolling of flow feature, together with linkages the shell material shall be the circum- that must be installed between the ferential orientation of the cargo tank valve and remote actuator to provide shell. manual and thermal on-truck remote (b) For a chlorine cargo tank. Plates, means of closure. the manway nozzle, and anchorage [Order 59–B, 30 FR 579, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- shall be made of carbon steel which nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] meets the following requirements: (1) For a cargo tank manufactured on EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- or before December 31, 1974— tations affecting § 178.337–1, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the (i) Material shall conform to ASTM A Finding Aids section of the printed volume 300, ‘‘Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels and at www.govinfo.gov. for Service at Low Temperatures’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter); § 178.337–2 Material. (ii) Material shall be Class 1, Grade (a) General. (1) All material used for A, flange or firebox quality; construction of the cargo tank and ap- (iii) Plate impact test specimens, as purtenances must be suitable for use required under paragraph (a) of this with the commodities to be trans- section, shall be of the Charpy keyhole ported therein and must conform to notch type; and the requirements in Section II of the (iv) Plate impact test specimens ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- shall meet the impact test require- chapter) and/or requirements of the ments in paragraph (a) of this section American Society for Testing and Ma- in both the longitudinal and transverse terials in all respects. directions of rolling at a temperature (2) Impact tests are required on steel of minus 45.5 C. (¥50 °F.). used in the fabrication of each cargo (2) For a cargo tank manufactured on tank constructed in accordance with or after January 1, 1975— part UHT in Section VIII of the ASME (i) Material shall conform to ASTM A Code. The tests must be made on a lot 612 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), basis. A lot is defined as 100 tons or less Grade B or A 516/A 516M (IBR, see § 171.7 of the same heat treatment processing of this subchapter), Grade 65 or 70; lot having a thickness variation no (ii) Material shall meet the Charpy greater than plus or minus 25 percent. V-notch test requirements of ASTM A The minimum impact required for full 20/A 20M (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subsize specimens must be 20 foot-pounds chapter); and in the longitudinal direction at ¥30 (iii) Plate impact test specimens °F., Charpy V-Notch and 15 foot-pounds shall meet the impact test require- in the transverse direction at ¥30 °F., ments in paragraph (a) of this section Charpy V-Notch. The required values in both the longitudinal and transverse for subsize specimens must be reduced directions of rolling at a temperature in direct proportion to the cross-sec- of minus 40 °C. (¥40 °F.). tional area of the specimen beneath the (c) A cargo tank in anhydrous ammo- notch. If a lot does not meet this re- nia service must be constructed of quirement, individual plates may be steel. The use of copper, silver, zinc or accepted if they individually meet this their alloys is prohibited. Baffles made requirement. from aluminum may be used only if (3) The fabricator shall record the joined to the cargo tank by a process heat, and slab numbers, and the cer- not requiring postweld heat treatment tified Charpy impact values, where re- of the cargo tank. quired, of each plate used in each cargo [Order 59–B, 30 FR 579, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- tank on a sketch showing the location nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] of each plate in the shell and heads of EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- the cargo tank. Copies of each sketch tations affecting § 178.337–2, see the List of shall be provided to the owner and re- CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the tained for at least five years by the Finding Aids section of the printed volume fabricator and made available to duly and at www.govinfo.gov.

137

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00147 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.337–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

§ 178.337–3 Structural integrity. (c) Shell design. Shell stresses result- (a) General requirements and accept- ing from static or dynamic loadings, or ance criteria. (1) Except as provided in combinations thereof, are not uniform paragraph (d) of this section, the max- throughout the cargo tank motor vehi- imum calculated design stress at any cle. The vertical, longitudinal, and lat- point in the cargo tank may not exceed eral normal operating loadings can the maximum allowable stress value occur simultaneously and must be prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME combined. The vertical, longitudinal Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- and lateral extreme dynamic loadings chapter), or 25 percent of the tensile occur separately and need not be com- strength of the material used. bined. (2) The relevant physical properties (1) Normal operating loadings. The fol- of the materials used in each cargo lowing procedure addresses stress in tank may be established either by a the tank shell resulting from normal certified test report from the material operating loadings. The effective stress manufacturer or by testing in conform- (the maximum principal stress at any ance with a recognized national stand- point) must be determined by the fol- ard. In either case, the ultimate tensile lowing formula: 2 0.5 strength of the material used in the de- S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) ±[0.25(Sy ¥ Sx) + Ss2] sign may not exceed 120 percent of the ultimate tensile strength specified in Where: either the ASME Code or the ASTM (i) S = effective stress at any given standard to which the material is man- point under the combination of static ufactured. and normal operating loadings that can (3) The maximum design stress at occur at the same time, in psi. any point in the cargo tank must be (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen- calculated separately for the loading erated by the MAWP and external pres- conditions described in paragraphs (b), sure, when applicable, plus static head, (c), and (d) of this section. Alternate in psi. test or analytical methods, or a com- (iii) Sx = The following net longitu- bination thereof, may be used in place dinal stress generated by the following of the procedures described in para- static and normal operating loading graphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section, if conditions, in psi: the methods are accurate and (A) The longitudinal stresses result- verifiable. ing from the MAWP and external pres- (4) Corrosion allowance material may sure, when applicable, plus static head, not be included to satisfy any of the in combination with the bending stress design calculation requirements of this generated by the static weight of the section. fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, (b) Static design and construction. (1) all structural elements, equipment and The static design and construction of appurtenances supported by the cargo each cargo tank must be in accordance tank wall; with Section VIII of the ASME Code. (B) The tensile or compressive stress The cargo tank design must include resulting from normal operating longi- calculation of stresses generated by de- tudinal acceleration or deceleration. In sign pressure, the weight of lading, the each case, the forces applied must be weight of structure supported by the 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the cargo tank wall, and the effect of tem- suspension assembly, applied at the perature gradients resulting from lad- road surface, and as transmitted to the ing and ambient temperature extremes. cargo tank wall through the suspension When dissimilar materials are used, assembly of a trailer during decelera- their thermal coefficients must be used tion; or the horizontal pivot of the in calculation of thermal stresses. truck tractor or converter dolly fifth (2) Stress concentrations in tension, wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the bending and torsion which occur at fixed dolly during acceleration; or an- pads, cradles, or other supports must choring and support members of a be considered in accordance with ap- truck during acceleration and decelera- pendix G in Section VIII of the ASME tion, as applicable. The vertical reac- Code. tion must be calculated based on the

138

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00148 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.337–3

static weight of the fully loaded cargo (C) The lateral shear stress generated tank motor vehicle, all structural ele- by a normal operating lateral accelera- ments, equipment and appurtenances tive force equal to 0.2 times the supported by the cargo tank wall. The vertical reaction at each suspension as- following loadings must be included: sembly of a trailer, applied at the road (1) The axial load generated by a surface, and as transmitted to the decelerative force; cargo tank wall through the suspension (2) The bending moment generated by assembly of a trailer, and the hori- a decelerative force; zontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth (3) The axial load generated by an ac- wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and support members of a truck, as applica- celerative force; and ble. The vertical reaction must be cal- (4) The bending moment generated by culated based on the static weight of an accelerative force; and the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- (C) The tensile or compressive stress cle, all structural elements, equipment generated by the bending moment re- and appurtenances supported by the sulting from normal operating vertical cargo tank wall; and accelerative force equal to 0.35 times (D) The torsional shear stress gen- the vertical reaction at the suspension erated by the same lateral forces as de- assembly of a trailer; or the horizontal scribed in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) section. or turntable; or anchoring and support (2) Extreme dynamic loadings. The fol- members of a truck, as applicable. The lowing procedure addresses stress in vertical reaction must be calculated the tank shell resulting from extreme based on the static weight of the fully dynamic loadings. The effective stress loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all (the maximum principal stress at any structural elements, equipment and ap- point) must be determined by the fol- purtenances supported by the cargo lowing formula: tank wall. 2 0.5 S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) ±[0.25(Sy ¥ Sx) + Ss2] (iv) Ss = The following shear stresses generated by the following static and Where: normal operating loading conditions, (i) S = effective stress at any given in psi: point under a combination of static (A) The static shear stress resulting and extreme dynamic loadings that can from the vertical reaction at the sus- occur at the same time, in psi. pension assembly of a trailer, and the (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen- horizontal pivot of the upper coupler erated by MAWP and external pressure, (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring when applicable, plus static head, in and support members of a truck, as ap- psi. plicable. The vertical reaction must be (iii) Sx = the following net longitu- calculated based on the static weight dinal stress generated by the following of the fully loaded cargo tank motor static and extreme dynamic loading vehicle, all structural elements, equip- conditions, in psi: ment and appurtenances supported by (A) The longitudinal stresses result- the cargo tank wall; ing from the MAWP and external pres- (B) The vertical shear stress gen- sure, when applicable, plus static head, erated by a normal operating accelera- in combination with the bending stress tive force equal to 0.35 times the generated by the static weight of the vertical reaction at the suspension as- fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, sembly of a trailer; or the horizontal all structural elements, equipment and pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) appurtenances supported by the tank or turntable; or anchoring and support wall; members of a truck, as applicable. The (B) The tensile or compressive stress vertical reaction must be calculated resulting from extreme longitudinal based on the static weight of the fully acceleration or deceleration. In each loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all case the forces applied must be 0.7 structural elements, equipment and ap- times the vertical reaction at the sus- purtenances supported by the cargo pension assembly, applied at the road tank wall; surface, and as transmitted to the

139

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00149 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.337–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

cargo tank wall through the suspension or turntable; or anchoring and support assembly of a trailer during decelera- members of a truck, as applicable. The tion; or the horizontal pivot of the vertical reaction must be calculated truck tractor or converter dolly fifth based on the static weight of the fully wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all fixed dolly during acceleration; or the structural elements, equipment and ap- anchoring and support members of a purtenances supported by the cargo truck during acceleration and decelera- tank wall; tion, as applicable. The vertical reac- (C) The lateral shear stress generated tion must be calculated based on the by an extreme lateral accelerative static weight of the fully loaded cargo force equal to 0.4 times the vertical re- tank motor vehicle, all structural ele- action at the suspension assembly of a ments, equipment and appurtenances trailer, applied at the road surface, and supported by the cargo tank wall. The as transmitted to the cargo tank wall following loadings must be included: through the suspension assembly of a (1) The axial load generated by a trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the decelerative force; upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turn- (2) The bending moment generated by table; or anchoring and support mem- a decelerative force; bers of a truck, as applicable. The (3) The axial load generated by an ac- vertical reaction must be calculated celerative force; and based on the static weight of the fully (4) The bending moment generated by loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all an accelerative force; and structural elements, equipment and ap- (C) The tensile or compressive stress purtenances supported by the cargo generated by the bending moment re- tank wall; and sulting from an extreme vertical accel- (D) The torsional shear stress gen- erative force equal to 0.7 times the erated by the same lateral forces as de- vertical reaction at the suspension as- scribed in paragraph (c)(2)(iv)(C) of this sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal section. pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turntable; or the anchoring and sup- (d) In order to account for stresses port members of a truck, as applicable. due to impact in an accident, the de- The vertical reaction must be cal- sign calculations for the cargo tank culated based on the static weight of shell and heads must include the load the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- resulting from the design pressure in cle, all structural elements, equipment combination with the dynamic pres- and appurtenances supported by the sure resulting from a longitudinal de- cargo tank wall. celeration of ‘‘2g’’. For this loading condition the stress value used may (iv) Ss = The following shear stresses generated by static and extreme dy- not exceed the lesser of the yield namic loading conditions, in psi: strength or 75 percent of the ultimate (A) The static shear stress resulting tensile strength of the material of con- from the vertical reaction at the sus- struction. For cargo tanks constructed pension assembly of a trailer, and the of stainless steel the maximum design horizontal pivot of the upper coupler stress may not exceed 75 percent of the (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring ultimate tensile strength of the type and support members of a truck, as ap- steel used. plicable. The vertical reaction must be (e) The minimum metal thickness for calculated based on the static weight the shell and heads on tanks with a de- of the fully loaded cargo tank motor sign pressure of 100 psig or more must vehicle, all structural elements, equip- be 4.75 mm (0.187 inch) for steel and 6.86 ment and appurtenances supported by mm (0.270 inch) for aluminum, except the cargo tank wall; for chlorine and sulfur dioxide tanks. (B) The vertical shear stress gen- In all cases, the minimum thickness of erated by an extreme vertical accelera- the tank shell and head shall be deter- tive force equal to 0.7 times the mined using structural design require- vertical reaction at the suspension as- ments in Section VIII of the ASME sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal Code or 25% of the tensile strength of pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) the material used. For a cargo tank

140

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00150 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.337–3

used in chlorine or sulfur dioxide serv- there will be no adverse effect upon the ice, the cargo tank must be made of lading retention integrity of the cargo steel. A corrosion allowance of 20 per- tank if any force less than that pre- cent or 2.54 mm (0.10 inch), whichever scribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec- is less, must be added to the thickness tion is applied from any direction. The otherwise required for sulfur dioxide thickness of the mounting pad may not and chlorine tank material. In chlorine be less than that of the shell wall or cargo tanks, the wall thickness must head wall to which it is attached, and be at least 1.59 cm (0.625 inch), includ- not more than 1.5 times the shell or ing corrosion allowance. head thickness. However, a pad with a (f) Where a cargo tank support is at- minimum thickness of 0.25 inch may be tached to any part of the cargo tank used when the shell or head thickness wall, the stresses imposed on the cargo is over 0.25 inch. If weep holes or tell- tank wall must meet the requirements in paragraph (a) of this section. tale holes are used, the pad must be (g) The design, construction, and in- drilled or punched at the lowest point stallation of an attachment, appur- before it is welded to the tank. Each tenance to the cargo tank, structural pad must— support member between the cargo (i) Be fabricated from material deter- tank and the vehicle or suspension mined to be suitable for welding to component, or accident protection de- both the cargo tank material and the vice must conform to the following re- material of the appurtenance or struc- quirements: tural support member; a Design Certi- (1) Structural members, the suspen- fying Engineer must make this deter- sion sub-frame, accident protection mination considering chemical and structures, and external circumferen- physical properties of the materials tial reinforcement devices must be and must specify filler material con- used as sites for attachment of appur- forming to the requirements in Section tenances and other accessories to the VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 cargo tank, when practicable. of this subchapter). (2) A lightweight attachment to the (ii) Be preformed to an inside radius cargo tank wall such as a conduit clip, no greater than the outside radius of brake line clip, skirting structure, the cargo tank at the attachment loca- lamp mounting bracket, or placard tion. holder must be of a construction having lesser strength than the cargo tank (iii) Extend at least 2 inches in each wall materials and may not be more direction from any point of attachment than 72 percent of the thickness of the of an appurtenance or structural sup- material to which it is attached. The port member. This dimension may be lightweight attachment may be se- measured from the center of the at- cured directly to the cargo tank wall if tached structural member. the device is designed and installed in (iv) Have rounded corners, or other- such a manner that, if damaged, it will wise be shaped in a manner to mini- not affect the lading retention integ- mize stress concentrations on the shell rity of the tank. A lightweight attach- or head. ment must be secured to the cargo (v) Be attached by continuous fillet tank shell or head by a continuous welding. Any fillet weld discontinuity weld or in such a manner as to preclude may only be for the purpose of pre- formation of pockets which may be- venting an intersection between the fil- come sites for corrosion. Attachments let weld and a tank or jacket seam meeting the requirements of this para- weld. graph are not authorized for cargo tanks constructed under part UHT in [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37056, Sept. 7, 1990, as Section VIII of the ASME Code. amended by Amdt. 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. (3) Except as prescribed in para- 26, 1994; Amdt. 178–105, 60 FR 17401, Apr. 5, graphs (g)(1) and (g)(2) of this section, 1995; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; the welding of any appurtenance to the 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19279, Apr. cargo tank wall must be made by at- 18, 2003; 68 FR 52370, Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75753, Dec. 31, 2003] tachment of a mounting pad so that

141

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00151 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.337–4 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

§ 178.337–4 Joints. § 178.337–5 Bulkheads, baffles and ring stiffeners. (a) Joints shall be as required in Sec- tion VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see (a) Not a specification requirement. § 171.7 of this subchapter), with all un- (b) [Reserved] dercutting in shell and head material [Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- repaired as specified therein. nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] (b) Welding procedure and welder performance must be in accordance with § 178.337–6 Closure for manhole. Section IX of the ASME Code. In addi- (a) Each cargo tank marked or cer- tion to the essential variables named tified after April 21, 1994, must be pro- therein, the following must be consid- vided with a manhole conforming to ered as essential variables: Number of paragraph UG–46(g)(1) and other appli- passes; thickness of plate; heat input cable requirements in Section VIII of per pass; and manufacturer’s identi- the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this fication of rod and flux. When fabrica- subchapter), except that a cargo tank tion is done in accordance with part constructed of NQT steel having a ca- UHT in Section VIII of the ASME Code, pacity of 3,500 water gallons or less filler material containing more than may be provided with an inspection 0.08 percent vanadium must not be opening conforming to paragraph UG– used. The number of passes, thickness 46 and other applicable requirements of of plate, and heat input per pass may the ASME Code instead of a manhole. not vary more than 25 percent from the (b) The manhole assembly of cargo procedure or welder qualifications. tanks constructed after June 30, 1979, Records of the qualifications must be may not be located on the front head of retained for at least 5 years by the the cargo tank. cargo tank manufacturer and must be made available to duly identified rep- [Amdt. 178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969, as resentatives of the Department and the amended by Amdt. 178–52, 43 FR 58820, Dec. 18, 1978; Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25017, June 12, owner of the cargo tank. 1989; 55 FR 21038, May 22, 1990; 56 FR 27876, (c) All longitudinal shell welds shall June 17, 1991; 58 FR 12905, Mar. 8, 1993; Amdt. be located in the upper half of the 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 75753, cargo tank. Dec. 31, 2003] (d) Edge preparation of shell and head components may be by machine § 178.337–7 Overturn protection. heat processes, provided such surfaces (a) See § 178.337–10. are remelted in the subsequent welding (b) [Reserved] process. Where there will be no subsequent remelting of the prepared surface [Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] as in a tapered section, the final 0.050 inch of material shall be removed by § 178.337–8 Openings, inlets, and out- mechanical means. lets. (e) The maximum tolerance for mis- (a) General. The requirements in this alignment and butting up shall be in paragraph (a) apply to MC 331 cargo accordance with the requirement in tanks except for those used to trans- Section VIII of the ASME Code. port chlorine. The requirements for in- (f) Substructures shall be properly lets and outlets on chlorine cargo fitted before attachment, and the weld- tanks are in paragraph (b) of this sec- ing sequence shall be such as to mini- tion. mize stresses due to shrinkage of (1) An opening must be provided on welds. each cargo tank used for the transpor- [Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- tation of liquefied materials to permit nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] complete drainage. (2) Except for gauging devices, ther- EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- tations affecting § 178.337–4, see the List of mometer wells, pressure relief valves, CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the manhole openings, product inlet open- Finding Aids section of the printed volume ings, and product discharge openings, and at www.govinfo.gov. each opening in a cargo tank must be

142

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00152 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.337–8

closed with a plug, cap, or bolted ing connection area. The loading/un- flange. loading connection area is where hoses (3) Except as provided in paragraph or hose reels are connected to the per- (b) of this section, each product inlet manent metal piping. Linkages be- opening, including vapor return lines, tween closures and remote operators must be fitted with a back flow check must be corrosion resistant and effec- valve or an internal self-closing stop tive in all types of environmental con- valve located inside the cargo tank or ditions incident to discharge of prod- inside a welded nozzle that is an inte- uct. gral part of the cargo tank. The valve (iii) All parts of a valve inside a seat must be located inside the cargo cargo tank or within a welded flange tank or within 2.54 cm (one inch) of the must be made of material that will not external face of the welded flange. corrode or deteriorate in the presence Damage to parts exterior to the cargo of the lading. tank or mating flange must not prevent effective seating of the valve. All (iv) An excess flow valve, integral ex- parts of a valve inside a cargo tank or cess flow valve, or excess flow feature welded flange must be made of mate- must close if the flow reaches the rated rial that will not corrode or deteriorate flow of a gas or liquid specified by the in the presence of the lading. original valve manufacturer when pip- (4) Except as provided in paragraphs ing mounted directly on the valve is (a)(5), (b), and (c) of this section, each sheared off before the first valve, liquid or vapor discharge outlet must pump, or fitting downstream from the be fitted with a primary discharge con- excess flow valve, integral excess flow trol system as defined in § 178.337–1(g). valve, or excess flow feature. Thermal remote operators must acti- (v) An integral excess flow valve or vate at a temperature of 121.11 °C (250 the excess flow feature of an internal °F) or less. Linkages between closures self-closing stop valve may be designed and remote operators must be corro- with a bypass, not to exceed 0.1016 cm sion resistant and effective in all types (0.040 inch) diameter opening, to allow of environmental conditions incident equalization of pressure. to discharging of product. (vi) The internal self-closing stop (i) On a cargo tank over 13,247.5 L valve must be designed so that the self- (3,500 gallons) water capacity, thermal stored energy source and the valve seat and mechanical means of remote clo- are located inside the cargo tank or sure must be installed at the ends of within 2.54 cm (one inch) of the exter- the cargo tank in at least two diagonal face of the welded flange. Damage nally opposite locations. If the loading/ to parts exterior to the cargo tank or unloading connection at the cargo tank mating flange must not prevent effec- is not in the general vicinity of one of tive seating of the valve. the two locations specified in the first (5) A primary discharge control sys- sentence of this paragraph (a)(4)(i), ad- tem is not required on the following: ditional means of thermal remote clo- (i) A vapor or liquid discharge open- sure must be installed so that heat 1 from a fire in the loading/unloading ing of less than 1 ⁄4 NPT equipped with connection area or the discharge pump an excess flow valve together with a will activate the primary discharge manually operated external stop valve control system. The loading/unloading in place of an internal self-closing stop connection area is where hoses or hose valve. reels are connected to the permanent (ii) An engine fuel line on a truck- metal piping. mounted cargo tank of not more than (ii) On a cargo tank of 13,247.5 L (3,500 3⁄4 NPT equipped with a valve having an gallons) water capacity or less, a ther- integral excess flow valve or excess mal means of remote closure must be flow feature. installed at or near the internal self- (iii) A cargo tank motor vehicle used closing stop valve. A mechanical to transport refrigerated liquids such means of remote closure must be in- as argon, carbon dioxide, helium, kryp- stalled on the end of the cargo tank ton, neon, nitrogen, and xenon, or mix- furthest away from the loading/unload- tures thereof.

143

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00153 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.337–9 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(6) In addition to the internal self- lief devices, must be at least 4 times closing stop valve, each filling and dis- the design pressure of the cargo tank. charge line must be fitted with a stop Additionally, the burst pressure may valve located in the line between the not be less than 4 times any higher internal self-closing stop valve and the pressure to which each pipe, pipe fit- hose connection. A back flow check ting, hose or other pressure part may valve or excess flow valve may not be be subjected to in service. For chlorine used to satisfy this requirement. service, see paragraph (b)(7) of this sec- (7) An excess flow valve may be de- tion. signed with a bypass, not to exceed a (2) Pipe joints must be threaded, 0.1016 centimeter (0.040 inch) diameter welded, or flanged. If threaded pipe is opening, to allow equalization of pres- used, the pipe and fittings must be sure. Schedule 80 weight or heavier, except (b) Inlets and discharge outlets on chlo- for sacrificial devices. Malleable metal, rine tanks. The inlet and discharge outlets on a cargo tank used to transport stainless steel, or ductile iron must be chlorine must meet the requirements used in the construction of primary of § 178.337–1(c)(2) and must be fitted valve body parts and fittings used in with an internal excess flow valve. In liquid filling or vapor equalization. addition to the internal excess flow Stainless steel may be used for internal valve, the inlet and discharge outlets components such as shutoff discs and must be equipped with an external stop springs except where incompatible with valve (angle valve). Excess flow valves the lading to be transported. Where must conform to the standards of The copper tubing is permitted, joints must Chlorine Institute, Inc., as follows: be brazed or be of equally strong metal (1) A valve conforming to The Chlo- union type. The melting point of the rine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 101–7 (IBR, brazing material may not be lower see § 171.7 of this subchapter), must be than 538 °C (1,000 °F). The method of installed under each liquid angle valve. joining tubing may not reduce the (2) A valve conforming to The Chlo- strength of the tubing. rine Institute, Inc., Dwg. 106–6 (IBR, (3) Each hose coupling must be de- see § 171.7 of this subchapter), must be signed for a pressure of at least 120 per- installed under each gas angle valve. cent of the hose design pressure and so (c) Discharge outlets on carbon dioxide, that there will be no leakage when con- refrigerated liquid, cargo tanks. A dis- nected. charge outlet on a cargo tank used to (4) Piping must be protected from transport carbon dioxide, refrigerated damage due to thermal expansion and liquid is not required to be fitted with contraction, jarring, and vibration. an internal self-closing stop valve. Slip joints are not authorized for this [64 FR 28049, May 24, 1999, as amended at 66 purpose. FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19279, Apr. 18, (5) [Reserved] 2003; 68 FR 75753, Dec. 31, 2003] (6) Cargo tank manufacturers and § 178.337–9 Pressure relief devices, fabricators must demonstrate that all piping, valves, hoses, and fittings. piping, valves, and fittings on a cargo tank are free from leaks. To meet this (a) Pressure relief devices. (1) See requirement, the piping, valves, and § 173.315(i) of this subchapter. fittings must be tested after installa- (2) On cargo tanks for carbon dioxide or nitrous oxide see § 173.315 (i) (9) and tion at not less than 80 percent of the (10) of this subchapter. design pressure marked on the cargo (3) Each valve must be designed, con- tank. structed, and marked for a rated pres- (7) A hose assembler must: sure not less than the cargo tank de- (i) Permanently mark each hose as- sign pressure at the temperature ex- sembly with a unique identification pected to be encountered. number. (b) Piping, valves, hose, and fittings. (1) (ii) Demonstrate that each hose as- The burst pressure of all piping, pipe sembly is free from leaks by per- fittings, hose and other pressure parts, forming the tests and inspections in except for pump seals and pressure re- § 180.416(f) of this subchapter.

144

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00154 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.337–10

(iii) Mark each hose assembly with Finding Aids section of the printed volume the month and year of its original pres- and at www.govinfo.gov. sure test. § 178.337–10 Accident damage protec- (8) Chlorine cargo tanks. Angle valves tion. on cargo tanks intended for chlorine service must conform to the standards (a) All valves, fittings, pressure relief of the Chlorine Institute, Inc., Draw- devices, and other accessories to the ing; Dwg. 104–8; or ‘‘Section 3, Pam- tank proper shall be protected in ac- phlet 166, Angle Valve Guidelines for cordance with paragraph (b) of this sec- Chlorine Bulk Transportation;’’ or tion against such damage as could be ‘‘Sections 4 through 6, Pamphlet 168, caused by collision with other vehicles Guidelines for Dual Valve Systems for or objects, jack-knifing and over- Bulk Chlorine Transport’’ (IBR, see turning. In addition, pressure relief § 171.7 of this subchapter). Before in- valves shall be so protected that in the stallation, each angle valve must be event of overturn of the vehicle onto a tested for leakage at not less than 225 hard surface, their opening will not be psig using dry air or inert gas. prevented and their discharge will not (c) Marking inlets and outlets. Except be restricted. for gauging devices, thermometer (b) The protective devices or housing wells, and pressure relief valves, each must be designed to withstand static cargo tank inlet and outlet must be loading in any direction equal to twice marked ‘‘liquid’’ or ‘‘vapor’’ to des- the weight of the tank and attach- ignate whether it communicates with ments when filled with the lading, liquid or vapor when the cargo tank is using a safety factor of not less than filled to the maximum permitted fill- four, based on the ultimate strength of ing density. A filling line that commu- the material to be used, without dam- nicates with vapor may be marked age to the fittings protected, and must 3 ‘‘spray-fill’’ instead of ‘‘vapor.’’ be made of metal at least ⁄16-inch (d) Refrigeration and heating coils. (1) thick. Refrigeration and heating coils must (c) Rear-end tank protection. Rear-end be securely anchored with provisions tank protection devices must: for thermal expansion. The coils must (1) Consist of at least one rear bump- be pressure tested externally to at er designed to protect the cargo tank least the cargo tank test pressure, and and all valves, piping and fittings lo- internally to either the tank test pres- cated at the rear of the cargo tank sure or twice the working pressure of from damage that could result in loss the heating/refrigeration system, of lading in the event of a rear end col- whichever is higher. A cargo tank may lision. The bumper design must trans- not be placed in service if any leakage mit the force of the collision directly occurs or other evidence of damage is to the chassis of the vehicle. The rear found. The refrigerant or heating me- bumper and its attachments to the dium to be circulated through the coils chassis must be designed to withstand must not be capable of causing any ad- a load equal to twice the weight of the verse chemical reaction with the cargo loaded cargo tank motor vehicle and tank lading in the event of leakage. attachments, using a safety factor of The unit furnishing refrigeration may four based on the tensile strength of be mounted on the motor vehicle. the materials used, with such load (2) Where any liquid susceptible to being applied horizontally and parallel freezing, or the vapor of any such liq- to the major axis of the cargo tank. uid, is used for heating or refrigera- The rear bumper dimensions must also tion, the heating or refrigeration sys- meet the requirements of § 393.86 of this tem shall be arranged to permit com- title; or plete drainage. (2) Conform to the requirements of § 178.345–8(d). [Order 59–B, 30 FR 580, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- (d) Chlorine tanks. A chlorine tank nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] must be equipped with a protective EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- housing and a manway cover to permit tations affecting § 178.337–9, see the List of the use of standard emergency kits for CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the controlling leaks in fittings on the

145

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00155 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.337–11 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

dome cover plate. For tanks manufac- valve having an integral excess flow tured on or after October 1, 2009, the valve or excess flow feature. housing and manway cover must conform to the Chlorine Institute, Inc., [64 FR 28050, May 24, 1999] Dwg. 137–5 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- § 178.337–12 [Reserved] chapter). (e) Piping and fittings. Piping and fit- § 178.337–13 Supporting and anchor- tings must be grouped in the smallest ing. practicable space and protected from damage as required in this section. (a) A cargo tank that is not permanently attached to or integral with a (f) Shear section. A shear section or sacrificial device is required for the vehicle chassis must be secured by the valves specified in the following loca- use of restraining devices designed to tions: prevent relative motion between the (1) A section that will break under cargo tank and the vehicle chassis strain must be provided adjacent to or when the vehicle is in operation. Such outboard of each valve specified in restraining devices must be readily ac- § 178.337–8(a)(3) and (4). cessible for inspection and mainte- (2) Each internal self-closing stop nance. valve, excess flow valve, and check (b) On a cargo tank motor vehicle de- valve must be protected by a shear sec- signed and constructed so that the tion or other sacrificial device. The cargo tank constitutes in whole or in sacrificial device must be located in part the structural member used in the piping system outboard of the stop place of a motor vehicle frame, the valve and within the accident damage cargo tank must be supported by exter- protection to prevent any accidental nal cradles. A cargo tank mounted on a loss of lading. The failure of the sac- motor vehicle frame must be supported rificial device must leave the protected by external cradles or longitudinal lading protection device and its attach- members. Where used, the cradles must ment to the cargo tank wall intact and subtend at least 120 degrees of the shell capable of retaining product. circumference. [Order 59–B, 30 FR 581, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- (c) The design calculations of the nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] support elements must satisfy the requirements of § 178.337–3, (a), (b), (c), EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- tations affecting § 178.337–10, see the List of and (d). CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the (d) Where any cargo tank support is Finding Aids section of the printed volume attached to any part of a cargo tank and at www.govinfo.gov. head, the stresses imposed upon the head must be provided for as required § 178.337–11 Emergency discharge control. in paragraph (c) of this section. (a) Emergency discharge control equip- [68 FR 19280, Apr. 18, 2003] ment. Emergency discharge control equipment must be installed in a liquid § 178.337–14 Gauging devices. discharge line as specified by product (a) Liquid level gauging devices. See and service in § 173.315(n) of this sub- § 173.315(h) of this subchapter. chapter. The performance and certifi- (b) Pressure gauges. (1) See § 173.315(h) cation requirements for emergency dis- of this subchapter. charge control equipment are specified (2) Each cargo tank used in carbon in § 173.315(n) of this subchapter and are dioxide, refrigerated liquid or nitrous not a part of the cargo tank motor ve- oxide, refrigerated liquid service must hicle certification made under this be provided with a suitable pressure specification. gauge. A shut-off valve must be in- (b) Engine fuel lines. On a truck- stalled between the pressure gauge and mounted cargo tank, emergency dis- the cargo tank. charge control equipment is not required on an engine fuel line of not more than 3⁄4 NPT equipped with a

146

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00156 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.337–17

(c) Orifices. See § 173.315(h) (3) and (4) test must be made of all welds in or on of this subchapter. the shell and heads both inside and [Amdt. 178–29, 38 FR 27599, Oct. 5, 1973, as outside by either the wet fluorescent amended by Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25018, June magnetic particle method conforming 12, 1989; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, to appendix U in Section VIII of the 1996] ASME Code, liquid dye penetrant method, or ultrasonic testing in ac- § 178.337–15 Pumps and compressors. cordance with appendix 12 in Section (a) Liquid pumps or gas compressors, VIII of the ASME Code. Permanent if used, must be of suitable design, ade- magnets must not be used to perform quately protected against breakage by the magnetic particle inspection. collision, and kept in good condition. (c) All defects found shall be re- They may be driven by motor vehicle paired, the cargo tanks shall then power take-off or other mechanical, again be postweld heat treated, if such electrical, or hydraulic means. Unless heat treatment was previously per- they are of the centrifugal type, they formed, and the repaired areas shall shall be equipped with suitable pres- again be tested. sure actuated by-pass valves permit- ting flow from discharge to suction or [Order 59–B, 30 FR 582, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- to the cargo tank. nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967, and amended (b) A liquid chlorine pump may not by Amdt. 178–7, 34 FR 18250, Nov. 14, 1969; be installed on a cargo tank intended Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 75753, for the transportation of chlorine. Dec. 31, 2003] [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25018, June 12, 1989, as amended by Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. § 178.337–17 Marking. 1, 1996] (a) General. Each cargo tank certified § 178.337–16 Testing. after October 1, 2004 must have a corrosion-resistant metal name plate (a) Inspection and tests. Inspection of (ASME Plate); and each cargo tank materials of construction of the cargo motor vehicle certified after October 1, tank and its appurtenances and origi- 2004 must have a specification plate, nal test and inspection of the finished permanently attached to the cargo cargo tank and its appurtenances must tank by brazing, welding, or other suit- be as required by Section VIII of the able means on the left side near the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) and as further required by this front, in a place accessible for inspec- specification, except that for cargo tion. If the specification plate is at- tanks constructed in accordance with tached directly to the cargo tank wall part UHT in Section VIII of the ASME by welding, it must be welded to the Code the original test pressure must be tank before the cargo tank is postweld at least twice the cargo tank design heat treated. pressure. (1) The plates must be legibly marked (b) Weld testing and inspection. (1) by stamping, embossing, or other Each cargo tank constructed in accord- means of forming letters into the ance with part UHT in Section VIII of metal of the plate, with the informa- the ASME Code must be subjected, tion required in paragraphs (b) and (c) after postweld heat treatment and hy- of this section, in addition to that re- drostatic tests, to a wet fluorescent quired by the ASME Code, in char- magnetic particle inspection to be acters at least 3⁄16 inch high (parenthet- made on all welds in or on the cargo ical abbreviations may be used). All tank shell and heads both inside and plates must be maintained in a legible out. The method of inspection must condition. conform to appendix 6 in Section VIII (2) Each insulated cargo tank must of the ASME Code except that perma- have additional plates, as described, at- nent magnets shall not be used. tached to the jacket in the location (2) On cargo tanks of over 3,500 gal- specified unless the specification plate lons water capacity other than those is attached to the chassis and has the described in paragraph (b)(1) of this information required in paragraphs (b) section unless fully radiographed, a and (c) of this section.

147

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00157 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.337–18 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(3) The information required for both (13) Exposed surface area, in square the name and specification plate may feet. be displayed on a single plate. If the in- NOTE TO PARAGRAPH (b): When the shell and formation required by this section is head materials are the same thickness, they displayed on a plate required by the may be combined, (Shell&head matl, ASME, the information need not be re- yyy***). peated on the name and specification (c) Specification plate. The following plates. information must be marked on the (4) The specification plate may be at- specification plate in accordance with tached to the cargo tank motor vehicle this section: chassis rail by brazing, welding, or (1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manu- other suitable means on the left side facturer (CTMV mfr.). near the front head, in a place acces- (2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certifi- sible for inspection. If the specification cation date (CTMV cert. date). plate is attached to the chassis rail, (3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT then the cargo tank serial number as- mfr.). signed by the cargo tank manufacturer (4) Cargo tank date of manufacture must be included on the plate. (CT date of mfr.), month and year. (b) Name plate. The following infor- (5) Maximum weight of lading (Max. mation must be marked on the name Payload), in pounds plate in accordance with this section: (6) Lining materials (Lining), if ap- (1) DOT-specification number MC 331 plicable. (DOT MC 331). (7) Heating system design pressure (2) Original test date (Orig. Test (Heating sys. press.), in psig, if applica- Date). ble. (3) MAWP in psig. (8) Heating system design tempera- (4) Cargo tank design temperature ture (Heating sys. temp.), in °F, if ap- (Design Temp. Range) lll °F to plicable. lll °F. (9) Cargo tank serial number, as- (5) Nominal capacity (Water Cap.), in signed by cargo tank manufacturer (CT pounds. serial), if applicable. (6) Maximum design density of lading NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (c): See § 173.315(a) of (Max. Lading density), in pounds per this chapter regarding water capacity. gallon. NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (c): When the shell (7) Material specification number— and head materials are the same thickness, shell (Shell matl, yyy***), where ‘‘yyy’’ they may be combined (Shell & head matl, is replaced by the alloy designation yyy***). and ‘‘***’’ is replaced by the alloy type. (d) The design weight of lading used (8) Material specification number— in determining the loading in §§ 178.337– heads (Head matl. yyy***), where 3(b), 178.337–10(b) and (c), and 178.337– ‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa- 13(a) and (b), must be shown as the tion and ‘‘***’’ by the alloy type. maximum weight of lading marking re- (9) Minimum Thickness—shell (Min. quired by paragraph (c) of this section. Shell-thick), in inches. When minimum [68 FR 19280, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52370, Sept. shell thicknesses are not the same for 3, 2003, as amended at 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, different areas, show (topll, sidell, 2003; 81 FR 35544, June 2, 2016] bottomll, in inches). (10) Minimum thickness—heads (Min. § 178.337–18 Certification. heads thick.), in inches. (a) At or before the time of delivery, (11) Manufactured thickness—shell the cargo tank motor vehicle manufac- (Mfd. Shell thick.), topll, sidell, turer must supply and the owner must bottomll, in inches. (Required when obtain, a cargo tank motor vehicle additional thickness is provided for manufacturer’s data report as required corrosion allowance.) by Section VIII of the ASME Code (12) Manufactured thickness—heads (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), and (Mfd. Heads thick.), in inches. (Re- a certificate stating that the com- quired when additional thickness is pleted cargo tank motor vehicle con- provided for corrosion allowance.) forms in all respects to Specification

148

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00158 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.338–1

MC 331 and the ASME Code. The reg- vices conform to the requirements of istration numbers of the manufacturer, the specification. If it does not so cer- the Design Certifying Engineer, and tify, the installer of any such valve, the Registered Inspector, as appro- piping, or device shall supply and the priate, must appear on the certificates owner shall obtain a certificate assert- (see subpart F, part 107 in subchapter A ing complete compliance with these of this chapter). specifications for such devices. The (1) For each design type, the certifi- certificate, or certificates, will include cate must be signed by a responsible of- sufficient sketches, drawings, and ficial of the manufacturer and a Design other information to indicate the loca- Certifying Engineer; and tion, make, model, and size of each (2) For each cargo tank motor vehi- valve and the arrangement of all piping cle, the certificate must be signed by a associated with the cargo tank. responsible official of the manufac- (6) The certificate must contain a turer and a Registered Inspector. statement indicating whether or not (3) When a cargo tank motor vehicle the cargo tank was postweld heat is manufactured in two or more stages, treated for anhydrous ammonia as each manufacturer who performs a specified in § 178.337–1(f). manufacturing function or portion (b) The owner shall retain the copy of thereof on the incomplete cargo tank the data report and certificates and re- motor vehicle must provide to the suc- lated papers in his files throughout his ceeding manufacturer, at or before the ownership of the cargo tank motor ve- time of delivery, a certificate that hicle and for at least one year there- states the function performed by the after; and in the event of change in manufacturer, including any certifi- ownership, retention by the prior cates received from previous manufac- owner of nonfading photographically turers, Registered Inspectors, and De- reproduced copies will be deemed to sign Certifying Engineers. satisfy this requirement. Each motor (4) Specification shortages. When a carrier using the cargo tank motor ve- cargo tank motor vehicle is manufac- hicle, if not the owner thereof, shall tured in two or more stages, the manu- obtain a copy of the data report and facturer of the cargo tank must attach certificate and retain them in his files the name plate and specification plate during the time he uses the cargo tank as required by § 178.337–17(a) and (b) motor vehicle and for at least one year without the original date of certifi- thereafter. cation stamped on the specification [Order 59–B, 30 FR 583, Jan. 16, 1965. Redesig- plate. Prior manufacturers must list nated at 32 FR 5606, Apr. 5, 1967] the specification requirements that are not completed on the Certificate of EDITORIAL NOTE: For FEDERAL REGISTER ci- Compliance. When the cargo tank tations affecting § 178.337–18, see the List of CFR Sections Affected, which appears in the motor vehicle is brought into full com- Finding Aids section of the printed volume pliance with the applicable specifica- and at www.govinfo.gov. tion, the cargo tank motor vehicle manufacturer must have a Registered § 178.338 Specification MC–338; insu- Inspector stamp the date of certifi- lated cargo tank motor vehicle. cation on the specification plate and issue a Certificate of Compliance to the § 178.338–1 General requirements. owner of the cargo tank motor vehicle. (a) For the purposes of this section— The Certificate of Compliance must (1) Design pressure means the list the actions taken to bring the ‘‘MAWP’’ as used in Section VIII of the cargo tank motor vehicle into full ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- compliance. In addition, the certificate chapter), and is the gauge pressure at must include the date of certification the top of the tank. and the person (manufacturer, carrier (2) Design service temperature means or repair organization) accomplishing the coldest temperature for which the compliance. tank is suitable (see §§ 173.318 (a)(1) and (5) The certificate must state wheth- (f) of this subchapter). er or not it includes certification that (b) Each cargo tank must consist of a all valves, piping, and protective de- suitably supported welded inner vessel

149

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00159 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.338–2 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

enclosed within an outer shell or jack- (1) The jacket must be designed to et, with insulation between the inner sustain a minimum critical collapsing vessel and outer shell or jacket, and pressure of 30 psig. having piping, valves, supports and (2) If the jacket also supports addi- other appurtenances as specified in this tional loads, such as the weight of the subchapter. For the purpose of this tank and lading, the combined stress, specification, tank means inner vessel computed according to the formula in and jacket means either the outer shell § 178.338–3(b), may not exceed 25 percent or insulation cover. of the minimum specified tensile (c) Each tank must be designed, con- strength. structed, certified, and stamped in ac- [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27703, June 16, 1983, as cordance with Section VIII of the amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; Amdt. ASME Code. 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 66 FR (d) The exterior surface of the tank 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003] must be insulated with a material compatible with the lading. § 178.338–2 Material. (1) Each cargo tank must have an in- (a) All material used in the construc- sulation system that will prevent the tion of a tank and its appurtenances tank pressure from exceeding the pres- that may come in contact with the lad- sure relief valve set pressure within the ing must be compatible with the lading specified holding time when the tank is to be transported. All material used for loaded with the specific cryogenic liq- tank pressure parts must conform to uid at the design conditions of— the requirements in Section II of the (i) The specified temperature and ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- pressure of the cryogenic liquid, and chapter). All material used for evacu- (ii) The exposure of the filled cargo ated jacket pressure parts must con- tank to an average ambient tempera- form to the chemistry and steelmaking ture of 85 °F. practices of one of the material speci- (2) For a cargo tank used to transport fications of Section II of the ASME oxygen, the insulation may not sustain Code or the following ASTM Specifica- combustion in a 99.5 percent oxygen at- tions (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- mosphere at atmospheric pressure chapter): A 242, A 441, A 514, A 572, A when contacted with a continuously 588, A 606, A 633, A 715, A 1008/A 1008M, heated glowing platinum wire. The A 1011/A 1011M. cargo tank must be marked in accord- (b) All tie-rods, mountings, and other ance with § 178.338–18(b)(7). appurtenances within the jacket and (3) Each vacuum-insulated cargo all piping, fittings and valves must be tank must be provided with a connec- of material suitable for use at the low- tion for a vacuum gauge to indicate the est temperature to be encountered. absolute pressure within the insulation (c) Impact tests are required on all space. tank materials, except materials that (e) The insulation must be com- are excepted from impact testing by pletely covered by a metal jacket. The the ASME Code, and must be per- jacket or the insulation must be so formed using the procedure prescribed constructed and sealed as to prevent in Section VIII of the ASME Code. moisture from coming into contact (d) The direction of final rolling of with the insulation (see § 173.318(a)(3) of the shell material must be the circum- this subchapter). Minimum metal ferential orientation of the tank shell. thicknesses are as follows: (e) Each tank constructed in accord- Jacket evacu- Jacket not ance with part UHT in Section VIII of Type metal ated evacuated the ASME Code must be postweld heat Gauge Inches Gauge Inches treated as a unit after completion of all welds to the shell and heads. Other Stainless steel ...... 18 0 .0428 22 0.0269 Low carbon mild steel .. 12 0 .0946 14 0.0677 tanks must be postweld heat treated as Aluminum ...... 0 .125 ...... 0.1000 required in Section VIII of the ASME Code. For all tanks the method must (f) An evacuated jacket must be in be as prescribed in the ASME Code. compliance with the following require- Welded attachments to pads may be ments: made after postweld heat treatment.

150

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00160 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.338–3

(f) The fabricator shall record the each tank must be in accordance with heat and slab numbers and the certified appendix G in Section VIII of the Charpy impact values of each plate ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- used in the tank on a sketch showing chapter). The tank design must include the location of each plate in the shell calculation of stress due to the design and heads of the tank. A copy of the pressure, the weight of lading, the sketch must be provided to the owner weight of structures supported by the of the cargo tank and a copy must be tank wall, and the effect of tempera- retained by the fabricator for at least ture gradients resulting from lading five years and made available, upon re- and ambient temperature extremes. quest, to any duly identified represent- When dissimilar materials are used, ative of the Department. their thermal coefficients must be used in calculation of the thermal stresses. (Approved by the Office of Management and Budget under control number 2137–0017) (2) Stress concentrations in tension, bending, and torsion which occur at [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27703, 27713, June 16, pads, cradles, or other supports must 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; 68 FR 19281, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, be considered in accordance with ap- 2003; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005] pendix G in Section VIII of the ASME Code. § 178.338–3 Structural integrity. (c) Stresses resulting from static and (a) General requirements and accept- dynamic loadings, or a combination ance criteria. (1) Except as permitted in thereof, are not uniform throughout paragraph (d) of this section, the max- the cargo tank motor vehicle. The fol- imum calculated design stress at any lowing is a simplified procedure for cal- point in the tank may not exceed the culating the effective stress in the lesser of the maximum allowable stress tank resulting from static and dynamic value prescribed in Section VIII of the loadings. The effective stress (the max- ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- imum principal stress at any point) chapter), or 25 percent of the tensile must be determined by the following strength of the material used. formula: (2) The relevant physical properties 2 0.5 S = 0.5 (Sy + Sx) ±(0.25(Sy ¥ Sx) + Ss2) of the materials used in each tank may be established either by a certified test Where: report from the material manufacturer (1) S = effective stress at any given or by testing in conformance with a point under the most severe combina- recognized national standard. In either tion of static and dynamic loadings case, the ultimate tensile strength of that can occur at the same time, in psi. the material used in the design may (2) Sy = circumferential stress gen- not exceed 120 percent of the minimum erated by internal and external pres- ultimate tensile strength specified in sure when applicable, in psi. either the ASME Code or the ASTM (3) Sx = the net longitudinal stress, in standard to which the material is man- psi, generated by the following loading ufactured. conditions: (3) The maximum design stress at (i) The longitudinal tensile stress any point in the tank must be cal- generated by internal pressure; culated separately for the loading con- (ii) The tensile or compressive stress ditions described in paragraphs (b), (c), generated by the axial load resulting and (d) of this section. Alternate test from a decelerative force applied inde- or analytical methods, or a combina- pendently to each suspension assembly tion thereof, may be used in lieu of the at the road surface using applicable procedures described in paragraphs (b), static loadings specified in § 178.338–13 (c), and (d) of this section, if the meth- (b); ods are accurate and verifiable. (iii) The tensile or compressive stress (4) Corrosion allowance material may generated by the bending moment re- not be included to satisfy any of the sulting from a decelerative force ap- design calculation requirements of this plied independently to each suspension section. assembly at the road surface using ap- (b) Static design and construction. (1) plicable static loadings specified in The static design and construction of § 178.338–13 (b);

151

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00161 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.338–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(iv) The tensile or compressive stress meet the requirements in paragraph (a) generated by the axial load resulting of this section. from an accelerative force applied to (g) The design, construction and in- the horizontal pivot of the fifth wheel stallation of an attachment, appur- supporting the vehicle using applicable tenance to the cargo tank or structural static loadings specified in § 178.338–13 support member between the cargo (b); tank and the vehicle or suspension (v) The tensile or compressive stress component or accident protection de- generated by the bending moment re- vice must conform to the following resulting from an accelerative force ap- quirements: plied to the horizontal pivot of the (1) Structural members, the suspen- fifth wheel supporting the vehicle sion subframe, accident protection using applicable static loadings speci- structures and external circumferen- fied in § 178.338–13 (b); and tial reinforcement devices must be (vi) The tensile or compressive stress used as sites for attachment of appur- generated by a bending moment pro- tenances and other accessories to the duced by a vertical force using applica- cargo tank, when practicable. ble static loadings specified in § 178.338– (2) A lightweight attachment to the 13 (b). cargo tank wall such as a conduit clip, (4) Ss = The following shear stresses brakeline clip, skirting structure, lamp that apply, in psi,: The vectorial sum mounting bracket, or placard holder of the applicable shear stresses in the must be of a construction having lesser plane under consideration, including strength than the cargo tank wall ma- direct shear generated by the static terials and may not be more than 72 vertical loading; direct lateral and tor- percent of the thickness of the mate- sional shear generated by a lateral ac- rial to which it is attached. The light- celerative force applied at the road sur- weight attachment may be secured di- face, using applicable static loads spec- rectly to the cargo tank wall if the de- ified in § 178.338–13 (b) vice is designed and installed in such a (d) In order to account for stresses manner that, if damaged, it will not af- due to impact in an accident, the defect the lading retention integrity of sign calculations for the tank shell and the tank. A lightweight attachment heads must include the load resulting must be secured to the cargo tank shell from the design pressure in combina- or head by a continuous weld or in such tion with the dynamic pressure result- a manner as to preclude formation of ing from a longitudinal deceleration of pockets that may become sites for cor- ‘‘2g’’. For this loading condition the rosion. Attachments meeting the re- stress value used may not exceed the quirements of this paragraph are not lesser of the yield strength or 75 per- authorized for cargo tanks constructed cent of the ultimate tensile strength of under part UHT in Section VIII of the the material of construction. For a ASME Code. cargo tank constructed of stainless (3) Except as prescribed in para- steel, the maximum design stress may graphs (g)(1) and (g)(2) of this section, not exceed 75 percent of the ultimate the welding of any appurtenance the tensile strength of the type steel used. cargo tank wall must be made by at- (e) The minimum thickness of the tachment of a mounting pad so that shell or heads of the tank must be 0.187 there will be no adverse effect upon the inch for steel and 0.270 inch for alu- lading retention integrity of the cargo minum. However, the minimum thick- tank if any force less than that pre- ness for steel may be 0.110 inches pro- scribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec- vided the cargo tank is: tion is applied from any direction. The (1) Vacuum insulated, or thickness of the mounting pad may not (2) Double walled with a load bearing be less than that of the shell or head to jacket designed to carry a propor- which it is attached, and not more tionate amount of structural loads pre- than 1.5 times the shell or head thick- scribed in this section. ness. However, a pad with a minimum (f) Where a tank support is attached thickness of 0.187 inch may be used to any part of the tank wall, the when the shell or head thickness is stresses imposed on the tank wall must over 0.187 inch. If weep holes or tell-

152

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00162 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.338–6

tale holes are used, the pad must be Department, or the owner of the cargo drilled or punched at the lowest point tank. before it is welded to the tank. Each (c) All longitudinal welds in tanks pad must: and load bearing jackets must be lo- (i) Be fabricated from material deter- cated so as not to intersect nozzles or mined to be suitable for welding to supports other than load rings and both the cargo tank material and the stiffening rings. material of the appurtenance or struc- (d) Substructures must be properly tural support member; a Design Certi- fitted before attachment and the weld- fying Engineer must make this deter- ing sequence must minimize stresses mination considering chemical and due to shrinkage of welds. physical properties of the materials (e) Filler material containing more and must specify filler material con- than 0.05 percent vanadium may not be forming to the requirements in Section used with quenched and tempered steel. IX of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of (f) All tank nozzle-to-shell and noz- this subchapter). zle-to-head welds must be full penetra- (ii) Be preformed to an inside radius tion welds. no greater than the outside radius of the cargo tank at the attachment loca- (Approved by the Office of Management and tion. Budget under control number 2137–0017) (iii) Extend at least 2 inches in each [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, 27713, June 16, direction from any point of attachment 1983, as amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; of an appurtenance or structural sup- 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003] port member. This dimension may be measured from the center of the at- § 178.338–5 Stiffening rings. tached structural member. (a) A tank is not required to be pro- (iv) Have rounded corners, or other- vided with stiffening rings, except as wise be shaped in a manner to mini- prescribed in Section VIII of the ASME mize stress concentrations on the shell Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- or head. chapter). (v) Be attached by continuous fillet (b) If a jacket is evacuated, it must welding. Any fillet weld discontinuity may only be for the purpose of pre- be constructed in compliance with venting an intersection between the fil- § 178.338–1(f). Stiffening rings may be let weld and a tank or jacket seam used to meet these requirements. weld. [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37057, Sept. 7, 1990, as amended at 68 FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003] amended by Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27876, June 17, 1991; 56 FR 46354, Sept. 11, 1991; 68 FR § 178.338–6 Manholes. 19281, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 57633, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 (a) Each tank in oxygen service must FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003; 81 FR 25618, Apr. 29, be provided with a manhole as pre- 2016] scribed in Section VIII of the ASME § 178.338–4 Joints. Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). (a) All joints in the tank, and in the (b) Each tank having a manhole must jacket if evacuated, must be as pre- be provided with a means of entrance scribed in Section VIII of the ASME and exit through the jacket, or the Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), except that a butt weld with jacket must be marked to indicate the one plate edge offset is not authorized. manway location on the tank. (b) Welding procedure and welder per- (c) A manhole with a bolted closure formance tests must be made in ac- may not be located on the front head of cordance with Section IX of the ASME the tank. Code. Records of the qualification must [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as be retained by the tank manufacturer amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; 68 FR for at least five years and must be 75754, Dec. 31, 2003] made available, upon request, to any duly identified representative of the

153

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00163 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.338–7 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

§ 178.338–7 Openings. leaks. This requirement is met when such piping, valves, and fittings have (a) The inlet to the liquid product been tested after installation with gas discharge opening of each tank in- or air and proved leak tight at not less tended for flammable ladings must be than the design pressure marked on the at the bottom centerline of the tank. cargo tank. This requirement is appli- (b) If the leakage of a single valve, cable to all hoses used in a cargo tank, except a pressure relief valve, pressure except that hose may be tested before control valve, full trycock or gas phase or after installation on the tank. manual vent valve, would permit loss of flammable material, an additional (6) Each valve must be suitable for closure that is leak tight at the tank the tank design pressure at the tank design pressure must be provided out- design service temperature. board of such valve. (7) All fittings must be rated for the maximum tank pressure and suitable [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983] for the coldest temperature to which they will be subjected in actual serv- § 178.338–8 Pressure relief devices, ice. piping, valves, and fittings. (8) All piping, valves, and fittings (a) Pressure relief devices. Each tank must be grouped in the smallest prac- pressure relief device must be designed, ticable space and protected from dam- constructed, and marked in accordance age as required by § 178.338–10. with § 173.318(b) of this subchapter. (9) When a pressure-building coil is (b) Piping, valves, and fittings. (1) The used on a tank designed to handle oxy- burst pressure of all piping, pipe fit- gen or flammable ladings, the vapor tings, hoses and other pressure parts, connection to that coil must be pro- except for pump seals and pressure re- vided with a valve or check valve as lief devices, must be at least 4 times close to the tank shell as practicable to the design pressure of the tank. Addi- prevent the loss of vapor from the tank tionally, the burst pressure may not be in case of damage to the coil. The liq- less than 4 times any higher pressure uid connection to that coil must also to which each pipe, pipe fitting, hose or be provided with a valve. other pressure part may be subjected to in service. [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983, as (2) Pipe joints must be threaded, amended by Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25019, June welded or flanged. If threaded pipe is 12, 1989] used, the pipe and fittings must be Schedule 80 weight or heavier. Malle- § 178.338–9 Holding time. able metals must be used in the con- (a) ‘‘Holding time’’ is the time, as destruction of valves and fittings. Where termined by testing, that will elapse copper tubing is permitted, joints shall from loading until the pressure of the be brazed or be of equally strong metal contents, under equilibrium conditions, union type. The melting point of the reaches the level of the lowest pressure brazing materials may not be lower control valve or pressure relief valve than 1000 °F. The method of joining setting. tubing may not reduce the strength of (b) Holding time test. (1) The test to the tubing, such as by the cutting of determine holding time must be per- threads. formed by charging the tank with a (3) Each hose coupling must be de- cryogenic liquid having a boiling point, signed for a pressure of at least 120 per- at a pressure of one atmosphere, abso- cent of the hose design pressure and so lute, no lower than the design service that there will be no leakage when con- temperature of the tank. The tank nected. must be charged to its maximum per- (4) Piping must be protected from mitted filling density with that liquid damage due to thermal expansion and and stabilized to the lowest practical contraction, jarring, and vibration. pressure, which must be equal to or Slip joints are not authorized for this less than the pressure to be used for purpose. loading. The cargo tank together with (5) All piping, valves and fittings on a its contents must then be exposed to cargo tank must be proved free from ambient temperature.

154

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00164 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.338–10

(2) The tank pressure and ambient q = calculated heat transfer rate to cargo temperature must be recorded at 3- tank with lading, Btu/hr. hour intervals until the pressure level n = normal evaporation rate (NER), which is of the contents reaches the set-to-dis- the rate of evaporation, determined by the test of a test cryogenic liquid in a charge pressure of the pressure control cargo tank maintained at a pressure of valve or pressure relief valve with the approximately one atmosphere, absolute, lowest setting. This total time lapse in lb/hr. hours represents the measured holding D h = latent heat of vaporization of test fluid time at the actual average ambient at test pressure, Btu/lb. temperature. This measured holding ts = average temperature of outer shell dur- time for the test cryogenic liquid must ing test, °F. be adjusted to an equivalent holding t1 = equilibrium temperature of lading at maximum loading pressure, °F. time for each cryogenic liquid that is tf = equilibrium temperature of test fluid at to be identified on or adjacent to the one atmosphere, °F. specification plate, at an average ambient temperature of 85 °F. This is the (ii) The rated holding time (RHT) rated holding time (RHT). The marked must be calculated as follows:

rated holding time (MRHT) displayed RHT = [(U2 ¥ U1) W] / q on or adjacent to the specification plate (see § 178.338–18(c)(10)) may not ex- Where: ceed this RHT. RHT = rated holding time, in hours (c) Optional test regimen. (1) If more U1 and U2 = internal energy for the combined than one cargo tank is made to the liquid and vapor lading at the pressure offered for transportation, and the set same design, only one cargo tank must pressure of the applicable pressure con- be subjected to the full holding time trol valve or pressure relief valve, respec- test at the time of manufacture. How- tively, Btu/lb. ever, each subsequent cargo tank made W = total weight of the combined liquid and to the same design must be perform- vapor lading in the cargo tank, pounds. ance tested during its first trip. The q = calculated heat transfer rate to cargo holding time determined in this test tank with lading, Btu/hr. may not be less than 90 percent of the (iii) The MRHT (see § 178.338–18(b)(9) marked rated holding time. This test of this subchapter) may not exceed the must be performed in accordance with RHT. §§ 173.318(g)(3) and 177.840(h) of this subchapter, regardless of the classification [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27704, June 16, 1983; 48 FR 50442, Nov. 1, 1983, as amended at 49 FR of the cryogenic liquid. 24316, June 12, 1984; 49 FR 43965, Nov. 1, 1984; (2) Same design. The term ‘‘same de- 59 FR 55173, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR sign’’ as used in this section means 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 57634, Oct. 6, 2003; 71 cargo tanks made to the same design FR 54397, Sept. 14, 2006] type. See § 178.320(a) for definition of ‘‘design type’’. § 178.338–10 Accident damage protec- (3) For a cargo tank used in nonflam- tion. mable cryogenic liquid service, in place (a) All valves, fittings, pressure relief of the holding time tests prescribed in devices and other accessories to the paragraph (b) of this section, the tank proper, which are not isolated marked rated holding time (MRHT) from the tank by closed intervening may be determined as follows: shut-off valves or check valves, must (i) While the cargo tank is sta- be installed within the motor vehicle tionary, the heat transfer rate must be framework or within a suitable colli- determined by measuring the normal sion resistant guard or housing, and evaporation rate (NER) of the test appropriate ventilation must be pro- cryogenic liquid (preferably the lading, vided. Each pressure relief device must where feasible) maintained at approxi- be protected so that in the event of the mately one atmosphere. The calculated upset of the vehicle onto a hard sur- heat transfer rate must be determined face, the device’s opening will not be from: prevented and its discharge will not be restricted. q = [n( h)(85¥t )] / [t ¥ t ] D 1 s f (b) Each protective device or housing, Where: and its attachment to the vehicle

155

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00165 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.338–11 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

structure, must be designed to with- line must also have a manual shut-off stand static loading in any direction valve. that it may be loaded as a result of (c) Except for a cargo tank that is front, rear, side, or sideswipe collision, used to transport argon, carbon diox- or the overturn of the vehicle. The ide, helium, krypton, neon, nitrogen, static loading shall equal twice the xenon, or mixtures thereof, each liquid loaded weight of the tank and attach- filling and liquid discharge line must ments. A safety factor of four, based on be provided with an on-vehicle re- the tensile strength of the material, motely controlled self-closing shutoff shall be used. The protective device or valve. the housing must be made of steel at (1) If pressure from a reservoir or least 3⁄16-inch thick, or other material from an engine-driven pump or com- of equivalent strength. pressor is used to open this valve, the (c) Rear-end tank protection. Rear-end control must be of fail-safe design and tank protections devices must: spring-biased to stop the admission of (1) Consist of at least one rear bump- such pressure into the cargo tank. If er designed to protect the cargo tank the jacket is not evacuated, the seat of and piping in the event of a rear-end the valve must be inside the tank, in collision. The rear-end tank protection the opening nozzle or flange, or in a device design must transmit the force companion flange bolted to the nozzle. of the collision directly to the chassis If the jacket is evacuated, the re- of the vehicle. The rear-end tank pro- motely controlled valve must be lo- tection device and its attachments to cated as close to the tank as prac- the chassis must be designed to with- ticable. stand a load equal to twice the weight (2) Each remotely controlled shut off of the loaded cargo tank and attach- valve must be provided with on-vehicle ments, using a safety factor of four remote means of automatic closure, based on the tensile strength of the both mechanical and thermal. One materials used, with such load being means may be used to close more than applied horizontally and parallel to the one remotely controlled valve. Cable major axis of the cargo tank. The rear- linkage between closures and remote end tank protection device dimensions operators must be corrosion resistant must meet the requirements of § 393.86 and effective in all types of environ- of this title and extend vertically to a ment and weather. The thermal means height adequate to protect all valves must consist of fusible elements actu- and fittings located at the rear of the ated at a temperature not exceeding cargo tank from damage that could re- 121 °C (250 °F), or equivalent devices. sult in loss of lading; or The loading/unloading connection area (2) Conform to the requirements of is where hoses are connected to the § 178.345–8(b). permanent metal piping. The number (d) Every part of the loaded cargo and location of remote operators and tank, and any associated valve, pipe, thermal devices shall be as follows: enclosure, or protective device or (i) On a cargo tank motor vehicle structure (exclusive of wheel assem- over 3,500 gallons water capacity, re- blies), must be at least 14 inches above mote means of automatic closure must level ground. be installed at the ends of the cargo [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27705, June 16, 1983, as tank in at least two diagonally oppo- amended at 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984; Amdt. site locations. If the loading/unloading 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; 68 FR 19282, connection at the cargo tank is not in Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52371, Sept. 3, 2003] the general vicinity of one of these locations, at least one additional ther- § 178.338–11 Discharge control devices. mal device must be installed so that (a) Excess-flow valves are not reheat from a fire in the loading/unload- quired. ing connection area will activate the (b) Each liquid filling and liquid dis- emergency control system. charge line must be provided with a (ii) On a cargo tank motor vehicle of shut-off valve located as close to the 3,500 gallons water capacity or less, at tank as practicable. Unless this valve least one remote means of automatic is manually operable at the valve, the closure must be installed on the end of

156

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00166 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.338–14

the cargo tank farthest away from the lowing factors. The effects of fatigue loading/unloading connection area. At must also be considered in the calcula- least one thermal device must be in- tions. Minimum static loadings must stalled so that heat from a fire in the be as follows: loading/unloading connection area will (1) For a vacuum-insulated cargo activate the emergency control sys- tank— tem. (i) Vertically downward of 2; (ii) Vertically upward of 2; [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27705, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55173, Nov. (iii) Longitudinally of 2; and 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, 1995; 68 FR 19282, (iv) Laterally of 2. Apr. 18, 2003] (2) For any other insulated cargo tank— § 178.338–12 Shear section. (i) Vertically downward of 3; Unless the valve is located in a rear (ii) Vertically upward of 2; cabinet forward of and protected by the (iii) Longitudinally of 2; and bumper (see § 178.338–10(c)), the design (iv) Laterally of 2. and installation of each valve, damage (b) When a loaded tank is supported to which could result in loss of liquid within the vacuum jacket by struc- or vapor, must incorporate a shear sec- tural members, the design calculations tion or breakage groove adjacent to, for the tank and its structural mem- and outboard of, the valve. The shear bers must be based on a safety factor of section or breakage groove must yield four and the tensile strength of the ma- or break under strain without damage terial at ambient temperature. The en- to the valve that would allow the loss hanced tensile strength of the material of liquid or vapor. The protection spec- at actual operating temperature may ified in § 178.338–10 is not a substitute be substituted for the tensile strength for a shear section or breakage groove. at ambient temperature to the extent recognized in the ASME Code for static [Amdt. 178–77, 49 FR 24316, June 12, 1984] loadings. Static loadings must take into consideration the weight of the § 178.338–13 Supporting and anchoring. tank and the structural members when the tank is filled to the design weight (a) On a cargo tank motor vehicle de- of lading (see Appendix G of Section signed and constructed so that the VIII, Division 1 of the ASME Code), cargo tank constitutes in whole or in multiplied by the following factors. part the structural member used in Static loadings must take into consid- place of a motor vehicle frame, the eration the weight of the tank and the cargo tank or the jacket must be sup- structural members when the tank is ported by external cradles or by load filled to the design weight of lading rings. For a cargo tank mounted on a (see appendix G in Section VIII of the motor vehicle frame, the tank or jack- ASME Code), multiplied by the fol- et must be supported by external cra- lowing factors. When load rings in the dles, load rings, or longitudinal mem- jacket are used for supporting the bers. If cradles are used, they must tank, they must be designed to carry subtend at least 120 degrees of the the fully loaded tank at the specified cargo tank circumference. The design calculations for the supports and load- static loadings, plus external pressure. bearing tank or jacket, and the support Minimum static loadings must be as attachments must include beam stress, follows: (1) Vertically downward of 2; shear stress, torsion stress, bending 1 moment, and acceleration stress for (2) Vertically upward of 1 ⁄2; (3) Longitudinally of 11⁄2; and, (4) Lat- the loaded vehicle as a unit, using a 1 safety factor of four, based on the ten- erally of 1 ⁄2. sile strength of the material, and static [68 FR 19282, Apr. 18, 2003, as amended at 68 loading that uses the weight of the FR 75754, Dec. 31, 2003] cargo tank and its attachments when filled to the design weight of the lading § 178.338–14 Gauging devices. (see appendix G in Section VIII of the (a) Liquid level gauging devices. (1) Un- ASME Code) (IBR, see § 171.7 of this less a cargo tank is intended to be subchapter), multiplied by the fol- filled by weight, it must be equipped

157

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00167 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.338–15 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

with one or more gauging devices, remove all foreign material in accord- which accurately indicate the max- ance with CGA G–4.1 (IBR, see § 171.7 of imum permitted liquid level at the this subchapter). All loose particles loading pressure, in order to provide a from fabrication, such as weld beads, minimum of two percent outage below dirt, grinding wheel debris, and other the inlet of the pressure control valve loose materials, must be removed prior or pressure relief valve at the condition to the final closure of the manhole of of incipient opening of that valve. A the tank. Chemical or solvent cleaning fixed-length dip tube, a fixed trycock with a material compatible with the line, or a differential pressure liquid intending lading must be performed to level gauge must be used as the pri- remove any contaminants likely to mary control for filling. Other gauging react with the lading. devices, except gauge glasses, may be [68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003] used, but not as the primary control for filling. § 178.338–16 Inspection and testing. (2) The design pressure of each liquid (a) The material of construc- level gauging device must be at least General. tion of a tank and its appurtenances that of the tank. (3) If a fixed length dip tube or must be inspected for conformance to trycock line gauging device is used, it Section VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, must consist of a pipe or tube of small see § 171.7 of this subchapter). The tank diameter equipped with a valve at or must be subjected to either a hydro- near the jacket and extending into the static or pneumatic test. The test pres- cargo tank to a specified filling height. sure must be one and one-half times The fixed height at which the tube ends the sum of the design pressure, plus in the cargo tank must be such that static head of lading, plus 101.3 kPa the device will function when the liq- (14.7 psi) if subjected to external vacuum, except that for tanks constructed uid reaches the maximum level per- in accordance with Part UHT in Sec- mitted in loading. tion VIII of the ASME Code the test (4) The liquid level gauging device pressure must be twice the design pres- used as a primary control for filling sure. must be designed and installed to accu- (b) Additional requirements for pneu- rately indicate the maximum filling matic test. A pneumatic test may be level at the point midway of the tank used in place of the hydrostatic test. both longitudinally and laterally. Due regard for protection of all per- (b) Pressure gauges. Each cargo tank sonnel should be taken because of the must be provided with a suitable pres- potential hazard involved in a pneu- sure gauge indicating the lading pres- matic test. The pneumatic test pressure and located on the front of the sure in the tank must be reached by jacket so it can be read by the driver in gradually increasing the pressure to the rear view mirror. Each gauge must one-half of the test pressure. There- have a reference mark at the cargo after, the test pressure must be in- tank design pressure or the set pres- creased in steps of approximately one- sure of the pressure relief valve or pres- tenth of the test pressure until the re- sure control valve, whichever is lowest. quired test pressure has been reached. (c) Orifices. All openings for dip tube Then the pressure must be reduced to a gauging devices and pressure gauges in value equal to four-fifths of the test flammable cryogenic liquid service pressure and held for a sufficient time must be restricted at or inside the to permit inspection of the cargo tank jacket by orifices no larger than 0.060- for leaks. inch diameter. Trycock lines, if pro- (c) Weld inspection. All tank shell or 1 vided, may not be greater than ⁄2-inch head welds subject to pressure shall be nominal pipe size. radiographed in accordance with Sec- [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983, as tion VIII of the ASME Code. A tank amended at 49 FR 24317, June 12, 1984] which has been subjected to inspection by the magnetic particle method, the § 178.338–15 Cleanliness. liquid penetrant method, or any meth- A cargo tank constructed for oxygen od involving a material deposit on the service must be thoroughly cleaned to interior tank surface, must be cleaned

158

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00168 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.338–18

to remove any such residue by scrub- tank by brazing, welding, or other suit- bing or equally effective means, and all able means on the left side near the such residue and cleaning solution front, in a place accessible for inspec- must be removed from the tank prior tion. If the specification plate is at- to final closure of the tank. tached directly to the cargo tank wall (d) Defect repair. All cracks and other by welding, it must be welded to the defects must be repaired as prescribed tank before the cargo tank is postweld in Section VIII of the ASME Code. The heat treated. welder and the welding procedure must (1) The plates must be legibly marked be qualified in accordance with Section by stamping, embossing, or other IX of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of means of forming letters into the this subchapter). After repair, the tank metal of the plate, with the informa- must again be postweld heat-treated, if tion required in paragraphs (b) and (c) such heat treatment was previously of this section, in addition to that re- performed, and the repaired areas must quired by Section VIII of the ASME be retested. Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- (e) Verification must be made of the chapter), in characters at least 3⁄16 inch interior cleanliness of a tank con- high (parenthetical abbreviations may structed for oxygen service by means be used). All plates must be maintained that assure that all contaminants that in a legible condition. are likely to react with the lading have (2) Each insulated cargo tank must been removed as required by § 178.338– 15. have additional plates, as described, attached to the jacket in the location [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27706, June 16, 1983, as specified unless the specification plate amended at 49 FR 24317, June 12, 1984; 49 FR is attached to the chassis and has the 42736, Oct. 24, 1984; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003] information required in paragraphs (b) § 178.338–17 Pumps and compressors. and (c) of this section. (3) The information required for both (a) Liquid pumps and gas compressors, the name and specification plate may if used, must be of suitable design, ade- be displayed on a single plate. If the in- quately protected against breakage by formation required by this section is collision, and kept in good condition. displayed on a plate required by Sec- They may be driven by motor vehicle tion VIII of the ASME Code, the infor- power take-off or other mechanical, mation need not be repeated on the electrical, or hydraulic means. Unless name and specification plates. they are of the centrifugal type, they shall be equipped with suitable pres- (4) The specification plate may be at- sure actuated by-pass valves permit- tached to the cargo tank motor vehicle ting flow from discharge to suction to chassis rail by brazing, welding, or the tank. other suitable means on the left side (b) A valve or fitting made of alu- near the front head, in a place acces- minum with internal rubbing or abrad- sible for inspection. If the specification ing aluminum parts that may come in plate is attached to the chassis rail, contact with oxygen (cryogenic liquid) then the cargo tank serial number as- may not be installed on any cargo tank signed by the cargo tank manufacturer used to transport oxygen (cryogenic must be included on the plate. liquid) unless the parts are anodized in (b) Name plate. The following infor- accordance with ASTM B 580 (IBR, see mation must be marked on the name § 171.7 of this subchapter). plate in accordance with this section: (1) DOT-specification number MC 338 [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25020, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37058, Sept. 7, 1990; 67 FR (DOT MC 338). 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003] (2) Original test date (Orig, Test Date). § 178.338–18 Marking. (3) MAWP in psig. (a) General. Each cargo tank certified (4) Cargo tank test pressure (Test P), after October 1, 2004 must have a corro- in psig. sion-resistant metal name plate (5) Cargo tank design temperature (ASME Plate) and specification plate (Design Temp. Range) ll °F to ll permanently attached to the cargo °F.

159

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00169 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.338–19 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(6) Nominal capacity (Water Cap.), in (10) Marked rated holding time for at pounds. least one cryogenic liquid, in hours, (7) Maximum design density of lading and the name of that cryogenic liquid (Max. Lading density), in pounds per (MRHT ll hrs, name of cryogenic liq- gallon. uid). Marked rated holding marking for (8) Material specification number— additional cryogenic liquids may be shell (Shell matl, yyy * * *), where displayed on or adjacent to the speci- ‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa- fication plate. tion and ‘‘* * *’’ is replaced by the (11) Cargo tank serial number (CT se- alloy type. rial), as assigned by cargo tank manu- (9) Material specification number— facturer, if applicable. heads (Head matl. yyy * * *), where ‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa- NOTE 1 TO PARAGRAPH (c): See § 173.315(a) of tion and ‘‘* * *’’ by the alloy type. this chapter regarding water capacity. NOTE 2 TO PARAGRAPH (c): When the shell NOTE: When the shell and heads materials and head materials are the same thickness, are the same thickness, they may be com- they may be combined (Shell & head matl, bined, (Shell & head matl, yyy * * *). yyy***). (10) Weld material (Weld matl.). (d) The design weight of lading used (11) Minimum Thickness-shell (Min. in determining the loading in §§ 178.338– Shell-thick), in inches. When minimum 3 (b), 178.338–10 (b) and (c), and 178.338– shell thicknesses are not the same for 13 (b), must be shown as the maximum different areas, show (top ll, side weight of lading marking required by ll, bottom ll, in inches). paragraph (c) of this section. (12) Minimum thickness-heads (Min heads thick.), in inches. [68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003, as amended at 68 (13) Manufactured thickness-shell FR 57634, Oct. 6, 2003; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003] (Mfd. Shell thick.), top ll, side ll, bottom ll, in inches. (Required when § 178.338–19 Certification. additional thickness is provided for corrosion allowance.) (a) At or before the time of delivery, (14) Manufactured thickness-heads the manufacturer of a cargo tank (Mfd. Heads thick.), in inches. (Re- motor vehicle shall furnish to the quired when additional thickness is owner of the completed vehicle the fol- provided for corrosion allowance.) lowing: (15) Exposed surface area, in square (1) The tank manufacturer’s data re- feet. port as required by the ASME Code (c) Specification plate. The following (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter), and information must be marked on the a certificate bearing the manufactur- specification plate in accordance with er’s vehicle serial number stating that this section: the completed cargo tank motor vehi- (1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manu- cle conforms to all applicable require- facturer (CTMV mfr.). ments of Specification MC 338, includ- (2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certifi- ing Section VIII of the ASME Code cation date (CTMV cert. date). (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter) in (3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT effect on the date (month, year) of cer- mfr.). tification. The registration numbers of (4) Cargo tank date of manufacture the manufacturer, the Design Certi- (CT date of mfr.), month and year. fying Engineer, and the Registered In- (5) Maximum weight of lading (Max. spector, as appropriate, must appear on Payload), in pounds. the certificates (see subpart F, part 107 (6) Maximum loading rate in gallons in subchapter B of this chapter). per minute (Max. Load rate, GPM). (2) A photograph, pencil rub, or other (7) Maximum unloading rate in gal- facsimile of the plates required by lons per minute (Max Unload rate). paragraphs (a) and (b) of § 178.338-18. (8) Lining materials (Lining), if ap- (b) In the case of a cargo tank vehicle plicable. manufactured in two or more stages, (9) ‘‘Insulated for oxygen service’’ or each manufacturer who performs a ‘‘Not insulated for oxygen service’’ as manufacturing operation on the incom- appropriate. plete vehicle or portion thereof shall

160

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00170 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.345–1

furnish to the succeeding manufac- ments of the applicable specification turer, at or before the time of delivery, contained in §§ 178.346, 178.347 or 178.348. a certificate covering the particular (b) All specification requirements are operation performed by that manufac- minimum requirements. turer, and any certificates received (c) Definitions. See § 178.320(a) for the from previous manufacturers, Reg- definition of certain terms used in istered Inspectors, and Design Certi- §§ 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, and 178.348. In fying Engineers. The certificates must addition, the following definitions include sufficient sketches, drawings, apply to §§ 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, and and other information to indicate the 178.348: location, make, model and size of each Appurtenance means any cargo tank valve and the arrangement of all piping accessory attachment that has no lad- associated with the tank. Each certifi- ing retention or containment function cate must be signed by an official of and provides no structural support to the manufacturing firm responsible for the cargo tank. the portion of the complete cargo tank means a non-liquid-tight trans- vehicle represented thereby, such as Baffle basic tank fabrication, insulation, verse partition device that deflects, jacket, or piping. The final manufac- checks or regulates fluid motion in a turer shall furnish the owner with all tank. certificates, as well as the documents Bulkhead means a liquid-tight trans- required by paragraph (a) of this sec- verse closure at the ends of or between tion. cargo tanks. (c) The owner shall retain the data Charging line means a hose, tube, report, certificates, and related papers pipe, or similar device used to pres- throughout his ownership of the cargo surize a tank with material other than tank. In the event of change of owner- the lading. ship, the prior owner shall retain non- Companion flange means one of two fading photographically reproduced mating flanges where the flange faces copies of these documents for at least are in contact or separated only by a one year. Each operator using the thin leak sealing gasket and are se- cargo tank vehicle, if not the owner cured to one another by bolts or thereof, shall obtain a copy of the data clamps. report and the certificate or certifi- Connecting structure means the struc- cates and retain them during the time ture joining two cargo tanks. he uses the cargo tank and for at least Constructed and certified in conform- one year thereafter. ance with the ASME Code means the (Approved by the Office of Management and cargo tank is constructed and stamped Budget under control number 2137–0017) in accordance with the ASME Code, and is inspected and certified by an Au- [Amdt. 178–77, 48 FR 27707, 27713, June 16, 1983, as amended by Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR thorized Inspector. 37058, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Constructed in accordance with the Oct. 1, 1993; 62 FR 51561, Oct. 1, 1997; 68 FR ASME Code means the cargo tank is 75755, Dec. 31, 2003] constructed in accordance with the ASME Code with the authorized excep- §§ 178.340–178.343 [Reserved] tions (see §§ 178.346, 178.347, and 178.348) and is inspected and certified by a Reg- § 178.345 General design and construc- istered Inspector. tion requirements applicable to Specification DOT 406 (§ 178.346), External self-closing stop-valve means DOT 407 (§ 178.347), and DOT 412 a self-closing stop-valve designed so (§ 178.348) cargo tank motor vehi- that the self-stored energy source is lo- cles. cated outside the cargo tank and the welded flange. § 178.345–1 General requirements. Extreme dynamic loading means the (a) Specification DOT 406, DOT 407 maximum single-acting loading a cargo and DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicles tank motor vehicle may experience must conform to the requirements of during its expected life, excluding acci- this section in addition to the require- dent loadings.

161

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00171 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.345–1 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

Flange means the structural ring for Outlet stop-valve means the stop-valve guiding or attachment of a pipe or fit- at the cargo tank loading/unloading ting with another flange (companion outlet. flange), pipe, fitting or other attach- Pipe coupling means a fitting with in- ment. ternal threads on both ends. Inspection pressure means the pres- Rear bumper means the structure de- sure used to determine leak tightness signed to prevent a vehicle or object of the cargo tank when testing with from under-riding the rear of a motor pneumatic pressure. vehicle. See § 393.86 of this title. Internal self-closing stop-valve means a Rear-end tank protection device means self-closing stop-valve designed so that the structure designed to protect a the self-stored energy source is located cargo tank and any lading retention inside the cargo tank or cargo tank piping or devices in case of a rear end sump, or within the welded flange, and collision. the valve seat is located within the Sacrificial device means an element, cargo tank or within one inch of the such as a shear section, designed to fail external face of the welded flange or under a load in order to prevent dam- sump of the cargo tank. age to any lading retention part or de- Lading means the hazardous material vice. The device must break under contained in a cargo tank. strain at no more than 70 percent of Loading/unloading connection means the strength of the weakest piping ele- the fitting in the loading/unloading ment between the cargo tank and the line farthest from the loading/unload- sacrificial device. Operation of the sac- ing outlet to which the loading/unload- rificial device must leave the remaining ing hose or device is attached. piping and its attachment to the cargo Loading/unloading outlet means the tank intact and capable of retaining cargo tank outlet used for normal load- lading. ing/unloading operations. Self-closing stop-valve means a stop- Loading/unloading stop-valve means valve held in the closed position by the stop valve farthest from the cargo means of self-stored energy, which tank loading/unloading outlet to which opens only by application of an exter- the loading/unloading connection is at- nal force and which closes when the ex- tached. ternal force is removed. MAWP. See § 178.320(a). means a sacrificial de- Multi-specification cargo tank motor ve- Shear section vice fabricated in such a manner as to hicle means a cargo tank motor vehicle equipped with two or more cargo tanks abruptly reduce the wall thickness of fabricated to more than one cargo tank the adjacent piping or valve material specification. by at least 30 percent. Normal operating loading means the Shell means the circumferential por- loading a cargo tank motor vehicle tion of a cargo tank defined by the may be expected to experience rou- basic design radius or radii excluding tinely in operation. the closing heads. Nozzle means the subassembly con- Stop-valve means a valve that stops sisting of a pipe or tubular section with the flow of lading. or without a welded or forged flange on Sump means a protrusion from the one end. bottom of a cargo tank shell designed Outlet means any opening in the shell to facilitate complete loading and un- or head of a cargo tank, (including the loading of lading. means for attaching a closure), except Tank means a container, consisting that the following are not outlets: A of a shell and heads, that forms a pres- threaded opening securely closed dur- sure tight vessel having openings de- ing transportation with a threaded signed to accept pressure tight fittings plug or a threaded cap, a flanged open- or closures, but excludes any appur- ing securely closed during transpor- tenances, reinforcements, fittings, or tation with a bolted or welded blank closures. flange, a manhole, or gauging devices, Test pressure means the pressure to thermometer wells, and safety relief which a tank is subjected to determine devices. pressure integrity.

162

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00172 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.345–2

Toughness of material means the capa- tions of this title, are incorporated bility of a material to absorb the en- into these specifications. ergy represented by the area under the (h) Any additional requirements pre- stress strain curve (indicating the en- scribed in part 173 of this subchapter ergy absorbed per unit volume of the that pertain to the transportation of a material) up to the point of rupture. specific lading are incorporated into Vacuum cargo tank means a cargo these specifications. tank that is loaded by reducing the (i) Cargo tank motor vehicle composed pressure in the cargo tank to below at- of multiple cargo tanks. (1) A cargo tank mospheric pressure. motor vehicle composed of more than Variable specification cargo tank one cargo tank may be constructed means a cargo tank that is constructed with the cargo tanks made to the same in accordance with one specification, specification or to different specifications. Each cargo tank must conform but which may be altered to meet an- in all respects with the specification other specification by changing relief for which it is certified. device, closures, lading discharge de- (2) The strength of the connecting vices, and other lading retention de- structure joining multiple cargo tanks vices. in a cargo tank motor vehicle must Void means the space between tank meet the structural design require- heads or bulkheads and a connecting ments in § 178.345–3. Any void within structure. the connecting structure must be Welded flange means a flange at- equipped with a drain located on the tached to the tank by a weld joining bottom centerline that is accessible the tank shell to the cylindrical outer and kept open at all times. For carbon surface of the flange, or by a fillet weld steel, self-supporting cargo tanks, the joining the tank shell to a flange drain configuration may consist of a shaped to fit the shell contour. single drain of at least 1.0 inch diame- (d) A manufacturer of a cargo tank ter, or two or more drains of at least must hold a current ASME certificate 0.5 inch diameter, 6.0 inches apart, one of authorization and must be registered of which is located as close to the bot- with the Department in accordance tom centerline as practicable. Vapors with part 107, subpart F of this chapter. trapped in a void within the connecting (e) All construction must be certified structure must be allowed to escape to by an Authorized Inspector or by a the atmosphere either through the Registered Inspector as applicable to drain or a separate vent. the cargo tank. (j) Variable specification cargo tank. A (f) Each cargo tank must be designed cargo tank that may be physically al- and constructed in conformance with tered to conform to another cargo tank the requirements of the applicable specification must have the required cargo tank specification. Each DOT 412 physical alterations to convert from cargo tank with a ‘‘MAWP’’ greater one specification to another clearly in- than 15 psig, and each DOT 407 cargo dicated on the variable specification tank with a maximum allowable work- plate. ing pressure greater than 35 psig must [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25020, June 12, 1989, as be ‘‘constructed and certified in con- amended at 55 FR 37058, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. formance with Section VIII of the 178–105, 59 FR 55173, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178– ASME Code’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this 118, 61 FR 51340, Oct. 1, 1996; 66 FR 45387, 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003; subchapter) except as limited or modi- 68 FR 52371, Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, fied by the applicable cargo tank speci- 2003; 70 FR 56099, Sept. 23, 2005; 76 FR 43532, fication. Other cargo tanks must be July 20, 2011] ‘‘constructed in accordance with Sec- tion VIII of the ASME Code,’’ except as § 178.345–2 Material and material limited or modified by the applicable thickness. cargo tank specification. (a) All material for shell, heads, (g) Requirements relating to parts bulkheads, and baffles must conform to and accessories on motor vehicles, Section II of the ASME Code (IBR, see which are contained in part 393 of the § 171.7 of this subchapter) except as fol- Federal Motor Carrier Safety Regula- lows:

163

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00173 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.345–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(1) The following steels are also au- tack by the lading. The lining material thorized for cargo tanks ‘‘constructed must be bonded or attached by other in accordance with the ASME Code’’, appropriate means to the cargo tank Section VIII. wall and must be imperforate when ap- ASTM A 569 plied. Any joint or seam in the lining ASTM A 570 must be made by fusing the materials ASTM A 572 together, or by other satisfactory ASTM A 622 means. ASTM A 656 ASTM A 715 [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25021, June 12, 1989, as ASTM A 1008/ A 1008M, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M amended at 55 FR 37059, Sept. 7, 1990; 56 FR (2) Aluminum alloys suitable for fu- 27876, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–97, 57 FR 45465, sion welding and conforming with the Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75755, 0, H32 or H34 tempers of one of the fol- Dec. 31, 2003; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005] lowing ASTM specifications may be used for cargo tanks ‘‘constructed in § 178.345–3 Structural integrity. accordance with the ASME Code’’: (a) General requirements and accept- ASTM B–209 Alloy 5052 ance criteria. (1) The maximum cal- ASTM B–209 Alloy 5086 ASTM B–209 Alloy 5154 culated design stress at any point in ASTM B–209 Alloy 5254 the cargo tank wall may not exceed the ASTM B–209 Alloy 5454 maximum allowable stress value pre- ASTM B–209 Alloy 5652 scribed in Section VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- All heads, bulkheads and baffles must be of 0 temper (annealed) or stronger chapter), or 25 percent of the tensile tempers. All shell materials shall be of strength of the material used at design H 32 or H 34 tempers except that the conditions. lower ultimate strength tempers may (2) The relevant physical properties be used if the minimum shell of the materials used in each cargo thicknesses in the tables are increased tank may be established either by a in inverse proportion to the lesser ulti- certified test report from the material mate strength. manufacturer or by testing in conform- (b) Minimum thickness. The minimum ance with a recognized national stand- thickness for the shell and heads (or ard. In either case, the ultimate tensile baffles and bulkheads when used as strength of the material used in the de- tank reinforcement) must be no less sign may not exceed 120 percent of the than that determined under criteria for minimum ultimate tensile strength minimum thickness specified in specified in either the ASME Code or § 178.320(a). the ASTM standard to which the mate- (c) Corrosion or abrasion protection. rial is manufactured. When required by 49 CFR part 173 for a (3) The maximum design stress at particular lading, a cargo tank or a any point in the cargo tank must be part thereof, subject to thinning by calculated separately for the loading corrosion or mechanical abrasion due conditions described in paragraphs (b) to the lading, must be protected by providing the tank or part of the tank and (c) of this section. Alternate test with a suitable increase in thickness of or analytical methods, or a combina- material, a lining or some other suit- tion thereof, may be used in place of able method of protection. the procedures described in paragraphs (1) Corrosion allowance. Material (b) and (c) of this section, if the meth- added for corrosion allowance need not ods are accurate and verifiable. TTMA be of uniform thickness if different RP 96–01, Structural Integrity of DOT rates of attack can reasonably be ex- 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 Cylindrical pected for various areas of the cargo Cargo Tanks, may be used as guidance tank. in performing the calculations. (2) Lining. Lining material must con- (4) Corrosion allowance material may sist of a nonporous, homogeneous ma- not be included to satisfy any of the terial not less elastic than the parent design calculation requirements of this metal and substantially immune to at- section.

164

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00174 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.345–3

(b) ASME Code design and construc- stress at any point) must be deter- tion. The static design and construc- mined by the following formula: tion of each cargo tank must be in ac- S = 0.5(S + S ) ± [0.25(S ¥ S )2 + S 2]0.5 cordance with Section VIII of the y X y X S ASME Code. The cargo tank design Where: must include calculation of stresses (i) S = effective stress at any given generated by the MAWP, the weight of point under the combination of static the lading, the weight of structures and normal operating loadings that can supported by the cargo tank wall and occur at the same time, in psi. the effect of temperature gradients re- (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen- sulting from lading and ambient tem- erated by the MAWP and external pres- perature extremes. When dissimilar sure, when applicable, plus static head, materials are used, their thermal coef- in psi. ficients must be used in the calculation (iii) Sx = The following net longitu- of thermal stresses. dinal stress generated by the following (1) Stress concentrations in tension, static and normal operating loading bending and torsion which occur at conditions, in psi: pads, cradles, or other supports must (A) The longitudinal stresses result- be considered in accordance with ap- ing from the MAWP and external pres- pendix G in Section VIII of the ASME sure, when applicable, plus static head, Code. in combination with the bending stress (2) Longitudinal compressive buck- generated by the static weight of the ling stress for ASME certified vessels fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, must be calculated using paragraph all structural elements, equipment and UG–23(b) in Section VIII of the ASME appurtenances supported by the cargo Code. For cargo tanks not required to tank wall; be certified in accordance with the (B) The tensile or compressive stress ASME Code, compressive buckling resulting from normal operating longi- stress may be calculated using alter- tudinal acceleration or deceleration. In native analysis methods which are ac- each case, the forces applied must be curate and verifiable. When alternative 0.35 times the vertical reaction at the methods are used, calculations must suspension assembly, applied at the include both the static loads described road surface, and as transmitted to the in this paragraph and the dynamic cargo tank wall through the suspension loads described in paragraph (c) of this assembly of a trailer during decelera- section. tion; or the horizontal pivot of the (3) Cargo tank designers and manu- truck tractor or converter dolly fifth facturers must consider all of the con- wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the ditions specified in § 173.33(c) of this fixed dolly during acceleration; or an- subchapter when matching a cargo choring and support members of a tank’s performance characteristic to truck during acceleration and decelera- the characteristic of each lading trans- tion, as applicable. The vertical reac- ported. tion must be calculated based on the (c) Shell design. Shell stresses result- static weight of the fully loaded cargo ing from static or dynamic loadings, or tank motor vehicle, all structural ele- combinations thereof, are not uniform ments, equipment and appurtenances throughout the cargo tank motor vehi- supported by the cargo tank wall. The cle. The vertical, longitudinal, and lat- following loadings must be included: eral normal operating loadings can (1) The axial load generated by a occur simultaneously and must be decelerative force; combined. The vertical, longitudinal (2) The bending moment generated by and lateral extreme dynamic loadings a decelerative force; occur separately and need not be com- (3) The axial load generated by an ac- bined. celerative force; and (1) Normal operating loadings. The fol- (4) The bending moment generated by lowing procedure addresses stress in an accelerative force; and the cargo tank shell resulting from (C) The tensile or compressive stress normal operating loadings. The effec- generated by the bending moment re- tive stress (the maximum principal sulting from normal operating vertical

165

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00175 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.345–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

accelerative force equal to 0.35 times (D) The torsional shear stress gen- the vertical reaction at the suspension erated by the same lateral forces as de- assembly of a trailer; or the horizontal scribed in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) section. or turntable; or anchoring and support (2) Extreme dynamic loadings. The fol- members of a truck, as applicable. The lowing procedure addresses stress in vertical reaction must be calculated the cargo tank shell resulting from ex- based on the static weight of the fully treme dynamic loadings. The effective loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all stress (the maximum principal stress structural elements, equipment and ap- at any point) must be determined by purtenances supported by the cargo the following formula: tank wall. 2 2 0.5 S = 0.5(Sy + Sx) ±[0.25(Sy ¥ Sx) + SS ] (iv) SS = The following shear stresses generated by the following static and Where: normal operating loading conditions, (i) S = effective stress at any given in psi: point under a combination of static (A) The static shear stress resulting and extreme dynamic loadings that can from the vertical reaction at the sus- occur at the same time, in psi. pension assembly of a trailer, and the (ii) Sy = circumferential stress gen- horizontal pivot of the upper coupler erated by MAWP and external pressure, (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring when applicable, plus static head, in and support members of a truck, as ap- psi. plicable. The vertical reaction must be (iii) Sx = the following net longitu- calculated based on the static weight dinal stress generated by the following of the fully loaded cargo tank motor static and extreme dynamic loading vehicle, all structural elements, equip- conditions, in psi: ment and appurtenances supported by (A) The longitudinal stresses result- the cargo tank wall; ing from the MAWP and external pres- (B) The vertical shear stress gen- sure, when applicable, plus static head, erated by a normal operating accelera- in combination with the bending stress tive force equal to 0.35 times the generated by the static weight of the vertical reaction at the suspension as- fully loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, sembly of a trailer; or the horizontal all structural elements, equipment and pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) appurtenances supported by the tank or turntable; or anchoring and support wall; members of a truck, as applicable. The (B) The tensile or compressive stress vertical reaction must be calculated resulting from extreme longitudinal based on the static weight of the fully acceleration or deceleration. In each loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all case the forces applied must be 0.7 structural elements, equipment and ap- times the vertical reaction at the sus- purtenances supported by the cargo pension assembly, applied at the road tank wall; surface, and as transmitted to the (C) The lateral shear stress generated cargo tank wall through the suspension by a normal operating lateral accelera- assembly of a trailer during decelerative force equal to 0.2 times the tion; or the horizontal pivot of the vertical reaction at each suspension as- truck tractor or converter dolly fifth sembly of a trailer, applied at the road wheel, or the drawbar hinge on the surface, and as transmitted to the fixed dolly during acceleration; or the cargo tank wall through the suspension anchoring and support members of a assembly of a trailer, and the hori- truck during acceleration and decelera- zontal pivot of the upper coupler (fifth tion, as applicable. The vertical reac- wheel) or turntable; or anchoring and tion must be calculated based on the support members of a truck, as applica- static weight of the fully loaded cargo ble. The vertical reaction must be cal- tank motor vehicle, all structural ele- culated based on the static weight of ments, equipment and appurtenances the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- supported by the cargo tank wall. The cle, all structural elements, equipment following loadings must be included: and appurtenances supported by the (1) The axial load generated by a cargo tank wall; and decelerative force;

166

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00176 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.345–3

(2) The bending moment generated by table; or anchoring and support mem- a decelerative force; bers of a truck, as applicable. The (3) The axial load generated by an ac- vertical reaction must be calculated celerative force; and based on the static weight of the fully (4) The bending moment generated by loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all an accelerative force; and structural elements, equipment and ap- (C) The tensile or compressive stress purtenances supported by the cargo generated by the bending moment re- tank wall; and sulting from an extreme vertical accel- (D) The torsional shear stress gen- erative force equal to 0.7 times the erated by the same lateral forces as de- vertical reaction at the suspension as- scribed in paragraph (c)(2)(iv)(C) of this sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal section. pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) (d) In no case may the minimum or turntable; or the anchoring and sup- thickness of the cargo tank shells and port members of a truck, as applicable. heads be less than that prescribed in The vertical reaction must be cal- § 178.346–2, § 178.347–2, or § 178.348–2, as culated based on the static weight of applicable. the fully loaded cargo tank motor vehi- (e) For a cargo tank mounted on a cle, all structural elements, equipment frame or built with integral structural and appurtenances supported by the supports, the calculation of effective cargo tank wall. stresses for the loading conditions in (iv) SS = The following shear stresses paragraph (c) of this section may in- generated by static and extreme dy- clude the structural contribution of namic loading conditions, in psi: the frame or the integral structural (A) The static shear stress resulting supports. from the vertical reaction at the sus- (f) The design, construction, and in- pension assembly of a trailer, and the stallation of an attachment, appur- horizontal pivot of the upper coupler tenance to a cargo tank, structural (fifth wheel) or turntable; or anchoring support member between the cargo and support members of a truck, as ap- tank and the vehicle or suspension plicable. The vertical reaction must be component must conform to the fol- calculated based on the static weight lowing requirements: of the fully loaded cargo tank motor (1) Structural members, the suspen- vehicle, all structural elements, equip- sion sub-frame, accident protection ment and appurtenances supported by structures and external circumferen- the cargo tank wall; tial reinforcement devices must be (B) The vertical shear stress gen- used as sites for attachment of appur- erated by an extreme vertical accelera- tenances and other accessories to the tive force equal to 0.7 times the cargo tank, when practicable. vertical reaction at the suspension as- (2) A lightweight attachment to a sembly of a trailer, and the horizontal cargo tank wall such as a conduit clip, pivot of the upper coupler (fifth wheel) brake line clip, skirting structure, or turntable; or anchoring and support lamp mounting bracket, or placard members of a truck, as applicable. The holder must be of a construction hav- vertical reaction must be calculated ing lesser strength than the cargo tank based on the static weight of the fully wall materials and may not be more loaded cargo tank motor vehicle, all than 72 percent of the thickness of the structural elements, equipment and ap- material to which it is attached. The purtenances supported by the cargo lightweight attachment may be se- tank wall; cured directly to the cargo tank wall if (C) The lateral shear stress generated the device is designed and installed in by an extreme lateral accelerative such a manner that, if damaged, it will force equal to 0.4 times the vertical re- not affect the lading retention integ- action at the suspension assembly of a rity of the tank. A lightweight attach- trailer, applied at the road surface, and ment must be secured to the cargo as transmitted to the cargo tank wall tank shell or head by continuous weld through the suspension assembly of a or in such a manner as to preclude for- trailer, and the horizontal pivot of the mation of pockets which may become upper coupler (fifth wheel) or turn- sites for corrosion.

167

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00177 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.345–4 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(3) Except as prescribed in para- let weld and the tank or jacket seam graphs (f)(1) and (f)(2) of this section, weld. the welding of any appurtenance to the [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37059, Sept. 7, 1990, as cargo tank wall must be made by at- amended by Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27876, June tachment of a mounting pad so that 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, there will be no adverse effect upon the 1994; Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55173, 55174, 55175, lading retention integrity of the cargo Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, 1995; Amdt. tank if any force less than that pre- 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR 58631, scribed in paragraph (b)(1) of this sec- Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19283, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75755, Dec. 31, 2003; 74 FR 16143, Apr. 9, 2009; tion is applied from any direction. The 78 FR 60755, Oct. 2, 2013; 81 FR 35545, June 2, thickness of the mounting pad may not 2016] be less than that of the shell or head to which it is attached, and not more § 178.345–4 Joints. than 1.5 times the shell or head thick- (a) All joints between the cargo tank ness. However, a pad with a minimum shell, heads, baffles, baffle attaching thickness of 0.187 inch may be used rings, and bulkheads must be welded in when the shell or head thickness is conformance with Section VIII of the over 0.187 inch. If weep holes or tell- ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- tale holes are used, the pad must be chapter). drilled or punched at the lowest point (b) Where practical all welds must be before it is welded to the tank. Each easily accessible for inspection. pad must: (i) Be fabricated from material deter- [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25022, June 12, 1989, as amended by Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. mined to be suitable for welding to 1, 1996; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003] both the cargo tank material and the material of the appurtenance or struc- § 178.345–5 Manhole assemblies. tural support member; a Design Certi- (a) Each cargo tank with capacity fying Engineer must make this deter- greater than 400 gallons must be acces- mination considering chemical and sible through a manhole at least 15 physical properties of the materials inches in diameter. and must specify filler material con- (b) Each manhole, fill opening and forming to the requirements of the washout assembly must be structurally ASME Code (incorporated by reference; capable of withstanding, without leak- see § 171.7 of this subchapter). age or permanent deformation that (ii) Be preformed to an inside radius would affect its structural integrity, a no greater than the outside radius of static internal fluid pressure of at least the cargo tank at the attachment loca- 36 psig, or cargo tank test pressure, tion. whichever is greater. The manhole as- (iii) Extend at least 2 inches in each sembly manufacturer shall verify com- direction from any point of attachment pliance with this requirement by of an appurtenance or structural sup- hydrostatically testing at least one port member. This dimension may be percent (or one manhole closure, measured from the center of the struc- whichever is greater) of all manhole tural member attached. closures of each type produced each 3 (iv) Have rounded corners, or other- months, as follows: wise be shaped in a manner to mini- (1) The manhole, fill opening, or mize stress concentrations on the shell washout assembly must be tested with or head. the venting devices blocked. Any leak- (v) Be attached by continuous fillet age or deformation that would affect the product retention capability of the welding. Any fillet weld discontinuity assembly shall constitute a failure. may only be for the purpose of pre- (2) If the manhole, fill opening, or venting an intersection between the fil- washout assembly tested fails, then five more covers from the same lot must be tested. If one of these five covers fails, then all covers in the lot from which the tested covers were selected

168

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00178 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.345–7

are to be 100% tested or rejected for (b) A cargo tank designed and con- service. structed so that it constitutes, in (c) Each manhole, filler and washout whole or in part, the structural mem- cover must be fitted with a safety de- ber used in lieu of a frame must be sup- vice that prevents the cover from open- ported in such a manner that the re- ing fully when internal pressure is sulting stress levels in the cargo tank present. do not exceed those specified in (d) Each manhole and fill cover must § 178.345–3(a). The design calculations of be secured with fastenings that will the support elements must include the prevent opening of the covers as a re- stresses indicated in § 178.345–3(b) and sult of vibration under normal trans- as generated by the loads described in portation conditions or shock impact § 178.345–3(c). due to a rollover accident on the road- [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25023, June 12, 1989, as way or shoulder where the fill cover is amended by Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. not struck by a substantial obstacle. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, (e) On cargo tank motor vehicles 1996] manufactured after October 1, 2004, each manhole assembly must be per- § 178.345–7 Circumferential reinforce- manently marked on the outside by ments. stamping or other means in a location (a) A cargo tank with a shell thick- visible without opening the manhole ness of less than 3⁄8 inch must be cir- assembly or fill opening, with: cumferentially reinforced with bulk- (1) Manufacturer’s name; heads, baffles, ring stiffeners, or any (2) Test pressure ll psig; combination thereof, in addition to the (3) A statement certifying that the cargo tank heads. manhole cover meets the requirements (1) Circumferential reinforcement in § 178.345–5. must be located so that the thickness (f) All components mounted on a and tensile strength of the shell mate- manhole cover that form part of the rial in combination with the frame and lading retention structure of the cargo reinforcement produces structural in- tank wall must withstand the same tegrity at least equal to that pre- static internal fluid pressure as that scribed in § 178.345–3 and in such a man- required for the manhole cover. The ner that the maximum unreinforced component manufacturer shall verify portion of the shell does not exceed 60 compliance using the same test proce- inches. For cargo tanks designed to be dure and frequency of testing as speci- loaded by vacuum, spacing of circum- fied in § 178.345–5(b). ferential reinforcement may exceed 60 [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25022, June 12, 1989, as inches provided the maximum amended by Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. unreinforced portion of the shell con- 3, 1994; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003; 74 FR 16144, forms with the requirements in Section Apr. 9, 2009] VIII of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). § 178.345–6 Supports and anchoring. (2) Where circumferential joints are (a) A cargo tank with a frame not in- made between conical shell sections, or tegral to the cargo tank must have the between conical and cylindrical shell tank secured by restraining devices to sections, and the angle between adja- eliminate any motion between the cent sections is less than 160 degrees, tank and frame that may abrade the circumferential reinforcement must be tank shell due to the stopping, start- located within one inch of the shell ing, or turning of the cargo tank motor joint, unless otherwise reinforced with vehicle. The design calculations of the structural members capable of main- support elements must include the taining shell stress levels authorized in stresses indicated in § 178.345–3(b) and § 178.345–3. When the joint is formed by as generated by the loads described in the large ends of adjacent conical shell § 178.345–3(c). Such restraining devices sections, or by the large end of a con- must be readily accessible for inspec- ical shell and a cylindrical shell section and maintenance, except that in- tion, this angle is measured inside the sulation and jacketing are permitted to shell; when the joint is formed by the cover the restraining devices. small end of a conical shell section and

169

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00179 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.345–8 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

a cylindrical shell section, it is meas- Number of circum- Shell sec- ferential ring stiffener- J 1 ured outside the shell. to-shell welds tion (b) Except for doubler plates and knuckle pads, no reinforcement may 1 ...... 20t 2 ...... Less than 20t ...... 20t + J cover any circumferential joint. 2 ...... 20t or more ...... 40t (c) When a baffle or baffle attach- 1 where: ment ring is used as a circumferential t = Shell thickness, inches; J = Longitudinal distance between parallel circumferential reinforcement member, it must ring stiffener-to-shell welds. produce structural integrity at least equal to that prescribed in § 178.345–3 (3) When used to meet the vacuum requirements of this section, ring stiff- and must be circumferentially welded eners must be as prescribed in Section to the cargo tank shell. The welded VIII of the ASME Code. portion may not be less than 50 percent (4) If configuration of internal or ex- of the total circumference of the cargo ternal ring stiffener encloses an air tank and the length of any unwelded space, this air space must be arranged space on the joint may not exceed 40 for venting and be equipped with drain- times the shell thickness unless rein- age facilities which must be kept oper- forced external to the cargo tank. ative at all times. (d) When a ring stiffener is used as a (5) Hat shaped or open channel ring circumferential reinforcement mem- stiffeners which prevent visual inspec- ber, whether internal or external, rein- tion of the cargo tank shell are prohib- forcement must be continuous around ited on cargo tank motor vehicles con- the circumference of the cargo tank structed of carbon steel. shell and must be in accordance with [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37060, Sept. 7, 1990, as the following: amended by Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27876, June (1) The section modulus about the 17, 1991; 56 FR 46354, Sept. 11, 1991; Amdt. 178– neutral axis of the ring section parallel 104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 178–118, to the shell must be at least equal to 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, that derived from the applicable for- 2003] mula: § 178.345–8 Accident damage protec- I/C = 0.00027WL, for MS, HSLA and SS; tion. or (a) General. Each cargo tank motor I/C = 0.000467WL, for aluminum alloys; vehicle must be designed and constructed in accordance with the re- Where: quirements of this section and the ap- I/C = Section modulus in inches 3 plicable individual specification to W = Tank width, or diameter, inches minimize the potential for the loss of L = Spacing of ring stiffener, inches; i.e., the lading due to an accident. maximum longitudinal distance from the (1) Any dome, sump, or washout midpoint of the unsupported shell on one cover plate projecting from the cargo side of the ring stiffener to the midpoint tank wall that retains lading in any of the unsupported shell on the opposite tank orientation, must be as strong side of the ring stiffener. and tough as the cargo tank wall and (2) If a ring stiffener is welded to the have a thickness at least equal to that cargo tank shell, a portion of the shell specified by the appropriate cargo tank may be considered as part of the ring specification. Any such projection lo- section for purposes of computing the cated in the lower 1⁄3 of the tank cir- ring section modulus. This portion of cumference (or cross section perimeter the shell may be used provided at least for non-circular cargo tanks) that ex- 50 percent of the total circumference of tends more than half its diameter at the cargo tank is welded and the length the point of attachment to the tank or of any unwelded space on the joint does more than 4 inches from the cargo tank wall, or located in the upper 2⁄3 of the not exceed 40 times the shell thickness. tank circumference (or cross section The maximum portion of the shell to perimeter for non-circular cargo tanks) be used in these calculations is as fol- that extends more than 1⁄4 its diameter lows: or more than 2 inches from the point of

170

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00180 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.345–8

attachment to the tank must have ac- (5) Minimum road clearance. The min- cident damage protection devices that imum road clearance of any cargo tank are: motor vehicle component or protection (i) As specified in this section; device located between any two adja- (ii) 125 percent as strong as the other- cent axles on a vehicle or vehicle com- wise required accident damage protec- bination must be at least one-half inch tion device; or for each foot separating the component (iii) Attached to the cargo tank in or device from the nearest axle of the accordance with the requirements of adjacent pair, but in no case less than paragraph (a)(3) of this section. twelve (12) inches, except that the min- (2) Outlets, valves, closures, piping, imum road clearance for landing gear or any devices that if damaged in an or other attachments within ten (10) accident could result in a loss of lading feet of an axle must be no less than ten (10) inches. These measurements must from the cargo tank must be protected be calculated at the gross vehicle by accident damage protection devices weight rating of the cargo tank motor as specified in this section. vehicle. (3) Accident damage protection de- (b) Each outlet, projection or piping vices attached to the wall of a cargo located in the lower 1⁄3 of the cargo tank must be able to withstand or de- tank circumference (or cross section flect away from the cargo tank the perimeter for non-circular cargo tanks) loads specified in this section. They that could be damaged in an accident must be designed, constructed and in- that may result in the loss of lading stalled so as to maximize the distribu- must be protected by a bottom damage tion of loads to the cargo tank wall and protection device, except as provided to minimize the possibility of ad- by paragraph (a)(1) of this section and versely affecting the lading retention § 173.33(e) of this subchapter. Outlets, integrity of the cargo tank. Accident projections and piping may be grouped induced stresses resulting from the ap- or clustered together and protected by propriate accident damage protection a single protection device. device requirements in combination (1) Any bottom damage protection with the stresses from the cargo tank device must be able to withstand a operating at the MAWP may not result force of 155,000 pounds (based on the ul- in a cargo tank wall stress greater timate strength of the material) from than the ultimate strength of the ma- the front, side, or rear, uniformly dis- terial of construction using a safety tributed over each surface of the de- factor of 1.3. Deformation of the pro- vice, over an area not to exceed 6 tection device is acceptable provided square feet, and a width not to exceed the devices being protected are not 6 feet. Suspension components and damaged when loads specified in this structural mounting members may be section are applied. used to provide all, or part, of this pro- (4) Any piping that extends beyond tection. The device must extend no less an accident damage protection device than 6 inches beyond any component must be equipped with a stop-valve and that may contain lading in transit. a sacrificial device such as a shear sec- (2) A lading discharge opening tion. The sacrificial device must be lo- equipped with an internal self-closing cated in the piping system outboard of stop-valve need not conform to para- the stop-valve and within the accident graph (b)(1) of this section provided it damage protection device to prevent is protected so as to reasonably assure any accidental loss of lading. The de- against the accidental loss of lading. vice must break at no more than 70 This protection must be provided by a percent of the load that would be re- sacrificial device located outboard of quired to cause the failure of the pro- each internal self-closing stop-valve tected lading retention device, part or and within 4 inches of the major radius cargo tank wall. The failure of the sac- of the cargo tank shell or within 4 rificial device must leave the protected inches of a sump, but in no case more lading retention device and its attach- than 8 inches from the major radius of ment to the cargo tank wall intact and the tank shell. The device must break capable of retaining product. at no more than 70 percent of the load

171

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00181 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.345–8 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

that would be required to cause the age that could result in the loss of lad- failure of the protected lading reten- ing. Nothing in this paragraph relieves tion device, part or cargo tank wall. the manufacturer of responsibility for The failure of the sacrificial device complying with the requirements of must leave the protected lading reten- § 393.86 of this title and, if applicable, tion device or part and its attachment paragraph (b) of this section. The rear- to the cargo tank wall intact and capa- end tank protection device must con- ble of retaining product. form to the following requirements: (c) Each closure for openings, includ- (1) The rear-end cargo tank protec- ing but not limited to the manhole, tion device must be designed so that it filling or inspection openings, and each can deflect at least 6 inches hori- valve, fitting, pressure relief device, zontally forward with no contact be- vapor recovery stop valve or lading re- tween any part of the cargo tank taining fitting located in the upper 2⁄3 motor vehicle which contains lading of a cargo tank circumference (or cross during transit and with any part of the section perimeter for non-circular rear-end protection device, or with a tanks) must be protected by being lo- vertical plane passing through the out- cated within or between adjacent roll- board surface of the protection device. over damage protection devices, or by (2) The dimensions of the rear-end being 125 percent of the strength that cargo tank protection device shall con- would be provided by the otherwise re- form to the following: quired damage protection device. (i) The bottom surface of the rear-end (1) A rollover damage protection de- protection device must be at least 4 vice on a cargo tank motor vehicle inches below the lower surface of any must be designed and installed to with- part at the rear of the cargo tank stand loads equal to twice the weight motor vehicle which contains lading of the loaded cargo tank motor vehicle during transit and not more than 60 applied as follows: normal to the cargo inches from the ground when the vehi- tank shell (perpendicular to the cargo cle is empty. tank surface); and tangential (perpen- (ii) The maximum width of a notch, dicular to the normal load) from any indentation, or separation between sec- direction. The stresses shall not exceed tions of a rear-end cargo tank protec- the ultimate strength of the material tion device may not exceed 24 inches. A of construction. These design loads notched, indented, or separated rear- may be considered to be uniformly dis- end protection device may be used only tributed and independently applied. If when the piping at the rear of the more than one rollover protection de- cargo tank is equipped with a sacrifi- vice is used, each device must be capa- cial device outboard of a shut-off valve. ble of carrying its proportionate share (iii) The widest part of the motor ve- of the required loads and in each case hicle at the rear may not extend more at least one-fourth the total tangential than 18 inches beyond the outermost load. The design must be proven capa- ends of the device or (if separated) de- ble of carrying the required loads by vices on either side of the vehicle. calculations, tests or a combination of (3) The structure of the rear-end pro- tests and calculations. tection device and its attachment to (2) A rollover damage protection de- the vehicle must be designed to satisfy vice that would otherwise allow the ac- the conditions specified in paragraph cumulation of liquid on the top of the (d)(1) of this section when subjected to cargo tank, must be provided with a an impact of the cargo tank motor ve- drain that directs the liquid to a safe hicle at rated payload, at a decelera- point of discharge away from any tion of 2 ‘‘g’’. Such impact must be structural component of the cargo considered as being uniformly applied tank motor vehicle. in the horizontal plane at an angle of (d) Rear-end tank protection. Each 10 degrees or less to the longitudinal cargo tank motor vehicle must be pro- axis of the vehicle. vided with a rear-end tank protection (e) Longitudinal deceleration protec- device to protect the cargo tank and tion. In order to account for stresses piping in the event of a rear-end colli- due to longitudinal impact in an acci- sion and reduce the likelihood of dam- dent, the cargo tank shell and heads

172

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00182 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.345–10

must be able to withstand the load re- line must be of sufficient strength, or sulting from the design pressure in be protected by a sacrificial device, combination with the dynamic pres- such that any load applied by loading/ sure resulting from a longitudinal de- unloading or charging lines connected celeration of 2 ‘‘g’’. For this loading to the cargo tank cannot cause damage condition, the allowable stress value resulting in loss of lading from the used may not exceed the ultimate cargo tank. strength of the material of construc- (h) Use of a nonmetallic pipe, valve tion using a safety factor of 1.3. Per- or connection that is not as strong and formance testing, analytical methods, heat resistant as the cargo tank mate- or a combination thereof, may be used rial is authorized only if such attach- to prove this capability provided the ment is located outboard of the lading methods are accurate and verifiable. retention system. For cargo tanks with internal baffles, [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25025, June 12, 1989, as the decelerative force may be reduced amended at 55 FR 37061, Sept. 7, 1990, Amdt. by 0.25 ‘‘g’’ for each baffle assembly, 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178– but in no case may the total reduction 118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996] in decelerative force exceed 1.0 ‘‘g’’. § 178.345–10 Pressure relief. [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25023, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37061, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. (a) Each cargo tank must be equipped 178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178– to relieve pressure and vacuum condi- 118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996; 68 FR 19284, Apr. tions in conformance with this section 18, 2003] and the applicable individual specification. The pressure and vacuum relief § 178.345–9 Pumps, piping, hoses and system must be designed to operate connections. and have sufficient capacity to prevent (a) Suitable means must be provided cargo tank rupture or collapse due to during loading or unloading operations over-pressurization or vacuum result- to ensure that pressure within a cargo ing from loading, unloading, or from tank does not exceed test pressure. heating and cooling of lading. Pressure (b) Each hose, piping, stop-valve, lad- relief systems are not required to con- ing retention fitting and closure must form to the ASME Code. be designed for a bursting pressure of (b) Type and construction of relief sys- the greater of 100 psig or four times the tems and devices. (1) Each cargo tank MAWP. must be provided with a primary pres- (c) Each hose coupling must be de- sure relief system consisting of one or signed for a bursting pressure of the more reclosing pressure relief valves. A greater of 120 psig or 4.8 times the secondary pressure relief system con- MAWP of the cargo tank, and must be sisting of another pressure relief valve designed so that there will be no leak- in parallel with the primary pressure age when connected. relief system may be used to augment (d) Suitable provision must be made the total venting capacity of the cargo to allow for and prevent damage due to tank. Non-reclosing pressure relief de- expansion, contraction, jarring, and vi- vices are not authorized in any cargo bration. Slip joints may not be used for tank except when in series with a re- this purpose in the lading retention closing pressure relief device. Gravity system. actuated reclosing valves are not au- (e) Any heating device, when in- thorized on any cargo tank. stalled, must be so constructed that (2) When provided by § 173.33(c)(1)(iii) the breaking of its external connec- of this subchapter, cargo tanks may be tions will not cause leakage of the equipped with a normal vent. Such cargo tank lading. vents must be set to open at not less (f) Any gauging, loading or charging than 1 psig and must be designed to device, including associated valves, prevent loss of lading through the de- must be provided with an adequate vice in case of vehicle overturn. means of secure closure to prevent (3) Each pressure relief system must leakage. be designed to withstand dynamic pres- (g) The attachment and construction sure surges in excess of the design set of each loading/unloading or charging pressure as specified in paragraphs

173

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00183 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.345–10 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(b)(3) (i) and (ii) of this section. Set positioned at the horizontal and trans- pressure is a function of MAWP as set verse center of the cargo tank; on forth in paragraph (d) of this section. cargo tanks sloped to the rear, the de- (i) Each pressure relief device must vice should be located in the forward be able to withstand dynamic pressure half of the cargo tank. The discharge surge reaching 30 psig above the design from any device must be unrestricted. set pressure and sustained above the Protective devices which deflect the set pressure for at least 60 milliseconds flow of vapor are permissible provided with a total volume of liquid released the required vent capacity is main- not exceeding one gallon before the retained. lief device recloses to a leak-tight con- (d) Settings of pressure relief system. dition. This requirement must be met The set pressure of the pressure relief regardless of vehicle orientation. This system is the pressure at which it capability must be demonstrated by starts to open, allowing discharge. testing. An acceptable method is out- (1) Primary pressure relief system. The lined in TTMA RP No. 81–97 ‘‘Perform- set pressure of each primary relief ance of Spring Loaded Pressure Relief valve must be no less than 120 percent Valves on MC 306, MC 307, MC 312, DOT of the MAWP, and no more than 132 406, DOT 407, and DOT 412 Tanks’’ (in- percent of the MAWP. The valve must corporated by reference; see § 171.7 of reclose at not less than 108 percent of this subchapter). the MAWP and remain closed at lower (ii) After August 31, 1995, each pres- pressures. sure relief device must be able to with- (2) Secondary pressure relief system. stand a dynamic pressure surge reach- The set pressure of each pressure relief ing 30 psig above the design set pres- valve used as a secondary relief device sure and sustained above the design set must be not less than 120 percent of the pressure for at least 60 milliseconds MAWP. with a total volume of liquid released (e) Venting capacity of pressure relief not exceeding 1 L before the relief systems. The pressure relief system (pri- valve recloses to a leak-tight condi- mary and secondary, including piping) tion. This requirement must be met re- must have sufficient venting capacity gardless of vehicle orientation. This to limit the cargo tank internal pres- capability must be demonstrated by sure to not more than the cargo tank testing. TTMA RP No. 81, cited in para- test pressure. The total venting capac- graph (b)(3)(i) of this section, is an ac- ity, rated at not more than the cargo ceptable test procedure. tank test pressure, must be at least (4) Each reclosing pressure relief that specified in table I, except as pro- valve must be constructed and in- vided in § 178.348–4. stalled in such a manner as to prevent unauthorized adjustment of the relief TABLE I—MINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT CAPACITY valve setting. [In cubic feet free air/hour at 60 °F and 1 atm.] (5) No shut-off valve or other device Cubic feet that could prevent venting through the Exposed area in square feet free air per pressure relief system may be installed hour in a pressure relief system. 20 ...... 15,800 (6) The pressure relief system must 30 ...... 23,700 be mounted, shielded and drainable so 40 ...... 31,600 50 ...... 39,500 as to minimize the accumulation of 60 ...... 47,400 material that could impair the oper- 70 ...... 55,300 ation or discharge capability of the 80 ...... 63,300 90 ...... 71,200 system by freezing, corrosion or block- 100 ...... 79,100 age. 120 ...... 94,900 (c) Location of relief devices. Each 140 ...... 110,700 160 ...... 126,500 pressure relief device must commu- 180 ...... 142,300 nicate with the vapor space above the 200 ...... 158,100 lading as near as practicable to the 225 ...... 191,300 center of the vapor space. For example, 250 ...... 203,100 275 ...... 214,300 on a cargo tank designed to operate in 300 ...... 225,100 a level attitude, the device should be 350 ...... 245,700

174

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00184 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.345–11

TABLE I—MINIMUM EMERGENCY VENT vice model to be certified, the capac- CAPACITY—Continued ities of the devices tested must fall [In cubic feet free air/hour at 60 °F and 1 atm.] within a range of plus or minus 5 percent of the average for the devices test- Cubic feet Exposed area in square feet free air per ed. hour (2) The rated flow capacity of a device model may not be greater than 90 400 ...... 265,000 450 ...... 283,200 percent of the average value for the de- 500 ...... 300,600 vices tested. 550 ...... 317,300 (3) The rated flow capacity derived 600 ...... 333,300 650 ...... 348,800 for each device model must be certified 700 ...... 363,700 by a responsible official of the device 750 ...... 378,200 manufacturer. 800 ...... 392,200 850 ...... 405,900 (h) Marking of pressure relief devices. 900 ...... 419,300 Each pressure relief device must be 950 ...... 432,300 permanently marked with the fol- 1,000 ...... 445,000 lowing: Note 1: Interpolate for intermediate sizes. (1) Manufacturer’s name; (1) Primary pressure relief system. Un- (2) Model number; less otherwise specified in the applica- (3) Set pressure, in psig; and ble individual specification, the pri- (4) Rated flow capacity, in SCFH at mary relief system must have a min- the rating pressure, in psig. imum venting capacity of 12,000 SCFH [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25025, June 12, 1989, as per 350 square feet of exposed cargo amended at 55 FR 21038, May 22, 1990; 55 FR tank area, but in any case at least one 37062, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27877, fourth the required total venting ca- June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55175, Nov. pacity for the cargo tank. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, (2) Secondary pressure relief system. If 1996; 65 FR 58631, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45389, the primary pressure relief system does Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003] not provide the required total venting capacity, additional capacity must be § 178.345–11 Tank outlets. provided by a secondary pressure relief (a) General. As used in this section, system. ‘‘loading/unloading outlet’’ means any (f) Certification of pressure relief de- opening in the cargo tank wall used for vices. The manufacturer of any pressure loading or unloading of lading, as dis- relief device, including valves, fran- tinguished from outlets such as man- gible (rupture) disks, vacuum vents and hole covers, vents, vapor recovery de- combination devices must certify that vices, and similar closures. Cargo tank the device model was designed and outlets, closures and associated piping tested in accordance with this section must be protected in accordance with and the appropriate cargo tank speci- § 178.345–8. fication. The certificate must contain (b) Each cargo tank loading/unload- sufficient information to describe the ing outlet must be equipped with an in- device and its performance. The certifi- ternal self-closing stop-valve, or alter- cate must be signed by a responsible of- natively, with an external stop-valve ficial of the manufacturer who ap- located as close as practicable to the proved the flow capacity certification. cargo tank wall. Each cargo tank load- (g) Rated flow capacity certification ing/unloading outlet must be in accord- test. Each pressure relief device model ance with the following provisions: must be successfully flow capacity cer- (1) Each loading/unloading outlet tification tested prior to first use. De- must be fitted with a self-closing sys- vices having one design, size and set tem capable of closing all such outlets pressure are considered to be one in an emergency within 30 seconds of model. The testing requirements are as actuation. During normal operations follows: the outlets may be closed manually. (1) At least 3 devices of each specific The self-closing system must be de- model must be tested for flow capacity signed according to the following: at a pressure not greater than the test (i) Each self-closing system must in- pressure of the cargo tank. For a de- clude a remotely actuated means of

175

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00185 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.345–12 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

closure located more than 10 feet from level to within 0.5 percent of the nomi- the loading/unloading outlet where ve- nal capacity as measured by volume or hicle length allows, or on the end of liquid level. Gauge glasses are not per- the cargo tank farthest away from the mitted. loading/unloading outlet. The actuating mechanism must be corrosion-re- [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37062, Sept. 7, 1990, as sistant and effective in all types of en- amended by Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996] vironment and weather. (ii) If the actuating system is acci- § 178.345–13 Pressure and leakage dentally damaged or sheared off during tests. transportation, each loading/unloading outlet must remain securely closed and (a) Each cargo tank must be pressure capable of retaining lading. and leakage tested in accordance with (iii) When required by part 173 of this this section and §§ 178.346–5, 178.347–5, or subchapter for materials which are 178.348–5. flammable, pyrophoric, oxidizing, or (b) Pressure test. Each cargo tank or Division 6.1 (poisonous liquid) mate- cargo tank compartment must be test- rials, the remote means of closure ed hydrostatically or pneumatically. must be capable of thermal activation. Each cargo tank of a multi-cargo tank The means by which the self-closing motor vehicle must be tested with the system is thermally activated must be adjacent cargo tanks empty and at at- located as close as practicable to the mospheric pressure. Each closure, ex- primary loading/unloading connection cept pressure relief devices and load- and must actuate the system at a tem- ing/unloading venting devices rated at perature not over 250 °F. In addition, less than the prescribed test pressure, outlets on these cargo tanks must be must be in place during the test. If the capable of being remotely closed manu- venting device is not removed during ally or mechanically. the test, such device must be rendered (2) Bottom loading outlets which dis- inoperative by a clamp, plug or other charge lading into the cargo tank equally effective restraining device, through fixed internal piping above the which may not prevent the detection of maximum liquid level of the cargo leaks, or damage the device. Restrain- tank need not be equipped with a self- ing devices must be removed imme- closing system. diately after the test is completed. (c) Any loading/unloading outlet ex- (1) Hydrostatic method. Each cargo tending beyond an internal self-closing tank, including its domes, must be stop-valve, or beyond the innermost ex- filled with water or other liquid having ternal stop-valve which is part of a similar viscosity, the temperature of self-closing system, must be fitted with which may not exceed 100 °F. The cargo another stop-valve or other leak-tight tank must then be pressurized as pre- closure at the end of such connection. scribed in the applicable specification. (d) Each cargo tank outlet that is not The pressure must be gauged at the top a loading/unloading outlet must be of the cargo tank. The prescribed test equipped with a stop-valve or other pressure must be maintained for at leak-tight closure located as close as least 10 minutes during which time the practicable to the cargo tank outlet. cargo tank must be inspected for leak- Any connection extending beyond this age, bulging, or other defect. closure must be fitted with another (2) Pneumatic method. A pneumatic stop-valve or other leak-tight closure test may be used in place of the hydro- at the end of such connection. static test. However, pneumatic pres- [Amdt. 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991, as sure testing may involve higher risk amended by Amdt. 178–97, 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, than hydrostatic testing. Therefore, 1992; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51341, Oct. 1, 1996] suitable safeguards must be provided to protect personnel and facilities should § 178.345–12 Gauging devices. failure occur during the test. The cargo Each cargo tank, except a cargo tank tank must be pressurized with air or an intended to be filled by weight, must be inert gas. Test pressure must be equipped with a gauging device that in- reached gradually by increasing the dicates the maximum permitted liquid pressure to one half of test pressure.

176

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00186 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.345–14

Thereafter, the pressure must be in- place readily accessible for inspection. creased in steps of approximately one The plates must be permanently and tenth of the test pressure until test plainly marked in English by stamp- pressure is reached. Test pressure must ing, embossing or other means in char- be held for at least 5 minutes. The pres- acters at least 3⁄16 inch high. The infor- sure must then be reduced to the in- mation required by paragraphs (b) and spection pressure which must be main- (c) of this section may be combined on tained while the entire cargo tank sur- one specification plate. face is inspected for leakage and other (b) Nameplate. Each cargo tank must sign of defects. The inspection method have a corrosion resistant nameplate must consist of coating all joints and permanently attached to it. The fol- fittings with a solution of soap and lowing information, in addition to any water or other equally sensitive meth- applicable information required by the od. ASME Code, must be marked on the (c) Leakage test. The cargo tank with tank nameplate (parenthetical abbre- all its accessories in place and operable must be leak tested at not less than 80 viations may be used): percent of tank’s MAWP with the pres- (1) DOT-specification number DOT sure maintained for at least 5 minutes. XXX (DOT XXX) where ‘‘XXX’’ is re- (d) Any cargo tank that leaks, bulges placed with the applicable specification or shows any other sign of defect must number. For cargo tanks having a vari- be rejected. Rejected cargo tanks must able specification plate, the DOT-speci- be suitably repaired and retested suc- fication number is replaced with the cessfully prior to being returned to words ‘‘See variable specification service. The retest after any repair plate.’’ must use the same method of test (2) Original test date, month and under which the cargo tank was origi- year (Orig. Test Date). nally rejected. (3) Tank MAWP in psig. [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25026, June 12, 1989, as (4) Cargo tank test pressure (Test P), amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. in psig. 178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; Amdt. 178– (5) Cargo tank design temperature 118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; 65 FR 58631, range (Design temp. range),l °F to l Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003] °F. § 178.345–14 Marking. (6) Nominal capacity (Water cap.), in gallons. (a) General. The manufacturer shall (7) Maximum design density of lading certify that each cargo tank motor ve- (Max. lading density), in pounds per hicle has been designed, constructed gallon. and tested in accordance with the applicable Specification DOT 406, DOT 407 (8) Material specification number— or DOT 412 (§§ 178.345, 178.346, 178.347, shell (Shell matl, yyy***), where ‘‘yyy’’ 178.348) cargo tank requirements and, is replaced by the alloy designation when applicable, with Section VIII of and ‘‘***’’ by the alloy type. the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this (9) Material specification number— subchapter). The certification shall be heads (Head matl, yyy***), where accomplished by marking the cargo ‘‘yyy’’ is replaced by the alloy designa- tank as prescribed in paragraphs (b) tion and ‘‘***’’ by the alloy type. and (c) of this section, and by pre- NOTE: When the shell and heads materials paring the certificate prescribed in are the same thickness, they may be com- § 178.345–15. Metal plates prescribed by bined, (Shell&head matl, yyy***). paragraphs (b), (c), (d) and (e) of this section, must be permanently attached (10) Weld material (Weld matl.). to the cargo tank or its integral sup- (11) Minimum thickness—shell (Min. porting structure, by brazing, welding shell-thick), in inches. When minimum or other suitable means. These plates shell thicknesses are not the same for must be affixed on the left side of the different areas, show (top l, side l, vehicle near the front of the cargo tank bottom l, in inches). (or the frontmost cargo tank of a (12) Minimum thickness—heads (Min. multi-cargo tank motor vehicle), in a heads thick.), in inches.

177

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00187 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.345–14 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(13) Manufactured thickness—shell must be visible and not covered by in- (Mfd. shell thick.), top l, side l, bot- sulation. The required information tom l, in inches. (Required when addi- must be listed on the plate from front tional thickness is provided for corro- to rear in the order of the cor- sion allowance.) responding cargo tank location. (14) Manufactured thickness—heads (e) Variable specification cargo tank. (Mfd. heads thick.), in inches. (Re- Each variable specification cargo tank quired when additional thickness is must have a corrosion resistant metal provided for corrosion allowance.) variable specification plate attached to (15) Exposed surface area, in square it. The mounting of this variable speci- feet. fication plate must be such that only (c) Specification plate. Each cargo the plate identifying the applicable tank motor vehicle must have an additional corrosion resistant metal speci- specification under which the tank is fication plate attached to it. The speci- being operated is legible. fication plate must contain the fol- (1) The following information must lowing information (parenthetical ab- be included (parenthetical abbrevia- breviations may be used): tions are authorized): (1) Cargo tank motor vehicle manu- Specification DOT XXX (DOT XXX), where facturer (CTMV mfr.). ‘‘XXX’’ is replaced with the applicable speci- (2) Cargo tank motor vehicle certifi- fication number. cation date (CTMV cert. date), if different from the cargo tank certifi- Equipment required Required cation date. rating 1 (3) Cargo tank manufacturer (CT mfr.). Pressure relief devices: (4) Cargo tank date of manufacture Pressure actuated llllll type. (CT date of mfr.), month and year. Frangible type ...... llllll (5) Maximum weight of lading (Max. Lading discharge de- llllll Payload), in pounds. vices. (6) Maximum loading rate in gallons Top ...... llllll per minute (Max. Load rate, GPM). Bottom ...... llllll (7) Maximum unloading rate in gal- Pressure unloading llllll lons per minute (Max. Unload rate). fitting. (8) Lining material (Lining), if appli- Closures: cable. Manhole ...... llllll (9) Heating system design pressure Fill openings ...... llllll (Heating sys. press.), in psig, if applica- Discharge openings .... llllll ble. 1 Required rating—to meet the applicable (10) Heating system design tempera- specification. ture (Heating sys. temp.), in °F, if ap- (2) If no change of information in the plicable. specification plate is required, the let- (d) Multi-cargo tank motor vehicle. For ters ‘‘NC’’ must follow the rating re- a multi-cargo tank motor vehicle having all its cargo tanks not separated by quired. If the cargo tank is not so any void, the information required by equipped, the word ‘‘None’’ must be in- paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section serted. may be combined on one specification (3) Those parts to be changed or plate. When separated by a void, each added must be stamped with the appro- cargo tank must have an individual priate MC or DOT Specification mark- nameplate as required in paragraph (b) ings. of this section, unless all cargo tanks (4) The alterations that must be are made by the same manufacturer made in order for the tank to be modi- with the same materials, manufactured fied from one specification to another thickness, minimum thickness and to the same specification. The cargo tank motor vehicle may have a combined nameplate and specification plate. When only one plate is used, the plate

178

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00188 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.345–15

must be clearly indicated on the manu- motor vehicle is constructed, tested facturer’s certificate and on the vari- and completed in conformance with the able specification plate. applicable specifications. The certifi- [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25027, June 12, 1989, as cate must include all the information amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. required and marked on the variable 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178–104, specification plate. 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; Amdt. 178–105, 59 (d) In the case of a cargo tank motor FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 60 FR 17402, Apr. 5, vehicle manufactured in two or more 1995; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; stages, each manufacturer who per- 66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 19284, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 52371, Sept. 3, 2003; 68 FR 75756, forms a manufacturing operation on Dec. 31, 2003] the incomplete vehicle or portion thereof shall provide to the succeeding § 178.345–15 Certification. manufacturer, at or before the time of (a) At or before the time of delivery, delivery, a certificate covering the par- the manufacturer of a cargo tank ticular operation performed by that motor vehicle must provide certifi- manufacturer, including any certification documents to the owner of the cates received from previous manufac- cargo tank motor vehicle. The registra- turers, Registered Inspectors, and De- tion numbers of the manufacturer, the sign Certifying Engineers. Each certifi- Design Certifying Engineer, and the cate must indicate the portion of the Registered Inspector, as appropriate, complete cargo tank motor vehicle rep- must appear on the certificates (see resented thereby, such as basic cargo subpart F, part 107 in subchapter A of tank fabrication, insulation, jacket, this chapter). lining, or piping. The final manufac- (b) The manufacturer of a cargo tank turer shall provide all applicable cer- motor vehicle made to any of these tificates to the owner. specifications must provide: (e) Specification shortages. If a cargo (1) For each design type, a certificate tank is manufactured which does not signed by a responsible official of the meet all applicable specification remanufacturer and a Design Certifying quirements, thereby requiring subse- Engineer certifying that the cargo quent manufacturing involving the in- tank motor vehicle design meets the stallation of additional components, applicable specification; and parts, appurtenances or accessories, (2) For each ASME cargo tank, a the cargo tank manufacturer may affix cargo tank manufacturer’s data report the name plate and specification plate, as required by Section VIII of the as required by § 178.345–14 (b) and (c), ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of this sub- without the original date of certifi- chapter). For each cargo tank motor cation stamped on the specification vehicle, a certificate signed by a re- plate. The manufacturer shall state the sponsible official of the manufacturer and a Registered Inspector certifying specification requirements not com- that the cargo tank motor vehicle is plied with on the manufacturer’s Cer- constructed, tested and completed in tificate of Compliance. When the cargo conformance with the applicable speci- tank is brought into full compliance fication. with the applicable specification, the (c) The manufacturer of a variable Registered Inspector shall stamp the specification cargo tank motor vehicle date of compliance on the specification must provide: plate. The Registered Inspector shall (1) For each design type, a certificate issue a Certificate of Compliance stat- signed by a responsible official of the ing details of the particular operations manufacturer and a Design Certifying performed on the cargo tank, and the Engineer certifying that the cargo date and person (manufacturer, carrier, tank motor vehicle design meets the or repair organization) accomplishing applicable specifications; and the compliance. (2) For each variable specification [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990, as cargo tank motor vehicle, a certificate amended by Amdt. 178–98, 58 FR 33306, June signed by a responsible official of the 16, 1993; Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, manufacturer and a Registered Inspec- 1994; Amdt. 178–118, 61 FR 51342, Oct. 1, 1996; tor certifying that the cargo tank 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]

179

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00189 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.346 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

§ 178.346 Specification DOT 406; cargo (9) Single full fillet lap joints with- tank motor vehicle. out plug welds may be used for arc or gas welded longitudinal seams without § 178.346–1 General requirements. radiographic examination under the (a) Each Specification DOT 406 cargo following conditions: tank motor vehicle must meet the gen- (i) For a truck-mounted cargo tank, eral design and construction require- no more than two such joints may be ments in § 178.345, in addition to the used on the top half of the tank and no specific requirements contained in this more than two joints may be used on section. the bottom half. They may not be lo- (b) MAWP: The MAWP of each cargo cated farther from the top and bottom tank must be no lower than 2.65 psig centerline than 16 percent of the shell’s and no higher than 4 psig. circumference. (c) Vacuum loaded cargo tanks must (ii) For a self-supporting cargo tank, not be constructed to this specifica- no more than two such joints may be tion. used on the top of the tank. They may (d) Each cargo tank must be ‘‘con- not be located farther from the top structed in accordance with Section centerline than 12.5 percent of the VIII of the ASME Code’’ (IBR, see shell’s circumference. § 171.7 of this subchapter) except as (iii) Compliance test. Two test speci- modified herein: mens of the material to be used in the (1) The record-keeping requirements manufacture of a cargo tank must be contained in the ASME Code Section tested to failure in tension. The test VIII do not apply. Parts UG–90 through specimens must be of the same 94 in Section VIII do not apply. Inspec- thicknesses and joint configuration as tion and certification must be made by the cargo tank, and joined by the same an inspector registered in accordance welding procedures. The test specimens with subpart F of part 107. may represent all the tanks that are (2) Loadings must be as prescribed in made of the same materials and weld- § 178.345–3. ing procedures, have the same joint (3) The knuckle radius of flanged heads must be at least three times the configuration, and are made in the material thickness, and in no case less same facility within 6 months after the than 0.5 inch. Stuffed (inserted) heads tests are completed. Before welding, may be attached to the shell by a fillet the fit-up of the joints on the test weld. The knuckle radius and dish ra- specimens must represent production dius versus diameter limitations of conditions that would result in the UG–32 do not apply. Shell sections of least joint strength. Evidence of joint cargo tanks designed with a non-cir- fit-up and test results must be retained cular cross section need not be given a at the manufacturers’ facility. preliminary curvature, as prescribed in (iv) Weld joint efficiency. The lower UG–79(b). value of stress at failure attained in (4) Marking, certification, data re- the two tensile test specimens shall be ports, and nameplates must be as pre- used to compute the efficiency of the scribed in §§ 178.345–14 and 178.345–15. joint as follows: Determine the failure (5) Manhole closure assemblies must ratio by dividing the stress at failure conform to §§ 178.345–5 and 178.346–5. by the mechanical properties of the ad- (6) Pressure relief devices must be as jacent metal; this value, when multi- prescribed in § 178.346–3. plied by 0.75, is the design weld joint ef- (7) The hydrostatic or pneumatic test ficiency. must be as prescribed in § 178.346–5. (10) The requirements of paragraph (8) The following paragraphs in parts UW–9(d) in Section VIII of the ASME UG and UW in Section VIII of the Code do not apply. ASME Code do not apply: UG–11, UG– [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25028, June 12, 1989, as 12, UG–22(g), UG–32(e), UG–34, UG–35, amended at 55 FR 37063, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. UG–44, UG–76, UG–77, UG–80, UG–81, 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; Amdt. 178– UG–96, UG–97, UW–13(b)(2), UW–13.1(f) 105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 65 FR 58631, and the dimensional requirements Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR found in Figure UW–13.1. 19285, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003]

180

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00190 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.346–3

§ 178.346–2 Material and thickness of that determined by the minimum material. thickness requirements in § 178.320(a). The type and thickness of material The following Tables I and II identify for DOT 406 specification cargo tanks the specified minimum thickness val- must conform to § 178.345–2, but in no ues to be employed in that determina- case may the thickness be less than tion.

TABLE I—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF HEADS (OR BULKHEADS AND BAFFLES WHEN USED AS TANK REINFORCEMENT) USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN INCH AFTER FORMING

Volume capacity in gallons per inch of length

Material 14 or less Over 14 to 23 Over 23 HSLA HSLA HSLA MS SS AL MS SS AL MS SS AL

Thickness ...... 100 .100 .160 .115 .115 .173 .129 .129 .187

TABLE II—SPECIFIED MINIMUM THICKNESS OF SHELL USING MILD STEEL (MS), HIGH STRENGTH LOW ALLOY STEEL (HSLA), AUSTENITIC STAINLESS STEEL (SS), OR ALUMINUM (AL)—EXPRESSED IN DECIMALS OF AN INCH AFTER FORMING 1

Cargo tank motor vehicle rated capacity (gallons) MS SS/HSLA AL

More than 0 to at least 4,500 ...... 0.100 0.100 0.151 More than 4,500 to at least 8,000 ...... 0.115 0.100 0.160 More than 8,000 to at least 14,000 ...... 0.129 0.129 0.173 More than 14,000 ...... 0.143 0.143 0.187 1 Maximum distance between bulkheads, baffles, or ring stiffeners shall not exceed 60 inches.

[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25028, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178– 105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]

§ 178.346–3 Pressure relief. with a total volume of liquid released (a) Each cargo tank must be equipped not exceeding 1 L before the relief with a pressure relief system in accord- valve recloses to a leak-tight condi- ance with § 178.345–10 and this section. tion. This requirement must be met re- (b) Type and construction. In addition gardless of vehicle orientation. This to the pressure relief devices required capability must be demonstrated by in § 178.345–10: testing. TTMA RP No. 81 (IBR, see (1) Each cargo tank must be equipped § 171.7 of this subchapter), cited at with one or more vacuum relief de- § 178.345–10(b)(3)(i), is an acceptable test vices; procedure. (2) When intended for use only for (c) Pressure settings of relief valves. (1) lading meeting the requirements of Notwithstanding the requirements in § 173.33(c)(1)(iii) of this subchapter, the § 178.345–10(d), the set pressure of each cargo tank may be equipped with a primary relief valve must be not less normal vent. Such vents must be set to than 110 percent of the MAWP or 3.3 open at not less than 1 psig and must psig, whichever is greater, and not be designed to prevent loss of lading more than 138 percent of the MAWP. through the device in case of vehicle The valve must close at not less than upset; and (3) Notwithstanding the requirements the MAWP and remain closed at lower in § 178.345–10(b), after August 31, 1996, pressures. each pressure relief valve must be able (2) Each vacuum relief device must to withstand a dynamic pressure surge be set to open at no more than 6 ounces reaching 30 psig above the design set vacuum. pressure and sustained above the set (d) Venting capacities. (1) Notwith- pressure for at least 60 milliseconds standing the requirements in § 178.345–

181

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00191 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.346–4 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

10 (e) and (g), the primary pressure re- of this paragraph, the test specified in lief valve must have a venting capacity 40 CFR 63.425(e)(1) must be conducted of at least 6,000 SCFH, rated at not using air. The hydrostatic test alter- greater than 125 percent of the tank native permitted under Appendix A to test pressure and not greater than 3 40 CFR Part 60 (‘‘Method 27—Deter- psig above the MAWP. The venting ca- mination of Vapor Tightness of Gaso- pacity required in § 178.345–10(e) may be line Delivery Tank Using Pressure- rated at these same pressures. Vacuum Test’’) may not be used to sat- (2) Each vacuum relief system must isfy the leakage test requirements of have sufficient capacity to limit the this paragraph. A cargo tank tested in vacuum to 1 psig. accordance with 40 CFR 63.425(e) may (3) If pressure loading or unloading be marked as specified in § 180.415 of devices are provided, the relief system this subchapter. must have adequate vapor and liquid capacity to limit the tank pressure to [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as the cargo tank test pressure at max- amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. imum loading or unloading rate. The 178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994. Redesig- nated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, maximum loading and unloading rates 1996; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003] must be included on the metal specification plate. § 178.347 Specification DOT 407; cargo [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as tank motor vehicle. amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178–105, 59 FR 55176, Nov. 3, 1994. Redesig- § 178.347–1 General requirements. nated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, (a) Each specification DOT 407 cargo 1996; 66 FR 45389, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 75756, tank motor vehicle must conform to Dec. 31, 2003] the general design and construction re- § 178.346–4 Outlets. quirements in § 178.345 in addition to the specific requirements contained in (a) All outlets on each tank must this section. conform to § 178.345–11 and this section. (b) External self-closing stop-valves (b) Each tank must be of a circular are not authorized as an alternative to cross-section and have an MAWP of at internal self-closing stop-valves on least 25 psig. loading/unloading outlets. (c) Any cargo tank motor vehicle built to this specification with a [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989. Re- MAWP greater than 35 psig or any designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, cargo tank motor vehicle built to this Apr. 29, 1996] specification designed to be loaded by § 178.346–5 Pressure and leakage tests. vacuum must be constructed and cer- (a) Each cargo tank must be tested in tified in accordance with Section VIII accordance with § 178.345–13 and this of the ASME Code (IBR, see § 171.7 of section. this subchapter). The external design (b) Pressure test. Test pressure must pressure for a cargo tank loaded by be as follows: vacuum must be at least 15 psi. (1) Using the hydrostatic test meth- (d) Any cargo tank motor vehicle od, the test pressure must be the great- built to this specification with a er of 5.0 psig or 1.5 times the cargo MAWP of 35 psig or less or any cargo tank MAWP. tank motor vehicle built to this speci- (2) Using the pneumatic test method, fication designed to withstand full vac- the test pressure must be the greater of uum but not equipped to be loaded by 5.0 psig or 1.5 times the cargo tank vacuum must be constructed in accord- MAWP, and the inspection pressure ance with Section VIII of the ASME must be the cargo tank MAWP. Code. (c) Leakage test. A cargo tank used to (1) The record-keeping requirements transport a petroleum distillate fuel contained in Section VIII of the ASME that is equipped with vapor recovery Code do not apply. The inspection re- equipment may be leakage tested in quirements of parts UG–90 through 94 accordance with 40 CFR 63.425(e). To do not apply. Inspection and certifi- satisfy the leakage test requirements cation must be made by an inspector

182

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00192 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.347–2

registered in accordance with subpart (iv) The welded seam must be com- F of part 107. pleted before forming the dish radius (2) Loadings must be as prescribed in and knuckle radius. § 178.345–3. (v) Compliance test: Two test speci- (3) The knuckle radius of flanged mens of materials representative of heads must be at least three times the those to be used in the manufacture of material thickness, and in no case less a cargo tank bulkhead must be tested than 0.5 inch. Stuffed (inserted) heads to failure in tension. The test specimen may be attached to the shell by a fillet must be of the same thickness and weld. The knuckle radius and dish ra- joined by the same welding procedure. The test specimens may represent all dius versus diameter limitations of the tanks that are made in the same UG–32 do not apply for cargo tank facility within 6 months after the tests motor vehicles with a MAWP of 35 psig are completed. Before welding, the fit- or less. up of the joints on the test specimens (4) Marking, certification, data re- must represent production conditions ports and nameplates must be as pre- that would result in the least joint scribed in §§ 178.345–14 and 178.345–15. strength. Evidence of joint fit-up and (5) Manhole closure assemblies must test results must be retained at the conform to § 178.347–3. manufacturer’s facility for at least 5 (6) Pressure relief devices must be as years. prescribed in § 178.347–4. (vi) Acceptance criteria: The ratio of (7) The hydrostatic or pneumatic test the actual tensile stress at failure to must be as prescribed in § 178.347–5. the actual tensile strength of the adja- (8) The following paragraphs in parts cent material of all samples of a test UG and UW in Section VIII the ASME lot must be greater than 0.85. Code do not apply: UG–11, UG–12, UG– [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25029, June 12, 1989, as 22(g), UG–32(e), UG–34, UG–35, UG–44, amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. UG–76, UG–77, UG–80, UG–81, UG–96, 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; 65 FR 58632, UG–97, UW–12, UW–13(b)(2), UW–13.1(f), Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR and the dimensional requirements 19285, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 FR 75756, Dec. 31, 2003; found in Figure UW–13.1. 76 FR 3388, Jan. 19, 2011; 76 FR 43532, July 20, 2011] (9) UW–12 in Section VIII of the ASME Code does not apply to a weld § 178.347–2 Material and thickness of seam in a bulkhead that has not been material. radiographically examined, under the (a) The type and thickness of mate- following conditions: rial for DOT 407 specification cargo (i) The strength of the weld seam is tanks must conform to § 178.345–2, but assumed to be 0.85 of the strength of in no case may the thickness be less the bulkhead. than that determined by the minimum (ii) The welded seam must be a full thickness requirements in § 178.320(a). penetration butt weld. Tables I and II identify the specified (iii) No more than one seam may be minimum thickness values to be em- used per bulkhead. ployed in that the determination:

10 or Over 10 Over 14 Over 18 Over 22 Over 26 Volume capacity in gallons per inch less to 14 to 18 to 22 to 26 to 30 Over 30

Thickness (MS)...... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156 Thickness (HSLA)...... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156 Thickness (SS)...... 0.100 0.100 0.115 0.129 0.129 0.143 0.156 Thickness (AL)...... 0.160 0.160 0.173 0.187 0.194 0.216 0.237

183

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00193 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.347–3 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

10 or Over 10 Over 14 Over 18 Over 22 Over 26 Volume capacity in gallons per inch less to 14 to 18 to 22 to 26 to 30 Over 30

(b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. 178– 104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]

§ 178.347–3 Manhole assemblies. must be included on the metal specification plate. Each manhole assembly must conform to § 178.345–5, except that each [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989, as manhole assembly must be capable of amended at 55 FR 37064, Sept. 7, 1990. Redes- withstanding internal fluid pressures of ignated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, 1996; 76 FR 43532, July 20, 2011] 40 psig or test pressure of the tank, whichever is greater. § 178.347–5 Pressure and leakage test. [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989. Re- (a) Each cargo tank must be tested in designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, accordance with § 178.345–13 and this Apr. 29, 1996] section. (b) Pressure test. Test pressure must § 178.347–4 Pressure relief. be as follows: (a) Each cargo tank must be equipped (1) Using the hydrostatic test meth- with a pressure and vacuum relief sys- od, the test pressure must be at least 40 tem in accordance with § 178.345–10 and psig or 1.5 times tank MAWP, which- this section. ever is greater. (b) Type and construction. Vacuum re- (2) Using the pneumatic test method, lief devices are not required for cargo the test pressure must be 40 psig or 1.5 tank motor vehicles that are designed times tank MAWP, whichever is great- to be loaded by vacuum in accordance er, and the inspection pressure is tank with § 178.347–1(c) or built to withstand MAWP. full vacuum in accordance with [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25030, June 12, 1989. Re- § 178.347–1(d). designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, (c) Pressure settings of relief valves. Apr. 29, 1996] The setting of pressure relief valves must be in accordance with § 178.345– § 178.348 Specification DOT 412; cargo tank motor vehicle. 10(d). (d) Venting capacities. (1) The vacuum § 178.348–1 General requirements. relief system must limit the vacuum to less than 80 percent of the design vacu- (a) Each specification DOT 412 cargo tank motor vehicle must conform to um capability of the cargo tank. the general design and construction re- (2) If pressure loading or unloading quirements in § 178.345 in addition to devices are provided, the relief system the specific requirements of this sec- must have adequate vapor and liquid tion. capacity to limit the tank pressure to (b) The MAWP of each cargo tank the cargo tank test pressure at max- must be at least 5 psig. imum loading or unloading rate. The (c) The MAWP for each cargo tank maximum loading or unloading rate designed to be loaded by vacuum must

184

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00194 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.348–2

be at least 25 psig internal and 15 psig tion need not be given a preliminary external. curvature, as prescribed in UG–79(b). (d) Each cargo tank having a MAWP (iv) Marking, certification, data re- greater than 15 psig must be of circular ports, and nameplates must be as pre- cross-section. scribed in §§ 178.345–14 and 178.345–15. (e) Each cargo tank having a— (v) Manhole closure assemblies must (1) MAWP greater than 15 psig must conform to §§ 178.345–5. be ‘‘constructed and certified in con- (vi) Pressure relief devices must be as formance with Section VIII of the prescribed in § 178.348–4. ASME Code’’ (IBR, see § 171.7 of this (vii) The hydrostatic or pneumatic subchapter); or test must be as prescribed in § 178.348–5. (viii) The following paragraphs in (2) MAWP of 15 psig or less must be parts UG and UW in Section VIII of the ‘‘constructed in accordance with Sec- ASME Code do not apply: UG–11, UG– tion VIII of the ASME Code,’’ except as 12, UG–22(g), UG–32(e), UG–34, UG–35, modified herein: UG–44, UG–76, UG–77, UG–80, UG–81, (i) The recordkeeping requirements UG–96, UG–97, UW–13(b)(2), UW–13.1(f), contained in Section VIII of the ASME and the dimensional requirements Code do not apply. Parts UG–90 found in Figure UW–13.1. through 94 in Section VIII do not apply. Inspection and certification [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25031, June 12, 1989, as must be made by an inspector reg- amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. istered in accordance with subpart F of 178–89, 56 FR 27877, June 17, 1991; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003; 68 fR part 107. 75756, Dec. 31, 2003] (ii) Loadings must be as prescribed in § 178.345–3. § 178.348–2 Material and thickness of (iii) The knuckle radius of flanged material. heads must be at least three times the (a) The type and thickness of mate- material thickness, and in no case less rial for DOT 412 specification cargo than 0.5 inch. Stuffed (inserted) heads tanks must conform to § 178.345–2, but may be attached to the shell by a fillet in no case may the thickness be less weld. The knuckle radius and dish ra- than that determined by the minimum dius versus diameter limitations of thickness requirements in § 178.320(a). UG–32 do not apply for cargo tank The following Tables I and II identify motor vehicles with a MAWP of 15 psig the ‘‘Specified Minimum Thickness’’ or less. Shell sections of cargo tanks values to be employed in that deter- designed with a non-circular cross sec- mination.

185

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00195 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.348–2 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

Over Over 13 to 13 to

16 lbs 16 lbs TEEL TAINLESS 250 .250 250 .312 360 .360 360 .450 S Over Over 10 to 10 to S 13 lbs 13 lbs ILD ECIMALS OF AN M and and less less D 10 lbs 10 lbs 7 .129 .157 .187 7 .187 .227 .270 SING USTENITIC Over Over 13 to 13 to ) U 16 lbs 16 lbs

XPRESSED IN Over Over 10 to 10 to 13 lbs 13 lbs (HSLA), A and and less less ORMING TEEL 10 lbs 10 lbs (AL)—E F S EINFORCEMENT R 360 .227 .360 .450 Over Over FTER LLOY 16 lbs 16 lbs ANK A A T LUMINUM 187 .250 .157 .312 A OW NCH Over Over 13 to 13 to L I 16 lbs 16 lbs OR SED AS U Over Over 10 to 10 to 13 lbs 13 lbs (SS), HEN TRENGTH S W and and less less 10 lbs 10 lbs TEEL IGH S ECIMALS OF AN D Over Over AFFLES 16 lbs 16 lbs B (MS), H TAINLESS Over Over 13 to 13 to S 16 lbs 16 lbs TEEL S XPRESSED IN Over Over 10 to 10 to 13 lbs 13 lbs ILD M ULKHEADS AND USTENITIC B and and less less (AL)—E SING OR ( U (HSLA), A EADS HELL LUMINUM S A H OR TEEL S (SS), LLOY A HICKNESS OF HICKNESS OF T TEEL T S OW L

INIMUM INIMUM M M ORMING TRENGTH F F in pounds per gallon ...... 10 lbs F in pounds per gallon ...... 10 lbs S ° ° Over 36 in. to 54 inches...... inches...... 54 less...... 100 .129 .157 .187 . 60 to or .100 .129 .157 .187 .250 . .100 .129 .157 .187 .15 to in. in. in. 36 36 54 inches...... Over inches...... Over 54 less...... 144 .187 .227 .270 .157 . 60 to or .144 .187 .227 .270 .360 . .144 .187 .227 .270 .22 to in. in. in. 36 36 54 Over Over Volume capacity (gallons per inch) 10 or less Over 10 to 14 Over 14 to 18 18 and over Volume capacity in gallons per inch 10 or less Over 10 to 14 Over 14 to 18 18 and over IGH PECIFIED PECIFIED FTER A stiffeners when used as tank reinforcement): stiffeners when used as tank reinforcement): I—S II—S Distances between heads (and bulkheads baffles and ring Distances between heads (and bulkheads baffles and ring NCH (MS), H I ABLE ABLE T T Lading density at 60 Lading density at 60 Thickness (inch), steel...... aluminum...... (inch), .100 .129 .157 .187 . (inch), Thickness .144 .187 .227 .270 . Thickness Thickness (steel): Thickness (aluminum):

186

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00196 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.348–5

(b) [Reserved]

[Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25031, June 12, 1989; 54 FR 28750, July 7, 1989, as amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990; 68 FR 19285, Apr. 18, 2003]

§ 178.348–3 Pumps, piping, hoses and Formula in Nonmetric Units connections. Q = 37,980,000 A0.82 (ZT)0.5 / (LC)(M0.5) Each pump and all piping, hoses and Where: connections on each cargo tank motor vehicle must conform to § 178.345–9, ex- Q = The total required venting capacity, in cubic meters of air per hour at standard cept that the use of nonmetallic pipes, conditions of 15.6 °C and 1 atm (cubic feet valves, or connections are authorized of air per hour at standard conditions of on DOT 412 cargo tanks. 60 °F and 14.7 psia); T = The absolute temperature of the vapor at [Amdt. 178–89, 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990. Re- the venting conditions—degrees Kelvin designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, (°C + 273) [degrees Rankine (°F + 460)]; Apr. 29, 1996] A = The exposed surface area of tank shell— square meters (square feet); § 178.348–4 Pressure relief. L = The latent heat of vaporization of the lading—calories per gram (BTU/lb); (a) Each cargo tank must be equipped Z = The compressibility factor for the vapor with a pressure and vacuum relief sys- (if this factor is unknown, let Z equal tem in accordance with § 178.345–10 and 1.0); this section. M = The molecular weight of vapor; (b) Type and construction. Vacuum re- C = A constant derived from (K), the ratio of lief devices are not required for cargo specific heats of the vapor. If (K) is unknown, let C = 315. tanks designed to be loaded by vacuum C = 520[K(2/(K ++ 1))[(K ∂ 1)/(K¥1)]]0.5 or built to withstand full vacuum. Where: (c) Pressure settings of relief valves. The setting of the pressure relief de- K = Cp / Cv Cp = The specific heat at constant pressure, vices must be in accordance with in -calories per gram degree centigrade § 178.345–10(d), except as provided in (BTU/lb °F.); and paragraph (d)(3) of this section. Cv = The specific heat at constant volume, in (d) Venting capacities. (1) The vacuum -calories per gram degree centigrade relief system must limit the vacuum to (BTU/lb °F.). less than 80 percent of the design vacu- [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989, as um capability of the cargo tank. amended at 55 FR 37065, Sept. 7, 1990; Amdt. (2) If pressure loading or unloading 178–104, 59 FR 49135, Sept. 26, 1994. Redesig- nated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, Apr. 29, devices are provided, the pressure relief 1996; 72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007; 72 FR 59146, system must have adequate vapor and Oct. 18, 2007] liquid capacity to limit tank pressure to the cargo tank test pressure at the § 178.348–5 Pressure and leakage test. maximum loading or unloading rate. (a) Each cargo tank must be tested in The maximum loading and unloading accordance with § 178.345–13 and this rates must be included on the metal section. specification plate. (b) Pressure test. Test pressure must (3) Cargo tanks used in dedicated be as follows: service for materials classed as corro- (1) Using the hydrostatic test meth- sive material, with no secondary haz- od, the test pressure must be at least ard, may have a total venting capacity 1.5 times MAWP. which is less than required by § 178.345– (2) Using the pneumatic test method, 10(e). The minimum total venting ca- the test pressure must be at least 1.5 pacity for these cargo tanks must be times tank MAWP, and the inspection determined in accordance with the fol- pressure is tank MAWP. lowing formula (use of approximate [Amdt. 178–89, 54 FR 25032, June 12, 1989. Re- values given for the formula is accept- designated by Amdt. 178–112, 61 FR 18934, able): Apr. 29, 1996]

187

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00197 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.350 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

Subpart K—Specifications for (vii) ‘‘7’’ means a pressure receptacle. Packagings for Class 7 (Ra- (2) A capital letter indicating the material of construction, as follows: dioactive) Materials (i) ‘‘A’’ means steel (all types and § 178.350 Specification 7A; general surface treatments). packaging, Type A. (ii) ‘‘B’’ means aluminum. (iii) ‘‘C’’ means natural wood. (a) Each packaging must meet all ap- (iv) ‘‘D’’ means plywood. plicable requirements of subpart B of (v) ‘‘F’’ means reconstituted wood. part 173 of this subchapter and be de- (vi) ‘‘G’’ means fiberboard. signed and constructed so that it meets (vii) ‘‘H’’ means plastic. the requirements of §§ 173.403, 173.410, (viii) ‘‘L’’ means textile. 173.412, 173.415 and 173.465 of this sub- (ix) ‘‘M’’ means paper, multi-wall. chapter for Type A packaging. (x) ‘‘N’’ means metal (other than (b) Each Specification 7A packaging steel or aluminum). must be marked on the outside ‘‘USA (xi) ‘‘P’’ means glass, porcelain or DOT 7A Type A.’’ stoneware. (c) Each Specification 7A packaging (3) A numeral indicating the category must comply with the requirements of of packaging within the kind to which §§ 178.2 and 178.3. In § 178.3(a)(2) the term the packaging belongs. For example, ‘‘packaging manufacturer’’ means the for steel drums (‘‘1A’’), ‘‘1’’ indicates a person certifying that the package non-removable head drum ( i.e., ‘‘1A1’’) meets all requirements of this section. and ‘‘2’’ indicates a removable head [Amdt. 178–109, 60 FR 50336, Sept. 28, 1995; 60 drum (i.e., ‘‘1A2’’). FR 54409, Oct. 23, 1995, as amended at 69 FR (b) For composite packagings, two 3696, Jan. 26, 2004; 70 FR 56099, Sept. 23, 2005; capital letters are used in sequence in 79 FR 40618, July 11, 2014] the second position of the code, the first indicating the material of the Subpart L—Non-bulk Perform- inner receptacle and the second, that of ance-Oriented Packaging the outer packaging. For example, a Standards plastic receptacle in a steel drum is designated ‘‘6HA1’’. (c) For combination packagings, only SOURCE: Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, unless otherwise noted. the code number for the outer packaging is used. § 178.500 Purpose, scope and defini- (d) Identification codes are set forth tions. in the standards for packagings in (a) This subpart prescribes certain re- §§ 178.504 through 178.523 of this sub- quirements for non-bulk packagings for part. hazardous materials. Standards for NOTE TO § 178.502: Plastics materials in- these packagings are based on the UN clude other polymeric materials such as rub- Recommendations. ber. (b) Terms used in this subpart are de- [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as fined in § 171.8 of this subchapter. amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67519, Dec. 29, 1994; 74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009] § 178.502 Identification codes for packagings. § 178.503 Marking of packagings. (a) Identification codes for desig- (a) A manufacturer must mark every nating kinds of packagings consist of packaging that is represented as manu- the following: factured to meet a UN standard with (1) A numeral indicating the kind of the marks specified in this section. The packaging, as follows: markings must be durable, legible and (i) ‘‘1’’ means a drum. placed in a location and of such a size (ii) ‘‘2’’ means a wooden barrel. relative to the packaging as to be read- (iii) ‘‘3’’ means a jerrican. ily visible, as specified in § 178.3(a). Ex- (iv) ‘‘4’’ means a box. cept as otherwise provided in this sec- (v) ‘‘5’’ means a bag. tion, every reusable packaging liable (vi) ‘‘6’’ means a composite pack- to undergo a reconditioning process aging. which might obliterate the packaging

188

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00198 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.503

marks must bear the marks specified designation shall be the maximum in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) and gross mass in kilograms; (a)(9) of this section in a permanent (5)(i) For single and composite pack- form (e.g. embossed) able to withstand agings intended to contain liquids, the the reconditioning process. A marking test pressure in kilopascals rounded may be applied in a single line or in down to the nearest 10 kPa of the hy- multiple lines provided the correct se- drostatic pressure test that the pack- quence is used. As illustrated by the aging design type has successfully examples in paragraph (e) of this sec- passed; tion, the following information must (ii) For packagings intended to con- be presented in the correct sequence. tain solids or inner packagings, the let- Slash marks should be used to separate ter ‘‘S’’; this information. A packaging con- (6) The last two digits of the year of forming to a UN standard must be manufacture. Packagings of types 1H marked as follows: and 3H shall also be marked with the (1) Except as provided in paragraph month of manufacture in any appro- (e)(1)(ii) of this section, the United Na- priate manner; this may be marked on tions symbol as illustrated in para- the packaging in a different place from graph (e)(1)(i) of this section (for em- the remainder of the markings; bossed metal receptacles, the letters (7) The state authorizing allocation ‘‘UN’’ may be applied in place of the of the mark. The letters ‘USA’ indicate symbol); that the packaging is manufactured (2) A packaging identification code and marked in the United States in designating the type of packaging, the compliance with the provisions of this material of construction and, when ap- subchapter; propriate, the category of packaging (8) The name and address or symbol under §§ 178.504 through 178.523 of this of the manufacturer or the approval subpart within the type to which the agency certifying compliance with sub- packaging belongs. The letter ‘‘V’’ part L and subpart M of this part. must follow the packaging identifica- Symbols, if used, must be registered tion code on packagings tested in ac- with the Associate Administrator; cordance with § 178.601(g)(2); for exam- (9) For metal or plastic drums or ple, ‘‘4GV’’. The letter ‘‘W’’ must fol- jerricans intended for reuse or recondi- low the packaging identification code tioning as single packagings or the on packagings when required by an ap- outer packagings of a composite pack- proval under the provisions of aging, the thickness of the packaging § 178.601(h) of this part; material, expressed in mm (rounded to the nearest 0.1 mm), as follows: (3) A letter identifying the perform- (i) Metal drums or jerricans must be ance standard under which the pack- marked with the nominal thickness of aging design type has been successfully the metal used in the body. The tested, as follows: marked nominal thickness must not (i) X—for packagings meeting Pack- exceed the minimum thickness of the ing Group I, II and III tests; steel used by more than the thickness (ii) Y—for packagings meeting Pack- tolerance stated in ISO 3574 (IBR, see ing Group II and III tests; or § 171.7 of this subchapter). (See appen- (iii) Z—for packagings only meeting dix C of this part.) The unit of measure Packing Group III tests; is not required to be marked. When the (4) A designation of the specific grav- nominal thickness of either head of a ity or mass for which the packaging de- metal drum is thinner than that of the sign type has been tested, as follows: body, the nominal thickness of the top (i) For packagings without inner head, body, and bottom head must be packagings intended to contain liquids, marked (e.g., ‘‘1.0–1.2–1.0’’ or ‘‘0.9–1.0– the designation shall be the specific 1.0’’). gravity rounded down to the first dec- (ii) Plastic drums or jerricans must imal but may be omitted when the spe- be marked with the minimum thick- cific gravity does not exceed 1.2; and ness of the packaging material. Min- (ii) For packagings intended to con- imum thicknesses of plastic must be as tain solids or inner packagings, the determined in accordance with

189

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00199 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.503 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

§ 173.28(b)(4). The unit of measure is not (iii) The last two digits of the year of required to be marked; reconditioning; (10) In addition to the markings pre- (iv) The letter ‘‘R’’; and scribed in paragraphs (a)(1) through (v) For every packaging successfully (a)(9) of this section, every new metal passing a leakproofness test, the addi- drum having a capacity greater than tional letter ‘‘L’’. 100 L must bear the marks described in (2) When, after reconditioning, the paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6), and markings required by paragraph (a)(1) (a)(9)(i) of this section, in a permanent through (a)(5) of this section no longer form, on the bottom. The markings on appear on the top head or the side of the top head or side of these pack- the metal drum, the reconditioner agings need not be permanent, and must apply them in a durable form fol- need not include the thickness mark lowed by the markings in paragraph described in paragraph (a)(9) of this (c)(1) of this section. These markings section. This marking indicates a may identify a different performance drum’s characteristics at the time it capability than that for which the was manufactured, and the information original design type had been tested in paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(6) of and marked, but may not identify a this section that is marked on the top greater performance capability. The head or side must be the same as the markings applied in accordance with information in paragraphs (a)(1) this paragraph may be different from through (a)(6) of this section perma- those which are permanently marked nently marked by the original manu- on the bottom of a drum in accordance facturer on the bottom of the drum; with paragraph (a)(10) of this section. and (d) Marking of remanufactured pack- (11) Rated capacity of the packaging agings. For remanufactured metal expressed in liters may be marked. drums, if there is no change to the (b) For a packaging with a removable packaging type and no replacement or head, the markings may not be applied removal of integral structural compo- only to the removable head. nents, the required markings need not (c) Marking of reconditioned pack- be permanent (e.g., embossed). Every agings. (1) If a packaging is recondi- other remanufactured drum must bear tioned, it shall be marked by the re- the marks required in paragraphs (a)(1) conditioner near the marks required in through (a)(6) of this section in a per- paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this manent form (e.g., embossed) on the section with the following additional top head or side. If the metal thickness information: marking required in paragraph (a)(9)(i) (i) The name of the country in which of this section does not appear on the the reconditioning was performed (in bottom of the drum, or if it is no the United States, use the letters longer valid, the remanufacturer also ‘‘USA’’); must mark this information in perma- (ii) The name and address or symbol nent form. of the reconditioner. Symbols, if used, (e) The following are examples of sym- must be registered with the Associate bols and required markings. Administrator; (1)(i) The United Nations symbol is:

190

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00200 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER05OC12.059 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.503

(ii) The circle that surrounds the let- circumference of the circle (72 degrees); ters ‘‘u’’ and ‘‘n’’ may have small and breaks provided the following provi- D) The letters ‘‘u’’ and ‘‘n’’ appear sions are met: exactly as depicted in § 178.503(e)(1)(i) (A) The total gap space does not ex- with no gaps. ceed 15 percent of the circumference of (2) Examples of markings for a new the circle; packaging are as follows: (B) There are no more than four gaps (i) For a fiberboard box designed to in the circle; contain an inner packaging: C) The spacing between gaps is separated by no less than 20 percent of the

(as in § 178.503 (a)(1) through (9) of this (ii) For a steel drum designed to con- subpart). tain liquids:

(as in § 178.503 (a)(1) through (10) of this (iii) For a steel drum to transport subpart). solids or inner packagings:

191

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00201 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER05OC12.060 ER05OC12.061 ER05OC12.062 § 178.504 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(as in § 178.503 (a)(1) through (8) of this (3) Examples of markings for recondi- subpart). tioned packagings are as follows:

(as in § 178.503(c)(1)). quired in paragraph (f)(2) of this sec- (f) A manufacturer must mark every tion. UN specification package represented [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as as manufactured to meet the require- amended at 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. ments of § 178.609 for packaging of in- 178–102, 59 FR 28493, June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178– fectious substances with the marks 106, 59 FR 67520, 67521, Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. specified in this section. The markings 178–107, 60 FR 26806, May 18, 1995; 62 FR 51561, must be durable, legible, and must be Oct. 1, 1997; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 67 FR 53143, Aug. 14, 2002; readily visible, as specified in § 178.3(a). 68 FR 75757, Dec. 31, 2003; 75 FR 5395, Feb. 2, An infectious substance packaging that 2010; 75 FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 77 FR 60943, successfully passes the tests con- Oct. 5, 2012; 78 FR 60755, Oct. 2, 2013] forming to the UN standard must be marked as follows: § 178.504 Standards for steel drums. (1) The United Nations symbol as il- (a) The following are identification lustrated in paragraph (e) of this sec- codes for steel drums: tion. (1) 1A1 for a non-removable head (2) The code designating the type of steel drum; and packaging and material of construc- (2) 1A2 for a removable head steel tion according to the identification drum. codes for packagings specified in (b) Construction requirements for § 178.502. steel drums are as follows: (3) The text ‘‘CLASS 6.2’’. (1) Body and heads must be con- (4) The last two digits of the year of structed of steel sheet of suitable type manufacture of the packaging. and adequate thickness in relation to (5) The country authorizing the allo- the capacity and intended use of the cation of the mark. The letters ‘‘USA’’ drum. Minimum thickness and mark- indicate the packaging is manufac- ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and tured and marked in the United States 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to in compliance with the provisions of drums intended for reuse. this subchapter. (2) Body seams must be welded on (6) The name and address or symbol drums designed to contain more than of the manufacturer or the approval 40 L (11 gallons) of liquids. Body seams must be mechanically seamed or weld- agency certifying compliance with sub- ed on drums intended to contain only parts L and M of this part. Symbols, if solids or 40 L (11 gallons) or less of liq- used, must be registered with the Asso- uids. ciate Administrator for Hazardous Ma- (3) Chimes must be mechanically terials Safety. seamed or welded. Separate reinforcing (7) For packagings meeting the re- rings may be applied. quirements of § 178.609(i)(3), the letter (4) The body of a drum of a capacity ‘‘U’’ must be inserted immediately fol- greater than 60 L (16 gallons) may have lowing the marking designating the at least two expanded rolling hoops or type of packaging and material re- two separate rolling hoops. If there are separate rolling hoops, they must be

192

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00202 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER05OC12.063 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.506

fitted tightly on the body and so se- ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and cured that they cannot shift. Rolling 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to hoops may not be spot-welded. drums intended for reuse. (5) Openings for filling, emptying and (2) All seams must be welded. Chime venting in the bodies or heads of non- seams, if any, must be reinforced by removable head (1A1) drums may not the application of separate reinforcing exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter. rings. Drums with larger openings are consid- (3) The body of a drum of a capacity ered to be of the removable head type greater than 60 L (16 gallons) may have (1A2). Closures for openings in the bod- at least two expanded rolling hoops or ies and heads of drums must be so de- two separate rolling hoops. If there are signed and applied that they will re- separate rolling hoops, the hoops must main secure and leakproof under nor- be fitted tightly on the body and so se- mal conditions of transport. Closure cured that they cannot shift. Rolling flanges may be mechanically seamed or hoops may not be spot-welded. welded in place. Gaskets or other seal- (4) Openings for filling, emptying, or ing elements must be used with clo- venting in the bodies or heads of non- sures unless the closure is inherently removable head (1B1) drums may not leakproof. exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter. (6) Closure devices for removable Drums with larger openings are consid- head drums must be so designed and ered to be of the removable head type applied that they will remain secure (1B2). Closures for openings in the bod- and drums will remain leakproof under ies and heads of drums must be so de- normal conditions of transport. Gas- signed and applied that they will re- kets or other sealing elements must be main secure and leakproof under nor- used with all removable heads. mal conditions of transport. Closure (7) If materials used for body, heads, flanges may be welded in place so that closures, and fittings are not in them- the weld provides a leakproof seam. selves compatible with the contents to Gaskets or other sealing elements be transported, suitable internal pro- must be used with closures unless the tective coatings or treatments must be closure is inherently leakproof. applied. These coatings or treatments (5) Closure devices for removable must retain their protective properties head drums must be so designed and under normal conditions of transport. applied that they remain secure and (8) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L drums remain leakproof under normal (119 gallons). conditions of transport. Gaskets or (9) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 other sealing elements must be used pounds). with all removable heads. [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as (6) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L amended at 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. (119 gallons). 178–110, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21, 1995] (7) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds). § 178.505 Standards for aluminum drums. [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as (a) The following are the identifica- amended at 56 FR 66284, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. tion codes for aluminum drums: 178–102, 59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994] (1) 1B1 for a non-removable head alu- § 178.506 Standards for metal drums minum drum; and other than steel or aluminum. (2) 1B2 for a removable head aluminum drum. (a) The following are the identifica- (b) Construction requirements for tion codes for metal drums other than aluminum drums are as follows: steel or aluminum: (1) Body and heads must be con- (1) 1N1 for a non-removable head structed of aluminum at least 99 per- metal drum; and cent pure or an aluminum base alloy. (2) 1N2 for a removable head metal Material must be of suitable type and drum. adequate thickness in relation to the (b) Construction requirements for capacity and the intended use of the metal drums other than steel or alu- drum. Minimum thickness and mark- minum are as follows:

193

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00203 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.507 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(1) Body and heads must be con- (1) The wood used must be well-sea- structed of metal (other than steel or soned, commercially dry and free from aluminum) of suitable type and ade- any defect likely to lessen the effec- quate thickness in relation to the ca- tiveness of the drum for the purpose in- pacity and the intended use of the tended. A material other than plywood, drum. Minimum thickness and mark- of at least equivalent strength and du- ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and rability, may be used for the manufac- 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to ture of the heads. drums intended for reuse. (2) At least two-ply plywood must be (2) All seams must be welded. Chime used for the body and at least three-ply seams, if any, must be reinforced by plywood for the heads; the plies must the application of separate reinforcing be firmly glued together, with their rings. grains crosswise. (3) The body of a drum of a capacity (3) The body and heads of the drum greater than 60 L (16 gallons) may have and their joints must be of a design ap- at least two expanded rolling hoops or propriate to the capacity of the drum two separate rolling hoops. If there are and its intended use. separate rolling hoops, the hoops must (4) In order to prevent sifting of the be fitted tightly on the body and so se- contents, lids must be lined with kraft cured that they cannot shift. Rolling paper or some other equivalent mate- hoops may not be spot-welded. rial which must be securely fastened to (4) Openings for filling, emptying, or the lid and extend to the outside along venting in the bodies or heads of non- its full circumference. (5) Maximum capacity of drum: 250 L removable head (1N1) drums may not (66 gallons). exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diameter. (6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 Drums with larger openings are consid- pounds). ered to be of the removable head type (1N2). Closures for openings in the bod- [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as ies and heads of drums must be so de- amended at 57 FR 45465, Oct. 1, 1992] signed and applied that they will remain secure and leakproof under nor- § 178.508 Standards for fiber drums. mal conditions of transport. Closure (a) The identification code for a fiber flanges may be welded in place so that drum is 1G. the weld provides a leakproof seam. (b) Construction requirements for Gaskets or other sealing elements fiber drums are as follows: must be used with closures unless the (1) The body of the drum must be closure is inherently leakproof. constructed of multiple plies of heavy (5) Closure devices for removable paper or fiberboard (without corruga- head drums must be so designed and tions) firmly glued or laminated to- applied that they remain secure and gether and may include one or more drums remain leakproof under normal protective layers of bitumen, waxed conditions of transport. Gaskets or kraft paper, metal foil, plastic mate- other sealing elements must be used rial, or similar materials. with all removable heads. (2) Heads must be of natural wood, fi- (6) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L berboard, metal, plywood, plastics, or (119 gallons). other suitable material and may in- (7) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 clude one or more protective layers of pounds). bitumen, waxed kraft paper, metal foil, plastic material, or similar material. [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as (3) The body and heads of the drum amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. and their joints must be of a design ap- 178–102, 59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994] propriate to the capacity and intended use of the drum. § 178.507 Standards for plywood (4) The assembled packaging must be drums. sufficiently water-resistant so as not (a) The identification code for a ply- to delaminate under normal conditions wood drum is 1D. of transport. (b) Construction requirements for (5) Maximum capacity of drum: 450 L plywood drums are as follows: (119 gallons).

194

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00204 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.510

(6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 (4) The wall thickness at every point pounds). of the packaging must be appropriate to its capacity and its intended use, [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. taking into account the stresses to 29, 1994] which each point is liable to be exposed. Minimum thickness and mark- § 178.509 Standards for plastic drums ing requirements in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and and jerricans. 178.503(a)(9) of this subchapter apply to (a) The following are identification drums intended for reuse. codes for plastic drums and jerricans: (5) Openings for filling, emptying and (1) 1H1 for a non-removable head venting in the bodies or heads of non- plastic drum; removable head (1H1) drums and (2) 1H2 for a removable head plastic jerricans (3H1) may not exceed 7.0 cm (3 drum; inches) in diameter. Drums and (3) 3H1 for a non-removable head jerricans with larger openings are con- jerrican; and sidered to be of the removable head (4) 3H2 for a removable head jerrican. type (1H2 and 3H2). Closures for open- (b) Construction requirements for ings in the bodies or heads of drums plastic drums and jerricans are as fol- and jerricans must be so designed and lows: applied that they remain secure and (1) The packaging must be manufac- leakproof under normal conditions of tured from suitable plastic material transport. Gaskets or other sealing ele- and be of adequate strength in relation ments must be used with closures un- to its capacity and intended use. No less the closure is inherently leakproof. used material other than production (6) Closure devices for removable residues or regrind from the same man- head drums and jerricans must be so ufacturing process may be used unless designed and applied that they remain approved by the Associate Adminis- secure and leakproof under normal con- trator. The packaging must be ade- ditions of transport. Gaskets must be quately resistant to aging and to deg- used with all removable heads unless radation caused either by the sub- the drum or jerrican design is such stance contained or by ultra-violet ra- that when the removable head is prop- diation. Any permeation of the sub- erly secured, the drum or jerrican is instance contained may not constitute a herently leakproof. danger under normal conditions of (7) Maximum capacity of drums and transport. jerricans: 1H1, 1H2: 450 L (119 gallons); (2) If protection against ultra-violet 3H1, 3H2: 60 L (16 gallons). radiation is required, it must be pro- (8) Maximum net mass: 1H1, 1H2: 400 vided by the addition of carbon black kg (882 pounds); 3H1, 3H2: 120 kg (265 or other suitable pigments or inhibi- pounds). tors. These additives must be compat- [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as ible with the contents and remain ef- amended by Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494, June fective throughout the life of the pack- 2, 1994; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR 45386, aging. Where use is made of carbon Aug. 28, 2001] black, pigments or inhibitors other than those used in the manufacture of § 178.510 Standards for wooden bar- the design type, retesting may be omit- rels. ted if the carbon black content does (a) The following are identification not exceed 2 percent by mass or if the codes for wooden barrels: pigment content does not exceed 3 per- (1) 2C1 for a bung type wooden barrel; cent by mass; the content of inhibitors and of ultra-violet radiation is not limited. (2) 2C2 for a slack type (removable (3) Additives serving purposes other head) wooden barrel. than protection against ultra-violet ra- (b) Construction requirements for diation may be included in the com- wooden barrels are as follows: position of the plastic material pro- (1) The wood used must be of good vided they do not adversely affect the quality, straight-grained, well-sea- chemical and physical properties of the soned and free from knots, bark, rotten packaging material. wood, sapwood or other defects likely

195

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00205 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.511 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

to lessen the effectiveness of the barrel jerricans intended to carry 40 L (11 gal- for the purpose intended. lons) or less must be mechanically (2) The body and heads must be of a seamed or welded. design appropriate to the capacity and (4) Openings in jerricans (3A1) may intended use of the barrel. not exceed 7.0 cm (3 inches) in diame- (3) Staves and heads must be sawn or ter. Jerricans with larger openings are cleft with the grain so that no annual considered to be of the removable head ring extends over more than half the type. Closures must be so designed that thickness of a stave or head. they remain secure and leakproof (4) Barrel hoops must be of steel or under normal conditions of transport. iron of good quality. The hoops of 2C2 Gaskets or other sealing elements barrels may be of a suitable hardwood. must be used with closures, unless the (5) For wooden barrels 2C1, the di- closure is inherently leakproof. ameter of the bung-hole may not ex- (5) If materials used for body, heads, ceed half the width of the stave in closures and fittings are not in them- which it is placed. selves compatible with the contents to (6) For wooden barrels 2C2, heads be transported, suitable internal pro- must fit tightly into crozes. tective coatings or treatments must be (7) Maximum capacity of barrel: 250 L applied. These coatings or treatments (66 gallons). must retain their protective properties (8) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pounds). under normal conditions of transport. (6) Maximum capacity of jerrican: 60 § 178.511 Standards for aluminum and L (16 gallons). steel jerricans. (7) Maximum net mass: 120 kg (265 (a) The following are identification pounds). codes for aluminum and steel jerricans: [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as (1) 3A1 for a non-removable head amended by Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494, June steel jerrican; 2, 1994; Amdt. 178–119, 62 FR 24742, May 6, (2) 3A2 for a removable head steel 1997] jerrican; (3) 3B1 for a non-removable head alu- § 178.512 Standards for steel, aluminum jerrican; and minum or other metal boxes. (4) 3B2 for a removable head alu- (a) The following are identification minum jerrican. codes for steel, aluminum, or other (b) Construction requirements for metal boxes: aluminum and steel jerricans are as (1) 4A for a steel box; follows: (2) 4B for an aluminum box; and (1) For steel jerricans the body and (3) 4N for an other metal box. heads must be constructed of steel sheet of suitable type and adequate (b) Construction requirements for thickness in relation to the capacity of steel, aluminum or other metal boxes the jerrican and its intended use. Min- are as follows: imum thickness and marking require- (1) The strength of the metal and the ments in §§ 173.28(b)(4) and 178.503(a)(9) construction of the box must be appro- of this subchapter apply to jerricans priate to the capacity and intended use intended for reuse. of the box. (2) For aluminum jerricans the body (2) Boxes must be lined with fiber- and heads must be constructed of alu- board or felt packing pieces or must minum at least 99% pure or of an alu- have an inner liner or coating of suit- minum base alloy. Material must be of able material in accordance with sub- a type and of adequate thickness in re- part C of part 173 of this subchapter. If lation to the capacity of the jerrican a double seamed metal liner is used, and to its intended use. steps must be taken to prevent the in- (3) Chimes of all jerricans must be gress of materials, particularly explo- mechanically seamed or welded. Body sives, into the recesses of the seams. seams of jerricans intended to carry (3) Closures may be of any suitable more than 40 L (11 gallons) of liquid type, and must remain secure under must be welded. Body seams of normal conditions of transport.

196

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00206 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.516

(4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 material used and the method of con- pounds). struction must be appropriate to the capacity and intended use of the box. [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. All adjacent plies must be glued with 29, 1994; 78 FR 1096, Jan. 7, 2013] water-resistant adhesive. Other suitable materials may be used together § 178.513 Standards for boxes of nat- with plywood in the construction of ural wood. boxes. Boxes must be nailed or secured (a) The following are the identifica- to corner posts or ends or assembled tion codes for boxes of natural wood: with other equally suitable devices. (1) 4C1 for an ordinary box; and (2) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 (2) 4C2 for a box with sift-proof walls. pounds). (b) Construction requirements for boxes of natural wood are as follows: § 178.515 Standards for reconstituted (1) The wood used must be well-sea- wood boxes. soned, commercially dry and free from (a) The identification code for a re- defects that would materially lessen constituted wood box is 4F. the strength of any part of the box. The (b) Construction requirements for re- strength of the material used and the constituted wood boxes are as follows: method of construction must be appro- (1) The walls of boxes must be made priate to the capacity and intended use of water-resistant, reconstituted wood of the box. The tops and bottoms may such as hardboard, particle board, or be made of water-resistant reconsti- other suitable type. The strength of tuted wood such as hard board, particle the material used and the method of board or other suitable type. (2) Fastenings must be resistant to construction must be appropriate to vibration experienced under normal the capacity of the boxes and their in- conditions of transportation. End grain tended use. nailing must be avoided whenever prac- (2) Other parts of the box may be ticable. Joints which are likely to be made of other suitable materials. highly stressed must be made using (3) Boxes must be securely assembled clenched or annular ring nails or equiv- by means of suitable devices. alent fastenings. (4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 (3) Each part of the 4C2 box must be pounds). one piece or equivalent. Parts are considered equivalent to one piece when § 178.516 Standards for fiberboard one of the following methods of glued boxes. assembly is used: Linderman joint, (a) The identification code for a fi- tongue and groove joint, ship lap or berboard box is 4G. rabbet joint, or butt joint with at least (b) Construction requirements for fi- two corrugated metal fasteners at each berboard boxes are as follows: joint. (1) Strong, solid or double-faced cor- (4) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 rugated fiberboard (single or multi- pounds). wall) must be used, appropriate to the [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as capacity and intended use of the box. amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. The water resistance of the outer sur- 29, 1994] face must be such that the increase in mass, as determined in a test carried § 178.514 Standards for plywood boxes. out over a period of 30 minutes by the (a) The identification code for a ply- Cobb method of determining water ab- wood box is 4D. sorption, is not greater than 155 g per (b) Construction requirements for square meter (0.0316 pounds per square plywood boxes are as follows: foot)—see ISO 535 (IBR, see § 171.7 of (1) Plywood used must be at least 3 this subchapter). Fiberboard must have ply. It shall be made from well-sea- proper bending qualities. Fiberboard soned rotary cut, sliced or sawn veneer, must be cut, creased without cutting commercially dry and free from defects through any thickness of fiberboard, that would materially lessen the and slotted so as to permit assembly strength of the box. The strength of the without cracking, surface breaks, or

197

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00207 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.517 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

undue bending. The fluting of cor- tion containing cavities for the inner rugated fiberboard must be firmly receptacles, and a top section covering glued to the facings. and interlocking with the bottom sec- (2) The ends of boxes may have a tion. The top and bottom sections must wooden frame or be entirely of wood or be so designed that the inner recep- other suitable material. Reinforce- tacles fit snugly. The closure cap for ments of wooden battens or other suit- any inner receptacle may not be in able material may be used. contact with the inside of the top sec- (3) Manufacturing joints. (i) Manu- tion of the box. facturing joints in the bodies of boxes (3) For transportation, an expanded must be— plastic box must be closed with a self- (A) Taped; adhesive tape having sufficient tensile (B) Lapped and glued; or strength to prevent the box from open- (C) Lapped and stitched with metal ing. The adhesive tape must be weath- staples. er-resistant and its adhesive compat- (ii) Lapped joints must have an ap- ible with the expanded plastic material propriate overlap. of the box. Other closing devices at (4) Where closing is effected by glu- least equally effective may be used. ing or taping, a water resistant adhe- (4) For solid plastic boxes, protection sive must be used. against ultra-violet radiation, if re- (5) Boxes must be designed so as to quired, must be provided by the addi- provide a snug fit to the contents. tion of carbon black or other suitable (6) Maximum net mass: 400 kg (882 pigments or inhibitors. These additives pounds). must be compatible with the contents (7) Authorization to manufacture, and remain effective throughout the mark, and sell UN4G combination life of the box. Where use is made of packagings with outer fiberboard boxes carbon black pigment or inhibitors and with inner fiberboard components other than those used in the manufac- that have individual containerboard or ture of the tested design type, re- paper wall basis weights that vary by testing may be waived if the carbon not more than plus or minus 10% from black content does not exceed 2 percent the nominal basis weight reported in by mass or if the pigment content does the initial design qualification test re- not exceed 3 percent by mass; the con- port. tent of inhibitors of ultra-violet radi- [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as ation is not limited. amended by Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, (5) Additives serving purposes other 1993; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994; than protection against ultra-violet ra- 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 79 FR 15046, Mar. 18, diation may be included in the com- 2014; 83 FR 55810, Nov. 7, 2018] position of the plastic material if they § 178.517 Standards for plastic boxes. do not adversely affect the material of the box. Addition of these additives (a) The following are identification does not change the design type. codes for plastic boxes: (1) 4H1 for an expanded plastic box; (6) Solid plastic boxes must have clo- and sure devices made of a suitable mate- (2) 4H2 for a solid plastic box. rial of adequate strength and so de- (b) Construction requirements for signed as to prevent the box from unin- plastic boxes are as follows: tentionally opening. (1) The box must be manufactured (7) Maximum net mass 4H1: 60 kg (132 from suitable plastic material and be pounds); 4H2: 400 kg (882 pounds). of adequate strength in relation to its capacity and intended use. The box § 178.518 Standards for woven plastic bags. must be adequately resistant to aging and to degradation caused either by (a) The following are identification the substance contained or by ultra- codes for woven plastic bags: violet radiation. (1) 5H1 for an unlined or non-coated (2) An expanded plastic box must con- woven plastic bag; sist of two parts made of a molded ex- (2) 5H2 for a sift-proof woven plastic panded plastic material: a bottom sec- bag; and

198

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00208 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.521

(3) 5H3 for a water-resistant woven § 178.520 Standards for textile bags. plastic bag. (a) The following are identification (b) Construction requirements for codes for textile bags: woven plastic fabric bags are as fol- (1) 5L1 for an unlined or non-coated lows: textile bag; (1) Bags must be made from stretched (2) 5L2 for a sift-proof textile bag; tapes or monofilaments of a suitable and plastic material. The strength of the (3) 5L3 for a water-resistant textile material used and the construction of bag. the bag must be appropriate to the ca- (b) Construction requirements for pacity and intended use of the bag. textile bags are as follows: (2) If the fabric is woven flat, the (1) The textiles used must be of good bags must be made by sewing or some quality. The strength of the fabric and other method ensuring closure of the the construction of the bag must be ap- bottom and one side. If the fabric is tu- propriate to the capacity and intended bular, the bag must be closed by sew- use of the bag. ing, weaving, or some other equally (2) Bags, sift-proof, 5L2: The bag strong method of closure. must be made sift-proof, by appropriate (3) Bags, sift-proof, 5H2 must be made means, such as by the use of paper sift-proof by appropriate means such as bonded to the inner surface of the bag use of paper or a plastic film bonded to by a water-resistant adhesive such as the inner surface of the bag or one or bitumen, plastic film bonded to the more separate inner liners made of inner surface of the bag, or one or more paper or plastic material. inner liners made of paper or plastic (4) Bags, water-resistant, 5H3: To pre- material. vent the entry of moisture, the bag (3) Bags, water-resistant, 5L3: To pre- must be made waterproof by appro- vent entry of moisture, the bag must priate means, such as separate inner be made waterproof by appropriate liners of water-resistant paper (e.g., means, such as by the use of separate waxed kraft paper, double-tarred kraft inner liners of water-resistant paper paper or plastic-coated kraft paper), or (e.g., waxed kraft paper, tarred paper, plastic film bonded to the inner or or plastic-coated kraft paper), or plas- outer surface of the bag, or one or more tic film bonded to the inner surface of inner plastic liners. the bag, or one or more inner liners (5) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 made of plastic material or metalized pounds). film or foil. (4) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as pounds). amended by Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993] [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991] § 178.519 Standards for plastic film bags. § 178.521 Standards for paper bags. (a) The identification code for a plas- (a) The following are identification tic film bag is 5H4. codes for paper bags: (b) Construction requirements for (1) 5M1 for a multi-wall paper bag; plastic film bags are as follows: and (1) Bags must be made of a suitable (2) 5M2 for a multi-wall water-resist- plastic material. The strength of the ant paper bag. material used and the construction of (b) Construction requirements for the bag must be appropriate to the ca- paper bags are as follows: pacity and the intended use of the bag. (1) Bags must be made of a suitable Joints and closures must be capable of kraft paper, or of an equivalent paper withstanding pressures and impacts with at least three plies. The strength liable to occur under normal conditions of the paper and the construction of of transportation. the bag must be appropriate to the ca- (2) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 pacity and intended use of the bag. pounds). Seams and closures must be sift-proof.

199

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00209 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.522 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(2) Paper bags 5M2: To prevent the (11) 6HH2 for a plastic receptacle entry of moisture, a bag of four plies or within a protective plastic box. more must be made waterproof by the (b) Construction requirements for use of either a water-resistant ply as composite packagings with inner re- one of the two outermost plies or a ceptacles of plastic are as follows: water-resistant barrier made of a suit- (1) Inner receptacles must be con- able protective material between the structed under the applicable construc- two outermost plies. A 5M2 bag of tion requirements prescribed in three plies must be made waterproof by § 178.509(b) (1) through (7) of this sub- the use of a water-resistant ply as the part. outermost ply. When there is danger of (2) The inner plastic receptacle must the lading reacting with moisture, or fit snugly inside the outer packaging, when it is packed damp, a waterproof which must be free of any projections ply or barrier, such as double-tarred which may abrade the plastic material. kraft paper, plastics-coated kraft paper, plastics film bonded to the inner (3) Outer packagings must be con- surface of the bag, or one or more inner structed as follows: plastics liners, must also be placed (i) 6HA1 or 6HB1: Protective pack- next to the substance. Seams and clo- aging must conform to the require- sures must be waterproof. ments for steel drums in § 178.504(b) of (3) Maximum net mass: 50 kg (110 this subpart, or aluminum drums in pounds). § 178.505(b) of this subpart. (4) UN5M1 and UN5M2 multi wall (ii) 6HA2 or 6HB2: Protective pack- paper bags that have paper wall basis agings with steel or aluminum crate weights that vary by not more than must conform to the requirements for plus or minus 5% from the nominal steel or aluminum boxes found in basis weight reported in the initial de- § 178.512(b) of this subpart. sign qualification test report. (iii) 6HC protective packaging must [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as conform to the requirements for wood- amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. en boxes in § 178.513(b) of this subpart. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. 29, 1994; 79 FR 15046, (iv) 6HD1: Protective packaging must Mar. 18, 2014] conform to the requirements for plywood drums, in § 178.507(b) of this sub- § 178.522 Standards for composite part. packagings with inner plastic receptacles. (v) 6HD2: Protective packaging must conform to the requirements of ply- (a) The following are the identifica- wood boxes, in § 178.514(b) of this sub- tion codes for composite packagings part. with inner plastic receptacles: (vi) 6HG1: Protective packaging must (1) 6HA1 for a plastic receptacle with- conform to the requirements for fiber in a protective steel drum; drums, in § 178.508(b) of this subpart. (2) 6HA2 for a plastic receptacle with- (vii) 6HG2: protective packaging in a protective steel crate or box; must conform to the requirements for (3) 6HB1 for a plastic receptacle with- fiberboard boxes, in § 178.516(b) of this in a protective aluminum drum. subpart. (4) 6HB2 for a plastic receptacle within a protective aluminum crate or box. (viii) 6HH1: Protective packaging (5) 6HC for a plastic receptacle within must conform to the requirements for a protective wooden box. plastic drums, in § 178.509(b). (6) 6HD1 for a plastic receptacle with- (ix) 6HH2: Protective packaging must in a protective plywood drum; conform to the requirements for plastic (7) 6HD2 for a plastic receptacle with- boxes, in § 178.517(b). in a protective plywood box; (4) Maximum capacity of inner recep- (8) 6HG1 for a plastic receptacle with- tacles is as follows: 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, in a protective fiber drum; 6HG1, 6HH1—250 L (66 gallons); 6HA2, (9) 6HG2 for a plastic receptacle with- 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, 6HH2—60 L (16 in a protective fiberboard box; gallons). (10) 6HH1 for a plastic receptacle (5) Maximum net mass is as follows: within a protective plastic drum; and 6HA1, 6HB1, 6HD1, 6HG1, 6HH1—400kg

200

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00210 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.523

(882 pounds); 6HB2, 6HC, 6HD2, 6HG2, (ii) Any part of a closure likely to 6HH2—75 kg (165 pounds). come into contact with the contents of the receptacle must be resistant to [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as amended by Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, Dec. those contents. Closures must be fitted 29, 1994] so as to be leakproof and secured to prevent any loosening during transpor- § 178.523 Standards for composite tation. Vented closures must conform packagings with inner glass, por- to § 173.24(f) of this subchapter. celain, or stoneware receptacles. (2) Protective packagings must con- (a) The following are identification form to the following requirements: codes for composite packagings with (i) For receptacles with protective inner receptacles of glass, porcelain, or steel drum 6PAl, the drum must com- stoneware: ply with § 178.504(b) of this subpart. (1) 6PA1 for glass, porcelain, or stone- However, the removable lid required ware receptacles within a protective for this type of packaging may be in steel drum; the form of a cap. (2) 6PA2 for glass, porcelain, or stone- (ii) For receptacles with protective ware receptacles within a protective packaging of steel crate or steel box steel crate or box; 6PA2, the protective packaging must conform to the following: (3) 6PB1 for glass, porcelain, or stone- (A) Section 178.512(b) of this subpart. ware receptacles within a protective (B) In the case of cylindrical recep- aluminum drum; tacles, the protective packaging must, (4) 6PB2 for glass, porcelain, or stone- when upright, rise above the receptacle ware receptacles within a protective and its closure; and aluminum crate or box; (C) If the protective crate surrounds (5) 6PC for glass, porcelain, or stone- a pear-shaped receptacle and is of ware receptacles within a protective matching shape, the protective pack- wooden box; aging must be fitted with a protective (6) 6PD1 for glass, porcelain, or stone- cover (cap). ware receptacles within a protective (iii) For receptacles with protective plywood drum; aluminum drum 6PB1, the require- (7) 6PD2 for glass, porcelain, or stone- ments of § 178.505(b) of this subpart ware receptacles within a protective apply to the protective packaging. wickerwork hamper; (iv) For receptacles with protective (8) 6PG1 for glass, porcelain, or stone- aluminum box or crate 6PB2, the re- ware receptacles within a protective quirements of § 178.512(b) of this sub- fiber drum; part apply to the protective packaging. (9) 6PG2 for glass, porcelain, or stone- (v) For receptacles with protective ware receptacles within a protective fi- wooden box 6PC, the requirements of berboard box; § 178.513(b) of this subpart apply to the (10) 6PH1 for glass, porcelain, or protective packaging. stoneware receptacles within a protec- (vi) For receptacles with protective tive expanded plastic packaging; and plywood drum 6PD1, the requirements (11) 6PH2 for glass, porcelain, or of § 178.507(b) of this subpart apply to stoneware receptacles within a protec- the protective packaging. tive solid plastic packaging. (vii) For receptacles with protective (b) Construction requirements for wickerwork hamper 6PD2, the composite packagings with inner re- wickerwork hamper must be properly ceptacles of glass, porcelain, or stone- made with material of good quality. ware are as follows: The hamper must be fitted with a pro- (1) Inner receptacles must conform to tective cover (cap) so as to prevent the following requirements: damage to the receptacle. (i) Receptacles must be of suitable (viii) For receptacles with protective form (cylindrical or pear-shaped), be fiber drum 6PG1, the drum must con- made of good quality materials free form to the requirements of § 178.508(b) from any defect that could impair their of this subpart. strength, and be firmly secured in the (ix) For receptacles with protective outer packaging. fiberboard box 6PG2, the requirements

201

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00211 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.600 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

of § 178.516(b) of this subpart apply to with §§ 173.22 and 178.2 of this sub- the protective packaging. chapter. (x) For receptacles with protective (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this solid plastic or expanded plastic pack- subpart: aging 6PH1 or 6PH2, the requirements (1) Design qualification testing is the of § 178.517(b) of this subpart apply to performance of the tests prescribed in the protective packaging. Solid protec- § 178.603, § 178.604, § 178.605, § 178.606, tive plastic packaging must be manu- § 178.607, § 178.608, or § 178.609, as applica- factured from high-density poly- ble, for each new or different pack- ethylene from some other comparable aging, at the start of production of plastic material. The removable lid re- that packaging. quired for this type of packaging may (2) Periodic retesting is the perform- be a cap. ance of the drop, leakproofness, hydro- (3) Quantity limitations are as fol- static pressure, and stacking tests, as lows: applicable, as prescribed in § 178.603, (i) Maximum net capacity for pack- § 178.604, § 178.605, or § 178.606, respec- aging for liquids: 60 L (16 gallons). tively, at the frequency specified in (ii) Maximum net mass for pack- paragraph (e) of this section. For infec- agings for solids: 75 kg (165 pounds). tious substances packagings required to meet the requirements of § 178.609, Subpart M—Testing of Non-bulk periodic retesting is the performance of Packagings and Packages the tests specified in § 178.609 at the frequency specified in paragraph (e) of SOURCE: Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, this section. 1990, unless otherwise noted. (3) Production testing is the performance of the leakproofness test pre- § 178.600 Purpose and scope. scribed in § 178.604 of this subpart on This subpart prescribes certain test- each single or composite packaging in- ing requirements for performance-ori- tended to contain a liquid. ented packagings identified in subpart (4) A different packaging is one that L of this part. differs (i.e., is not identical) from a previously produced packaging in struc- [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52717, Dec. 21, 1990, as tural design, size, material of construc- amended by Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, tion, wall thickness or manner of con- 1993] struction but does not include: § 178.601 General requirements. (i) A packaging which differs only in surface treatment; (a) General. The test procedures prescribed in this subpart are intended to (ii) A combination packaging which ensure that packages containing haz- differs only in that the outer pack- ardous materials can withstand normal aging has been successfully tested with conditions of transportation and are different inner packagings. A variety of considered minimum requirements. such inner packagings may be assem- Each packaging must be manufactured bled in this outer packaging without and assembled so as to be capable of further testing; successfully passing the prescribed (iii) A plastic packaging which differs tests and of conforming to the require- only with regard to additives which ments of § 173.24 of this subchapter at conform to § 178.509(b)(3) or § 178.517(b) all times while in transportation. (4) or (5) of this part; (b) Responsibility. It is the responsi- (iv) A combination packaging with bility of the packaging manufacturer inner packagings conforming to the to assure that each package is capable provisions of paragraph (g) of this sec- of passing the prescribed tests. To the tion; extent that a package assembly func- (v) Packagings which differ from the tion, including final closure, is per- design type only in their lesser design formed by the person who offers a haz- height; or ardous material for transportation, (vi) For a steel drum, variations in that person is responsible for per- design elements which do not conforming the function in accordance stitute a different design type under

202

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00212 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.601

the provisions of paragraph (g)(8) of mented in writing by the person certi- this section. fying compliance with this paragraph (d) Design qualification testing. The and retained in accordance with para- packaging manufacturer shall achieve graph (l) of this section. Permitted successful test results for the design variations are as follows: qualification testing at the start of (i) Inner packagings of equivalent or production of each new or different smaller size may be used provided— packaging. (A) The inner packagings are of simi- (e) Periodic retesting. The packaging lar design to the tested inner pack- manufacturer must achieve successful agings (i.e., shape—round, rectangular, test results for the periodic retesting etc.); at intervals established by the manufacturer of sufficient frequency to en- (B) The material of construction of sure that each packaging produced by the inner packagings (glass, plastic, the manufacturer is capable of passing metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact the design qualification tests. Changes and stacking forces equal to or greater in retest frequency are subject to the than that of the originally tested inner approval of the Associate Adminis- packaging; trator for Hazardous Materials Safety. (C) The inner packagings have the For single or composite packagings, same or smaller openings and the clo- the periodic retests must be conducted sure is of similar design (e.g., screw at least once every 12 months. For cap, friction lid, etc.); combination packagings, the periodic (D) Sufficient additional cushioning retests must be conducted at least once material is used to take up void spaces every 24 months. For infectious sub- and to prevent significant moving of stances packagings, the periodic the inner packagings; retests must be conducted at least once (E) Inner packagings are oriented every 24 months. within the outer packaging in the same (f) Test samples. The manufacturer manner as in the tested package; and, shall conduct the design qualification (F) The gross mass of the package and periodic tests prescribed in this subpart using random samples of pack- does not exceed that originally tested. agings, in the numbers specified in the (ii) A lesser number of the tested appropriate test section. In addition, inner packagings, or of the alternative the leakproofness test, when required, types of inner packagings identified in shall be performed on each packaging paragraph (g)(1)(i) of this section, may produced by the manufacturer, and be used provided sufficient cushioning each packaging prior to reuse under is added to fill void space(s) and to pre- § 173.28 of this subchapter, by the re- vent significant moving of the inner conditioner. packagings. (g) Selective testing. The selective (2) Selective testing of combination testing of packagings that differ only packagings. Variation 2. Articles or in minor respects from a tested type is inner packagings of any type, for solids permitted as described in this section. or liquids, may be assembled and trans- For air transport, packagings must ported without testing in an outer comply with § 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of packaging under the following condi- this subchapter. tions: (1) Selective testing of combination (i) The outer packaging must have packagings. Variation 1. Variations are been successfully tested in accordance permitted in inner packagings of a with § 178.603 with fragile (e.g. glass) tested combination package, without further testing of the package, pro- inner packagings containing liquids at vided an equivalent level of perform- the Packing Group I drop height; ance is maintained and, when a pack- (ii) The total combined gross mass of age is altered under Variation 1 after inner packagings may not exceed one- October 1, 2010, the methodology used half the gross mass of inner packagings to determine that the inner packaging, used for the drop test; including closure, maintains an equiva- (iii) The thickness of cushioning ma- lent level of performance is docu- terial between inner packagings and

203

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00213 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.601 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

between inner packagings and the out- duced with reductions in external di- side of the packaging may not be re- mensions (i.e., length, width or diame- duced below the corresponding thick- ter) of up to 25 percent of the dimen- ness in the originally tested packaging; sions of a tested packaging may be and when a single inner packaging was used without further testing provided used in the original test, the thickness an equivalent level of performance is of cushioning between inner pack- maintained. The packagings must, in agings may not be less than the thick- all other respects (including wall ness of cushioning between the outside thicknesses), be identical to the tested of the packaging and the inner pack- design-type. The marked gross mass aging in the original test. When either (when required) must be reduced in fewer or smaller inner packagings are proportion to the reduction in volume. used (as compared to the inner pack- (4) Variation 4. Variations are per- agings used in the drop test), sufficient mitted in outer packagings of a tested additional cushioning material must be design-type combination packaging, used to take up void spaces. without further testing, provided an (iv) The outer packaging must have equivalent level of performance is successfully passed the stacking test maintained, as follows: set forth in § 178.606 of this subpart (i) Each external dimension (length, when empty, i.e., without either inner width and height) is less than or equal packagings or cushioning materials. to the corresponding dimension of the The total mass of identical packages tested design-type; must be based on the combined mass of (ii) The structural design of the test- inner packagings used for the drop ed outer packaging (i.e., methods of test; construction, materials of construc- (v) Inner packagings containing liq- tion, strength characteristics of mate- uids must be completely surrounded rials of construction, method of closure with a sufficient quantity of absorbent and material thicknesses) is main- material to absorb the entire liquid tained; contents of the inner packagings; (iii) The inner packagings are iden- (vi) When the outer packaging is in- tical to the inner packagings used in tended to contain inner packagings for the tested design type except that their liquids and is not leakproof, or is in- size and mass may be less; and they are tended to contain inner packagings for oriented within the outer packaging in solids and is not siftproof, a means of the same manner as in the tested pack- containing any liquid or solid contents aging; in the event of leakage must be pro- (iv) The same type or design of ab- vided in the form of a leakproof liner, sorbent materials, cushioning mate- plastic bag, or other equally efficient rials and any other components nec- means of containment. For packagings essary to contain and protect inner containing liquids, the absorbent mate- packagings, as used in the tested de- rial required in paragraph (g)(2)(v) of sign type, are maintained. The thick- this section must be placed inside the ness of cushioning material between means of containing liquid contents; inner packagings and between inner and packagings and the outside of the (vii) Packagings must be marked in packaging may not be less than the accordance with § 178.503 of this part as thicknesses in the tested design type having been tested to Packing Group I packaging; and performance for combination pack- (v) Sufficient additional cushioning agings. The marked maximum gross material is used to take up void spaces mass may not exceed the sum of the and to prevent significant moving of mass of the outer packaging plus one the inner packagings. half the mass of the filled inner pack- An outer packaging qualifying for use agings of the tested combination pack- in transport in accordance with all of aging. In addition, the marking re- the above conditions may also be used quired by § 178.503(a)(2) of this part without testing to transport inner must include the letter ‘‘V’’. packagings substituted for the origi- (3) Variation 3. Packagings other than nally tested inner packagings in ac- combination packagings which are pro- cordance with the conditions set out in

204

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00214 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.601

Variation 1 in paragraph (g)(1) of this the specific gravity of the liquid used section. in the design type tests of the pack- (5) Variation 5. Single packagings aging with replacement closure devices (i.e., non-bulk packagings other than or gasketing.) combination packagings), that differ (6) The provisions in Variations 1, 2, from a tested design type only to the and 4 in paragraphs (g)(1), (2) and (4) of extent that the closure device or this section for combination pack- gasketing differs from that used in the agings may be applied to packagings originally tested design type, may be containing articles, where the provi- used without further testing, provided sions for inner packagings are applied an equivalent level of performance is analogously to the articles. In this maintained, subject to the following case, inner packagings need not comply conditions (the qualifying tests): with § 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of this sub- (i) A packaging with the replacement chapter. closure devices or gasketing must suc- (7) Approval of selective testing. In ad- cessfully pass the drop test specified in dition to the provisions of § 178.601(g)(1) § 178.603 in the orientation which most through (g)(6) of this subpart, the Asso- severely tests the integrity of the clo- ciate Administrator may approve the sure or gasket; (ii) When intended to contain liquids, selective testing of packagings that a packaging with the replacement clo- differ only in minor respects from a sure devices or gasketing must success- tested type. fully pass the leakproofness test speci- (8) For a steel drum with a capacity fied in § 178.604, the hydrostatic pres- greater than 12 L (3 gallons) manufac- sure test specified in § 178.605, and the tured from low carbon, cold-rolled stacking test specified in § 178.606. sheet steel meeting ASTM designations A 366/A 366M or A 568/A 568M, vari- Replacement closures and gasketings ations in elements other than the fol- qualified under the above test require- lowing design elements are considered ments are authorized without addi- minor and do not constitute a different tional testing for packagings described in paragraph (g)(3) of this section. Re- drum design type, or ‘‘different pack- placement closures and gasketings aging’’ as defined in paragraph (c) of qualified under the above test require- this section for which design qualifica- ments also are authorized without ad- tion testing and periodic retesting are ditional testing for different tested de- required. Minor variations authorized sign types packagings of the same type without further testing include as the originally tested packaging, pro- changes in the identity of the supplier vided the original design type tests are of component material made to the more severe or comparable to tests same specifications, or the original which would otherwise be conducted on manufacturer of a DOT specification or the packaging with the replacement UN standard drum to be remanufac- closures or gasketings. (For example: tured. A change in any one or more of The packaging used in the qualifying the following design elements con- tests has a lesser packaging wall thick- stitutes a different drum design type: ness than the packaging with replace- (i) The packaging type and category ment closure devices or gasketing; the of the original drum and the remanu- gross mass of the packaging used in the factured drum, i.e., 1A1 or 1A2; qualifying drop test equals or exceeds (ii) The style, (i.e., straight-sided or the mass for which the packaging with tapered); replacement closure devices or (iii) Except as provided in paragraph gasketing was tested; the packaging (g)(3) of this section, the rated used in the qualifying drop test was (marked) capacity and outside dimen- dropped from the same or greater sions; height than the height from which the (iv) The physical state for which the packaging with replacement closure packaging was originally approved devices or gasketing was dropped in de- (e.g., tested for solids or liquids); sign type tests; and the specific gravity (v) An increase in the marked level of of the substance used in the qualifying performance of the original drum (i.e., drop test was the same or greater than to a higher packing group, hydrostatic

205

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00215 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.601 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

test pressure, or specific gravity to pendent testing facility, in accordance which the packaging has been tested); with this subpart; or (vi) Type of side seam welding; (2) Supply packagings, in quantities (vii) Type of steel; sufficient to conduct tests in accord- (viii) An increase greater than 10% or ance with this subpart, to the Asso- any decrease in the steel thickness of ciate Administrator or a designated the head, body, or bottom; representative of the Associate Admin- (ix) End seam type, (e.g., triple or istrator. double seam); (j) Coatings. If an inner treatment or (x) A reduction in the number of roll- coating of a packaging is required for ing hoops (beads) which equal or exceed safety reasons, the manufacturer shall the diameter over the chimes; design the packaging so that the treat- (xi) The location, type or size, and ment or coating retains its protective material of closures (other than the properties even after withstanding the cover of UN 1A2 drums); tests prescribed by this subpart. (xii) The location (e.g., from the head (k) Number of test samples. Except as to the body), type (e.g., mechanically provided in this section, one test sam- seamed or welded flange), and mate- ple must be used for each test per- rials of closure (other than the cover of formed under this subpart. UN 1A2 drums); and (1) Stainless steel drums. Provided the (xiii) For UN 1A2 drums: validity of the test results is not af- (A) Gasket material (e.g., plastic), or fected, a person may perform the de- properties affecting the performance of sign qualification testing of stainless the gasket; steel drums using three (3) samples (B) Configuration or dimensions of rather than the specified eighteen (18) the gasket; samples under the following provisions: (C) Closure ring style including bolt (i) The packaging must be tested in size (e.g., square or round back, 0.625 accordance with this subpart by sub- inches bolt); and jecting each of the three containers to (D) Closure ring thickness, the following sequence of tests: (E) Width of lugs or extensions in (A) The stacking test in § 178.606, crimp/lug cover. (B) The leakproofness test in § 178.604, (h) Approval of equivalent packagings. (C) The hydrostatic pressure test in A packaging having specifications dif- § 178.608, and ferent from those in §§ 178.504–178.523 of (D) Diagonal top chime and flat on this part, or which is tested using the side drop tests in § 178.603. Both methods or test intervals, other than drop tests may be conducted on the those specified in subpart M of this same sample. part, may be used if approved by the (ii) For periodic retesting of stainless Associate Administrator. Such pack- steel drums, a reduced sample size of agings must be shown to be equally ef- one container is authorized. fective, and testing methods used must (2) Packagings other than stainless steel be equivalent. drums. Provided the validity of the test (i) Proof of compliance. Notwith- results is not affected, several tests standing the periodic retest intervals may be performed on one sample with specified in paragraph (e) of this sec- the approval of the Associate Adminis- tion, the Associate Administrator may trator. at any time require demonstration of (l) Record retention. Following each compliance by a manufacturer, design qualification test and each peri- through testing in accordance with odic retest on a packaging, a test re- this subpart, that packagings meet the port must be prepared. requirements of this subpart. As re- (1) The test report must be main- quired by the Associate Administrator, tained at each location where the pack- the manufacturer shall either— aging is manufactured, certified, and a (1) Conduct performance tests, or design qualification test or periodic have tests conducted by an inde- retest is conducted as follows:

206

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00216 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.602

Responsible party Duration

Person manufacturing the packaging ...... As long as manufactured and two years thereafter. Person performing design testing ...... Design test maintained for a single or composite packaging for six years after the test is successfully performed and for a combination packaging or packaging intended for infectious substances for seven years after the test is successfully performed. Person performing periodic retesting ...... Performance test maintained for a single or composite packaging for one year after the test is successfully performed and for a combination packaging or packaging intended for infectious substances for two years after the test is successfully performed.

(2) The test report must be made out in the same manner as if prepared available to a user of a packaging or a for transportation, including inner representative of the Department upon packagings in the case of combination request. The test report, at a min- packagings. imum, must contain the following in- (b) For the drop and stacking test, formation: inner and single-unit receptacles other (i) Name and address of test facility; than bags must be filled to not less (ii) Name and address of applicant than 95% of maximum capacity (see (where appropriate); § 171.8 of this subchapter) in the case of (iii) A unique test report identifica- solids and not less than 98% of max- tion; imum in the case of liquids. Bags con- (iv) Date of the test report; taining solids shall be filled to the (v) Manufacturer of the packaging; maximum mass at which they may be (vi) Description of the packaging de- used. The material to be transported in sign type (e.g., dimensions, materials, the packagings may be replaced by a closures, thickness, etc.), including non-hazardous material, except for methods of manufacture (e.g., blow chemical compatibility testing or molding) and which may include draw- where this would invalidate the results ing(s) and/or photograph(s); of the tests. (vii) Maximum capacity; (c) If the material to be transported (viii) Characteristics of test contents, is replaced for test purposes by a non- including for plastic packagings sub- hazardous material, the material used ject to the hydrostatic pressure test in must be of the same or higher specific § 178.605 of this subpart, the tempera- gravity as the material to be carried, ture of the water used; and its other physical properties (ix) Test descriptions and results; and (grain, size, viscosity) which might in- (x) Signed with the name and title of fluence the results of the required tests signatory. must correspond as closely as possible [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as to those of the hazardous material to amended at 56 FR 66285, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR be transported. Water may also be used 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494, for the liquid drop test under the con- June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67521, 67522, ditions specified in § 178.603(e) of this Dec. 29, 1994; Amdt. 178–117, 61 FR 50628, Sept. subpart. It is permissible to use addi- 26, 1996; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 53143, tives, such as bags of lead shot, to Aug. 14, 2002; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 68 FR achieve the requisite total package 61942, Oct. 30, 2003; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010; 75 mass, so long as they are placed so that FR 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 77 FR 60944, Oct. 5, 2012; 78 FR 1118, Jan. 7, 2013; 78 FR 14715, Mar. the test results are not affected. 7, 2013; 78 FR 65487, Oct. 31, 2013; 85 FR 27901, (d) Paper or fiberboard packagings May 11, 2020] must be conditioned for at least 24 hours immediately prior to testing in § 178.602 Preparation of packagings an atmosphere maintained— and packages for testing. (1) At 50 percent ±2 percent relative (a) Except as otherwise provided in humidity, and at a temperature of 23 this subchapter, each packaging and °C±2 °C (73 °F±4 °F). Average values package must be closed in preparation should fall within these limits. Short- for testing and tests must be carried term fluctuations and measurement

207

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00217 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.603 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

limitations may cause individual meas- (f) Bung-type barrels made of natural urements to vary by up to ±5 percent wood must be left filled with water for relative humidity without significant at least 24 hours before the tests. impairment of test reproducibility; (2) At 65 percent ±2 percent relative [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as humidity, and at a temperature of 20 amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. °C±2 °C (68 °F±4 °F), or 27 °C±2 °C (81 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994; 69 FR 76186, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 78635, Dec. 29, 2006] °F±4 °F). Average values should fall within these limits. Short-term fluc- § 178.603 Drop test. tuations and measurement limitations may cause individual measurements to (a) General. The drop test must be vary by up to ±5 percent relative hu- conducted for the qualification of all midity without significant impairment packaging design types and performed of test reproducibility; or periodically as specified in § 178.601(e). (3) For testing at periodic intervals For other than flat drops, the center of only (i.e., other than initial design gravity of the test packaging must be qualification testing), at ambient con- vertically over the point of impact. ditions. Where more than one orientation is (e) Except as otherwise provided, possible for a given drop test, the ori- each packaging must be closed in prep- entation most likely to result in fail- aration for testing in the same manner ure of the packaging must be used. The as if prepared for actual shipment. All number of drops required and the pack- closures must be installed using proper ages’ orientations are as follows: techniques and torques.

Packaging No. of tests (samples) Drop orientation of samples

Steel drums, Aluminum drums, Metal Six—(three for each First drop (using three samples): The package must strike the drums (other than steel or alu- drop). target diagonally on the chime or, if the packaging has no minum), Steel Jerricans, Plywood chime, on a circumferential seam or an edge. Second drop drums, Wooden barrels, Fiber (using the other three samples): The package must strike drums, Plastic drums and Jerricans, the target on the weakest part not tested by the first drop, Composite packagings which are in for example a closure or, for some 7 cylindrical drums, the the shape of a drum. welded longitudinal seam of the drum body. Boxes of natural wood, Plywood Five—(one for each First drop: Flat on the bottom (using the first sample). Second boxes, Reconstituted wood boxes, drop). drop: Flat on the top (using the second sample). Third drop: Fiberboard boxes, Plastic boxes, Flat on the long side (using the third sample). Fourth drop: Steel, aluminum or other metal Flat on the short side (using the fourth sample). Fifth drop: boxes, Composite packagings that On a corner (using the fifth sample). are in the shape of a box. Bags—single-ply with a side seam ..... Three—(three drops First drop: Flat on a wide face (using all three samples). Sec- per bag). ond drop: Flat on a narrow face (using all three samples). Third drop: On an end of the bag (using all three samples). Bags—single-ply without a side seam, Three—(two drops per First drop: Flat on a wide face (using all three samples). Sec- or multi-ply. bag). ond drop: On an end of the bag (using all three samples).

(b) Exceptions. For testing of single or (c) Special preparation of test samples composite packagings constructed of for the drop test. (1) Testing of plastic stainless steel, nickel, or monel at drums, plastic jerricans, plastic boxes periodic intervals only (i.e., other than other than expanded polystyrene boxes, design qualification testing), the drop composite packagings (plastic mate- test may be conducted with two sam- rial), and combination packagings with ples, one sample each for the two drop plastic inner packagings other than orientations. These samples may have plastic bags intended to contain solids been previously used for the hydro- or articles must be carried out when static pressure or stacking test. Excep- the temperature of the test sample and tions for the number of steel, alu- its contents has been reduced to ¥18 °C minum and other metal packaging (0 °F) or lower. Test liquids must be samples used for conducting the drop kept in the liquid state, if necessary, test are subject to the approval of the by the addition of anti-freeze. Water/ Associate Administrator. anti-freeze solutions with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 for testing at

208

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00218 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.604

¥18 °C (0 °F) or lower are considered (2) For removable head drums for sol- acceptable test liquids. Test samples ids, the entire contents are retained by prepared in this way are not required an inner packaging (e.g., a plastic bag) to be conditioned in accordance with even if the closure on the top head of § 178.602(d). the drum is no longer sift-proof; (d) Target. The target must be a rigid, (3) For a bag, neither the outermost non-resilient, flat and horizontal sur- ply nor an outer packaging exhibits face. any damage likely to adversely affect (e) Drop height. Drop heights, meas- safety during transport; ured as the vertical distance from the (4) The packaging or outer packaging target to the lowest point on the pack- of a composite or combination package, must be equal to or greater than aging must not exhibit any damage the drop height determined as follows: likely to affect safety during transport. (1) For solids and liquids, if the test Inner receptacles, inner packagings, or is performed with the solid or liquid to articles must remain completely with- be transported or with a non-hazardous in the outer packaging and there must material having essentially the same be no leakage of the filling substance physical characteristic, the drop height from the inner receptacles or inner must be determined according to pack- packagings; ing group, as follows: (5) Any discharge from a closure is (i) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet). slight and ceases immediately after (ii) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet). impact with no further leakage; and (iii) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 (6) No rupture is permitted in pack- feet). agings for materials in Class 1 which (2) For liquids in single packagings would permit spillage of loose explo- and for inner packagings of combina- sive substances or articles from the tion packagings, if the test is per- outer packaging. formed with water: [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as (i) Where the materials to be carried amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR have a specific gravity not exceeding 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–99, 58 FR 51534, 1.2, drop height must be determined ac- Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. cording to packing group, as follows: 29, 1994; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, 2000; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, Sept. 27, 2002; 69 FR (A) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet). 76186, Dec. 20, 2004; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19, 2011; (B) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet). 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013] (C) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet). (ii) Where the materials to be trans- § 178.604 Leakproofness test. ported have a specific gravity exceed- (a) General. The leakproofness test ing 1.2, the drop height must be cal- must be performed with compressed air culated on the basis of the specific or other suitable gases on all pack- gravity (SG) of the material to be car- agings intended to contain liquids, ex- ried, rounded up to the first decimal, as cept that: follows: (1) The inner receptacle of a com- (A) Packing Group I: SG × 1.5 m (4.9 posite packaging may be tested with- feet). out the outer packaging provided the (B) Packing Group II: SG × 1.0 m (3.3 test results are not affected; and feet). (2) This test is not required for inner (C) Packing Group III: SG × 0.67 m packagings of combination packagings. (2.2 feet). (b) Number of packagings to be tested— (f) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- (1) Production testing. All packagings age is considered to successfully pass subject to the provisions of this section the drop tests if for each sample test- must be tested and must pass the ed— leakproofness test: (1) For packagings containing liquid, (i) Before they are first used in trans- each packaging does not leak when portation; and equilibrium has been reached between (ii) Prior to reuse, when authorized the internal and external pressures, ex- for reuse by § 173.28 of this subchapter. cept for inner packagings of combina- (2) Design qualification and periodic tion packagings when it is not nec- testing. Three samples of each different essary that the pressures be equalized; packaging must be tested and must

209

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00219 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.605 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

pass the leakproofness test. Exceptions (b) Number of test samples. Three test for the number of samples used in con- samples are required for each different ducting the leakproofness test are sub- packaging. For packagings constructed ject to the approval of the Associate of stainless steel, monel, or nickel, Administrator. only one sample is required for periodic (c) Special preparation—(1) For design retesting of packagings. Exceptions for qualification and periodic testing, the number of aluminum and steel packagings must be tested with clo- sample packagings used in conducting sures in place. For production testing, the hydrostatic pressure test are sub- packagings need not have their clo- ject to the approval of the Associate sures in place. Removable heads need Administrator. not be installed during production test- (c) Special preparation of receptacles ing. for testings. Vented closures must ei- (2) For testing with closures in place, ther be replaced by similar non-vented vented closures must either be replaced by similar non-vented closures or the closures or the vent must be sealed. vent must be sealed. (d) Test method and pressure to be ap- (d) Test method. The packaging must plied. Metal packagings and composite be restrained under water while an in- packagings other than plastic (e.g., ternal air pressure is applied; the glass, porcelain or stoneware), includ- method of restraint must not affect the ing their closures, must be subjected to results of the test. The test must be the test pressure for 5 minutes. Plastic conducted, for other than production packagings and composite packagings testing, for a minimum time of five (plastic material), including their clo- minutes. Other methods, at least sures, must be subjected to the test equally effective, may be used in ac- pressure for 30 minutes. This pressure cordance with appendix B of this part. is the one to be marked as required in (e) Pressure applied. An internal air § 178.503(a)(5). The receptacles must be pressure (gauge) must be applied to the supported in a manner that does not packaging as indicated for the fol- invalidate the test. The test pressure lowing packing groups: must be applied continuously and even- (1) Packing Group I: Not less than 30 ly, and it must be kept constant kPa (4 psi). throughout the test period. In addition, (2) Packing Group II: Not less than 20 packagings intended to contain haz- kPa (3 psi). ardous materials of Packing Group I (3) Packing Group III: Not less than must be tested to a minimum test pres- 20 kPa (3 psi). sure of 250 kPa (36 psig). The hydraulic (f) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- pressure (gauge) applied, taken at the aging passes the test if there is no top of the receptacle, and determined leakage of air from the packaging. by any one of the following methods [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as must be: amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. (1) Not less than the total gauge pres- 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] sure measured in the packaging (i.e., the vapor pressure of the filling mate- § 178.605 Hydrostatic pressure test. rial and the partial pressure of the air (a) General. The hydrostatic pressure or other inert gas minus 100 kPa (15 ° ° test must be conducted for the quali- psi)) at 55 C (131 F), multiplied by a fication of all metal, plastic, and com- safety factor of 1.5. This total gauge posite packaging design types intended pressure must be determined on the to contain liquids and be performed pe- basis of a maximum degree of filling in riodically as specified in § 178.601(e). accordance with § 173.24a(d) of this sub- This test is not required for inner chapter and a filling temperature of 15 packagings of combination packagings. °C (59 °F); For internal pressure requirements for (2) Not less than 1.75 times the vapor inner packagings of combination pack- pressure at 50 °C (122 °F) of the mate- agings intended for transportation by rial to be transported minus 100 kPa (15 aircraft, see § 173.27(c) of this sub- psi), but with a minimum test pressure chapter. of 100 kPa (15 psig); or

210

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00220 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.606

(3) Not less than 1.5 times the vapor for a period of 28 days at a temperature pressure at 55 °C (131 °F) of the mate- of not less than 40 °C (104 °F). Alter- rial to be transported minus 100 kPa (15 native test methods which yield equiv- psi), but with a minimum test pressure alent results may be used if approved of 100 kPa (15 psig). by the Associate Administrator. In Packagings intended to contain haz- guided load tests, stacking stability ardous materials of Packing Group I must be assessed after completion of must be tested to a minimum test pres- the test by placing two filled pack- sure of 250 kPa (36 psig). agings of the same type on the test (e) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- sample. The stacked packages must age passes the hydrostatic test if, for maintain their position for one hour. each test sample, there is no leakage of Plastic packagings must be cooled to liquid from the package. ambient temperature before this stacking stability assessment. [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as (2) Periodic retesting. The test sample amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; Amdt. must be tested in accordance with: 178–99, 58 FR 51534, Oct. 1, 1993; Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494, June 2, 1994; 65 FR 50462, Aug. 18, (i) Section 178.606(c)(1) of this sub- 2000; 66 FR 45386, 45390, Aug. 28, 2001; 73 FR part; or 57007, Oct. 1, 2008; 78 FR 60755, Oct. 2, 2013] (ii) The packaging may be tested using a dynamic compression testing § 178.606 Stacking test. machine. The test must be conducted (a) General. All packaging design at room temperature on an empty, un- types other than bags must be sub- sealed packaging. The test sample jected to a stacking test. must be centered on the bottom platen (b) Number of test samples. Three test of the testing machine. The top platen samples are required for each different must be lowered until it comes in con- packaging. For periodic retesting of tact with the test sample. Compression packagings constructed of stainless must be applied end to end. The speed steel, monel, or nickel, only one test of the compression tester must be one- sample is required. Exceptions for the half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch number of aluminum and steel sample per minute. An initial preload of 50 packagings used in conducting the pounds must be applied to ensure a stacking test are subject to the ap- definite contact between the test sam- proval of the Associate Administrator. ple and the platens. The distance be- Notwithstanding the provisions of tween the platens at this time must be § 178.602(a) of this subpart, combination recorded as zero deformation. The force packagings may be subjected to the A to then be applied must be calculated stacking test without their inner pack- using the formula: agings, except where this would invali- Liquids: A = (n¥1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 × date the results of the test. .98)] × 1.5; (c) Test method—(1) Design qualifica- Solids: A = (n¥1) (m × 2.2 × 1.5) tion testing. The test sample must be subjected to a force applied to the top Where: surface of the test sample equivalent to A = applied load in pounds m = the certified maximum gross mass for the total weight of identical packages the container in kilograms. which might be stacked on it during n = minimum number of containers that, transport; where the contents of the when stacked, reach a height of 3 meters. test sample are non-hazardous liquids s = specific gravity of lading. with specific gravities different from w = maximum weight of one empty container that of the liquid to be transported, the in pounds. force must be calculated based on the v = actual capacity of container (rated ca- specific gravity that will be marked on pacity + outage) in gallons. the packaging. The minimum height of And: the stack, including the test sample, 8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0 must be 3.0 m (10 feet). The duration of gallon of water. .98 corresponds to the minimum filling per- the test must be 24 hours, except that centage of the maximum capacity for liq- plastic drums, jerricans, and composite uids. packagings 6HH intended for liquids 1.5 is a compensation factor that converts shall be subjected to the stacking test the static load of the stacking test into

211

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00221 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.607 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

a load suitable for dynamic compression be left free to move vertically, bounce testing. and rotate. 2.2 is the conversion factor for kilograms to (3) The test must be performed for pounds. one hour at a frequency that causes the (d) Criteria for passing the test. No test package to be raised from the vibrating sample may leak. In composite pack- platform to such a degree that a piece agings or combination packagings, of material of approximately 1.6 mm there must be no leakage of the filling (0.063 inch) thickness (such as steel substance from the inner receptacle, or strapping or paperboard) can be passed inner packaging. No test sample may between the bottom of any package show any deterioration which could ad- and the platform. versely affect transportation safety or (4) Immediately following the period any distortion likely to reduce its of vibration, each package must be re- strength, cause instability in stacks of moved from the platform, turned on its packages, or cause damage to inner side and observed for any evidence of packagings likely to reduce safety in leakage. transportation. For the dynamic com- (5) Other methods, at least equally pression test, a container passes the effective, may be used, if approved by test if, after application of the required the Associate Administrator. load, there is no buckling of the side- (c) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- walls sufficient to cause damage to its aging passes the vibration test if there expected contents; in no case may the is no rupture or leakage from any of maximum deflection exceed one inch. the packages. No test sample should [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as show any deterioration which could ad- amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR versely affect transportation safety or 45465, Oct. 1, 1992; Amdt. 178–102, 59 FR 28494, any distortion liable to reduce pack- June 2, 1994; Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. aging strength. 29, 1994; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 70 FR 34076, June 13, 2005; [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as 72 FR 55696, Oct. 1, 2007] amended at 56 FR 66286, Dec. 20, 1991; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] § 178.607 Cooperage test for bung-type wooden barrels. § 178.609 Test requirements for packagings for infectious substances. (a) Number of samples. One barrel is (a) Samples of each packaging must required for each different packaging. be prepared for testing as described in (b) Method of testing. Remove all paragraph (b) of this section and then hoops above the bilge of an empty bar- subjected to the tests in paragraphs (d) rel at least two days old. through (i) of this section. (c) Criteria for passing the test. A pack- (b) Samples of each packaging must aging passes the cooperage test only if be prepared as for transport except the diameter of the cross-section of the that a liquid or solid infectious sub- upper part of the barrel does not instance should be replaced by water or, crease by more than 10 percent. where conditioning at ¥18 °C (0 °F) is specified, by water/antifreeze. Each pri- § 178.608 Vibration standard. mary receptacle must be filled to 98 (a) Each packaging must be capable percent capacity. Packagings for live of withstanding, without rupture or animals should be tested with the live leakage, the vibration test procedure animal being replaced by an appro- outlined in this section. priate dummy of similar mass. (b) Test method. (1) Three sample (c) Packagings prepared as for trans- packagings, selected at random, must port must be subjected to the tests in be filled and closed as for shipment. Table I of this paragraph (c), which, for (2) The three samples must be placed test purposes, categorizes packagings on a vibrating platform that has a according to their material character- vertical or rotary double-amplitude istics. For outer packagings, the head- (peak-to-peak displacement) of one ings in Table I relate to fiberboard or inch. The packages should be con- similar materials whose performance strained horizontally to prevent them may be rapidly affected by moisture; from falling off the platform, but must plastics that may embrittle at low

212

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00222 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.609

temperature; and other materials, such receptacle determines the appropriate as metal, for which performance is not test. In instances where a primary re- significantly affected by moisture or ceptacle is made of more than one ma- temperature. Where a primary recep- terial, the material most likely to be tacle and a secondary packaging of an damaged determines the appropriate inner packaging are made of different test. materials, the material of the primary

TABLE I—TESTS REQUIRED

Material of Tests required Outer packaging Inner packaging Refer to para. (d) Refer to Fiberboard Plastics Other Plastics Other (d) (e) (f) (g) para. (h)

X X X X When dry ice X is used X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X

(d) Samples must be subjected to inches) per hour for at least one hour. free-fall drops onto a rigid, nonresil- They must then be subjected to the ient, flat, horizontal surface from a test described in paragraph (d) of this height of 9 m (30 feet). section. The drops must be performed as fol- (f) The sample must be conditioned in lows: an atmosphere of ¥18 °C (0 °F) or less (1) Where the samples are in the for a period of at least 24 hours and shape of a box, five samples must be within 15 minutes of removal from that dropped, one in each of the following atmosphere be subjected to the test de- orientation: scribed in paragraph (d) of this section. (i) Flat on the base; Where the sample contains dry ice, the (ii) Flat on the top; conditioning period may be reduced to (iii) Flat on the longest side; 4 hours. (iv) Flat on the shortest side; and (g) Where packaging is intended to (v) On a corner. contain dry ice, a test additional to (2) Where the samples are in the that specified in paragraph (d) or (e) or shape of a drum, three samples must be (f) of this section must be carried out. dropped, one in each of the following One sample must be stored so that all orientations: the dry ice dissipates and then be sub- (i) Diagonally on the top chime, with jected to the test described in para- the center of gravity directly above the graph (d) of this section. point of impact; (h) Packagings with a gross mass of 7 (ii) Diagonally on the base chime; kg (15 pounds) or less should be sub- and jected to the tests described in para- (iii) Flat on the side. graph (h)(1) of this section and pack- (3) While the sample should be re- agings with a gross mass exceeding 7 leased in the required orientation, it is kg (15 pounds) to the tests in paragraph accepted that for aerodynamic reasons (h)(2) of this section. the impact may not take place in that (1) Samples must be placed on a orientation. level, hard surface. A cylindrical steel (4) Following the appropriate drop se- rod with a mass of at least 7 kg (15 quence, there must be no leakage from pounds), a diameter not exceeding 38 the primary receptacle(s) which should mm (1.5 inches), and, at the impact end remain protected by absorbent mate- edges, a radius not exceeding 6 mm (0.2 rial in the secondary packaging. inches), must be dropped in a vertical (e) The samples must be subjected to free fall from a height of 1 m (3 feet), a water spray to simulate exposure to measured from the impact end of the rainfall of approximately 50 mm (2 sample’s impact surface. One sample

213

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00223 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.609 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

must be placed on its base. A second (iv) Sufficient additional cushioning sample must be placed in an orienta- material is used to fill void spaces and tion perpendicular to that used for the to prevent significant movement of the first. In each instance, the steel rod primary receptacles. must be aimed to impact the primary (v) Primary receptacles are oriented receptacle(s). For a successful test, within the intermediate packaging in there must be no leakage from the pri- the same manner as in the tested pack- mary receptacle(s) following each im- age. pact. (2) Variation 2. A lesser number of the (2) Samples must be dropped onto the tested primary receptacles, or of the end of a cylindrical steel rod. The rod alternative types of primary recep- must be set vertically in a level, hard tacles identified in paragraph (i)(1) of surface. It must have a diameter of 38 this section, may be used provided suf- mm (1.5 inches) and a radius not ex- ficient cushioning is added to fill the ceeding 6 mm (0.2 inches) at the edges void space(s) and to prevent significant of the upper end. The rod must pro- movement of the primary receptacles. trude from the surface a distance at (3) Variation 3. Primary receptacles of least equal to that between the pri- any type may be placed within a sec- mary receptacle(s) and the outer sur- ondary packaging and shipped without face of the outer packaging with a min- testing in the outer packaging provided imum of 200 mm (7.9 inches). One sam- all of the following conditions are met: ple must be dropped in a vertical free (i) The secondary and outer pack- fall from a height of 1 m (3 feet), measured from the top of the steel rod. A aging combination must be success- second sample must be dropped from fully tested in accordance with para- the same height in an orientation per- graphs (a) through (h) of this section pendicular to that used for the first. In with fragile (e.g., glass) inner recep- each instance, the packaging must be tacles. oriented so the steel rod will impact (ii) The total combined gross weight the primary receptacle(s). For a suc- of inner receptacles may not exceed cessful test, there must be no leakage one-half the gross weight of inner re- from the primary receptacle(s) fol- ceptacles used for the drop test in para- lowing each impact. graph (d) of this section. (i) Variations. The following vari- (iii) The thickness of cushioning ma- ations in the primary receptacles terial between inner receptacles and placed within the secondary packaging between inner receptacles and the out- are allowed without additional testing side of the secondary packaging may of the completed package. An equiva- not be reduced below the corresponding lent level of performance must be thicknesses in the originally tested maintained. packaging. If a single inner receptacle (1) Variation 1. Primary receptacles of was used in the original test, the thick- equivalent or smaller size as compared ness of cushioning between the inner to the tested primary receptacles may receptacles must be no less than the be used provided they meet all of the thickness of cushioning between the following conditions: outside of the secondary packaging and (i) The primary receptacles are of the inner receptacle in the original similar design to the tested primary retest. When either fewer or smaller ceptacle (e.g., shape: round, rectan- inner receptacles are used (as com- gular, etc.). pared to the inner receptacles used in (ii) The material of construction of the drop test), sufficient additional the primary receptacle (glass, plastics, cushioning material must be used to metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact fill the void. and a stacking force equal to or greater (iv) The outer packaging must pass than that of the originally tested pri- the stacking test in § 178.606 while mary receptacle. empty. The total weight of identical (iii) The primary receptacles have packages must be based on the com- the same or smaller openings and the bined mass of inner receptacles used in closure is of similar design (e.g., screw the drop test in paragraph (d) of this cap, friction lid, etc.). section.

214

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00224 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.703

(v) For inner receptacles containing the maximum net mass (see § 171.8 of liquids, an adequate quantity of ab- this subchapter). sorbent material must be present to [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as absorb the entire liquid contents of the amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug. inner receptacles. 4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 73 FR (vi) If the outer packaging is in- 57008, Oct. 1, 2008; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010] tended to contain inner receptacles for liquids and is not leakproof, or is in- § 178.702 IBC codes. tended to contain inner receptacles for (a) Intermediate bulk container code solids and is not sift proof, a means of designations consist of: two numerals containing any liquid or solid contents specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this sec- in the event of leakage must be pro- tion; followed by the capital letter(s) vided. This can be a leakproof liner, specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this sec- plastic bag, or other equally effective tion; followed, when specified in an individual section, by a numeral indi- means of containment. cating the category of intermediate (vii) In addition, the marking re- bulk container. quired in § 178.503(f) of this subchapter (1) IBC code number designations are must be followed by the letter ‘‘U’’. as follows: [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52723, Dec. 21, 1990, as For solids, discharged amended by Amdt. 178–111, 60 FR 48787, Sept. 20, 1995; 67 FR 53143, Aug. 14, 2002; 69 FR 54046, Under pres- Type sure of For liquids Sept. 7, 2004] by gravity more than 10 kPa Subpart N—IBC Performance- (1.45 psig) Oriented Standards Rigid ...... 11 21 31 Flexible ...... 13

§ 178.700 Purpose, scope and defini- (2) Intermediate bulk container code tions. letter designations are as follows: (a) This subpart prescribes require- ‘‘A’’ means steel (all types and surface treatments applying to IBCs intended for ments). the transportation of hazardous mate- ‘‘B’’ means aluminum. rials. Standards for these packagings ‘‘C’’ means natural wood. are based on the UN Recommendations. ‘‘D’’ means plywood. (b) Terms used in this subpart are de- ‘‘F’’ means reconstituted wood. fined in § 171.8 of this subchapter and in ‘‘G’’ means fiberboard. ‘‘H’’ means plastic. paragraph (c) of this section. ‘‘L’’ means textile. (c) The following definitions pertain ‘‘M’’ means paper, multiwall. to the IBC standards in this subpart. ‘‘N’’ means metal (other than steel or alu- (1) Body means the receptacle proper minum). (including openings and their closures, (b) For composite IBCs, two capital but not including service equipment) letters are used in sequence following that has a volumetric capacity of not the numeral indicating IBC design more than 3 cubic meters (3,000 L, 793 type. The first letter indicates the ma- gallons, or 106 cubic feet). terial of the IBC inner receptacle. The (2) Service equipment means filling and second letter indicates the material of discharge, pressure relief, safety, heat- the outer IBC. For example, 31HA1 is a ing and heat-insulating devices and composite IBC with a plastic inner re- measuring instruments. ceptacle and a steel outer packaging. (3) Structural equipment means the re- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as inforcing, fastening, handling, protec- amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] tive or stabilizing members of the body or stacking load bearing structural § 178.703 Marking of IBCs. members (such as metal cages). (a) The manufacturer shall: (4) Maximum permissible gross mass (1) Mark every IBC in a durable and means the mass of the body, its service clearly visible manner. The marking equipment, structural equipment and may be applied in a single line or in

215

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00225 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.703 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

multiple lines provided the correct se- (A) X—for IBCs meeting Packing quence is followed with the informa- Group I, II and III tests; tion required by this section in letters, (B) Y—for IBCs meeting Packing numerals and symbols of at least 12 Group II and III tests; and mm in height. This minimum marking (C) Z—for IBCs meeting only Packing size applies only to IBCs manufactured Group III tests. after October 1, 2001). The following in- (iv) The month (designated numeri- formation is required in the sequence cally) and year (last two digits) of presented: manufacture. (i) Except as provided in (v) The country authorizing the allo- § 178.503(e)(1)(ii), the United Nations cation of the mark. The letters ‘USA’ symbol as illustrated in indicate that the IBC is manufactured § 178.503(e)(1)(i). For metal IBCs on and marked in the United States in which the marking is stamped or em- compliance with the provisions of this bossed, the capital letters ‘‘UN’’ may subchapter. be applied instead of the symbol. (vi) The name and address or symbol (ii) The code number designating IBC of the manufacturer or the approval design type according to § 178.702(a). agency certifying compliance with sub- The letter ‘‘W’’ must follow the IBC de- parts N and O of this part. Symbols, if sign type identification code on an IBC used, must be registered with the Asso- when the IBC differs from the require- ciate Administrator. ments in subpart N of this part, or is (vii) The stacking test load in kilo- tested using methods other than those grams (kg). For IBCs not designed for specified in this subpart, and is ap- stacking, the figure ‘‘0’’ must be proved by the Associate Administrator shown. in accordance with the provisions in (viii) The maximum permissible § 178.801(i). gross mass in kg. (iii) A capital letter identifying the (2) The following are examples of performance standard under which the symbols and required markings: design type has been successfully test- (i) For a metal IBC containing solids ed, as follows: discharged by gravity made from steel:

(ii) For a flexible IBC containing solids discharged by gravity and made from woven plastic with a liner:

(iii) For a rigid plastic IBC con- structural equipment withstanding the taining liquids, made from plastic with stack load and with a manufacturer’s

216

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00226 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER26JY94.000 ER26JY94.001 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.703

symbol in place of the manufacturer’s name and address:

(iv) For a composite IBC containing with the symbol of a DOT approved liquids, with a rigid plastic inner re- third-party test laboratory: ceptacle and an outer steel body and

(b) Additional marking. In addition to (vi) Body material and its minimum markings required in paragraph (a) of thickness in mm; and this section, each IBC must be marked (vii) Serial number assigned by the as follows in a place near the markings manufacturer. required in paragraph (a) of this sec- (3) Markings required by paragraph tion that is readily accessible for in- (b)(1) or (b)(2) of this section may be spection. Where units of measure are preceded by the narrative description used, the metric unit indicated (e.g., of the marking, e.g. ‘‘Tare Mass: * * *’’ 450 L) must also appear. where the ‘‘* * *’’ are replaced with the (1) For each rigid plastic and com- tare mass in kilograms of the IBC. posite IBC, the following markings (4) For each fiberboard and wooden must be included: IBC, the tare mass in kg must be (i) Rated capacity in L of water at 20 shown. °C (68 °F); (5) Each flexible IBC may be marked (ii) Tare mass in kilograms; with a pictogram displaying rec- (iii) Gauge test pressure in kPa; ommended lifting methods. (iv) Date of last leakproofness test, if (6) For each composite IBC, the inner applicable (month and year); and receptacle must be marked with at (v) Date of last inspection (month least the following information: and year). (i) The code number designating the (2) For each metal IBC, the following IBC design type, the name and address markings must be included on a metal or symbol of the manufacturer, the corrosion-resistant plate: date of manufacture and the country (i) Rated capacity in L of water at 20 authorizing the allocation of the mark °C (68 °F); as specified in paragraph (a) of this sec- (ii) Tare mass in kilograms; tion. The date of manufacture of the (iii) Date of last leakproofness test, if inner receptacle may be different from applicable (month and year); the marked date of manufacture re- (iv) Date of last inspection (month quired by § 178.703(a)(1)(iv) or by and year); § 180.352(d)(1)(iv) of this subchapter; and (v) Maximum loading/discharge pres- (ii) When a composite IBC is designed sure, in kPa, if applicable; in such a manner that the outer casing

217

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00227 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER26JY94.002 ER26JY94.003 § 178.704 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

is intended to be dismantled for trans- (7) The symbol applicable to an IBC port when empty (such as, for the re- designed for stacking or not designed turn of the IBC for reuse to the origi- for stacking, as appropriate, must be nal consignor), each of the parts in- marked on all IBCs manufactured, re- tended to be detached when so disman- paired or remanufactured after Janu- tled must be marked with the month ary 1, 2011 as follows: and year of manufacture and the name (i) or symbol of the manufacturer.

(ii) Display the symbol in a durable mass must be at least 12 mm (0.48 and visible manner. inches). (iii) The symbol must be a square [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as with each side being not less than 100 amended by Amdt. 178–119, 62 FR 24743, May mm (3.9 inches) by 100 mm (3.9 inches) 6, 1997; 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 65 FR 50462, as measured from the corner printer Aug. 18, 2000; 65 FR 58632, Sept. 29, 2000; 66 FR marks shown on the figures in para- 33451, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 FR 74, Jan. 4, 2010; graph (b)(7)(i) of this section. Where di- 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19, mensions are not specified, all features 2011; 80 FR 1168, Jan. 8, 2015; 83 FR 55810, Nov. must be in approximate proportion to 7, 2018] those shown. (A) Transitional exception. A marking § 178.704 General IBC standards. in conformance with the requirements (a) Each IBC must be resistant to, or of this paragraph in effect on December protected from, deterioration due to 31, 2014, may continue to be applied to exposure to the external environment. all IBCs manufactured, repaired or re- IBCs intended for solid hazardous ma- manufactured between January 1, 2011 terials must be sift-proof and water-re- and December 31, 2016. sistant. (b) All service equipment must be so (B) For domestic transportation, an positioned or protected as to minimize IBC marked prior to January 1, 2017 potential loss of contents resulting and in conformance with the require- from damage during IBC handling and ments of this paragraph in effect on transportation. December 31, 2014, may continue in (c) Each IBC, including attachments, service until the end of its useful life. and service and structural equipment, (iv) For IBCs designed for stacking, must be designed to withstand, without the maximum permitted stacking load loss of hazardous materials, the inter- applicable when the IBC is in use must nal pressure of the contents and the be displayed with the symbol. The stresses of normal handling and trans- mass in kilograms (kg) marked above port. An IBC intended for stacking the symbol must not exceed the load must be designed for stacking. Any imposed during the design test, as indi- lifting or securing features of an IBC cated by the marking in paragraph must be of sufficient strength to with- (a)(1)(vii) of this section, divided by 1.8. stand the normal conditions of han- The letters and numbers indicating the dling and transportation without gross distortion or failure and must be positioned so as to cause no undue stress in any part of the IBC.

218

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00228 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER04JA10.097 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.705

(d) An IBC consisting of a packaging made so as to maintain design type in- within a framework must be so con- tegrity of the receptacle under condi- structed that: tions normally incident to transpor- (1) The body is not damaged by the tation. framework; (i) The use of dissimilar metals must (2) The body is retained within the not result in deterioration that could framework at all times; and affect the integrity of the body. (3) The service and structural equip- (ii) Aluminum IBCs intended to con- ment are fixed in such a way that they tain flammable liquids must have no cannot be damaged if the connections movable parts, such as covers and clo- between body and frame allow relative sures, made of unprotected steel liable expansion or motion. to rust, which might cause a dangerous (e) Bottom discharge valves must be reaction from friction or percussive secured in the closed position and the contact with the aluminum. discharge system suitably protected (iii) Metals used in fabricating the from damage. Valves having lever clo- body of a metal IBC must meet the fol- sures must be secured against acci- lowing requirements: dental opening. The open or closed po- (A) For steel, the percentage elon- sition of each valve must be readily ap- gation at fracture must not be less parent. For each IBC containing a liq- than 10,000/Rm with a minimum of 20 uid, a secondary means of sealing the percent; where Rm = minimum tensile discharge aperture must also be pro- strength of the steel to be used, in N/ vided, e.g., by a blank flange or equiva- mm2; if U.S. Standard units of psi are lent device. used for tensile strength then the ratio (f) IBC design types must be con- becomes 10,000 × (145/Rm). structed in such a way as to be bottom- (B) For aluminum, the percentage lifted or top-lifted as specified in elongation at fracture must not be less §§ 178.811 and 178.812. than 10,000/(6Rm) with an absolute min- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as imum of eight percent; if U.S. Standard amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR units of psi are used for tensile 61942, Oct. 30, 2003] strength then the ratio becomes 10,000 × 145 / (6Rm). § 178.705 Standards for metal IBCs. (C) Specimens used to determine the (a) The provisions in this section elongation at fracture must be taken apply to metal IBCs intended to con- transversely to the direction of rolling tain liquids and solids. Metal IBC types and be so secured that: are designated: (1) 11A, 11B, 11N for solids that are Lo = 5d loaded or discharged by gravity. or (2) 21A, 21B, 21N for solids that are loaded or discharged at a gauge pres- Lo = 5.65 √A sure greater than 10 kPa (1.45 psig). where: (3) 31A, 31B, 31N for liquids. (b) Definitions for metal IBCs: Lo = gauge length of the specimen before the (1) Metal IBC means an IBC with a test d = diameter metal body, together with appropriate A = cross-sectional area of test specimen. service and structural equipment. (2) Protected means providing the IBC (iv) Minimum wall thickness: body with additional external protec- (A) For a reference steel having a tion against impact and abrasion. For product of Rm × Ao = 10,000, where Ao example, a multi-layer (sandwich) or is the minimum elongation (as a per- double wall construction or a frame centage) of the reference steel to be with a metal lattice-work casing. used on fracture under tensile stress (c) Construction requirements for (Rm × Ao = 10,000 × 145; if tensile metal IBCs are as follows: strength is in U.S. Standard units of (1) Body. The body must be made of pounds per square inch), the wall ductile metal materials. Welds must be thickness must not be less than:

219

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00229 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.706 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

Wall thickness (T) in mm

Capacity (C) in liters 1 Types 11A, 11B, 11N Types 21A, 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N Unprotected Protected Unprotected Protected

C≤1000 ...... 2.0 ...... 1.5 ...... 2.5 ...... 2.0 1000

(B) For metals other than the ref- be the minimum value indicated in the erence steel described in paragraph material inspection certificate. (c)(1)(iii)(A) of this section, the min- (2) Pressure relief. The following pres- imum wall thickness is the greater of sure relief requirements apply to IBCs 1.5 mm (0.059 inches) or as determined intended for liquids: by use of the following equivalence for- (i) IBCs must be capable of releasing mula: a sufficient amount of vapor in the event of fire engulfment to ensure that FORMULA FOR METRIC UNITS no rupture of the body will occur due to pressure build-up. This can be 21. 4 × e achieved by spring-loaded or non-re- e = 0 closing pressure relief devices or by 1 3 × Rm11 A other means of construction. (ii) The start-to-discharge pressure FORMULA FOR U.S. STANDARD may not be higher than 65 kPa (9 psig) UNITS and no lower than the vapor pressure of the hazardous material plus the partial × 21. 4 e0 pressure of the air or other inert gases, e = measured in the IBC at 55 °C (131 °F), 1 3 × ()Rm11 A /145 determined on the basis of a maximum degree of filling as specified in where: § 173.35(d) of this subchapter. This does e1 = required equivalent wall thickness of the not apply to fusible devices unless such metal to be used (in mm or if eo is in inches, use formula for U.S. Standard devices are the only source of pressure units). relief for the IBC. Pressure relief de- eo = required minimum wall thickness for vices must be fitted in the vapor space. the reference steel (in mm or if eo is in (d) Metal IBCs may not have a volu- inches, use formula for U.S. Standard metric capacity greater than 3,000 L units). (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 gal- Rm1 = guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be used (in N/mm2 or for lons). U.S. Standard units, use psi). [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as A1 = minimum elongation (as a percentage) amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug. of the metal to be used on fracture under 4, 1995; Amdt. 178–117, 61 FR 50629, Sept. 26, tensile stress (see paragraph (c)(1) of this 1996; 66 FR 33452, June 21, 2001; 66 FR 45386, section). 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45041, July 31, 2003; (C) For purposes of the calculation 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010; 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, described in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(B) of 2013] this section, the guaranteed minimum tensile strength of the metal to be used § 178.706 Standards for rigid plastic IBCs. (Rm1) must be the minimum value according to material standards. How- (a) The provisions in this section ever, for austenitic (stainless) steels, apply to rigid plastic IBCs intended to the specified minimum value for Rm, contain solids or liquids. Rigid plastic according to the material standards, IBC types are designated: may be increased by up to 15% when a (1) 11H1 fitted with structural equip- greater value is provided in the mate- ment designed to withstand the whole rial inspection certificate. When no load when IBCs are stacked, for solids material standard exists for the mate- which are loaded or discharged by grav- rial in question, the value of Rm must ity.

220

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00230 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR EP26JN96.000 EP26JN96.001 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.707

(2) 11H2 freestanding, for solids which internal pressure in excess of that for are loaded or discharged by gravity. which it was hydraulically tested. This (3) 21H1 fitted with structural equip- may be achieved by spring-loaded or ment designed to withstand the whole non-reclosing pressure relief devices or load when IBCs are stacked, for solids by other means of construction. which are loaded or discharged under (d) Rigid plastic IBCs may not have a pressure. volumetric capacity greater than 3,000 (4) 21H2 freestanding, for solids which L (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 are loaded or discharged under pres- gallons). sure. (5) 31H1 fitted with structural equip- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as ment designed to withstand the whole amended at 66 FR 45386, 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; load when IBCs are stacked, for liquids. 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010] (6) 31H2 freestanding, for liquids. § 178.707 Standards for composite (b) Rigid plastic IBCs consist of a IBCs. rigid plastic body, which may have structural equipment, together with (a) The provisions in this section appropriate service equipment. apply to composite IBCs intended to (c) Rigid plastic IBCs must be manu- contain solids and liquids. To complete factured from plastic material of the marking codes listed below, the known specifications and be of a letter ‘‘Z’’ must be replaced by a cap- strength relative to its capacity and to ital letter in accordance with the service it is required to perform. In § 178.702(a)(2) to indicate the material addition to conformance to § 173.24 of used for the outer packaging. Com- this subchapter, plastic materials must posite IBC types are designated: be resistant to aging and to degrada- (1) 11HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid tion caused by ultraviolet radiation. plastic inner receptacle for solids load- (1) If protection against ultraviolet ed or discharged by gravity. radiation is necessary, it must be pro- (2) 11HZ2 Composite IBCs with a vided by the addition of a pigment or flexible plastic inner receptacle for sol- inhibiter such as carbon black. These ids loaded or discharged by gravity. additives must be compatible with the (3) 21HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid contents and remain effective through- plastic inner receptacle for solids load- out the life of the IBC body. Where use ed or discharged under pressure. is made of carbon black, pigments or (4) 21HZ2 Composite IBCs with a inhibitors, other than those used in the flexible plastic inner receptacle for sol- manufacture of the tested design type, ids loaded or discharged under pres- retesting may be omitted if changes in sure. the carbon black content, the pigment (5) 31HZ1 Composite IBCs with a rigid content or the inhibitor content do not plastic inner receptacle for liquids. adversely affect the physical properties of the material of construction. (6) 31HZ2 Composite IBCs with a (2) Additives may be included in the flexible plastic inner receptacle for liq- composition of the plastic material to uids. improve the resistance to aging or to (b) Definitions for composite IBC serve other purposes, provided they do types: not adversely affect the physical or (1) A composite IBC is an IBC which chemical properties of the material of consists of a rigid outer packaging en- construction. closing a plastic inner receptacle to- (3) No used material other than pro- gether with any service or other struc- duction residues or regrind from the tural equipment. The outer packaging same manufacturing process may be of a composite IBC is designed to bear used in the manufacture of rigid plastic the entire stacking load. The inner re- IBCs. ceptacle and outer packaging form an (4) Rigid plastic IBCs intended for the integral packaging and are filled, transportation of liquids must be capa- stored, transported, and emptied as a ble of releasing a sufficient amount of unit. vapor to prevent the body of the IBC (2) The term plastic means polymeric from rupturing if it is subjected to an materials (i.e., plastic or rubber).

221

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00231 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.707 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(3) A ‘‘rigid’’ inner receptacle is an versely affect the physical or chemical inner receptacle which retains its gen- properties of the material. eral shape when empty without clo- (iii) No used material other than pro- sures in place and without benefit of duction residues or regrind from the the outer casing. Any inner receptacle same manufacturing process may be that is not ‘‘rigid’’ is considered to be used in the manufacture of inner recep- ‘‘flexible.’’ tacles. (c) Construction requirements for (iv) Composite IBCs intended for the composite IBCs with plastic inner re- transportation of liquids must be capa- ceptacles are as follows: ble of releasing a sufficient amount of (1) The outer packaging must consist vapor to prevent the body of the IBC of rigid material formed so as to pro- from rupturing if it is subjected to an tect the inner receptacle from physical internal pressure in excess of that for damage during handling and transpor- which it was hydraulically tested. This tation, but is not required to perform may be achieved by spring-loaded or the secondary containment function. It non-reclosing pressure relief devices or includes the base pallet where appro- by other means of construction. priate. The inner receptacle is not in- (4) The strength of the construction tended to perform a containment func- material comprising the outer pack- tion without the outer packaging. aging and the manner of construction (2) A composite IBC with a fully en- must be appropriate to the capacity of closing outer packaging must be de- the composite IBC and its intended use. signed to permit assessment of the in- The outer packaging must be free of tegrity of the inner container following any projection that might damage the the leakproofness and hydraulic tests. inner receptacle. The outer packaging of 31HZ2 com- (i) Outer packagings of natural wood posite IBCs must enclose the inner re- must be constructed of well seasoned ceptacles on all sides. wood that is commercially dry and free (3) The inner receptacle must be from defects that would materially manufactured from plastic material of lessen the strength of any part of the known specifications and be of a outer packaging. The tops and bottoms strength relative to its capacity and to may be made of water-resistant recon- the service it is required to perform. In stituted wood such as hardboard or addition to conformance with the re- particle board. Materials other than quirements of § 173.24 of this sub- natural wood may be used for construc- chapter, the material must be resistant tion of structural equipment of the to aging and to degradation caused by outer packaging. ultraviolet radiation. The inner recep- (ii) Outer packagings of plywood tacle of 31HZ2 composite IBCs must must be made of well-seasoned, rotary consist of at least three plies of film. cut, sliced, or sawn veneer, commer- (i) If necessary, protection against cially dry and free from defects that ultraviolet radiation must be provided would materially lessen the strength of by the addition of pigments or inhibi- the casing. All adjacent plies must be tors such as carbon black. These addi- glued with water-resistant adhesive. tives must be compatible with the con- Materials other than plywood may be tents and remain effective throughout used for construction of structural the life of the inner receptacle. Where equipment of the outer packaging. use is made of carbon black, pigments, Outer packagings must be firmly or inhibitors, other than those used in nailed or secured to corner posts or the manufacture of the tested design ends or be assembled by equally suit- type, retesting may be omitted if the able devices. carbon black content, the pigment con- (iii) Outer packagings of reconsti- tent, or the inhibitor content do not tuted wood must be constructed of adversely affect the physical properties water-resistant reconstituted wood of the material of construction. such as hardboard or particle board. (ii) Additives may be included in the Materials other than reconstituted composition of the plastic material of wood may be used for the construction the inner receptacle to improve resist- of structural equipment of reconsti- ance to aging, provided they do not ad- tuted wood outer packaging.

222

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00232 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.708

(iv) Fiberboard outer packagings performance, may be used but must be must be constructed of strong, solid, or external to the inner receptacle. double-faced corrugated fiberboard (iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs (single or multiwall). intended for stacking must be designed (A) Water resistance of the outer sur- to distribute loads in a stable manner. face must be such that the increase in An IBC intended for stacking must be mass, as determined in a test carried designed so that loads are not sup- out over a period of 30 minutes by the ported by the inner receptacle. Cobb method of determining water ab- (6) Intermediate IBCs of type 31HZ2 sorption, is not greater than 155 grams must be limited to a capacity of not per square meter (0.0316 pounds per more than 1,250 L. square foot)—see ISO 535 (E) (IBR, see (d) Composite IBCs may not have a § 171.7 of this subchapter). Fiberboard volumetric capacity greater than 3,000 must have proper bending qualities. Fi- L (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 berboard must be cut, creased without gallons). cutting through any thickness of fiber- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as board, and slotted so as to permit as- amended by Amdt. 178–119, 62 FR 24743, May sembly without cracking, surface 6, 1997; 66 FR 45387, Aug. 28, 2001; 67 FR 61016, breaks, or undue bending. The fluting Sept. 27, 2002; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 69 FR of corrugated fiberboard must be firm- 54046, Sept. 7, 2004; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010] ly glued to the facings. (B) The ends of fiberboard outer § 178.708 Standards for fiberboard IBCs. packagings may have a wooden frame or be constructed entirely of wood. (a) The provisions of this section Wooden battens may be used for rein- apply to fiberboard IBCs intended to forcements. contain solids that are loaded or dis- (C) Manufacturers’ joints in the bod- charged by gravity. Fiberboard IBCs ies of outer packagings must be taped, are designated: 11G. lapped and glued, or lapped and (b) Definitions for fiberboard IBC stitched with metal staples. types: (D) Lapped joints must have an ap- (1) Fiberboard IBCs consist of a fiber- propriate overlap. board body with or without separate top and bottom caps, appropriate serv- (E) Where closing is effected by glu- ice and structural equipment, and if ing or taping, a water-resistant adhe- necessary an inner liner (but no inner sive must be used. packaging). (F) All closures must be sift-proof. (2) Liner means a separate tube or (v) Outer packagings of plastic mate- bag, including the closures of its open- rials must be constructed in accord- ings, inserted in the body but not formance with the relevant provisions of ing an integral part of it. paragraph (c)(3) of this section. (c) Construction requirements for fi- (5) Any integral pallet base forming berboard IBCs are as follows: part of an IBC, or any detachable pal- (1) Top lifting devices are prohibited let, must be suitable for the mechan- in fiberboard IBCs. ical handling of an IBC filled to its (2) Fiberboard IBCs must be con- maximum permissible gross mass. structed of strong, solid or double- (i) The pallet or integral base must faced corrugated fiberboard (single or be designed to avoid protrusions that multiwall) that is appropriate to the may cause damage to the IBC in han- capacity of the outer packaging and its dling. intended use. Water resistance of the (ii) The outer packaging must be se- outer surface must be such that the in- cured to any detachable pallet to en- crease in mass, as determined in a test sure stability in handling and transpor- carried out over a period of 30 minutes tation. Where a detachable pallet is by the Cobb method of determining used, its top surface must be free from water absorption, is not greater than sharp protrusions that might damage 155 grams per square meter (0.0316 the IBC. pounds per square foot)—see ISO 535 (E) (iii) Strengthening devices, such as (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Fi- timber supports to increase stacking berboard must have proper bending

223

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00233 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.709 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

qualities. Fiberboard must be cut, L (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 creased without cutting through any gallons). thickness of fiberboard, and slotted so [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as as to permit assembly without crack- amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR ing, surface breaks, or undue bending. 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 75 FR 5396, Feb. 2, 2010] The fluting of corrugated fiberboard must be firmly glued to the facings. § 178.709 Standards for wooden IBCs. (i) The walls, including top and bot- (a) The provisions in this section tom, must have a minimum puncture apply to wooden IBCs intended to con- resistance of 15 Joules (11 foot-pounds tain solids that are loaded or dis- of energy) measured according to ISO charged by gravity. Wooden IBC types 3036 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). are designated: (ii) Manufacturers’ joints in the bod- (1) 11C Natural wood with inner liner. ies of IBCs must be made with an ap- (2) 11D Plywood with inner liner. propriate overlap and be taped, glued, (3) 11F Reconstituted wood with stitched with metal staples or fastened inner liner. (b) Definitions for wooden IBCs: by other means at least equally effec- (1) Wooden IBCs consist of a rigid or tive. Where joints are made by gluing collapsible wooden body together with or taping, a water-resistant adhesive an inner liner (but no inner packaging) must be used. Metal staples must pass and appropriate service and structural completely through all pieces to be fas- equipment. tened and be formed or protected so (2) Liner means a separate tube or that any inner liner cannot be abraded bag, including the closures of its open- or punctured by them. ings, inserted in the body but not form- (3) The strength of the material used ing an integral part of it. and the construction of the liner must (c) Construction requirements for be appropriate to the capacity of the wooden IBCs are as follows: IBC and the intended use. Joints and (1) Top lifting devices are prohibited closures must be sift-proof and capable in wooden IBCs. of withstanding pressures and impacts (2) The strength of the materials used liable to occur under normal conditions and the method of construction must of handling and transport. be appropriate to the capacity and in- (4) Any integral pallet base forming tended use of the IBC. part of an IBC, or any detachable pal- (i) Natural wood used in the con- let, must be suitable for the mechan- struction of an IBC must be well-sea- ical handling of an IBC filled to its soned, commercially dry, and free from maximum permissible gross mass. defects that would materially lessen (i) The pallet or integral base must the strength of any part of the IBC. be designed to avoid protrusions that Each IBC part must consist of uncut may cause damage to the IBC in han- wood or a piece equivalent in strength dling. and integrity. IBC parts are equivalent (ii) The outer packaging must be se- to one piece when a suitable method of glued assembly is used (i.e., a cured to any detachable pallet to en- Lindermann joint, tongue and groove sure stability in handling and trans- joint, ship lap or rabbet joint, or butt port. Where a detachable pallet is used, joint with at least two corrugated its top surface must be free from sharp metal fasteners at each joint, or when protrusions that might damage the other methods at least equally effec- IBC. tive are used). Materials other than (iii) Strengthening devices, such as natural wood may be used for the con- timber supports to increase stacking struction of structural equipment of performance, may be used but must be the outer packaging. external to the inner liner. (ii) Plywood used in construction of (iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs bodies must be at least 3-ply. Plywood intended for stacking must be designed must be made of well-seasoned, rotary- to distribute loads in a stable manner. cut, sliced or sawn veneer, commer- (d) Fiberboard IBCs may not have a cially dry, and free from defects that volumetric capacity greater than 3,000 would materially lessen the strength of

224

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00234 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.710

the body. All adjacent plies must be tain solid hazardous materials. Flexi- glued with water-resistant adhesive. ble IBC types are designated: Materials other than plywood may be (1) 13H1 woven plastic without coat- used for the construction of structural ing or liner. equipment of the outer packaging. (2) 13H2 woven plastic, coated. (iii) Reconstituted wood used in con- (3) 13H3 woven plastic with liner. struction of bodies must be water re- (4) 13H4 woven plastic, coated and sistant reconstituted wood such as with liner. hardboard or particle board. Materials (5) 13H5 plastic film. other than reconstituted wood may be (6) 13L1 textile without coating or used for the construction of structural liner. equipment of the outer packaging. (7) 13L2 textile, coated. (iv) Wooden IBCs must be firmly (8) 13L3 textile with liner. nailed or secured to corner posts or (9) 13L4 textile, coated and with ends or be assembled by similar de- liner. vices. (10) 13M1 paper, multiwall. (3) The strength of the material used (11) 13M2 paper, multiwall, water re- and the construction of the liner must sistant. be appropriate to the capacity of the (b) Definitions for flexible IBCs: IBC and its intended use. Joints and (1) Flexible IBCs consist of a body con- closures must be sift-proof and capable structed of film, woven plastic, woven of withstanding pressures and impacts fabric, paper, or combination thereof, liable to occur under normal conditions together with any appropriate service of handling and transportation. equipment and handling devices, and if (4) Any integral pallet base forming necessary, an inner coating or liner. part of an IBC, or any detachable pal- (2) Woven plastic means a material let, must be suitable for the mechan- made from stretched tapes or ical handling of an IBC filled to its monofilaments. maximum permissible gross mass. (3) Handling device means any sling, (i) The pallet or integral base must loop, eye, or frame attached to the be designed to avoid protrusions that body of the IBC or formed from a con- may cause damage to the IBC in han- tinuation of the IBC body material. dling. (c) Construction requirements for (ii) The outer packaging must be se- flexible IBCs are as follows: cured to any detachable pallet to en- (1) The strength of the material and sure stability in handling and transpor- the construction of the flexible IBC tation. Where a detachable pallet is must be appropriate to its capacity and used, its top surface must be free from its intended use. sharp protrusions that might damage (2) All materials used in the con- the IBC. struction of flexible IBCs of types 13M1 (iii) Strengthening devices, such as and 13M2 must, after complete immer- timber supports to increase stacking sion in water for not less than 24 hours, performance, may be used but must be retain at least 85 percent of the tensile external to the inner liner. strength as measured originally on the (iv) The load-bearing surfaces of IBCs material conditioned to equilibrium at intended for stacking must be designed 67 percent relative humidity or less. to distribute loads in a stable manner. (3) Seams must be stitched or formed by heat sealing, gluing or any equiva- (d) Wooden IBCs may not have a vol- lent method. All stitched seam-ends umetric capacity greater than 3,000 L must be secured. (793 gallons) or less than 450 L (119 gal- (4) In addition to conformance with lons). the requirements of § 173.24 of this sub- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as chapter, flexible IBCs must be resistant amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 75 FR to aging and degradation caused by ul- 5397, Feb. 2, 2010] traviolet radiation. (5) For plastic flexible IBCs, if nec- § 178.710 Standards for flexible IBCs. essary, protection against ultraviolet (a) The provisions of this section radiation must be provided by the addi- apply to flexible IBCs intended to con- tion of pigments or inhibitors such as

225

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00235 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.800 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

carbon black. These additives must be assembled so as to be capable of suc- compatible with the contents and re- cessfully passing the prescribed tests main effective throughout the life of and of conforming to the requirements the container. Where use is made of of § 173.24 of this subchapter at all carbon black, pigments, or inhibitors, times while in transportation. other than those used in the manufac- (b) Responsibility. It is the responsi- ture of the tested design type, re- bility of the IBC manufacturer to as- testing may be omitted if the carbon sure that each IBC is capable of passing black content, the pigment content or the prescribed tests. To the extent that the inhibitor content does not ad- an IBC assembly function, including versely affect the physical properties final closure, is performed by the per- of the material of construction. Addi- son who offers a hazardous material for tives may be included in the composi- transportation, that person is respon- tion of the plastic material to improve sible for performing the function in ac- resistance to aging, provided they do cordance with §§ 173.22 and 178.2 of this not adversely affect the physical or subchapter. chemical properties of the material. (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this (6) No used material other than pro- subpart: duction residues or regrind from the (1) IBC design type refers to an IBC same manufacturing process may be that does not differ in structural de- used in the manufacture of plastic sign, size, material of construction, flexible IBCs. This does not preclude wall thickness, manner of construction the re-use of component parts such as and representative service equipment. fittings and pallet bases, provided such (2) Design qualification testing is the components have not in any way been performance of the drop, leakproofness, damaged in previous use. hydrostatic pressure, stacking, bot- (7) When flexible IBCs are filled, the tom-lift or top-lift, tear, topple, right- ratio of height to width may not be ing and vibration tests, as applicable, more than 2:1. prescribed in this subpart, for each dif- (d) Flexible IBCs: (1) May not have a ferent IBC design type, at the start of volumetric capacity greater than 3,000 production of that packaging. L (793 gallons) or less than 56 L (15 gal- (3) Periodic design requalification test is lons); and the performance of the applicable tests (2) Must be designed and tested to a specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- capacity of no less than 50 kg (110 tion on an IBC design type, in order to pounds). requalify the design for continued production at the frequency specified in [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38068, July 26, 1994, as amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug. paragraph (e) of this section. 4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 75 FR 5397, (4) Production inspection is the inspec- Feb. 2, 2010] tion that must initially be conducted on each newly manufactured IBC. Subpart O—Testing of IBCs (5) Production testing is the performance of the leakproofness test in ac- § 178.800 Purpose and scope. cordance with paragraph (f) of this section on each IBC intended to contain This subpart prescribes certain test- solids discharged by pressure or in- ing requirements for IBCs identified in tended to contain liquids. subpart N of this part. (6) Periodic retest and inspection is per- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as formance of the applicable test and in- amended by 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] spections on each IBC at the frequency specified in § 180.352 of this subchapter. § 178.801 General requirements. (7) Different IBC design type is one (a) General. The test procedures pre- that differs from a previously qualified scribed in this subpart are intended to IBC design type in structural design, ensure that IBCs containing hazardous size, material of construction, wall materials can withstand normal condi- thickness, or manner of construction, tions of transportation and are consid- but does not include: ered minimum requirements. Each (i) A packaging which differs in sur- packaging must be manufactured and face treatment;

226

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00236 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.801

(ii) A rigid plastic IBC or composite leakproofness test prescribed in IBC which differs with regard to addi- § 178.813 of this subpart and must be tives used to comply with §§ 178.706(c), performed on each IBC intended to con- 178.707(c) or 178.710(c); tain solids discharged by pressure or (iii) A packaging which differs only intended to contain liquids. For this in its lesser external dimensions (i.e., test: height, width, length) provided mate- (i) The IBC need not have its closures rials of construction and material fitted, except that the IBC must be thicknesses or fabric weight remain fitted with its primary bottom closure. the same; (ii) The inner receptacle of a com- (iv) A packaging which differs in posite IBC may be tested without the service equipment. outer IBC body, provided the test re- (d) Design qualification testing. The sults are not affected. packaging manufacturer shall achieve (2) Applicable inspection require- successful test results for the design ments in § 180.352 of this subchapter qualification testing at the start of must be performed on each IBC ini- production of each new or different IBC tially after production. design type. The service equipment se- (g) Test samples. The IBC manufac- lected for this design qualification turer shall conduct the design quali- testing shall be representative of the fication and periodic design requali- type of service equipment that will be fication tests prescribed in this subpart fitted to any finished IBC body under using random samples of IBCs, accord- the design. Application of the certification mark by the manufacturer shall ing to the appropriate test section. constitute certification that the IBC (h) Selective testing of IBCs. Variation design type passed the prescribed tests of a tested IBC design type is permitted in this subpart. without further testing, provided selec- (e) Periodic design requalification test- tive testing demonstrates an equiva- ing. (1) Periodic design requalification lent or greater level of safety than the must be conducted on each qualified design type tested and which has been IBC design type if the manufacturer is approved by the Associate Adminis- to maintain authorization for contin- trator. ued production. The IBC manufacturer (i) Approval of equivalent packagings. shall achieve successful test results for An IBC differing from the standards in the periodic design requalification at subpart N of this part, or tested using sufficient frequency to ensure each methods other than those specified in packaging produced by the manufac- this subpart, may be used if approved turer is capable of passing the design by the Associate Administrator. Such qualification tests. Design requalifica- IBCs must be shown to be equally effec- tion tests must be conducted at least tive, and testing methods used must be once every 12 months. equivalent. (2) Changes in the frequency of design (j) Proof of compliance. Notwith- requalification testing specified in standing the periodic design requali- paragraph (e)(1) of this section are au- fication testing intervals specified in thorized if approved by the Associate paragraph (e) of this section, the Asso- Administrator. These requests must be ciate Administrator, or a designated based on: representative, may at any time re- (i) Detailed quality assurance pro- quire demonstration of compliance by grams that assure that proposed de- a manufacturer, through testing in ac- creases in test frequency maintain the cordance with this subpart, that pack- integrity of originally tested IBC de- agings meet the requirements of this sign types; and subpart. As required by the Associate (ii) Demonstrations that each IBC Administrator, or a designated rep- produced is capable of withstanding resentative, the manufacturer shall ei- higher standards (e.g., increased drop ther: height, hydrostatic pressure, wall (1) Conduct performance tests or thickness, fabric weight). have tests conducted by an inde- (f) Production testing and inspection. pendent testing facility, in accordance (1) Production testing consists of the with this subpart; or

227

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00237 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.802 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(2) Make a sample IBC available to (l) Record retention. Following each the Associate Administrator, or a des- design qualification test and each peri- ignated representative, for testing in odic retest on an IBC, a test report accordance with this subpart. must be prepared. (k) Coatings. If an inner treatment or (1) The test report must be main- coating of an IBC is required for safety tained at each location where the pack- reasons, the manufacturer shall design aging is manufactured, certified, and a the IBC so that the treatment or coat- design qualification test or periodic ing retains its protective properties retest is conducted as follows: even after withstanding the tests prescribed by this subpart.

Responsible party Duration

(2) The test report must be made (x) The signature of the person con- available to a user of a packaging or a ducting the test, and name of the per- representative of the Department upon son responsible for testing. request. The test report, at a min- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as imum, must contain the following in- amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug. formation: 4, 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 66 FR 33452, (i) Name and address of test facility; June 21, 2001; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003; 73 FR (ii) Name and address of the person 57008, Oct. 1, 2008; 74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 certifying the IBC; FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010; 78 FR 14715, Mar. 7, 2013; (iii) A unique test report identifica- 78 FR 65487, Oct. 31, 2013; 80 FR 72929, Nov. 23, 2015; 85 FR 27901, May 11, 2020] tion; (iv) Date of test report; § 178.802 Preparation of fiberboard (v) Manufacturer of the IBC; IBCs for testing. (vi) Description of the IBC design (a) Fiberboard IBCs and composite type (e.g., dimensions, materials, clo- IBCs with fiberboard outer packagings sures, thickness, representative service must be conditioned for at least 24 equipment, etc.); hours in an atmosphere maintained: (vii) Maximum IBC capacity; (1) At 50 percent ±2 percent relative (viii) Characteristics of test contents, humidity, and at a temperature of 23° including for rigid plastics and com- ±2 °C (73 °F ±4 °F); or posite IBCs subject to the hydrostatic (2) At 65 percent ±2 percent relative pressure test in § 178.814 of this subpart, humidity, and at a temperature of 20° the temperature of the water used; ±2 °C (68 °F ±4 °F), or 27 °C ±2 °C (81 °F (ix) Test descriptions and results (in- ±4 °F). cluding drop heights, hydrostatic pres- (b) Average values for temperature sures, tear propagation length, etc.); and humidity must fall within the lim- and its in paragraph (a) of this section. Short-term fluctuations and measurement limitations may cause individual measurements to vary by up to ±5 percent relative humidity without significant impairment of test reproducibility.

228

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00238 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.810

(c) For purposes of periodic design re- § 178.803 Testing and certification of qualification only, fiberboard IBCs or IBCs. composite IBCs with fiberboard outer Tests required for the certification of packagings may be at ambient condi- each IBC design type are specified in tions. the following table. The letter X indi- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as cates that one IBC (except where amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] noted) of each design type must be subjected to the tests in the order presented:

IBC type

Performance test Rigid plastic Composite Fiber-board Metal IBCs IBCs IBCs IBCs Wooden IBCs Flexible IBCs

Vibration ...... 6 X 6 X 6 X 6 X 6 X 1.5 X Bottom lift ...... 2 X X X X X Top lift ...... 2 X 2 X 2 X 25 X Stacking ...... 7 X 7 X 7 X 7 X 7 X 5 X Leakproofness ...... 3 X 3 X 3 X Hydrostatic ...... 3 X 3 X 3 X Drop ...... 4 X 4 X 4 X 4 X 4 X 5 X Topple ...... 5 X Righting ...... 25 X Tear ...... 5 X 1 Flexible IBCs must be capable of withstanding the vibration test. 2 This test must be performed only if IBCs are designed to be handled this way. For metal IBCs, at least one of the bottom lift or top lift tests must be performed. 3 The leakproofness and hydrostatic pressure tests are required only for IBCs intended to contain liquids or intended to contain solids loaded or discharged under pressure. 4 Another IBC of the same design type may be used for the drop test set forth in § 178.810 of this subchapter. 5 Another different flexible IBC of the same design type may be used for each test. 6 The vibration test may be performed in another order for IBCs manufactured and tested under provisions of an exemption before October 1, 1994 and for non-DOT specification portable tanks tested before October 1, 1994, intended for export. 7 This test must be performed only if the IBC is designed to be stacked.

[Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40039, Aug. 4, 1995, as amended at 64 FR 51919, Sept. 27, 1999; 66 FR 45386, 45390, Aug. 28, 2001]

§ 178.810 Drop test. (4) Rigid plastic IBCs and composite IBCs with plastic inner receptacles (a) General. The drop test must be must be conditioned for testing by re- conducted for the qualification of all ducing the temperature of the pack- IBC design types and performed peri- aging and its contents to ¥18 °C (0 °F) odically as specified in § 178.801(e) of or lower. Test liquids must be kept in this subpart. the liquid state, if necessary, by the (b) Special preparation for the drop test. addition of anti-freeze. Water/anti- (1) Metal, rigid plastic, and composite freeze solutions with a minimum spe- IBCs intended to contain solids must cific gravity of 0.95 for testing at ¥18 be filled to not less than 95 percent of °C (0 °F) or lower are considered ac- their maximum capacity, or if intended ceptable test liquids, and may be con- to contain liquids, to not less than 98 sidered equivalent to water for test percent of their maximum capacity. purposes. IBCs conditioned in this way Pressure relief devices must be re- are not required to be conditioned in moved and their apertures plugged or accordance with § 178.802. rendered inoperative. (c) Test method. (1) Samples of all IBC (2) Fiberboard and wooden IBCs must design types must be dropped onto a be filled with a solid material to not rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat and less than 95 percent of their maximum horizontal surface. The point of impact capacity; the contents must be evenly must be the most vulnerable part of distributed. the base of the IBC being tested. Fol- (3) Flexible IBCs must be filled to the lowing the drop, the IBC must be re- maximum permissible gross mass; the stored to the upright position for ob- contents must be evenly distributed. servation.

229

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00239 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.811 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(2) IBC design types with a capacity occurs after the IBC has been raised of 0.45 cubic meters (15.9 cubic feet) or clear of the ground. less must be subject to an additional [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as drop test. The same IBC or a different amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 69 FR IBC of the same design may be used for 76186, Dec. 20, 2004; 71 FR 78635, Dec. 29, 2006; each drop. 74 FR 2269, Jan. 14, 2009; 75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, (d) Drop height. (1) For all IBCs, drop 2010; 85 FR 27901, May 11, 2020] heights are specified as follows: § 178.811 Bottom lift test. (i) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet). (ii) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet). (a) General. The bottom lift test must (iii) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 be conducted for the qualification of feet). all IBC design types designed to be lifted from the base. (2) Drop tests are to be performed (b) Special preparation for the bottom with the solid or liquid to be trans- lift test. The IBC must be loaded to 1.25 ported or with a non-hazardous mate- times its maximum permissible gross rial having essentially the same phys- mass, the load being evenly distrib- ical characteristics. uted. (3) The specific gravity and viscosity (c) Test method. All IBC design types of a substituted non-hazardous mate- must be raised and lowered twice by a rial used in the drop test for liquids lift truck with the forks centrally posi- must be similar to the hazardous mate- tioned and spaced at three quarters of rial intended for transportation. Water the dimension of the side of entry (un- also may be used for the liquid drop less the points of entry are fixed). The test under the following conditions: forks must penetrate to three quarters (i) Where the substances to be carried of the direction of entry. The test must have a specific gravity not exceeding be repeated from each possible direc- 1.2, the drop heights must be those tion of entry. specified in paragraph (d)(1) of this sec- (d) Criteria for passing the test. For all tion for each IBC design type; and IBC design types designed to be lifted (ii) Where the substances to be car- from the base, there may be no perma- ried have a specific gravity exceeding nent deformation which renders the 1.2, the drop heights must be as fol- IBC unsafe for transportation and no lows: loss of contents. (A) Packing Group I: SG × 1.5 m (4.9 [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as feet). amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] (B) Packing Group II: SG × 1.0 m (3.3 § 178.812 Top lift test. feet). (C) Packing Group III: SG × 0.67 m (a) General. The top lift test must be (2.2 feet). conducted for the qualification of all (e) Criteria for passing the test. For all IBC design types designed to be lifted IBC design types, there may be no dam- from the top or, for flexible IBCs, from the side. age which renders the IBC unsafe to be (b) Special preparation for the top lift transported for salvage or for dispos- test. (1) Metal, rigid plastic, and com- able, and no loss of contents. The IBC posite IBC design types must be loaded shall be capable of being lifted by an to twice the maximum permissible appropriate means until clear of the gross mass with the load being evenly floor for five minutes. A slight dis- distributed. charge from a closure upon impact is (2) Flexible IBC design types must be not considered to be a failure of the filled to six times the maximum net IBC provided that no further leakage mass, the load being evenly distrib- occurs. A slight discharge (e.g., from uted. closures or stitch holes) upon impact is (c) Test method. (1) A metal or flexible not considered a failure of the flexible IBC must be lifted in the manner for IBC provided that no further leakage which it is designed until clear of the floor and maintained in that position for a period of five minutes.

230

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00240 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.814

(2) Rigid plastic and composite IBC test must be carried out before the fit- design types must be: ting of any thermal insulation equip- (i) Lifted by each pair of diagonally ment. The inner receptacle of a com- opposite lifting devices, so that the posite IBC may be tested without the hoisting forces are applied vertically, outer packaging provided the test re- for a period of five minutes; and sults are not affected. (ii) Lifted by each pair of diagonally (c) Test method and pressure applied. opposite lifting devices, so that the The leakproofness test must be carried hoisting forces are applied towards the out for a suitable length of time using center at 45° to the vertical, for a pe- air at a gauge pressure of not less than riod of five minutes. 20 kPa (2.9 psig). Leakproofness of IBC (3) If not tested as indicated in para- design types must be determined by graph (c)(1) of this section, a flexible coating the seams and joints with a IBC design type must be tested as fol- heavy oil, a soap solution and water, or lows: other methods suitable for the purpose (i) Fill the flexible IBC to 95% full of detecting leaks. Other methods, if at with a material representative of the least equally effective, may be used in product to be shipped. accordance with appendix B of this (ii) Suspend the flexible IBC by its part, or if approved by the Associate lifting devices. Administrator, as provided in (iii) Apply a constant downward force § 178.801(i)). through a specially designed platen. (d) Criterion for passing the test. For The platen will be a minimum of 60% all IBC design types intended to con- and a maximum of 80% of the cross sec- tain solids that are loaded or dis- tional surface area of the flexible IBC. charged under pressure or intended to (iv) The combination of the mass of contain liquids, there may be no leak- the filled flexible IBC and the force ap- age of air from the IBC. plied through the platen must be a minimum of six times the maximum [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as net mass of the flexible IBC. The test amended at 64 FR 10782, Mar. 5, 1999; 66 FR must be conducted for a period of five 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] minutes. (v) Other equally effective methods § 178.814 Hydrostatic pressure test. of top lift testing and preparation may (a) General. The hydrostatic pressure be used with approval of the Associate test must be conducted for the quali- Administrator. fication of all metal, rigid plastic, and (d) Criteria for passing the test. For all composite IBC design types intended to IBC design types designed to be lifted contain solids that are loaded or dis- from the top, there may be no perma- charged under pressure or intended to nent deformation which renders the contain liquids. IBC, including the base pallets when (b) Special preparation for the hydro- applicable, unsafe for transportation, static pressure test. For metal IBCs, the and no loss of contents. test must be carried out before the fit- [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as ting of any thermal insulation equip- amended at 66 FR 33452, June 21, 2001; 66 FR ment. For all IBCs, pressure relief de- 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 68 FR 45042, July 31, 2003] vices and vented closures must be removed and their apertures plugged or § 178.813 Leakproofness test. rendered inoperative. (a) General. The leakproofness test (c) Test method. Hydrostatic gauge must be conducted for the qualification pressure must be measured at the top of all IBC design types and on all proof the IBC. The test must be carried duction units intended to contain sol- out for a period of at least 10 minutes ids that are loaded or discharged under applying a hydrostatic gauge pressure pressure or intended to contain liquids. not less than that indicated in para- (b) Special preparation for the graph (d) of this section. The IBCs may leakproofness test. Vented closures must not be mechanically restrained during either be replaced by similar non-vent- the test. ed closures or the vent must be sealed. (d) Hydrostatic gauge pressure applied. For metal IBC design types, the initial (1) For metal IBC design types, 31A,

231

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00241 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.815 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

31B, 31N: 65 kPa gauge pressure (9.4 mation that would make the IBC un- psig). safe for transportation. (2) For metal IBC design types 21A, (2) For metal IBCs intended to con- 21B, 21N, 31A, 31B, 31N: 200 kPa (29 tain liquids, when subjected to the 200 psig). For metal IBC design types 31A, kPa (29 psig) and the 250 kPa (36 psig) 31B and 31N, the tests in paragraphs test pressures specified in paragraphs (d)(1) and (d)(2) of this section must be (d)(2) and (d)(3) of this section, respec- conducted consecutively. tively, there may be no leakage. (3) For metal IBCs design types 21A, (3) For rigid plastic IBC types 21H1, 21B, and 21N, for Packing Group I sol- 21H2, 31H1, and 31H2, and composite ids: 250 kPa (36 psig) gauge pressure. IBC types 21HZ1, 21HZ2, 31HZ1, and (4) For rigid plastic IBC design types 31HZ2, there may be no leakage and no 21H1 and 21H2 and composite IBC de- permanent deformation which renders sign types 21HZ1 and 21HZ2: 75 kPa (11 the IBC unsafe for transportation. psig). [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as (5) For rigid plastic IBC design types amended at 66 FR 45185, 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] 31H1 and 31H2 and composite IBC design types 31HZ1 and 31HZ2: whichever § 178.815 Stacking test. is the greater of: (a) General. The stacking test must (i) The pressure determined by any be conducted for the qualification of one of the following methods: all IBC design types intended to be (A) The gauge pressure (pressure in stacked. the IBC above ambient atmospheric (b) Special preparation for the stacking pressure) measured in the IBC at 55 °C test. (1) All IBCs except flexible IBC de- (131 °F) multiplied by a safety factor of sign types must be loaded to their max- 1.5. This pressure must be determined imum permissible gross mass. on the basis of the IBC being filled and (2) The flexible IBC must be filled to closed to no more than 98 percent ca- not less than 95 percent of its capacity pacity at 15 °C (60 °F); and to its maximum net mass, with the (B) If absolute pressure (vapor pres- load being evenly distributed. sure of the hazardous material plus at- (c) Test method. (1) Design Qualifica- mospheric pressure) is used, 1.5 multi- tion Testing. All IBCs must be placed on plied by the vapor pressure of the haz- their base on level, hard ground and ardous material at 55 °C (131 °F) minus subjected to a uniformly distributed 100 kPa (14.5 psi). If this method is cho- superimposed test load for a period of sen, the hydrostatic test pressure ap- at least five minutes (see paragraph plied must be at least 100 kPa gauge (c)(5) of this section). pressure (14.5 psig); or (2) Fiberboard, wooden and composite (C) If absolute pressure (vapor pres- IBCs with outer packagings con- sure of the hazardous material plus at- structed of other than plastic mate- mospheric pressure) is used, 1.75 multi- rials must be subject to the test for 24 plied by the vapor pressure of the haz- hours. ardous material at 50 °C (122 °F) minus (3) Rigid plastic IBC types and com- 100 kPa (14.5 psi). If this method is cho- posite IBC types with plastic outer sen, the hydrostatic test pressure ap- packagings (11HH1, 11HH2, 21HH1, plied must be at least 100 kPa gauge 21HH2, 31HH1 and 31HH2) which bear pressure (14.5 psig); or the stacking load must be subjected to (ii) Twice the greater of: (A) The the test for 28 days at 40 °C (104 °F). static pressure of the hazardous mate- (4) For all IBCs, the load must be ap- rial on the bottom of the IBC filled to plied by one of the following methods: 98 percent capacity; or (i) One or more IBCs of the same type (B) The static pressure of water on loaded to their maximum permissible the bottom of the IBC filled to 98 per- gross mass and stacked on the test cent capacity. IBC; (e) Criteria for passing the test(s). (1) (ii) The calculated superimposed test For metal IBCs, subjected to the 65 load weight loaded on either a flat kPa (9.4 psig) test pressure specified in plate or a reproduction of the base of paragraph (d)(1) of this section, there the IBC, which is stacked on the test may be no leakage or permanent defor- IBC.

232

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00242 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.817

(5) Calculation of superimposed test permanent deformation, which renders load. For all IBCs, the load to be placed the whole IBC, including the base pal- on the IBC must be 1.8 times the com- let, unsafe for transportation. bined maximum permissible gross mass (3) For flexible IBCs, there may be no of the number of similar IBCs that may deterioration, which renders the IBC be stacked on top of the IBC during unsafe for transportation, and no loss transportation. of contents. (d) Periodic Retest. (1) The package (4) For the dynamic compression must be tested in accordance with test, a container passes the test if, paragraph (c) of this section; or after application of the required load, (2) The packaging may be tested there is no permanent deformation to using a dynamic compression testing the IBC, which renders the whole IBC, machine. The test must be conducted including the base pallet, unsafe for at room temperature on an empty, un- transportation; in no case may the sealed packaging. The test sample maximum deflection exceed one inch. must be centered on the bottom platen of the testing machine. The top platen [75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010] must be lowered until it comes in con- § 178.816 Topple test. tact with the test sample. Compression must be applied end to end. The speed (a) General. The topple test must be of the compression tester must be one- conducted for the qualification of all half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch flexible IBC design types. per minute. An initial preload of 50 (b) Special preparation for the topple pounds must be applied to ensure a test. The flexible IBC must be filled to definite contact between the test sam- not less than 95 percent of its capacity ple and the platens. The distance be- and to its maximum net mass, with the tween the platens at this time must be load being evenly distributed. recorded as zero deformation. The force (c) Test method. A flexible IBC must ‘‘A’’ then to be applied must be cal- be toppled onto any part of its top culated using the applicable formula: upon a rigid, non-resilient, smooth, flat, and horizontal surface. ¥ × × Liquids: A = (1.8)(n 1) [w + (s v 8.3 (d) Topple height. For all flexible × × .98)] 1.5; IBCs, the topple height is specified as or follows: Solids: A = (1.8)(n ¥ 1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 (1) Packing Group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet). × .95)] × 1.5 (2) Packing Group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet). (3) Packing Group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet). Where: (e) Criteria for passing the test. For all A = applied load in pounds. flexible IBCs, there may be no loss of n = maximum number of IBCs being stacked contents. A slight discharge (e.g., from during transportation. w = maximum weight of one empty container closures or stitch holes) upon impact is in pounds. not considered to be a failure, provided s = specific gravity (liquids) or density (sol- no further leakage occurs. ids) of the lading. [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as v = actual capacity of container (rated ca- amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] pacity + outage) in gallons. and: 8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0 § 178.817 Righting test. gallon of water. (a) General. The righting test must be 1.5 is a compensation factor converting the conducted for the qualification of all static load of the stacking test into a load flexible IBCs designed to be lifted from suitable for dynamic compression testing. the top or side. (e) Criteria for passing the test. (1) For (b) Special preparation for the righting metal, rigid plastic, and composite test. The flexible IBC must be filled to IBCs, there may be no permanent de- not less than 95 percent of its capacity formation, which renders the IBC un- and to its maximum net mass, with the safe for transportation, and no loss of load being evenly distributed. contents. (c) Test method. The flexible IBC, (2) For fiberboard and wooden IBCs, lying on its side, must be lifted at a there may be no loss of contents and no speed of at least 0.1 m/second (0.33 ft/s)

233

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00243 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.818 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

to an upright position, clear of the rotary double-amplitude (peak-to-peak floor, by one lifting device, or by two displacement) of one inch. The IBC lifting devices when four are provided. must be constrained horizontally to (d) Criterion for passing the test. For prevent it from falling off the plat- all flexible IBCs, there may be no dam- form, but must be left free to move age to the IBC or its lifting devices vertically and bounce. which renders the IBC unsafe for trans- (3) The test must be performed for portation or handling. one hour at a frequency that causes the package to be raised from the vibrating [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as platform to such a degree that a piece amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] of material of approximately 1.6-mm § 178.818 Tear test. (0.063-inch) thickness (such as steel strapping or paperboard) can be passed (a) General. The tear test must be between the bottom of the IBC and the conducted for the qualification of all platform. Other methods at least flexible IBC design types. equally effective may be used (see (b) Special preparation for the tear test. § 178.801(i)). The flexible IBC must be filled to not (c) Criteria for passing the test. An IBC less than 95 percent of its capacity and passes the vibration test if there is no to its maximum net mass, the load rupture or leakage. being evenly distributed. (c) Test method. Once the IBC is [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as placed on the ground, a 100-mm (4-inch) amended by Amdt. 178–108, 60 FR 40038, Aug. 4, 1995; Amdt. 178–110, 60 FR 49111, Sept. 21, knife score, completely penetrating the 1995; 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001; 75 FR 5397, wall of a wide face, is made at a 45° Feb. 2, 2010] angle to the principal axis of the IBC, halfway between the bottom surface Subpart P—Large Packagings and the top level of the contents. The IBC must then be subjected to a uni- Standards formly distributed superimposed load equivalent to twice the maximum net SOURCE: 75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, unless oth- mass. The load must be applied for at erwise noted. least five minutes. An IBC which is de- § 178.900 Purpose and scope. signed to be lifted from the top or the side must, after removal of the super- (a) This subpart prescribes require- imposed load, be lifted clear of the ments for Large Packaging intended floor and maintained in that position for the transportation of hazardous for a period of five minutes. materials. Standards for these pack- (d) Criterion for passing the test. The agings are based on the UN Rec- IBC passes the tear test if the cut does ommendations. not propagate more than 25 percent of (b) Terms used in this subpart are de- its original length. fined in § 171.8 of this subchapter. [Amdt. 178–103, 59 FR 38074, July 26, 1994, as § 178.905 Large Packaging identifica- amended at 66 FR 45386, Aug. 28, 2001] tion codes. Large packaging code designations § 178.819 Vibration test. consist of: two numerals specified in (a) General. The vibration test must paragraph (a) of this section; followed be conducted for the qualification of by the capital letter(s) specified in all rigid IBC design types. Flexible IBC paragraph (b) of this section. design types must be capable of with- (a) Large packaging code number standing the vibration test. designations are as follows: 50 for rigid (b) Test method. (1) A sample IBC, se- Large Packagings; or 51 for flexible lected at random, must be filled and Large Packagings. closed as for shipment. IBCs intended (b) Large Packagings code letter des- for liquids may be tested using water ignations are as follows: as the filling material for the vibration (1) ‘‘A’’ means steel (all types and test. surface treatments). (2) The sample IBC must be placed on (2) ‘‘B’’ means aluminum. a vibrating platform with a vertical or (3) ‘‘C’’ means natural wood.

234

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00244 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.910

(4) ‘‘D’’ means plywood. quirements in subpart P of this part, or (5) ‘‘F’’ means reconstituted wood. is tested using methods other than (6) ‘‘G’’ means fiberboard. those specified in this subpart, and is (7) ‘‘H’’ means plastic. approved by the Associate Adminis- (8) ‘‘M’’ means paper, multiwall. trator in accordance with the provi- (9) ‘‘N’’ means metal (other than sions in § 178.955; steel or aluminum). (iii) A capital letter identifying the performance standard under which the § 178.910 Marking of Large Pack- design type has been successfully test- agings. ed, as follows: (a) The manufacturer must: (A) X—for Large Packagings meeting (1) Mark every Large Packaging in a Packing Groups I, II and III tests; durable and clearly visible manner. (B) Y—for Large Packagings meeting The marking may be applied in a single Packing Groups II and III tests; and line or in multiple lines provided the (C) Z—for Large Packagings meeting correct sequence is followed with the Packing Group III test. information required by this section, in (iv) The month (designated numeri- letters, numerals, and symbols of at cally) and year (last two digits) of least 12 mm in height. This minimum manufacture; marking size requirement applies only (v) The country authorizing the allo- to large packages manufactured after cation of the mark. The letters ‘‘USA’’ January 1, 2014. The following informa- indicate that the Large Packaging is tion is required in the sequence pre- manufactured and marked in the sented: United States in compliance with the (i) Except as provided in provisions of this subchapter. § 178.503(e)(1)(ii), the United Nations (vi) The name and address or symbol packaging symbol as illustrated in of the manufacturer or the approval § 178.503(e)(1)(i). For metal Large Pack- agency certifying compliance with sub- agings on which the marking is part P and subpart Q of this part. Sym- stamped or embossed, the capital let- bols, if used, must be registered with ters ‘‘UN’’ may be applied instead of the Associate Administrator. the symbol; (vii) The stacking test load in kilo- (ii) The code number designating the grams (kg). For Large Packagings not Large Packaging design type according to designed for stacking the figure ‘‘0’’ § 178.905. The letters ‘‘T’’ or ‘‘W’’ may must be shown. follow the Large Packaging design type (viii) The maximum permissible identification code on a Large Pack- gross mass or for flexible Large Pack- aging. Large Salvage Packagings con- agings, the maximum net mass, in kg. forming to the requirements of subpart (2) The following are examples of P of this part must be marked with the symbols and required markings: letter ‘‘T’’. Large Packagings must be (i) For a steel Large Packaging suit- marked with the letter ‘‘W’’ when the able for stacking; stacking load: 2,500 Large Packaging differs from the re- kg; maximum gross mass: 1,000 kg.

(ii) For a plastic Large Packaging not suitable for stacking; maximum gross mass: 800 kg.

235

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00245 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER02FE10.003 § 178.910 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(iii) For a Flexible Large Packaging not suitable for stacking; maximum gross mass: 500 kg.

(iv) For a steel Large Salvage Pack- load: 2,500 kg; maximum gross mass: aging suitable for stacking; stacking 1,000 kg.

(b) All Large Packagings manufac- side being not less than 100 mm (3.9 tured, repaired or remanufactured after inches) by 100 mm (3.9 inches) as meas- January 1, 2015 must be marked with ured from the corner printer marks the symbol applicable to a Large Pack- shown on the following figures. Where aging designed for stacking or not de- dimensions are not specified, all fea- signed for stacking, as appropriate. tures must be in approximate propor- The symbol must be a square with each tion to those shown.

(1) Transitional exception—A marking 31, 2014, may continue to be applied to in conformance with the requirements all Large Packagings manufactured, of this paragraph in effect on December

236

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00246 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER02FE10.004 ER02FE10.005 ER08JA15.003 ER07JA13.001 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.925

repaired or remanufactured between tended to contain liquids and solids. January 1, 2015 and December 31, 2016. Metal Large Packaging types are des- (2) For domestic transportation, a ignated: Large Packaging marked prior to Jan- (1) 50A steel uary 1, 2017 and in conformance with (2) 50B aluminum the requirements of this paragraph in (3) 50N metal (other than steel or alu- effect on December 31, 2014, may con- minum) tinue in service until the end of its use- (b) Each Large Packaging must be ful life. made of suitable ductile metal mate- [75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR rials. Welds must be made so as to 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013; maintain design type integrity of the 80 FR 1168, Jan. 8, 2015] receptacle under conditions normally incident to transportation. Low-tem- § 178.915 General Large Packaging standards. perature performance must be taken into account when appropriate. (a) Each Large Packaging must be re- (c) The use of dissimilar metals must sistant to, or protected from, deterio- not result in deterioration that could ration due to exposure to the external affect the integrity of the Large Pack- environment. Large Packagings in- aging. tended for solid hazardous materials must be sift-proof and water-resistant. (d) Metal Large Packagings may not (b) All service equipment must be po- have a volumetric capacity greater sitioned or protected to minimize po- than 3,000 L (793 gallons) and not less tential loss of contents resulting from than 450 L (119 gallons). damage during Large Packaging han- § 178.925 Standards for rigid plastic dling and transportation. Large Packagings. (c) Each Large Packaging, including attachments and service and structural (a) The provisions in this section equipment, must be designed to with- apply to rigid plastic Large Packagings stand, without loss of hazardous mate- intended to contain liquids and solids. rials, the internal pressure of the con- Rigid plastic Large Packaging types tents and the stresses of normal han- are designated: dling and transport. A Large Pack- (1) 50H rigid plastics. aging intended for stacking must be de- (2) [Reserved] signed for stacking. Any lifting or se- (b) A rigid plastic Large Packaging curing features of a Large Packaging must be manufactured from plastic must be sufficient strength to with- material of known specifications and stand the normal conditions of han- be of a strength relative to its capacity dling and transportation without gross and to the service it is required to per- distortion or failure and must be posi- form. In addition to conformance to tioned so as to cause no undue stress in § 173.24 of this subchapter, plastic mate- any part of the Large Packaging. rials must be resistant to aging and to (d) A Large Packaging consisting of degradation caused by ultraviolet radi- packagings within a framework must ation. be so constructed that the packaging is (1) If protection against ultraviolet not damaged by the framework and is radiation is necessary, it must be pro- retained within the framework at all vided by the addition of a pigment or times. inhibiter such as carbon black to plas- (e) Large Packaging design types tic materials. These additives must be must be constructed in such a way as compatible with the contents and re- to be bottom-lifted or top-lifted as main effective throughout the life of specified in §§ 178.970 and 178.975. the plastic Large Packaging body. [75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR Where use is made of carbon black, pig- 60339, Sept. 30, 2010] ments or inhibitors, other than those used in the manufacture of the tested § 178.920 Standards for metal Large design type, retesting may be omitted Packagings. if changes in the carbon black content, (a) The provisions in this section the pigment content or the inhibitor apply to metal Large Packagings in- content do not adversely affect the

237

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00247 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.930 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

physical properties of the material of (ii) Manufacturers’ joints in the construction. outer packaging of Large Packagings (2) Additives may be included in the must be made with an appropriate composition of the plastic material to overlap and be taped, glued, stitched improve the resistance to aging or to with metal staples or fastened by other serve other purposes, provided they do means at least equally effective. Where not adversely affect the physical or joints are made by gluing or taping, a chemical properties of the material of water resistant adhesive must be used. construction. Metal staples must pass completely (3) No used material other than pro- through all pieces to be fastened and be duction residues or regrind from the formed or protected so that any inner same manufacturing process may be liner cannot be abraded or punctured used in the manufacture of rigid plastic by them. Large Packagings. (2) Integral and detachable pallets. (i) (c) Rigid plastic Large Packagings: Any integral pallet base forming part (1) May not have a volumetric capac- of a Large Packaging or any detach- ity greater than 3,000 L (793 gallons); able pallet must be suitable for me- and chanical handling with the Large (2) May not have a volumetric capac- Packaging filled to its maximum per- ity less than 450 L (119 gallons). missible gross mass. (ii) The pallet or integral base must § 178.930 Standards for fiberboard be designed to avoid protrusions caus- Large Packagings. ing damage to the fiberboard Large (a) The provisions in this section Packagings in handling. apply to fiberboard Large Packagings (iii) The body must be secured to any intended to contain solids. Rigid fiber- detached pallet to ensure stability in board Large Packaging types are des- handling and transport. Where a de- ignated: tachable pallet is used, its top surface (1) 50G fiberboard must be free from protrusions that (2) [Reserved] might damage the Large Packaging. (b) Construction requirements for fiber- (3) Strengthening devices, such as board Large Packagings. (1) Fiberboard timber supports to increase stacking Large Packagings must be constructed performance may be used but must be of strong, solid or double-faced cor- external to the liner. rugated fiberboard (single or (4) The load-bearing surfaces of Large multiwall) that is appropriate to the Packagings intended for stacking must capacity of the Large Packagings and be designed to distribute the load in a to their intended use. Water resistance stable manner. of the outer surface must be such that (c) Fiberboard Large Packagings may the increase in mass, as determined in not have a volumetric capacity greater a test carried out over a period of 30 than 3,000 L (793 gallons) and not less minutes by the Cobb method of deter- than 450 L (119 gallons). mining water absorption, is not greater [75 FR 5397, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR than 155 grams per square meter (0.0316 60339, Sept. 30, 2010] pounds per square foot)—see ISO 535 (E) (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). Fi- § 178.935 Standards for wooden Large berboard must have proper bending Packagings. qualities. Fiberboard must be cut, (a) The provisions in this section creased without cutting through any apply to wooden Large Packagings in- thickness of fiberboard, and slotted so tended to contain solids. Wooden Large as to permit assembly without crack- Packaging types are designated: ing, surface breaks or undue bending. (1) 50C natural wood. The fluting or corrugated fiberboard (2) 50D plywood. must be firmly glued to the facings. (3) 50F reconstituted wood. (i) The walls, including top and bot- (b) Construction requirements for tom, must have a minimum puncture wooden Large Packagings are as fol- resistance of 15 Joules (11 foot-pounds lows: of energy) measured according to ISO (1) The strength of the materials used 3036 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). and the method of construction must

238

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00248 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.940

be appropriate to the capacity and in- performance, may be used but must be tended use of the Large Packagings. external to the liner. (i) Natural wood used in the con- (4) The load bearing surfaces of the struction of Large Packagings must be Large Packaging must be designed to well-seasoned, commercially dry and distribute loads in a stable manner. free from defects that would materially (c) Wooden Large Packagings: lessen the strength of any part of the (1) May not have a volumetric capac- Large Packagings. Each Large Pack- ity greater than 3,000 L (793 gallons); aging part must consist of uncut wood and or a piece equivalent in strength and (2) May not have a volumetric capac- integrity. Large Packagings parts are ity less than 450 L (119 gallons). equivalent to one piece when a suitable method of glued assembly is used (i.e., § 178.940 Standards for flexible Large a Lindermann joint, tongue and groove Packagings. joint, ship, lap or babbet joint; or butt (a) The provisions in this section joint with at least two corrugated apply to flexible Large Packagings in- metal fasteners at each joint, or when tended to contain liquids and solids. other methods at least equally effec- Flexible Large Packagings types are tive are used). designated: (ii) Plywood used in construction (1) 51H flexible plastics. must be at least 3-ply. Plywood must (2) 51M flexible paper. be made of well-seasoned rotary cut, (b) Construction requirements for sliced or sawn veneer, commercially flexible Large Packagings are as fol- dry and free from defects that would lows: materially lessen the strength of the (1) The strength of the material and Large Packagings. All adjacent piles the construction of the flexible Large must be glued with water resistant ad- Packagings must be appropriate to its hesive. Materials other than plywood capacity and its intended use. may be used for the construction of the (2) All materials used in the con- Large Packaging. struction of flexible Large Packagings (iii) Reconstituted wood used in the of types 51M must, after complete im- construction of Large Packagings must mersion in water for not less than 24 be water resistant reconstituted wood hours, retain at least 85 percent of the such as hardboard, particle board or tensile strength as measured originally other suitable type. on the material conditioned to equi- (iv) Wooden Large Packagings must librium at 67 percent relative humidity be firmly nailed or secured to corner or less. posts or ends or be assembled by simi- (3) Seams must be stitched or formed lar devices. by heat sealing, gluing or any equiva- (2) Integral and detachable pallets. (i) lent method. All stitched seam-ends Any integral pallet base forming part must be secured. of a Large Packaging, or any detach- (4) In addition to conformance with able pallet must be suitable for me- the requirements of § 173.24 of this sub- chanical handling of a Large Pack- chapter, flexible Large Packaging must aging filled to its maximum permis- be resistant to aging and degradation sible gross mass. caused by ultraviolet radiation. (ii) The pallet or integral base must (5) For plastic flexible Large Pack- be designed to avoid protrusion that agings, if necessary, protection against may cause damage to the Large Pack- ultraviolet radiation must be provided aging in handling. by the addition of pigments or inhibi- (iii) The body must be secured to any tors such as carbon black. These addi- detachable pallet to ensure stability in tives must be compatible with the con- handling and transportation. Where a tents and remain effective throughout detachable pallet is used, its top sur- the life of the Large Packaging. Where face must be free from protrusions that use is made of carbon black, pigments might damage the Large Packaging. or inhibitors other than those used in (3) Strengthening devices, such as the manufacture of the tested design timber supports to increase stacking type, retesting may be omitted if the

239

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00249 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.950 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

carbon black content, the pigment con- with §§ 173.22 and 178.2 of this sub- tent or the inhibitor content do not ad- chapter. versely affect the physical properties (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this of the material of construction. subpart: (6) Additives may be included in the (1) Large packaging design type refers composition of the material of the to a Large Packaging which does not Large Packaging to improve the resist- differ in structural design, size, mate- ance to aging, provided they do not ad- rial of construction and packing. versely affect the physical or chemical (2) Design qualification testing is the properties of the material. performance of the drop, stacking, and (7) When flexible material Large bottom-lift or top-lift tests, as applica- Packagings are filled, the ratio of ble, prescribed in this subpart, for each height to width must be no more than different Large Packaging design type, 2:1. at the start of production of that pack- (c) Flexible Large Packagings: aging. (1) May not have a volumetric capac- (3) Periodic design requalification test is ity greater than 3,000 L (793 gallons); the performance of the applicable tests (2) May not have a volumetric capac- specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- ity less than 56 L (15 gallons); and tion on a Large Packaging design type, (3) Must be designed and tested to a to requalify the design for continued capacity of not less than 50 kg (110 production at the frequency specified pounds). in paragraph (e) of this section. (4) Production inspection is the inspec- Subpart Q—Testing of Large tion, which must initially be conducted Packagings on each newly manufactured Large Packaging. SOURCE: 75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, unless oth- (5) Different Large Packaging design erwise noted. type is one which differs from a previously qualified Large Packaging de- § 178.950 Purpose and scope. sign type in structural design, size, ma- This subpart prescribes certain test- terial of construction, wall thickness, ing requirements for Large Packagings or manner of construction, but does identified in subpart P of this part. not include: (i) A packaging which differs in sur- § 178.955 General requirements. face treatment; (a) General. The test procedures pre- (ii) A rigid plastic Large Packaging, scribed in this subpart are intended to which differs with regard to additives ensure that Large Packagings con- used to comply with § 178.925(b) or taining hazardous materials can with- § 178.940(b); stand normal conditions of transpor- (iii) A packaging which differs only tation. These test procedures are con- in its lesser external dimensions (i.e., sidered minimum requirements. Each height, width, length) provided mate- packaging must be manufactured and rials of construction and material assembled so as to be capable of suc- thickness or fabric weight remain the cessfully passing the prescribed tests same; and to conform to the requirements of (6) Remanufactured Large Packaging is § 173.24 of this subchapter while in a metal or rigid Large Packaging that transportation. is produced as a UN type from a non- (b) Responsibility. The Large Pack- UN type or is converted from one UN aging manufacturer is responsible for design type to another UN design type. ensuring each Large Packaging is capa- Remanufactured Large Packagings are ble of passing the prescribed tests. To subject to the same requirements of the extent a Large Packaging’s assem- this subchapter that apply to new bly function, including final closure, is Large Packagings of the same type. performed by the person who offers a (7) Reused Large Packaging is a Large hazardous material for transportation, Packaging intended to be refilled and that person is responsible for per- has been examined and found free of de- forming the function in accordance fects affecting its ability to withstand

240

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00250 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.955

the performance tests. See also section. Permitted variations are as § 173.36(c) of this subchapter. follows: (d) Design qualification testing. The (1) Inner packagings of equivalent or packaging manufacturer must achieve smaller size may be used provided— successful test results for the design (i) The inner packagings are of simi- qualification testing at the start of lar design to the tested inner pack- production of each new or different agings (i.e., shape—round, rectangular, Large Packaging design type. Applica- etc.); tion of the certification mark by the (ii) The material of construction of manufacturer constitutes certification the inner packagings (glass, plastic, that the Large Packaging design type metal, etc.) offers resistance to impact passed the prescribed tests in this sub- and stacking forces equal to or greater part. than that of the originally tested inner (e) Periodic design requalification test- packaging; ing. (1) Periodic design requalification (iii) The inner packagings have the must be conducted on each qualified same or smaller openings and the clo- Large Packaging design type if the sure is of similar design (e.g., screw manufacturer is to maintain authoriza- cap, friction lid, etc.); tion for continued production. The (iv) Sufficient additional cushioning Large Packaging manufacturer must material is used to take up void spaces achieve successful test results for the and to prevent significant movement of periodic design requalification at suffi- the inner packagings; cient frequency to ensure each packaging produced by the manufacturer is (v) Inner packagings are oriented capable of passing the design qualifica- within the outer packaging in the same tion tests. Design requalification tests manner as in the tested package; and must be conducted at least once every (vi) The gross mass of the package 24 months. does not exceed that originally tested. (2) Changes in the frequency of design (2) A lesser number of the tested requalification testing specified in inner packagings, or of the alternative paragraph (e)(1) of this section are au- types of inner packagings identified in thorized if approved by the Associate paragraph (g)(1) of this section, may be Administrator. used provided sufficient cushioning is (f) Test samples. The manufacturer added to fill void space(s) and to pre- must conduct the design qualification vent significant movement of the inner and periodic tests prescribed in this packagings. subpart using random samples of pack- (h) Approval of equivalent packagings. agings, in the numbers specified in the A Large Packaging differing from appropriate test section. standards in subpart P of this part, or (g) Selective testing. The selective tested using methods other than those testing of Large Packagings, which dif- specified in this subpart, may be used if fer only in minor respects from a test- approved by the Associate Adminis- ed type is permitted as described in trator. The Large Packagings and test- this section. For air transport, Large ing methods must be shown to have an Packagings must comply with equivalent level of safety. § 173.27(c)(1) and (c)(2) of this sub- (i) Proof of compliance. In addition to chapter. Variations are permitted in the periodic design requalification inner packagings of a tested Large testing intervals specified in paragraph Packaging, without further testing of (e) of this section, the Associate Ad- the package, provided an equivalent ministrator, or a designated represent- level of performance is maintained and ative, may at any time require dem- the methodology used to determine onstration of compliance by a manu- that the inner packaging, including facturer, through testing in accordance closure, maintains an equivalent level with this subpart, to ensure packagings of performance is documented in writ- meet the requirements of this subpart. ing by the person certifying compli- As required by the Associate Adminis- ance with this paragraph and retained trator, or a designated representative, in accordance with paragraph (l) of this the manufacturer must either:

241

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00251 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.960 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(1) Conduct performance tests or (j) Record retention. Following each have tests conducted by an inde- design qualification test and each peri- pendent testing facility, in accordance odic retest on a Large Packaging, a with this subpart; or test report must be prepared. (2) Make a sample Large Packaging (1) The test report must be main- available to the Associate Adminis- tained at each location where the pack- trator, or a designated representative, aging is manufactured, certified, and a for testing in accordance with this sub- design qualification test or periodic part. retest is conducted as follows:

Responsible party Duration

(2) The test report must be made § 178.960 Preparation of Large Pack- available to a user of a Large Pack- agings for testing. aging or a representative of the De- (a) Except as otherwise provided in partment of Transportation upon re- this subchapter, each Large Packaging quest. The test report, at a minimum, and package must be closed in prepara- must contain the following information for testing and tests must be car- tion: ried out in the same manner as if pre- (i) Name and address of test facility; pared for transportation, including (ii) Name and address of applicant inner packagings. All closures must be (where appropriate); installed using proper techniques and (iii) A unique test report identifica- torques. tion; (b) For the drop and stacking test, (iv) Date of the test report; inner receptacles must be filled to not (v) Manufacturer of the packaging; less than 95 percent of maximum ca- (vi) Description of the packaging de- pacity (see § 171.8 of this subchapter) in sign type (e.g., dimensions, materials, the case of solids and not less than 98 closures, thickness, etc.), including percent of maximum in the case of liq- methods of manufacture (e.g., blow uids. Bags must be filled to the max- molding) and which may include draw- imum mass at which they may be used. ing(s) and/or photograph(s); For Large Packagings where the inner (vii) Maximum capacity; packagings are designed to carry liq- (viii) Characteristics of test contents, uids and solids, separate testing is re- e.g., viscosity and relative density for quired for both liquid and solid con- liquids and particle size for solids; tents. The material to be transported (ix) Mathematical calculations per- in the packagings may be replaced by a formed to conduct and document test- non-hazardous material, except for ing (for example, drop height, test ca- chemical compatibility testing or pacity, outage requirements, etc.); where this would invalidate the results (x) Test descriptions and results; and of the tests. (xi) Signature with the name and (c) If the material to be transported title of signatory. is replaced for test purposes by a non- [75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR hazardous material, the material used 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 76 FR 3389, Jan. 19, 2011; must be of the same or higher specific 78 FR 14715, Mar. 7, 2013; 78 FR 65487, Oct. 31, gravity as the material to be carried, 2013; 81 FR 35545, June 2, 2016] and its other physical properties

242

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00252 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.965

(grain, size, viscosity) which might infor test purposes. Large Packagings fluence the results of the required tests conditioned in this way are not re- must correspond as closely as possible quired to be conditioned in accordance to those of the hazardous material to with § 178.960(d). be transported. It is permissible to use (d) Test method. (1) Samples of all additives, such as bags of lead shot, to Large Packaging design types must be achieve the requisite total package dropped onto a rigid, non-resilient, mass, so long as they do not affect the smooth, flat and horizontal surface. test results. The point of impact must be the most (d) Paper or fiberboard Large Pack- vulnerable part of the base of the Large agings must be conditioned for at least Packaging being tested. Following the 24 hours immediately prior to testing drop, the Large Packaging must be rein an atmosphere maintained— stored to the upright position for ob- (1) At 50 percent ±2 percent relative servation. humidity, and at a temperature of 23 °C (2) Large Packaging design types ±2 °C (73 °F ±4 °F). Average values with a capacity of 0.45 cubic meters should fall within these limits. Short- (15.9 cubic feet) or less must be subject term fluctuations and measurement to an additional drop test. limitations may cause individual meas- (e) Drop height. (1) For all Large urements to vary by up to ±5 percent Packagings, drop heights are specified relative humidity without significant as follows: impairment of test reproducibility; (i) Packing group I: 1.8 m (5.9 feet) (2) At 65 percent ±2 percent relative (ii) Packing group II: 1.2 m (3.9 feet) humidity, and at a temperature of 20 °C (iii) Packing group III: 0.8 m (2.6 feet) ±2 °C (68 °F ±4 °F), or 27 °C ±2 °C (81 °F (2) Drop tests are to be performed ±4 °F). Average values should fall with- with the solid or liquid to be trans- in these limits. Short-term fluctua- ported or with a non-hazardous mate- tions and measurement limitations rial having essentially the same phys- may cause individual measurements to ical characteristics. vary by up to ±5 percent relative hu- (3) The specific gravity and viscosity midity without significant impairment of a substituted non-hazardous mate- of test reproducibility; or rial used in the drop test for liquids (3) For testing at periodic intervals must be similar to the hazardous mate- only (i.e., other than initial design rial intended for transportation. Water qualification testing), at ambient con- also may be used for the liquid drop ditions. test under the following conditions: (i) Where the substances to be carried § 178.965 Drop test. have a specific gravity not exceeding (a) General. The drop test must be 1.2, the drop heights must be those conducted for the qualification of all specified in paragraph (e)(1) of this sec- Large Packaging design types and per- tion for each Large Packaging design formed periodically as specified in type; and § 178.955(e) of this subpart. (ii) Where the substances to be car- (b) Special preparation for the drop test. ried have a specific gravity exceeding Large Packagings must be filled in ac- 1.2, the drop heights must be as fol- cordance with § 178.960. lows: (c) Conditioning. Rigid plastic Large (A) Packing Group I: SG × 1.5 m (4.9 Packagings and Large Packagings with feet). plastic inner receptacles must be con- (B) Packing Group II: SG × 1.0 m (3.3 ditioned for testing by reducing the feet). temperature of the packaging and its (C) Packing Group III: SG × 0.67 m contents to ¥18 °C (0 °F) or lower. Test (2.2 feet). liquids must be kept in the liquid (f) Criteria for passing the test. For all state, if necessary, by the addition of Large Packaging design types there anti-freeze. Water/anti-freeze solutions may be no loss of the filling substance with a minimum specific gravity of 0.95 from inner packaging(s) or article(s). for testing at ¥18 °C (0 °F) or lower are Ruptures are not permitted in Large considered acceptable test liquids, and Packaging for articles of Class 1 which may be considered equivalent to water permit the spillage of loose explosive

243

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00253 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.970 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

substances or articles from the Large (i) Lifted by each pair of diagonally Packaging. Where a Large Packaging opposite lifting devices, so that the undergoes a drop test, the sample hoisting forces are applied vertically passes the test if the entire contents for a period of five minutes; and are retained even if the closure is no (ii) Lifted by each pair of diagonally longer sift-proof. opposite lifting devices so that the hoisting forces are applied towards the [75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR ° 60339, Sept. 30, 2010] center at 45 to the vertical, for a period of five minutes. § 178.970 Bottom lift test. (3) If not tested as indicated in para- (a) General. The bottom lift test must graph (c)(1) of this section, a flexible be conducted for the qualification of Large Packaging design type must be all Large Packagings design types de- tested as follows: signed to be lifted from the base. (i) Fill the flexible Large Packaging (b) Special preparation for the bottom to 95% full with a material representa- lift test. The Large Packaging must be tive of the product to be shipped. loaded to 1.25 times its maximum per- (ii) Suspend the flexible Large Pack- missible gross mass, the load being aging by its lifting devices. evenly distributed. (iii) Apply a constant downward force (c) Test method. All Large Packaging through a specially designed platen. design types must be raised and low- The platen will be a minimum of 60 ered twice by a lift truck with the percent and a maximum of 80 percent forks centrally positioned and spaced of the cross sectional surface area of at three quarters of the dimension of the flexible Large Packaging. the side of entry (unless the points of (iv) The combination of the mass of entry are fixed). The forks must pene- the filled flexible Large Packaging and trate to three quarters of the direction the force applied through the platen of entry. must be a minimum of six times the (d) Criteria for passing the test. For all maximum net mass of the flexible Large Packagings design types de- Large Packaging. The test must be signed to be lifted from the base, there conducted for a period of five minutes. may be no permanent deformation (v) Other equally effective methods which renders the Large Packaging un- of top lift testing and preparation may safe for transport and there must be no be used with approval of the Associate loss of contents. Administrator. (d) Criterion for passing the test. For § 178.975 Top lift test. all Large Packagings design types de- (a) General. The top lift test must be signed to be lifted from the top, there conducted for the qualification of all of may be no permanent deformation Large Packagings design types to be which renders the Large Packagings lifted from the top or, for flexible unsafe for transport and no loss of con- Large Packagings, from the side. tents. (b) Special preparation for the top lift test. (1) Metal and rigid plastic Large § 178.980 Stacking test. Packagings design types must be load- (a) General. The stacking test must ed to twice its maximum permissible be conducted for the qualification of gross mass. all Large Packagings design types in- (2) Flexible Large Packaging design tended to be stacked. types must be filled to six times the (b) Special preparation for the stacking maximum permissible gross mass, the test. (1) All Large Packagings except load being evenly distributed. flexible Large Packaging design types (c) Test method. (1) A Large Pack- must be loaded to their maximum per- aging must be lifted in the manner for missible gross mass. which it is designed until clear of the (2) Flexible Large Packagings must floor and maintained in that position be filled to not less than 95 percent of for a period of five minutes. their capacity and to their maximum (2) Rigid plastic Large Packaging de- net mass, with the load being evenly sign types must be: distributed.

244

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00254 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.985

(c) Test method. (1) All Large Pack- Liquids: A = (1.8)(n¥1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 agings must be placed on their base on × .98)] × 1.5; level, hard ground and subjected to a uniformly distributed superimposed or test load for a period of at least five Solids: A = (1.8)(n¥1) [w + (s × v × 8.3 × minutes (see paragraph (c)(5) of this .95)] × 1.5 section). Where: (2) Fiberboard and wooden Large A = applied load in pounds. Packagings must be subjected to the n = maximum number of Large Packagings test for 24 hours. that may be stacked during transpor- (3) Rigid plastic Large Packagings tation. which bear the stacking load must be w = maximum weight of one empty container subjected to the test for 28 days at 40 in pounds. ° ° s = specific gravity (liquids) or density (sol- C (104 F). ids) of the lading. (4) For all Large Packagings, the v = actual capacity of container (rated ca- load must be applied by one of the fol- pacity + outage) in gallons. lowing methods: and: (i) One or more Large Packagings of 8.3 corresponds to the weight in pounds of 1.0 gallon of water. the same type loaded to their max- 1.5 is a compensation factor that converts imum permissible gross mass and the static load of the stacking test into stacked on the test Large Packaging; a load suitable for dynamic compression (ii) The calculated superimposed test testing. load weight loaded on either a flat (e) Criterion for passing the test. (1) For plate or a reproduction of the base of metal or rigid plastic Large Pack- the Large Packaging, which is stacked agings, there may be no permanent de- on the test Large Packaging; or formation which renders the Large (5) Calculation of superimposed test Packaging unsafe for transportation load. For all Large Packagings, the and no loss of contents. load to be placed on the Large Pack- (2) For fiberboard or wooden Large aging must be 1.8 times the combined Packagings, there may be no loss of maximum permissible gross mass of contents and no permanent deforma- the number of similar Large Packaging tion that renders the whole Large that may be stacked on top of the Packaging, including the base pallet, Large Packaging during transpor- unsafe for transportation. tation. (3) For flexible Large Packagings, (d) Periodic Retest. (1) The package there may be no deterioration which must be tested in accordance with renders the Large Packaging unsafe for § 178.980(c) of this subpart; or transportation and no loss of contents. (2) The packaging may be tested (4) For the dynamic compression using a dynamic compression testing test, a container passes the test if, machine. The test must be conducted after application of the required load, at room temperature on an empty, un- there is no permanent deformation to sealed packaging. The test sample the Large Packaging which renders the must be centered on the bottom platen whole Large Packaging; including the of the testing machine. The top platen base pallet, unsafe for transportation; must be lowered until it comes in con- in no case may the maximum deflec- tact with the test sample. Compression tion exceed one inch. must be applied end to end. The speed [75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR of the compression tester must be one- 60339, Sept. 30, 2010; 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013] half inch plus or minus one-fourth inch per minute. An initial preload of 50 § 178.985 Vibration test. pounds must be applied to ensure a (a) General. All rigid Large Pack- definite contact between the test sam- aging and flexible Large Packaging de- ple and the platens. The distance be- sign types must be capable of with- tween the platens at this time must be standing the vibration test. recorded as zero deformation. The force (b) Test method. (1) A sample Large ‘‘A’’ to then be applied must be cal- Packaging, selected at random, must culated using the applicable formula: be filled and closed as for shipment.

245

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00255 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.1000 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

Large Packagings intended for liquids § 178.1010 Marking of Flexible Bulk may be tested using water as the filling Containers. material for the vibration test. (a) The manufacturer must: (2) The sample Large Packaging must (1) Mark every Flexible Bulk Con- be placed on a vibrating platform that tainer in a durable and clearly visible has a vertical or rotary double-ampli- manner. The marking may be applied tude (peak-to-peak displacement) of in a single line or in multiple lines pro- one inch. The Large Packaging must be vided the correct sequence is followed constrained horizontally to prevent it with the information required by this from falling off the platform, but must section. The following information is be left free to move vertically and required in the sequence presented: bounce. (i) Except as provided in (3) The sample Large Packaging must § 178.503(e)(1)(ii), the United Nations be placed on a vibrating platform that packaging symbol as illustrated in has a vertical double-amplitude (peak- § 178.503(e)(1)(i). to-peak displacement) of one inch. The (ii) The code number designating the Large Packaging must be constrained Flexible Bulk Container design type horizontally to prevent it from falling according to § 178.1005. The letter ‘‘W’’ off the platform, but must be left free must follow the Flexible Bulk Con- to move vertically and bounce. tainer design type identification code (4) The test must be performed for on a Flexible Bulk Container when the one hour at a frequency that causes the Flexible Bulk Container differs from package to be raised from the vibrating the requirements in subpart R of this platform to such a degree that a piece part, or is tested using methods other of material of approximately 1.6-mm than those specified in this subpart, (0.063-inch) in thickness (such as steel and is approved by the Associate Ad- strapping or paperboard) can be passed ministrator in accordance with between the bottom of the Large Pack- § 178.1035; aging and the platform. Other methods (iii) The capital letter Z identifying at least equally effective may be used that the Flexible Bulk Container meets (see § 178.801(i)). Packing Group III performance stand- (c) Criterion for passing the test. A ard under which the design type has Large Packaging passes the vibration been successfully tested. test if there is no rupture or leakage. (iv) The month (designated numerically) and year (last two digits) of [75 FR 5400, Feb. 2, 2010, as amended at 75 FR manufacture; 60339, Sept. 30, 2010] (v) The country authorizing the allocation of the mark. The letters ‘‘USA’’ Subpart R—Flexible Bulk Container indicate that the Flexible Bulk Con- Standards tainer is manufactured and marked in the United States in compliance with the provisions of this subchapter. SOURCE: 78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013, unless otherwise noted. (vi) The name and address or symbol of the manufacturer or the approval § 178.1000 Purpose and scope. agency certifying compliance with subpart R and subpart S of this part. Sym- (a) This subpart prescribes require- bols, if used, must be registered with ments for Flexible Bulk Containers the Associate Administrator. (FBCs) intended for the transportation (vii) The stacking test load in kilo- of hazardous materials. FBC standards grams (kg). For Flexible Bulk Con- in this subpart are based on the UN tainers not designed for stacking the Model Regulations. figure ‘‘0’’ must be shown. (b) Terms used in this subpart are de- (viii) The maximum permissible fined in § 171.8 of this subchapter. gross mass in kg. (2) The following is an example of § 178.1005 Flexible Bulk Container symbols and required markings for a identification code. Flexible Bulk container suitable for The Flexible Bulk Container code stacking; stacking load: 1,000 kg; max- designation is BK3. imum gross mass: 2,500 kg.

246

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00256 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.1035

(b) [Reserved] § 178.1020 Period of use for transportation of hazardous materials in § 178.1015 General Flexible Bulk Con- Flexible Bulk Containers. tainer standards. The use of Flexible Bulk Containers (a) Each Flexible Bulk Containers for the transport of hazardous mate- must be sift-proof and completely rials is permitted for a period of time closed during transport to prevent the not to exceed two years from the date release of contents and waterproof. of manufacture of the Flexible Bulk (b) Parts of the Flexible Bulk Con- Container. tainer that are in direct contact with hazardous materials: Subpart S—Testing of Flexible Bulk (1) Must not be affected or signifi- Containers cantly weakened by those hazardous materials. SOURCE: 78 FR 1098, Jan. 7, 2013, unless oth- (2) Must not cause a dangerous effect erwise noted. with the dangerous goods (e.g., cata- lyzing a reaction or reacting with the § 178.1030 Purpose and scope. hazardous materials). This subpart prescribes certain test- (3) Must not allow permeation of the ing requirements for Flexible Bulk hazardous materials that could con- Containers identified in subpart R of stitute a danger under conditions nor- this part. mally incident to transportation. (c) Filling and discharge devices § 178.1035 General requirements. must be so constructed as to be pro- (a) The test procedures pre- tected against damage during trans- General. scribed in this subpart are intended to port and handling. The filling and dis- ensure that Flexible Bulk Containers charge devices must be capable of containing hazardous materials can being secured against unintended open- withstand normal conditions of trans- ing. portation. These test procedures are (d) Slings of the Flexible Bulk Con- considered minimum requirements. tainer, if fitted with such, must with- Each packaging must be manufactured stand pressure and dynamic forces and assembled so as to be capable of which can be expected under conditions successfully passing the prescribed normally incident to transportation. tests and to conform to the require- (e) Handling devices must be strong ments of § 173.24 of this subchapter enough to withstand repeated use. while in transportation. (f) A venting device must be fitted to (b) Responsibility. The Flexible Bulk Flexible Bulk Containers intended to Container manufacturer is responsible transport hazardous materials that for ensuring each Flexible Bulk Con- may develop dangerous accumulation tainers is capable of passing the pre- of gases within the Flexible Bulk Con- scribed tests. To the extent a Flexible tainer. Any venting device must be de- Bulk Container’s assembly function, signed so that external foreign sub- including final closure, is performed by stances or the ingress of water are pre- the person who offers a hazardous ma- vented from entering the Flexible Bulk terial for transportation, that person is Container through the venting device responsible for performing the function under conditions normally incident to in accordance with §§ 173.22 and 178.2 of transportation. this subchapter. [78 FR 1097, Jan. 7, 2013, as amended at 82 FR (c) Definitions. For the purpose of this 15896, Mar. 30, 2017] subpart:

247

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00257 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER07JA13.002 § 178.1035 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(1) Flexible Bulk Container design type fication at sufficient frequency to en- refers to a Flexible Bulk Container sure each packaging produced by the that does not differ in structural de- manufacturer is capable of passing the sign, size, material of construction and design qualification tests. Design re- packing. qualification tests must be conducted (2) Design qualification testing is the at least once every 24 months. performance of the drop, topple, right- (2) Changes in the frequency of design ing, tear, stacking, and top-lift tests requalification testing specified in prescribed in this subpart, for each dif- paragraph (e)(1) of this section are au- ferent Flexible Bulk Container design thorized if approved by the Associate type, at the start of production of that Administrator. packaging. (f) Test samples. The manufacturer (3) Periodic design requalification test is must conduct the design qualification the performance of the applicable tests and periodic tests prescribed in this specified in paragraph (c)(2) of this sec- subpart using random samples of pack- tion on a Flexible Bulk Container de- agings, in the numbers specified in the sign type, to requalify the design for appropriate test section. continued production at the frequency (g) Proof of compliance. In addition to specified in paragraph (e) of this sec- the periodic design requalification tion. testing intervals specified in paragraph (4) Production inspection is the inspec- (e) of this section, the Associate Ad- tion that must initially be conducted ministrator, or a designated represent- on each newly manufactured Flexible ative, may at any time require dem- Bulk Container. onstration of compliance by a manu- (5) Different Flexible Bulk Container facturer, through testing in accordance design type is one that differs from a with this subpart, to ensure packagings previously qualified Flexible Bulk Con- meet the requirements of this subpart. tainer design type in structural design, As required by the Associate Adminis- size, material of construction, wall trator, or a designated representative, thickness, or manner of construction, but does not include: the manufacturer must either: (i) A packaging that differs in surface (1) Conduct performance tests or treatment; have tests conducted by an inde- (ii) A packaging that differs only in pendent testing facility, in accordance its lesser external dimensions (i.e., with this subpart; or height, width, length) provided mate- (2) Make a sample Flexible Bulk Con- rials of construction and material tainer available to the Associate Ad- thickness or fabric weight remain the ministrator, or a designated represent- same; ative, for testing in accordance with (d) Design qualification testing. The this subpart. packaging manufacturer must achieve (h) Record retention. Following each successful test results for the design design qualification test and each peri- qualification testing at the start of odic retest on a Flexible Bulk Con- production of each new or different tainer, a test report must be prepared. Flexible Bulk Container design type. The test report must be maintained at Application of the certification mark each location where the Flexible Bulk by the manufacturer constitutes cer- Container is manufactured and each lo- tification that the Flexible Bulk Con- cation where the design qualification tainer design type passed the pre- tests are conducted, for as long as the scribed tests in this subpart. Flexible Bulk Container is produced (e) Periodic design requalification test- and for at least two years thereafter, ing. (1) Periodic design requalification and at each location where the periodic must be conducted on each qualified retests are conducted until such tests Flexible Bulk Container design type if are successfully performed again and a the manufacturer is to maintain au- new test report produced. In addition, a thorization for continued production. copy of the test report must be main- The Flexible Bulk Container manufac- tained by a person certifying compli- turer must achieve successful test re- ance with this part. The test report sults for the periodic design requali- must be made available to a user of a

248

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00258 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT § 178.1050

Flexible Bulk Container or a represent- (b) Special preparation for the drop test. ative of the Department upon request. Flexible Bulk Containers must be filled The test report, at a minimum, must to their maximum permissible gross contain the following information: mass. (1) Name and address of test facility; (c) Test method. (1) A sample of all (2) Name and address of applicant Flexible Bulk Container design types (where appropriate); must be dropped onto a rigid, non-resil- (3) A unique test report identifica- ient, smooth, flat and horizontal sur- tion; face. This test surface must be large (4) Date of the test report; enough to be immovable during testing (5) Manufacturer of the packaging; and sufficiently large enough to ensure (6) Description of the flexible bulk that the test Flexible Bulk Container container design type (e.g., dimensions falls entirely upon the surface. The materials, closures, thickness, etc.), in- test surface must be kept free from cluding methods of manufacture (e.g., local defects capable of influencing the blow molding) and which may include test results. drawing(s) and/or photograph(s); (2) Following the drop, the Flexible (7) Maximum capacity; Bulk Container must be restored to the (8) Characteristics of test contents upright position for observation. (e.g., particle size for solids); (d) Drop height. (1) For all Flexible (9) Mathematical calculations per- Bulk Containers, drop heights are spec- formed to conduct and document test- ified as follows: Packing group III: 0.8 ing (e.g., drop height, test capacity, m (2.6 feet) outage requirements, etc.); (2) Drop tests are to be performed (10) Test descriptions and results; and with the solid to be transported or with (11) Signature with the name and a non-hazardous material having essen- title of signatory. tially the same physical characteristics. § 178.1040 Preparation of Flexible Bulk (e) Criteria for passing the test. For all Containers for testing. Flexible Bulk Container design types (a) Except as otherwise provided in there may be no loss of the filling sub- this subchapter, each Flexible Bulk stance. However a slight discharge Container must be closed in prepara- (e.g., from closures or stitch holes) tion for testing and tests must be car- upon impact is not considered a failure ried out in the same manner as if pre- of the Flexible Bulk Container pro- pared for transportation. All closures vided that no further leakage occurs must be installed using proper tech- after the container has been restored niques and torques. to the upright position. (b) If the material to be transported is replaced for test purposes by a non- § 178.1050 Top lift test. hazardous material, the physical prop- (a) General. The top lift test must be erties (grain, size, viscosity) of the re- conducted for the qualification of all of placement material used that might Flexible Bulk Containers design types influence the results of the required to be lifted from the top. tests must correspond as closely as (b) Special preparation for the top lift possible to those of the hazardous ma- test. Flexible Bulk Container design terial to be transported. It is permis- types must be filled to six times the sible to use additives, such as bags of maximum permissible gross mass, the lead shot, to achieve the requisite total load being evenly distributed. package mass, so long as they do not (c) Test method. (1) A Flexible Bulk affect the test results. Container must be lifted in the manner for which it is designed until clear of § 178.1045 Drop test. the floor and maintained in that posi- (a) General. The drop test must be tion for a period of five minutes. conducted for the qualification of all (2) If not tested as indicated in para- Flexible Bulk Container design types graph (c)(1) of this section, a Flexible and performed periodically as specified Bulk Container design type must be in § 178.1035(e) of this subpart. tested as follows:

249

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00259 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR § 178.1055 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

(i) Fill the Flexible Bulk Container stacked on the test Flexible Bulk Con- to 95% full with a material representa- tainer. tive of the product to be shipped. (d) Criteria for passing the test. There (ii) Suspend the Flexible Bulk Con- may be no deterioration that renders tainer by its lifting devices. the Flexible Bulk Container unsafe for (iii) Apply a constant downward force transportation and no loss of contents through a specially designed platen. during the test or after removal of the The platen will be a minimum of 60 test load. percent and a maximum of 80 percent of the cross sectional surface area of § 178.1060 Topple test. the Flexible Bulk Container. (a) General. The topple test must be (iv) The combination of the mass of conducted for the qualification of all the filled Flexible Bulk Container and Flexible Bulk Containers design types. the force applied through the platen (b) Special preparation for the topple must be a minimum of six times the test. Flexible Bulk Container design maximum net mass of the Flexible types must be filled to their maximum Bulk Container. The test must be con- permissible gross mass, the load being ducted for a period of five minutes. evenly distributed. (v) Other equally effective methods (c) Test method. Samples of all Flexi- of top lift testing and preparation may ble Bulk Container design types must be used with approval of the Associate be toppled onto any part of its top by Administrator. lifting the side furthest from the drop (d) Criteria for passing the test. For all edge upon a rigid, non-resilient, Flexible Bulk Containers design types smooth, flat and horizontal surface. designed to be lifted from the top, This test surface must be large enough there may be no damage to the Flexi- to be immovable during testing and ble Bulk Container or its lifting de- sufficiently large enough to ensure vices that renders the Flexible Bulk that the test Flexible Bulk Container Container unsafe for transport, and no falls entirely upon the surface. The loss of contents. test surface must be kept free from local defects capable of influencing the § 178.1055 Stacking test. test results. (a) General. The stacking test must (d) Topple height. (1) For all Flexible be conducted for the qualification of Bulk Containers, topple heights are all Flexible Bulk Containers design specified as follows: Packing group III: types. 0.8 m (2.6 feet). (b) Special preparation for the stacking (e) Criterion for passing the test. For test. All Flexible Bulk Containers de- all Flexible Bulk Container design sign types must be loaded to their max- types there may be no loss of the fill- imum permissible gross mass. ing substance. However a slight dis- (c) Test method. (1) All Flexible Bulk charge (e.g., from closures or stitch Containers must be placed on their holes) upon impact is not considered a base on level, hard ground and sub- failure of the Flexible Bulk Container. jected to a uniformly distributed superimposed test load that is four times the § 178.1065 Righting test. design type maximum gross weight for (a) General. The righting test must be a period of at least twenty-four hours. conducted for the qualification of all (2) For all Flexible Bulk Containers, Flexible Bulk Containers design types the load must be applied by one of the designed to be lifted from the top or following methods: side. (i) Four Flexible Bulk Containers of (b) Special preparation for the righting the same type loaded to their max- test. Flexible Bulk Container design imum permissible gross mass and types must be filled to not less than stacked on the test Flexible Bulk Con- 95% of their capacity and to their max- tainer; imum permissible gross mass, the load (ii) The calculated superimposed test being evenly distributed. load weight loaded on either a flat (c) Test method. A sample Flexible plate or a reproduction of the base of Bulk Container design type must be the Flexible Bulk Container, which is tested; the Flexible Bulk Container

250

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00260 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, App. A

should start lying on its side and then (ii) Be made at a 45° angle to the must be lifted at a speed of at least principal axis of the Flexible Bulk Con- 0.1m/s (0.328 ft/s) to an upright position tainer, halfway between the bottom clear of the floor, by no more than half surface and the top level of the con- of the lifting devices. tents. (d) Criterion for passing the test. For (2) The Flexible Bulk Container after all Flexible Bulk Container design being cut according to the provisions of types there must be no damage that § 178.1070(c)(1), must be subjected to a renders the Flexible Bulk Container uniformly distributed superimposed unsafe for transport or handling. load equivalent to twice the maximum § 178.1070 Tear test. gross mass of the package. This load (a) General. The tear test must be must be applied for at least fifteen conducted for the qualification of all of minutes. Flexible Bulk Containers that Flexible Bulk Containers design types. are designed to be lifted from the top (b) Special preparation for the tear test. or the side must, after removal of the Flexible Bulk Container design types superimposed load, be lifted clear of must be filled its maximum permis- the floor and maintained in that posi- sible gross mass, the load being evenly tion for a period of fifteen minutes. distributed. (d) Criterion for passing the test. For (c) Test method. (1) A Flexible Bulk all Flexible Bulk Container design Container design type must be placed types, the cut must not spread more on the ground and a 300 mm (11.9 in) than an additional 25% of its original cut shall be made. This 300 mm (11.9 in) length. cut must: (i) Completely penetrate all layers of the Flexible Bulk Container on a wall with a wide face.

APPENDIX A TO PART 178—SPECIFICATIONS FOR STEEL

TABLE 1 [Open-hearth, basic oxygen, or electric steel of uniform quality. The following chemical composition limits are based on ladle analysis:]

Chemical composition, percent-ladle analysis Designation Grade 1 1 Grade 2 12 Grade 3 245

Carbon ...... 0.10/0.20 ...... 0.24 maximum ...... 0.22 maximum. Manganese ...... 1.10/1.60 ...... 0.50/1.00 ...... 1.25 maximum. Phosphorus, maximum ...... 0.04 ...... 0.04 ...... 0.045.6 Sulfur, maximum ...... 0.05 ...... 0.05 ...... 0.05. Silicon ...... 0.15/0.30 ...... 0.30 maximum ...... Copper, maximum ...... 0.40 ...... Columbium ...... 0.01/0.04 ...... Heat treatment authorized ...... (3) ...... (3) ...... (3). Maximum stress (p.s.i.) ...... 35,000 ...... 35,000 ...... 35,000.

1 Addition of other elements to obtain alloying effect is not authorized. 2 Ferritic grain size 6 or finer according to ASTM E 112–96 (IBR, see § 171.7 of this subchapter). 3 Any suitable heat treatment in excess of 1,100 °F., except that liquid quenching is not permitted. 4 Other alloying elements may be added and shall be reported. 5 For compositions with a maximum carbon content of 0.15 percent of ladle analysis, the maximum limit for manganese on ladle analysis may be 1.40 percent. 6 Rephosphorized Grade 3 steels containing no more than 0.15 percent phosphorus are permitted if carbon content does not exceed 0.15 percent and manganese does not exceed 1 percent.

251

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00261 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pt. 178, App. B 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

CHECK ANALYSIS TOLERANCES [A heat of steel made under any of the above grades, the ladle analysis of which is slightly out of the specified range is acceptable if the check analysis is within the following variations:]

Tolerance (percent) over the maximum limit or Element Limit or maximum specified (percent) under the minimum limit Under min- Over maximum limit imum limit

Carbon ...... To 0.15 inclusive ...... 0 .02 0.03 Over 0.15 to 0.40 inclusive ...... 0 .03 0.04 Manganese ...... To 0.60 inclusive ...... 0 .03 0.03 Over 0.60 to 1.15 inclusive ...... 0 .04 0.04 Over 1.15 to 2.50 inclusive ...... 0 .05 0.05 Phosphorus 7 ...... All ranges ...... 0.01 Sulfur ...... All ranges ...... 0.01 Silicon ...... To 0.30 inclusive ...... 0 .02 0.03 Over 0.30 to 1.00 inclusive ...... 0 .05 0.05 Copper ...... To 1.00 inclusive ...... 0 .03 0.03 Over 1.00 to 2.00 inclusive ...... 0 .05 0.05 Nickel ...... To 1.00 inclusive ...... 0 .03 0.03 Over 1.00 to 2.00 inclusive ...... 0 .05 0.05 Chromium ...... To 0.90 inclusive ...... 0 .03 0.03 Over 0.90 to 2.10 inclusive ...... 0 .05 0.05 Molybdenum ...... To 0.20 inclusive ...... 0.01 0.01 Over 0.20 to 0.40 inclusive ...... 0 .02 0.02 Zirconium ...... All ranges ...... 0 .01 0.05 Columbium ...... To 0.04 inclusive ...... 0 .005 0.01 Aluminum ...... Over 0.10 to 0.20 inclusive ...... 0 .04 0.04 Over 0.20 to 0.30 inclusive ...... 0 .05 0.05 7 Rephosphorized steels not subject to check analysis for phosphorus.

[Amdt. 178–3, 34 FR 12283, July 25, 1969; 34 FR 12593, Aug. 1, 1969, as amended by Amdt. 178– 64, 45 FR 81573, Dec. 11, 1980; Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990; 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003]

APPENDIX B TO PART 178—ALTERNATIVE test. The test must be conducted for a period LEAKPROOFNESS TEST METHODS of time sufficient to appropriately pressurize or evacuate the interior of the packaging In addition to the method prescribed in and to determine if there is leakage into or § 178.604 of this subchapter, the following out of the packaging. A packaging passes the leakproofness test methods are authorized: pressure differential test if there is no (1) Helium test. The packaging must be change in measured internal pressure. filled with at least 1 L inert helium gas, air (3) Solution over seams. The packaging must tight closed, and placed in a testing cham- be restrained while an internal air pressure ber. The testing chamber must be evacuated is applied; the method of restraint may not down to a pressure of 5 kPa which equals an affect the results of the test. The exterior over-pressure inside the packaging of 95 kPa. surface of all seams and welds must be coat- The air in the testing chamber must be ana- ed with a solution of soap suds or a water lyzed for traces of helium gas by means of a and oil mixture. The test must be conducted mass spectrograph. The test must be con- for a period of time sufficient to pressurize ducted for a period of time sufficient to evac- the interior of the packaging to the specified uate the chamber and to determine if there air pressure and to determine if there is is leakage into or out of the packaging. If he- leakage of air from the packaging. A pack- lium gas is detected, the leaking packaging aging passes the test if there is no leakage of must be automatically separated from non- air from the packaging. leaking drums and the leaking area deter- (4) Solution over partial seams test. For other mined according to the method prescribed in than design qualification testing, the fol- § 178.604(d) of this subchapter. A packaging lowing test may be used for metal drums: passes the test if there is no leakage of he- The packaging must be restrained while an lium. internal air pressure of 48 kPa (7.0 psig) is (2) Pressure differential test. The packaging applied; the method of restraint may not af- shall be restrained while either pressure or a fect the results of the test. The packaging vacuum is applied internally. The packaging must be coated with a soap solution over the must be pressurized to the pressure required entire side seam and a distance of not less by § 178.604(e) of this subchapter for the ap- than eight inches on each side of the side propriate packing group. The method of re- seam along the chime seam(s). The test must straint must not affect the results of the be conducted for a period of time sufficient

252

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00262 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, App. D

to pressurize the interior of the packaging to tional three thermocouples must be used to the specified air pressure and to determine if monitor the temperature of the cylinder. there is leakage of air from the packaging. A The thermocouples must be 1⁄16 inch, ceramic packaging passes the test if there is no leak- packed, metal sheathed, type K (Chromel- age of air from the packaging. Chime cuts Alumel), grounded junction with a nominal must be made on the initial drum at the be- 30 American wire gauge (AWG) size con- ginning of each production run and on the ductor. The thermocouples measuring the initial drum after any adjustment to the temperature inside the oven must be placed chime seamer. Chime cuts must be main- at varying heights to ensure even tempera- tained on file in date order for not less than ture and proper heat-soak conditions. For six months and be made available to a rep- the thermocouples measuring the tempera- resentative of the Department of Transpor- ture of the cylinder: (1) Two of them must be tation on request. placed on the outer cylinder side wall at approximately 2 inches (5 cm) from the top and [Amdt. 178–97, 55 FR 52728, Dec. 21, 1990, as bottom shoulders of the cylinder; and (2) one amended at 56 FR 66287, Dec. 20, 1991; 57 FR must be placed on the cylinder valve body 45466, Oct. 1, 1992] near the pressure relief device. Alter- natively, the thermocouples may be replaced APPENDIX C TO PART 178—NOMINAL AND with other devices such as a remote tempera- MINIMUM THICKNESSES OF STEEL ture sensor, metal fuse on the valve, or coat- DRUMS AND JERRICANS ed wax, provided the device is tested and the For each listed packaging capacity, the test report is retained for verification. Under following table compares the ISO 3574 (IBR, this alternative, it is permissible to record see § 171.7 of this subchapter) nominal thick- the highest temperature to which the cyl- ness with the corresponding ISO 3574 min- inder is subjected instead of temperature imum thickness. measurements in intervals of not more than five (5) minutes. Cor- 2.3 Instrumentation. A calibrated recording ISO nomi- responding device or a computerized data acquisition Maximum capacity (L) ISO min- system with an appropriate range should be nal (mm) imum (mm) provided to measure and record the outputs of the thermocouples. 20 ...... 0.7 0.63 3. Test Specimen. 30 ...... 0.8 0.73 3.1 Specimen Configuration. Each outer 40 ...... 0.8 0.73 60 ...... 1.0 0.92 package material type and design must be 120 ...... 1.0 0.92 tested, including any features such as han- 220 ...... 1.0 0.92 dles, latches, fastening systems, etc., that 450 ...... 1.9 1.77 may compromise the ability of the outer package to provide thermal protection. [Amdt. 178–106, 59 FR 67522, Dec. 29, 1994, as 3.2 Test Specimen Mounting. The tested amended at 68 FR 75758, Dec. 31, 2003] outer package must be supported at the four corners using fire brick or other suitable APPENDIX D TO PART 178—THERMAL means. The bottom surface of the outer package must be exposed to allow exposure RESISTANCE TEST to heat. 1. Scope. This test method evaluates the 4. Preparation for Testing. thermal resistance capabilities of a com- 4.1 It is recommended that the cylinder be pressed oxygen generator and the outer closed at ambient temperature and config- packaging for a cylinder of compressed oxy- ured as when filled with a valve and pressure gen or other oxidizing gas and an oxygen relief device. The oxygen generator must be generator. When exposed to a temperature of filled with an oxidizing agent and may be 205 °C (400 °F) for a period of not less than tested with or without packaging. three hours, the outer surface of the cylinder 4.2 Place the package or generator onto may not exceed a temperature of 93 °C (199 supporting bricks or a stand inside the test °F) and the oxygen generator must not actu- oven in such a manner to ensure even tem- ate. perature flow. 2. Apparatus. 5. Test Procedure. 2.1 Test Oven. The oven must be large 5.1 Close oven door and check for proper enough in size to fully house the test outer reading on thermocouples. package without clearance problems. The 5.2 Raise the temperature of the oven to a test oven must be capable of maintaining a minimum temperature of 205 °C ±2 °C (400 °F minimum steady state temperature of 205 °C ±5 °F). Maintain a minimum oven tempera- (400 °F). ture of 205 °C ±2 °C (400 °F ±5 °F) for at least 2.2 Thermocouples. At least three three hours. Exposure time begins when the thermocouples must be used to monitor the oven steady state temperature reaches a temperature inside the oven and an addi- minimum of 205 °C ±2 °C (400 °F ±5 °F).

253

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00263 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pt. 178, App. E 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

5.3 At the conclusion of the three-hour pe- (c) Test Specimens. (1) The specimen to be riod, the outer package may be removed tested must measure 16 ±1⁄8 inches (406 ±3 from the oven and allowed to cool naturally. mm) by 24 + 1⁄8 inches (610 ±3 mm). 6. Recordkeeping. (2) The specimens must be conditioned at 6.1 Record a complete description of the 70 °F. ±5 °F. (21 °C. ±2 °C.) and 55% ±5% hu- material being tested, including the manu- midity for at least 24 hours before testing. facturer, size of cylinder, etc. (d) Test Apparatus. The arrangement of the 6.2 Record any observations regarding the test apparatus must include the components behavior of the test specimen during expo- described in this section. Minor details of the sure, such as smoke production, apparatus may vary, depending on the model delamination, resin ignition, and time of oc- of the burner used. currence of each event. (1) Specimen Mounting Stand. The mounting 6.3 Record the temperature and time his- stand for the test specimens consists of steel tory of the cylinder temperature during the angles. entire test for each thermocouple location. (2) Test Burner. The burner to be used in Temperature measurements must be re- tesing must— corded at intervals of not more than five (5) (i) Be a modified gun type. minutes. Record the maximum temperatures (ii) Use a suitable nozzle and maintain fuel achieved at all three thermocouple locations pressure to yield a 2 GPH fuel flow. For ex- and the corresponding time. ample: An 80 degree nozzle nominally rated 7. Requirements. at 2.25 GPH and operated at 85 pounds per 7.1 For a cylinder, the outer package square inch (PSI) gauge to deliver 2.03 GPH. must provide adequate protection such that (iii) Have a 12 inch (305 mm) burner exten- the outer surface of the cylinder and valve sion installed at the end of the draft tube does not exceed a temperature of 93 °C (199 with an opening 6 inches (152 mm) high and °F) at any of the three points where the 11 inches (280 mm) wide. thermocouples are located. (iv) Have a burner fuel pressure regulator 7.2 For an oxygen generator, the gener- that is adjusted to deliver a nominal 2.0 GPH ator must not actuate. of #2 Grade kerosene or equivalent. Burner models which have been used suc- [72 FR 4457, Jan. 31, 2008, as amended at 72 cessfully in testing are the Lenox Model OB– FR 55099, Sept. 28, 2007] 32, Carlin Model 200 CRD and Park Model DPL. APPENDIX E TO PART 178—FLAME (3) Calorimeter. (i) The calorimeter to be PENETRATION RESISTANCE TEST used in testing must be a total heat flux Foil Type Gardon Gage of an appropriate range (a) Criteria for Acceptance. (1) At least three (approximately 0 to 15.0 British thermal unit specimens of the outer packaging materials (BTU) per ft.2 sec., 0–17.0 watts/cm2). The cal- must be tested; orimeter must be mounted in a 6 inch by 12 (2) Each test must be conducted on a flat 16 inch (152 by 305 mm) by 3⁄4 inch (19 mm) thick inch × 24 inch test specimen mounted in the insulating block which is attached to a steel horizontal ceiling position of the test appa- angle bracket for placement in the test stand ratus to represent the outer packaging de- during burner calibration as shown in Figure sign; 2 of this part of this appendix. (3) Testing must be conducted on all design (ii) The insulating block must be mon- features (latches, seams, hinges, etc.) affect- itored for deterioration and the mounting ing the ability of the outer packaging to shimmed as necessary to ensure that the cal- safely prevent the passage of fire in the hori- orimeter face is parallel to the exit plane of zontal ceiling position; and the test burner cone. (4) There must be no flame penetration of (4) Thermocouples. The seven thermocouples any specimen within 5 minutes after applica- to be used for testing must be 1⁄16 inch ce- tion of the flame source and the maximum ramic sheathed, type K, grounded allowable temperature at a point 4 inches thermocouples with a nominal 30 American above the test specimen, centered over the wire gage (AWG) size conductor. The seven burner cone, must not exceed 205 °C (400 °F). thermocouples must be attached to a steel (b) Summary of Method. This method pro- angle bracket to form a thermocouple rake vides a laboratory test procedure for meas- for placement in the test stand during burn- uring the capability of cargo compartment er calibration. lining materials to resist flame penetration (5) Apparatus Arrangement. The test burner with a 2 gallon per hour (GPH) #2 Grade ker- must be mounted on a suitable stand to posi- osene or equivalent burner fire source. Ceil- tion the exit of the burner cone a distance of ing and sidewall liner panels may be tested 8 inches from the ceiling liner panel and 2 individually provided a baffle is used to sim- inches from the sidewall liner panel. The ulate the missing panel. Any specimen that burner stand should have the capability of passes the test as a ceiling liner panel may allowing the burner to be swung away from be used as a sidewall liner panel. the test specimen during warm-up periods.

254

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00264 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, App. E

(6) Instrumentation. A recording potentiom- temperature is out of this range, repeat steps eter or other suitable instrument with an ap- 2 through 5 until proper readings are ob- propriate range must be used to measure and tained. record the outputs of the calorimeter and (6) Turn off the burner and remove the the thermocouples. thermocouple rake. (7) Timing Device. A stopwatch or other de- (7) Repeat (1) to ensure that the burner is vice must be used to measure the time of in the correct range. flame application and the time of flame pen- (g) Test Procedure. (1) Mount a thermo- etration, if it occurs. couple of the same type as that used for cali- (e) Preparation of Apparatus. Before calibra- bration at a distance of 4 inches (102 mm) tion, all equipment must be turned on and above the horizontal (ceiling) test specimen. allowed to stabilize, and the burner fuel flow The thermocouple should be centered over must be adjusted as specified in paragraph the burner cone. (d)(2). (2) Mount the test specimen on the test (f) Calibration. To ensure the proper ther- stand shown in Figure 1 in either the hori- mal output of the burner the following test zontal or vertical position. Mount the insu- must be made: lating material in the other position. (1) Remove the burner extension from the (3) Position the burner so that flames will end of the draft tube. Turn on the blower not impinge on the specimen, turn the burn- portion of the burner without turning the er on, and allow it to run for 2 minutes. Ro- fuel or igniters on. Measure the air velocity tate the burner to apply the flame to the using a hot wire anemometer in the center of specimen and simultaneously start the tim- the draft tube across the face of the opening. ing device. Adjust the damper such that the air velocity (4) Expose the test specimen to the flame is in the range of 1550 to 1800 ft./min. If tabs for 5 minutes and then turn off the burner. are being used at the exit of the draft tube, The test may be terminated earlier if flame they must be removed prior to this measure- penetration is observed. ment. Reinstall the draft tube extension (5) When testing ceiling liner panels, cone. record the peak temperature measured 4 (2) Place the calorimeter on the test stand inches above the sample. as shown in Figure 2 at a distance of 8 inches (6) Record the time at which flame pene- (203 mm) from the exit of the burner cone to tration occurs if applicable. simulate the position of the horizontal test (h) Test Report. The test report must in- specimen. clude the following: (3) Turn on the burner, allow it to run for (1) A complete description of the materials 2 minutes for warm-up, and adjust the damp- tested including type, manufacturer, thicker to produce a calorimeter reading of 8.0 ±0.5 ness, and other appropriate data. BTU per ft.2 sec. (9.1 ±0.6 Watts/cm2). (2) Observations of the behavior of the test (4) Replace the calorimeter with the ther- specimens during flame exposure such as mocouple rake. delamination, resin ignition, smoke, etc., in- (5) Turn on the burner and ensure that cluding the time of such occurrence. each of the seven thermocouples reads 1700 (3) The time at which flame penetration °F. ±100 °F. (927 °C. ±38 °C.) to ensure steady occurs, if applicable, for each of the three state conditions have been achieved. If the specimens tested.

255

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00265 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR Pt. 178, App. E 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

256

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00266 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8006 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER11MR13.013 Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Admin., DOT Pt. 178, App. E

257

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00267 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8002 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR ER11MR13.014 Pt. 179 49 CFR Ch. I (10–1–20 Edition)

[72 FR 55099, Sept. 28, 2007, as amended at 78 179.101 Individual specification require- FR 15328, Mar. 11, 2013] ments applicable to pressure tank car tanks. 179.101–1 Individual specification require- PART 179—SPECIFICATIONS FOR ments. TANK CARS 179.102 Special commodity requirements for pressure tank car tanks. Subpart A—Introduction, Approvals and 179.102–1 Carbon dioxide, refrigerated liquid. Reports 179.102–2 Chlorine. 179.102–3 Materials poisonous by inhalation. Sec. 179.102–4 Vinyl fluoride, stabilized. 179.1 General. 179.102–17 Hydrogen chloride, refrigerated 179.2 Definitions and abbreviations. liquid. 179.3 Procedure for securing approval. 179.103 Special requirements for class 114A 179.4 Changes in specifications for tank * * * tank car tanks. cars. 179.103–1 Type. 179.5 Certificate of construction. 179.103–2 Manway cover. 179.6 Repairs and alterations. 179.103–3 Venting, loading and unloading 179.7 Quality assurance program. valves, measuring and sampling devices. 179.8 Limitation on actions by states, local 179.103–4 Safety relief devices and pressure governments, and Indian tribes. regulators. 179.103–5 Bottom outlets. Subpart B—General Design Requirements Subpart D—Specifications for Non-Pressure 179.10 Tank mounting. Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-111AW, 179.11 Welding certification. 115AW, and 117AW) 179.12 Interior heater systems. 179.13 Tank car capacity and gross weight 179.200 General specifications applicable to limitation. non-pressure tank car tanks (Class DOT– 179.14 Coupler vertical restraint system. 111, DOT–117). 179.15 Pressure relief devices. 179.200–1 Tank built under these specifica- 179.16 Tank-head puncture-resistance sys- tions must meet the applicable require- tems. ments in this part. 179.200–3 Type. 179.18 Thermal protection systems. 179.200–4 Insulation. 179.20 Service equipment; protection sys- 179.200–6 Thickness of plates. tems. 179.200–7 Materials. 179.22 Marking. 179.200–8 Tank heads. 179.24 Stamping. 179.200–9 Compartment tanks. 179.200–10 Welding. Subpart C—Specifications for Pressure 179.200–11 Postweld heat treatment. Tank Car Tanks (Classes DOT-105, 109, 179.200–13 Manway ring or flange, pressure 112, 114, and 120) relief device flange, bottom outlet nozzle flange, bottom washout nozzle flange and 179.100 General specifications applicable to other attachments and openings. pressure tank car tanks. 179.200–14 Expansion capacity. 179.100–1 Tanks built under these specifica- 179.200–15 Closures for manways. tions shall comply with the requirements 179.200–16 Gauging devices, top loading and of §§ 179.100, 179.101 and when applicable, unloading devices, venting and air inlet §§ 179.102 and 179.103. devices. 179.100–3 Type. 179.200–17 Bottom outlets. 179.100–4 Insulation. 179.200–19 Reinforcements, when used, and 179.100–6 Thickness of plates. appurtenances not otherwise specified. 179.100–7 Materials. 179.200–21 Closures for openings. 179.100–8 Tank heads. 179.200–22 Test of tanks. 179.100–9 Welding. 179.200–23 Tests of pressure relief valves. 179.100–10 Postweld heat treatment. 179.200–24 Stamping. 179.100–12 Manway nozzle, cover and protec- 179.201 Individual specification require- tive housing. ments applicable to non-pressure tank 179.100–13 Venting, loading and unloading car tanks. valves, measuring and sampling devices. 179.201–1 Individual specification require- 179.100–14 Bottom outlets. ments. 179.100–16 Attachments. 179.201–2 [Reserved] 179.100–17 Closures for openings. 179.201–3 Lined tanks. 179.100–18 Tests of tanks. 179.201–4 Material. 179.100–19 Tests of safety relief valves. 179.201–5 Postweld heat treatment and cor- 179.100–20 Stamping. rosion resistance.

258

VerDate Sep<11>2014 14:18 Jun 23, 2021 Jkt 250228 PO 00000 Frm 00268 Fmt 8010 Sfmt 8010 Y:\SGML\250228.XXX 250228 rmajette on DSKBCKNHB2PROD with CFR